 |
|
Fig. 1: Power, Ground, Antenna and Data Communication |
2016-2018
Chevrolet Volt
Service Manual
SPECIFICATIONS
FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS
|
Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
RADIO/NAVIGATION SYSTEM WIRING SCHEMATICS
Power, Ground, Antenna and Data Communication
|
|
Fig. 1: Power, Ground, Antenna and Data Communication |
Amplifier Inputs (UQA)
Fig. 2: Amplifier Inputs (UQA)
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
Auxiliary Audio Input
 |
|
Fig. 3: Auxiliary Audio Input Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Info Display
 |
|
Fig. 4: Info Display Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Speakers (UQA)
 |
|
Fig. 5: Speakers (UQA) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Speakers (UZ6)
 |
|
Fig. 6: Speakers (UZ6) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
ONSTAR/TELEMATICS WIRING SCHEMATICS
OnStar Schematics
 |
|
Fig. 7: OnStar Schematics Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
CELLULAR TELEPHONE WIRING SCHEMATICS
Cellular Telephone Microphone (-UE1)
 |
|
Fig. 8: Cellular Telephone Microphone (-UE1) |
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
DTC B0997: AUXILIARY ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT PERFORMANCE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Auxiliary Electronic Control Unit Performance Incorrect Component Installed
Auxiliary Electronic Control Unit Performance Internal Electronic Failure
Circuit/System Description
The info display module monitors itself for internal failures and reports its condition to the Human Machine
Interface Control Module when requested. The info display also reports electronic identification information when
requested.
Conditions for Running DTC
• Ignition is ON or in the ACC position
• The system voltage is 9-16 V
• DTC B101E is not set as current in the Human Machine Interface Control Module
• The test is run once during Human Machine Interface Control Module wake up
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The Info Display Module has reported identification information that differs from the information calibrated in the
Human Machine Interface Control Module.
The Info Display Module reports an internal malfunction.
Action Taken When DTC Sets
The Human Machine Interface Control Module will set the DTC and the Info Display Module will have limited or no
functionality.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The Human Machine Interface Control Module detects a compatible Info Display Module with no internal
malfunctions reported.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode, Infotainment system ON.
2. Verify DTC B101E is not set
• If DTC B101E is set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If DTC B101E is not set
3. Verify DTC B0997 is not set
Replace the P17 Info Display Module.
4. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Radio Control Assembly Replacement
DTC B1024: CIRCUIT BOARD TEMPERATURE SENSOR ABOVE MAXIMUM THRESHOLD (AUDIO
AMPLIFIER)
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Circuit Board Temperature Sensor Above Maximum Threshold
Circuit/System Description
The audio amplifier monitors the internal circuitry for excessive temperature. When the amplifier senses an internal
circuitry temperature greater than 95A°C (203A°F), the amplifier will set DTC B1024 11 and shut down until the
internal circuitry cools below 90A°C (194A°F). No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Radio ON.
• Battery voltage must be between 9-16 volts.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The audio amplifier detects an over-heat condition greater than 95A°C (203A°F) of the internal amplifier circuitry.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The audio amplifier will shut down and all speakers will be inoperative.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
Extended use or extremely high volume especially in warm weather conditions may cause this DTC to set. Under
these conditions it may be normal for this DTC to set to prevent permanent damage to the audio amplifier circuitry.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Allow the vehicle cabin to cool if the temperature inside the vehicle is excessive
before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.
1. Verify the DTC sets outside of the Conditions for Running and Setting. Since most occurrences of this DTC
are caused by extreme vehicle cabin temperatures due to ambient conditions, review with the customer the
conditions under which the DTC set.
• If the DTC sets within the Conditions for Running and Setting.
The system is operating as designed, All OK.
2. Using the scan tool, clear the DTC.
3. Verify the DTC does not set while operating the infotainment system under the conditions the customer
experienced the concern.
Replace the T3 Audio Amplifier
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.
Refer to Control Module References for audio amplifier replacement, setup, and programming
DTC B1024: CIRCUIT BOARD TEMPERATURE SENSOR THRESHOLD
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Circuit Board Temperature Sensor Below Minimum Threshold
Circuit Board Temperature Sensor Above Maximum Threshold
Circuit/System Description
The human machine interface control module monitors the internal circuitry for excessive temperature. When a
temperature outside of the range is detected, the module sets the DTC and limits its operation to avoid damage.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
• The system voltage is 9-16 V
• The test is run once per second when the infotainment system is operating
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The module senses an internal temperature less than -40A°C (-40A°F).
The module senses an internal temperature greater than 69A°C (156A°F).
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The human machine interface control module sets the DTC.
• A message is displayed indicating that the system performance is being impacted by the excessive temperature
condition.
• The module stops communicating on the MOST Bus network, but does not interrupt communication on the
network.
• The infotainment system and the Info Display Module will have limited or no functionality.
• Components or other subsystems that interface with the infotainment system may have limited or no
functionality.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The internal temperature is between -40A°C (-40A°F) and 69A°C (156A°F).
• A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
Under certain conditions it may be normal for this DTC to set to prevent permanent damage to the module.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Allow the vehicle cabin to cool if the temperature inside the vehicle is excessive
before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.
1. Verify the DTC sets outside of the Conditions for Running and Setting. Since most occurrences of this DTC
are caused by extreme vehicle cabin temperatures due to ambient conditions, review with the customer the
conditions under which the DTC set.
The system is operating as designed, All OK.
2. Using the scan tool, clear the DTC.
3. Verify the DTC does not set while operating the infotainment system under the conditions the customer
experienced the concern.
Replace the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for human machine interface control module replacement, programming, and
setup.
DTC B1025-B1135: AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUITS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Audio Output 1 Circuit
Audio Output 2 Circuit
Audio Output 3 Circuit
Audio Output 5 Circuit
Audio Output 6 Circuit
DTC B1085
Audio Output 7 Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST) is a high-speed multimedia network technology. The serial MOST
bus uses a ring topology and synchronous data communication to transmit audio, video, data and control information
between any devices attached.
The audio amplifier is a participant on the MOST network. The audio amplifier receives audio inputs and control
information from the MOST bus.
Each of the audio output channel circuits (+) and (-), at the audio amplifier have a DC bias voltage that is
approximately one half of the battery voltage. When using a DMM, each of the audio output channel circuits will
measure approximately 6.5 V DC. The audio being played on the system is produced by a varying AC voltage that is
centered around the DC bias voltage on the same circuit. The AC voltage is what causes the speaker cone to move
and produce sound.
Diagnostic Aids
• Improper speaker mounting or loose trim may cause an audible buzz or distortion. Inspect the appropriate
speaker and the surrounding interior trim for proper and secure mounting.
The EL-50334-6 Audio System Diagnostic CD contains audio tracks that can be used to duplicate and isolate
such concerns. Tracks 11 and 12 contain audio sweep tones for testing for speaker and grill rattles.
If the speaker or surrounding interior trim is found to be loose or improperly secured, correctly secure the item.
• The test tones on the CD may be copied to a USB drive or other device to use during testing.
• Some audio output circuits are connected to more than one speaker, dependant on vehicle equipment. It may
be necessary to disconnect one or more speakers during testing of some circuits.
Conditions for Running the DTC
NOTE: DTC B1325 must not be set as current for the amplifier to run any of the following
tests.
The test is run initially upon amplifier wake-up, and periodically every one second after amplifier operation begins.
The test is run initially upon amplifier wake-up, and periodically every one second after amplifier operation begins.
The test is run once during amplifier wake-up.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A short to voltage is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit
A short to ground is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit
An open is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The amplifier mutes the output channel and no sound is present from the speaker(s) that have a current circuit fault.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
• Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
EL-50334-50 USB Cable and Adapter Kit
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON, infotainment system ON, mute OFF.
2. Verify clear audio is heard from each speaker, adjusting fade and balance controls to test each speaker
individually.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Some circuits supply audio signals to more than one speaker. It may be
necessary to disconnect all speakers on the affected audio circuit when
performing circuit tests.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate P19 Speaker. Ignition ON, infotainment
system ON, mute OFF.
2. Test for 5 - 7 V between the appropriate signal circuit terminals listed below and ground.
• Front door, tweeter, rear door and subwoofer speakers audio (-) circuit terminal 1
• Front door, tweeter, rear door and subwoofer speakers audio (+) circuit terminal 2
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 and X2 harness connectors at the T3 Audio Amplifier.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the T3 Audio Amplifier.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 and X2 harness connectors at the T3 Audio Amplifier. Ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the T3 Audio Amplifier.
3. Test or replace the P19 Speaker.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for audio amplifier replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B124B: USB 1 CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
USB 1 Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
The infotainment system has a USB port and a Auxiliary Audio Input Jack located in the center console. The
receptacle assembly receives fused battery voltage and ground from the harness to power the internal hub device as
well as providing additional amperage to power USB devices.
The internal hub device interfaces directly with the human machine interface control module via a standard USB
cable. A Mini type USB connector is used to connect the human machine interface control module and the USB
receptacle. Standard USB male to female connections are typically used for connecting USB cables together where
an in-line connection is required. An in-line cable connection is typically found between the console and I/P harness.
When a portable audio playback device is connected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) auxiliary audio input jack an internal
switch opens the detection signal circuit within the hub. The HMI detects the device and AUX becomes available as
an audio source. Audio signals from the device are converted from analog to digital, these signals are then sent to the
HMI from the auxiliary input jack via USB.
USB Port
The USB port allows connectivity to the infotainment system from portable media players or a USB storage device
(memory stick/flash drive). When a device is connected to the USB port, the system detects the device and switches
to USB as the audio source. Once connected, the device can be controlled from the radio controls.
Not all portable media player devices or file types are compatible. Refer to the owner's manual for information on
USB devices, control, and operation.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
• The system voltage is 9-16 V
• The infotainment system is ON
• The test is run once per second when the infotainment system is operating
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The human machine interface control module detects an excessive current condition on the USB 5 V circuit.
The human machine interface control module does not detect the vehicle hub device.
The human machine interface control module detects an additional hub device attached to the vehicle USB port.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The USB port is inoperative while the DTC is current.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
• This DTC may be set due to the connection of an incompatible or faulty USB device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Radio/Audio System Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
• EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT)
• EL-50334-50 USB Cable and Adapter Kit
• EL-50334-14 Infotainment Test Cable
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC B124B is not set. Since occurrences of this DTC can be caused by an incompatible or faulty USB
device, review with the customer the conditions under which their concern occurred.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
2. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode. Infotainment system ON.
3. Connect the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) to the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input USB port and
select the USB test mode.
4. Verify the audio from the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) is heard through the infotainment
system while operating the system to play audio from the test tool.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
5. Verify the infotainment system can be switched to AUX as the audio source with the EL-50334-20 Multi-
Media Interface Tester (MIT) connected to the auxiliary audio input jack.
• If the infotainment system can not be switched to AUX as the audio source
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
6. Verify the audio from the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) is heard through the vehicle
infotainment system while operating the test tool to begin audio playback.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
7. All OK
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 6 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Verify the USB cable is properly connected at all components and in-line connections, and there is no damage
to the cable or connections.
• If connection problems or cable damage is noted.
Perform the appropriate repair or replacement to correct any issues.
5. Connect the X1 harness connector at the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input.
6. Disconnect the vehicle USB cable X3 harness connector at the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module
and the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input Adapter.
7. Connect the EL-50334-14 Infotainment Test Cable and the EL-50334-2 Type-A Female to Mini-B Male Cable
together. Connect the assembled test cable to the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module and the X83
Auxiliary Audio Input.
8. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode. Infotainment system ON.
9. Connect the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) to the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input USB port and
select the USB test mode.
10. Verify the audio from the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) is heard through the infotainment
system while operating the system to play audio from the test tool.
1. Replace the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input Adapter. Connect all harness connectors.
2. Connect the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) to the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input USB
port and select the USB test mode.
3. Verify the audio from the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) is heard through the
infotainment system while operating the system to play audio from the test tool.
• If audio is not heard from the test tool, replace the K74 Human Machine Interface Control
Module.
11. Connect the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) to the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input AUX port
and select the AUX test mode.
12. Verify the audio from the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) is heard through the infotainment
system while operating the system to play audio from the test tool.
1. Replace the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input Adapter. Connect all harness connectors.
13. Replace the vehicle USB cable between the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module and the X83
Auxiliary Audio Input Adapter.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for human machine interface control module replacement,
programming, and setup.
DTC B124F: UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) PROGRAMMING
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Programming
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
Certain devices in the entertainment system must be programmed with specific software and other information to
operate correctly. This DTC is the result of an unsuccessful USB programming event of the device. The symptom
byte information is for engineering reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved
Conditions for Running the DTC
Once upon each USB Programming Event.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The programming event was incomplete, or completed with errors.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The entertainment system has limited or no functionality.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The programming event completes successfully.
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC B124F is not set.
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If DTC is set, replace the device that set the DTC.
• If the DTC is not set
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for device replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B125A: ANTENNA SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Antenna Signal Circuit Short to Ground
Antenna Signal Circuit Open Circuit
Antenna Signal Circuit Short to Battery
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||
|
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The radio antenna for AM and FM radio reception is connected to the radio with a coaxial cable.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
• Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The radio detects a short to ground in the antenna signal circuit center conductor.
The radio detects an open in the antenna signal circuit center conductor.
The radio detects a short to battery in the antenna signal circuit center conductor.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Radio reception may be poor or not available.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clears after 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
Poor AM and FM radio reception is dependent on multiple influences, some of which may not be vehicle related.
Areas which have high RF traffic or block the signal path may cause a degradation in radio reception. Radio
reception may also be influenced by items within the vehicle, but are not part of the radio system. Such examples are
aftermarket electrical accessories or other items which may generate noise in the vehicle electrical system.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Inspect the antenna for proper mounting or physical damage.
• If damage is found
Repair or replace as necessary
2. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, A11 Radio ON.
3. Verify station reception is normal when tuned to several known good AM and FM stations.
• If AM or FM reception is poor.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the radio antenna coax cable from the A11 Radio and from the T2RR
Antenna - Roof Rear.
2. Verify the antenna coax cable passes the coax cable component test. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the antenna coax cable
3. Connect the antenna coax cable to the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
4. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield at the radio
end of the coax cable.
Replace the radio antenna base.
5. Test for less than 10 Q between the coax cable outer shield and ground at the radio end of the coax cable.
1. Clean the mounting surface of the radio antenna base.
2. Connect the antenna coax cable to the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
3. Test for less than 10 Q between the coax cable outer shield and ground at the radio end of the coax
cable.
• If 10 Q or greater, replace the antenna base.
• If less than 10 Q, connect all harness connectors. Verify station reception is normal when tuned to
several known good AM and FM stations. If AM or FM reception concerns are still present,
replace the A11 Radio.
6. Test or replace the A11 Radio.
Component Testing
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
NOTE: Before testing the coax cable, check the cable exterior for being pinched, cut,
damaged, or having loose connections at the components, which can cause
reception issues.
To prevent false reading when testing the center coax terminals, use care not to
ground the test probe on the outer housing/shield.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable at both components.
2. Test for less than 5 Q between coax cable center terminal end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable
3. Test for less than 5 Q between the coax cable outer shield end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable
4. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield.
Replace the coax cable
5. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.
• Refer to Control Module References for radio replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B125C: SATELLITE ANTENNA CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Satellite Antenna Circuit Short to Battery
Satellite Antenna Circuit Short to Ground
Satellite Antenna Circuit Open
Circuit/System Description
The digital radio receiver, located inside the radio, receives digital radio information from the digital radio antenna
located on the outside of the vehicle. The digital radio receiver is connected to the digital radio antenna via a shielded
coax cable. The digital radio antenna contains an amplifier which is powered by the radio through the coax cable.
Conditions for Running the DTC
This DTC is run every 300 milliseconds.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The radio detects a circuit fault in the digital radio antenna.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The radio displays No XM Signal or Check Antenna.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears after 100 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Diagnostic Aids
The digital radio antenna requires a clear line of sight to the sky to operate properly. Reception may be limited,
intermittent, or unavailable inside structures.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
EL-48028 Digital Radio Test Antenna
Circuit/System Verification
1. With the vehicle outside in an area with an unobstructed view of the southern sky, tune to XM.
2. Verify DTC B125C is not set as current and the No XM Signal message is not displayed on the radio.
• If DTC B125C is set as current or the No XM Signal message is displayed.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the digital radio antenna coax cable from the A11 Radio. Connect the
EL-48028 Digital Radio Test Antenna to the radio and place on the roof of the vehicle.
2. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, radio tuned to XM channel 1.
3. Verify DTC B125C is not set as current and XM reception is improved.
• If DTC B125C is set as current or XM reception is not improved
Replace the A11 Radio.
4. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the digital radio antenna coax cable from the T2RR Antenna - Roof
Rear.
5. Verify the digital radio antenna coax cable passes the coax cable component test. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the antenna coax cable
• If the coax cable passes the test
6. Test or replace the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
Component Testing
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
NOTE: Before testing the coax cable, check the cable exterior for being pinched, cut,
damaged, or having loose connections at the components, which can cause
reception issues.
To prevent false reading when testing the center coax terminals, use care not to
ground the test probe on the outer housing/shield.
Coax Cable Test
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable at both components.
2. Test for less than 5 Q between coax cable center terminal end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable
• If less than 5 fi
3. Test for less than 5 Q between the coax cable outer shield end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable
• If less than 5 fi
4. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield.
• If less than infinite resistance
Replace the coax cable
• If infinite resistance
5. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to High Frequency Antenna Replacement
• Refer to Control Module References for radio replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B1271: THEFT PROTECTION ACTIVE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Theft Protection Active
Circuit/System Description
When the radio is initially installed in the vehicle, the radio receives VIN information via serial data. The radio stores
a portion of the VIN and compares this sequence to the VIN information received each time the radio powers on. The
VIN in the radio is a single one-time learn.
The radio theft deterrent system is intended to disable or limit radio functionality if incorrect vehicle information is
received by the radio. The radio disables functionality if the VIN information received by the radio does not match
the VIN information that has been learned by the radio. This DTC is generated by the module when the Theft
Protection is activated.
Conditions for Running the DTC
This DTC test runs when the radio changes from OFF to ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The radio has learned a correct VIN sequence and the VIN information received via serial data does NOT match the
learned VIN sequence.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The radio may be disabled or have limited functionality. The radio display will indicate that theft protection is active.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The radio receives the correct VIN information via serial data.
Diagnostic Aids
A possible cause of incorrect VIN info could be the radio was originally installed in another vehicle.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode, radio ON.
2. Verify DTC B1271 is not set.
Replace the A11 Radio.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for radio replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B127E: FRONT VIDEO DISPLAY OUTPUT SIGNAL
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Front Video Display Output Signal
Circuit/System Description
The infotainment display and controls are a separate component from the radio, combined into an assembly. The
assembly is supplied battery voltage and ground from the vehicle harness. The human machine interface control
module communicates digital video data for on-screen display through a dedicated cable containing the LVDS data
circuits.
Control information, touch communications and dimming level for the display are communicated via a LIN serial
data circuit to the human machine interface control module.
If the human machine interface control module detects the display is not responding to the output on the LVDS
circuits, the human machine interface control module sets the DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition is ON or in the ACC position
• The system voltage is 9-16 V
• The infotainment system is ON
• The test is continuously when the infotainment system is operating
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The human machine interface control module detects the display is not responding to the output on the LVDS
circuits.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The human machine interface control module sets this DTC
• No images are shown on the Info Display Module
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The human machine interface control module detects a properly synced digital video signal.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
• EL-50334-2 Type A female to Mini B male USB Cable
• EL-50334-14 Infotainment Test Cable
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF.
2. Verify the LVDS interface cable is properly connected at the P17 Info Display Module and the K74 Human
Machine Interface Control Module connections and there is no damage to the cable or connections.
3. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, infotainment system ON.
4. Verify the P17 Info Display Module does not display an image.
• If the P17 Info Display Module displays an image.
All OK.
5. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF.
6. Disconnect the LVDS interface cable from the P17 Info Display Module.
7. Connect the EL-50334-2 Type A female to Mini B male USB Cable to the P17 Info Display Module. Connect
the EL-50334-14 Infotainment Test Cable to the adapter.
8. Disconnect the LVDS interface cable from the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module. Connect the
EL-50334-14 Infotainment Test cable to the K74 Human Machine Interface Module.
9. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, infotainment system ON.
10. Verify the P17 Info Display Module displays an image.
• If the P17 Info Display Module does not display an image
1. Replace the P17 Info Display Module. Connect all harness connectors.
2. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, infotainment system ON.
3. Verify the P17 Info Display Module displays an image.
• If the P17 Info Display Module still does not display an image, replace the K74 Human Machine
Interface Control Module.
• If the P17 Info Display Module displays an image.
4. All OK.
• If the P17 Info Display Module displays an image.
11. Replace the vehicle LVDS interface cable from the P17 Info Display Module to the K74 Human Machine
Interface Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for human machine interface control module replacement,
programming, and setup.
DTC B12A8: OPTICAL MEDIA DRIVE THEFT LOCKED
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Optical Media Drive Theft Locked
Circuit/System Description
When the Media Disc Player is initially installed in the vehicle, it receives VIN information via serial data. The
Media Disc Player stores a portion of the VIN and compares this sequence to the VIN information received each
time the Media Disc Player powers on. The VIN in the Media Disc Player is a single one-time learn.
The Media Disc Player theft deterrent system is intended to disable or limit Media Disc Player functionality if
incorrect vehicle information is received by the Media Disc Player. The Media Disc Player disables functionality if
the VIN information received by the Media Disc Player does not match the VIN information that has been learned by
the Media Disc Player. This DTC is generated by the module when the Theft Protection is activated.
Conditions for Running the DTC
This test runs once per second while the Media Disc Player is being accessed.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The Media Disc Player has learned a correct VIN sequence and the VIN information received via serial data does
NOT match the learned VIN sequence.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The Media Disc Player may be disabled or have limited functionality.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The Media Disc Player receives the correct VIN information via serial data.
Diagnostic Aids
A possible cause of incorrect VIN information could be the Media Disc Player was originally installed in another
vehicle.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC B12A8 is not set.
Replace the A33 Media Disc Player.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for media disc player replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B1446 OR B1447: BACKUP POWER SOURCE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Replace Backup Power Source Below Minimum Threshold
Backup Power Source Open Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The backup power source provides voltage to the telematics communication interface control module, to be able to
successfully place a call in the event of a main battery disconnect during a collision event.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
• System voltage is between 9.5 and 15.5 V.
• DTC B1447 is not set.
• Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
• System voltage is between 9.5 and 15.5 V.
• The above conditions are present for greater than 10 s.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The telematics communication interface control module detects that the backup power source voltage has dropped
below the minimum threshold value.
The telematics communication interface control module detects no voltage from the backup power source.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The OnStarA® status LED turns red.
• The OnStarA® status LED turns red.
• The telematics communication interface control module will be unable to place a call in the event of a main
battery disconnect during a collision event.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC B1446 will clear when the telematics communication interface control module detects the
voltage of the backup power source is above the minimum threshold value.
• A current DTC B1447 will clear when the telematics communication interface control module detects voltage
from the backup power source.
• A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Diagnostic Aids
• Shorting the backup power source positive voltage circuit to the backup power source ground circuit or chassis
ground will activate the internal circuit protection of the backup power source, rendering the backup power
source inoperative.
• DTC B1447 may set if the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module has been incorrectly
disconnected or serviced. When disconnecting the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module,
disconnect the harness connector X1 at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module prior to
disconnecting any other harness connectors. This will ensure the backup power source is preserved when
voltage is removed from the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Circuit Testing
Wiring Repairs
Connector Repairs
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to
power down.
2. Test for greater than 12.3 V between the B+ circuit terminal 14 and the low reference circuit terminal 13.
1. Disconnect the C3 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module Battery.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the circuits listed below and ground.
• B+ circuit terminal 14
• Low reference circuit terminal 13.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground in the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the circuits end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the C3 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module Battery.
• If greater than 12.3 V
3. Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement,
programming and setup.
DTC B2455: CELLULAR PHONE MICROPHONE CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B2455 04
Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The telematics communication interface control module provides the cellular phone microphone with a supplied
voltage on the cellular phone microphone high signal circuit. When the microphone is in use, voice data from the
user is sent back to the telematics communication interface control module on the microphone low signal circuit.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The Vehicle must be ON or in Service Mode.
• The system voltage is at least 9.5 V and no more than 15.5 V.
• All the above conditions are present for greater than 10 s.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The telematics communication interface control module detects a short to ground in the cellular phone microphone
signal circuit for 10 s or greater.
The following conditions will set this DTC:
• The telematics communication interface control module detects an open/high resistance in the cellular phone
microphone signal circuit for 10 s or greater.
• The telematics communication interface control module detects an open/high resistance in the low signal
circuit for 10 s or greater.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The OnStarA® status LED turns red.
• The telematics communication interface control module will not receive a signal from the cellular phone
microphone.
• Calls can be placed but the caller cannot be heard.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B24 cellular phone microphone, Ignition
ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for 8.0-10.5 V between the signal circuit terminal B and ground.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 telematics communication
interface control module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground in the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the vehicle K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If greater than 10.5 V
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 telematics communication
interface control module, Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal A and ground.
• If greater than 1 V
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 telematics communication
interface control module, Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage in the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, repair the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
4. Test for greater than 8 V between the signal circuit terminal B and the signal circuit terminal A.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the connector X2 at the K73 telematics communication interface
control module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the low signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground in the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the vehicle K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If greater than 8 V
5. Test or replace the B24 Cellular Phone Microphone.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement,
programming and setup.
DTC B2462: GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Global Positioning System Short to Ground
Global Positioning System Open
Circuit/System Description
The navigation antenna is connected to the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. The module
supplies 5 V to the antenna to power the internal amplifier through the center conductor of the antenna coax cable.
When the vehicle is equipped with the optional navigation system, a Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter is installed
to distribute the navigation signal to both the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module and the Human
Machine Interface Control Module. The Human Machine Interface Control Module supplies 5 V through the coax
cable to power the Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Radio On.
• System voltage is greater than 9 V and less than 16 V
• The navigation system/telematics communication interface control module tests the GPS antenna every 10 s.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module or Human Machine Interface Control Module detects a
short to ground on the GPS antenna signal circuit.
The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module or Human Machine Interface Control Module detects a
open/high resistance on the GPS antenna signal circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module or Human Machine Interface Control Module uses
the last reported position and the vehicle speed signal to calculate the vehicle position.
• Route guidance may be inaccurate.
• Turn by turn navigation may be inaccurate or inoperative.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction - free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
• The scan tool Telematics Communication Interface Control Module GPS signal parameter will display a Yes or
No dependent upon whether or not the module sees an increment of the seconds transmitted by GPS signals to
the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. Upon entering this screen, the GPS signal title will
initially display Yes, regardless of the presence of time increment, for at least 2 seconds, while the algorithm in
the scan tool determines the status of the clock. If increment is found, Yes is continually displayed. If the clock
remains static, No is displayed. The scan tool looks for increment every second, regardless of current display.
• Inaccurate or aged GPS position concerns which are no longer present may have been due to the temporary
loss of GPS signal reception by the vehicle. Conditions such as tunnels or parking structures will restrict the
cellular phone and navigation antenna from a clear view of the satellites in the sky and may have caused this
temporary data loss.
• The GPS requires a clear line of sight to the sky to operate properly. In most cases the GPS will not have
reception near tall buildings or inside structures.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-49903 OnStar Antenna Diagnostic Tool Kit
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: The following verification requires the vehicle to be outside with an unobstructed
view of the southern sky. Allow 5 minutes after turning the ignition ON for the
vehicle to acquire the GPS satellites signal.
1. Ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC B2462 is not set in the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If DTC B2462 is set in the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module and the vehicle is
not equipped with a navigation system
Refer to Circuit/System Testing Without Navigation System.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing With Navigation System.
3. Verify an OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle after performing a blue button press.
• If the advisor can not locate the vehicle and the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system
Refer to Circuit/System Testing Without Navigation System
Refer to Circuit/System Testing With Navigation System.
4. Verify DTC B2462 is not set in the Human Machine Interface Control Module.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing With Navigation System - Step 9.
5. Verify that the NO GPS symbol/message is not displayed on the radio display.
• If the NO GPS symbol/message is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing With Navigation System - Step 9.
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
without Navigation System
NOTE: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the GPS and cellular coax cable connector at the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module.
2. Attach both leads of the EL-49903-1 OnStar test antenna to the EL-49903-5 combiner. Using the EL-49903-6
coax cable attach the grey connector to the combiner and the brown connector to the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition ON.
3. Verify DTC B2462 is not set or that the OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle.
Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
4. Test the coax cable between the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module and the T2RR
Antenna - Roof Rear. Refer to component testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the coax cable.
5. Test or replace the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
with Navigation System
NOTE: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear coax cable at the T15 Navigation
Antenna Signal Splitter.
2. Attach both leads of the EL-49903-1 OnStar test antenna to the EL-49903-5 combiner. Using the EL-49903-7
coax cable attach one grey connector to the combiner and the other grey connector to the T15 Navigation
Antenna Signal Splitter. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition ON.
3. Verify DTC B2462 is not set or that the OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle.
1. Test the coax cable between the T15 Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter and the T2RR Antenna - Roof
Rear. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the coax cable.
• If the coax cable passes the test
2. Replace the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
4. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the GPS and cellular coax cable connector at the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module.
5. Attach both leads of the EL-49903-1 OnStar test antenna to the EL-49903-5 combiner. Using the EL-49903-6
coax cable attach the grey connector to the combiner and the brown connector to the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition ON.
6. Verify DTC B2462 is not set or that the OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle.
Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
7. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF.
8. Test the coax cable between the T15 Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter and the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test.
Replace the coax cable.
9. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the blue GPS coax cable connector at the K74 Human Machine
Interface Control Module.
10. Attach the EL-49903-1 OnStar test antenna blue connector to the K74 Human Machine Interface Control
Module and place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle.
11. Ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
12. Verify DTC B2462 is not set or that the NO GPS symbol/message is not displayed on the radio.
• If DTC B2462 is set or the NO GPS symbol/message is displayed
Replace the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module
13. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF.
14. Test the coax cable between the T15 Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter and the K74 Human Machine
Interface Control Module. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test.
Replace the coax cable.
15. Test or replace the T15 Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter.
Component Testing
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
|
NOTE: |
|
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable at both components.
2. Test for less than 5 Q between the coax cable center terminal end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable.
• If less than 5 fi
3. Test for greater than 5 Q between the coax cable outer shield end to end.
Replace the coax cable.
4. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield.
Replace the coax cable.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for Human Machine Interface control module or Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module replacement, programming, and setup.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Short to Ground
Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit
Circuit/System Description
The primary cellular phone antenna element is connected to the telematics communication interface control module
(violet connector) via a shielded coaxial cable. Cellular communication takes place on both the primary cellular
antenna signal circuit and the GPS/secondary cellular antenna signal circuit. This diagnostic only applies to the
primary cellular antenna signal circuit. Internal to the antenna on the cellular antenna signal circuit resistance is used
to apply a load, which the telematics communication interface control module uses to detect the presence of the
antenna.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition in the RUN or ACC position.
• System voltage is between 9.5 V and 15.5 V
• The above conditions are present for greater than 1 s.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The telematics communication interface control module detects a short to ground on the primary cellular antenna
signal circuit.
• The telematics communication interface control module detects an open or high resistance on the primary
cellular antenna signal circuit.
• The above conditions are present for greater than 1 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The OnStarA® status LED turns red.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The telematics communication interface control module detects the presence of a cellular antenna.
• A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn
|
Circuit/System Testing | ||
|
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the violet primary cellular coax cable
connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all
vehicle systems to power down.
2. Using the EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn connect the violet coax cable to the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition
ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify the DTC does not set or a call can be completed to the OnStar Call Center while operating the vehicle
within the conditions for running the DTC.
• If the DTC sets or a call can not be completed to the OnStar Call Center
Replace the K73 Telematics Communications Interface Control Module.
4. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF.
5. Disconnect the EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn from the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module
6. Test the coax cable. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the coax cable.
7. Test or replace the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
Component Testing
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution
|
NOTE: |
|
1. Test for less than 5 Q between the coax cable center terminal end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable.
2. Test for greater than 5 Q between the coax cable outer shield end to end.
Replace the coax cable.
3. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield.
Replace the coax cable.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair procedure.
• Refer to Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement,
setup, and programming
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open
Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Protection Time-out
Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The OnStarA® button assembly consists of 3 buttons: Call/Answer, OnStarA® Call Center, and OnStarA®
Emergency. The telematics communication interface control module supplies the OnStarA® button assembly with 10
V via the 10 V reference circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a
specific voltage to be returned to the telematics communication interface control module over the keypad signal
circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the telematics communication interface control module is able to
identify which button has been pressed.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
• Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The telematics communication interface control module detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply
voltage circuit.
The telematics communication interface control module detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for longer
than 15 s. If one of the OnStarA® buttons is held or stuck for 15 s or greater, the telematics communication interface
control module will set this DTC.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The OnStarA® status LED turns red.
• No calls can be placed.
• The telematics communication interface control module will ignore all inputs from the OnStarA® button
assembly.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
After any repair is made to the 10 V reference circuit or button signal circuit the fuse to the telematics
communication interface control module must be removed for 30 s to reset the control module. Failure to do so could
result in incorrect diagnosis.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE:
• 10 V reference circuit measurement may vary with vehicle battery voltage.
• Test for voltage range with vehicle battery measuring at a minimum of 11.5 V
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48B
Multifunction Switch - Overhead Console. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
4. Test for 8.0 - 10.5 V between the 10 V reference circuit terminal 16 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 10 V reference circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the 10 V reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If greater than 10.5 V
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 10 V reference circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
5. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF.
6. Test for 500 - 900 Q between the signal circuit terminal 17 and ground.
1. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If greater than 900 fi
1. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module,
vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Vehicle OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
7. Test or replace the S48B Multifunction Switch - Overhead Console.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement,
programming and setup.
SYMPTOMS - CELLULAR COMMUNICATION
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table.
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that all of
the following are true:
• There are no DTCs set.
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data link.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to OnStar
Description and Operation.
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to
Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect for easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
Bluetooth Malfunction
No Global Positioning System (GPS) Reception
OnStar Microphone Malfunction
OnStar Audio Malfunction
OnStar Button LED Malfunction
OnStar Call Center Remote Function Requests Malfunction
OnStar Button Malfunction
Unable to Contact OnStar Call Center
OnStar Voice Recognition Malfunction
OnStar Steering Wheel Control Functions Malfunction
IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table.
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that all of
the following are true:
• There are no DTCs set.
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data link.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio
System Description and Operation.
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System. Refer to
Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect for easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
Application Malfunction
Auxiliary Audio Input Malfunction
Bluetooth Malfunction
Digital Radio Poor or No Reception
Navigation System - Voice Recognition Malfunction
No Global Positioning System (GPS) Reception
Radio Poor Reception
Speaker Malfunction
APPLICATION MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The term application refers to any piece of software that works on a system (hardware) that is being operated by it's
own software. Applications are typically small software programs which uses the hardware to perform a specific
task, as opposed to operating the entire system.
Diagnostic Aids
• For an application to be used, it must be installed on both the vehicle infotainment system and a compatible
mobile device.
• The application must work correctly on the device to work with the vehicle infotainment system.
• The user may be required to log-in to the application on the mobile device before using the application from
the vehicle controls.
• Applications use the mobile device and connection to a service provider to operate. Connection quality issues,
or service provider data transmission issues can give the appearance of a vehicle malfunction.
• The device must be connected to the system. this may be done wirelessly via BluetoothA®, or via the vehicle
USB port.
When a mobile device is connected via BluetoothA®, some or all of the device controls may be unavailable
from the radio controls. This varies dependant upon the device being used. Refer to the vehicle owners
manual, supplements, and the device manufacturers information for information on devices, control, and
operation.
Refer to the device manufacturers information for the preferred connection method.
• The device must be unlocked, and any additional applications should be closed.
• If the device has any sound enhancement features such as noise reduction or echo control, these features
should be turned off.
• A low battery condition in the mobile device may not allow the device to connect to the system, or can create
communication issues with the device. Verify the device battery state of charge and re-charge or replace as
needed.
• If a 'Please See Device' or similar type error message is displayed, this may indicate the device has lost it's
connection to the vehicle, or the device has lost it's external data connection.
• If a cable is used for connection, attempt to connect the device using a different cable; cables can deteriorate
over time or become damaged.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the application is installed on the mobile device and is up to date.
• If the application is not installed or is not up to date.
Install or update the application on the device.
2. Verify the application operates correctly on the mobile device.
• If the application is not operating correctly on the mobile device.
Refer to the application website
3. Verify the radio calibrations are current.
Reprogram the radio and re-evaluate the concern.
4. Verify the application is installed on the radio and is up to date.
• If the application is not installed or is not up to date.
Install or update the application on the radio.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode, radio ON, connect the mobile device to the infotainment system. Refer to the owners
manual for information on the preferred connection method for the device.
• If the mobile device cannot connect to the vehicle infotainment system.
• If unable to connect via Bluetooth, refer to Bluetooth Malfunction.
• If unable to connect via USB, refer to Auxiliary Audio Input Malfunction.
• If the mobile device connects to the vehicle infotainment system.
6. Launch the application.
7. Verify the applications operates properly with the vehicle infotainment system.
• If the application does not function properly
Refer to diagnostic aids.
8. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.
Refer to Control Module References for radio replacement, setup, and programming
AUXILIARY AUDIO INPUT MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
USB 1 Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List .
Diagnostic Fault Information
| Circuit | Short to | Open/High | Short to | Signal |
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
The infotainment system has a USB port and a Auxiliary Audio Input Jack located in the center console. The
receptacle assembly receives fused battery voltage and ground from the harness to power the internal hub device as
well as providing additional amperage to power USB devices.
The internal hub device interfaces directly with the human machine interface control module via a standard USB
cable. A Mini type USB connector is used to connect the human machine interface control module and the USB
receptacle. Standard USB male to female connections are typically used for connecting USB cables together where
an in-line connection is required. An in-line cable connection is typically found between the console and I/P harness.
When a portable audio playback device is connected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) auxiliary audio input jack an internal
switch opens the detection signal circuit within the hub. The HMI detects the device and AUX becomes available as
an audio source. Audio signals from the device are converted from analog to digital, these signals are then sent to the
HMI from the auxiliary input jack via USB.
The USB port allows connectivity to the infotainment system from portable media players or a USB storage device
(memory stick/flash drive). When a device is connected to the USB port, the system detects the device and switches
to USB as the audio source. Once connected, the device can be controlled from the radio controls.
Not all portable media player devices or file types are compatible. Refer to the owner's manual for information on
USB devices, control, and operation.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
• The system voltage is 9-16 V
• The infotainment system is ON
• The test is run once per second when the infotainment system is operating
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The human machine interface control module detects an excessive current condition on the USB 5 V circuit.
The human machine interface control module does not detect the vehicle hub device.
B124B 11
The human machine interface control module detects an additional hub device attached to the vehicle USB port.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The USB port is inoperative while the DTC is current.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
• This DTC may be set due to the connection of an incompatible or faulty USB device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
• EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT)
• EL-50334-50 USB Cable and Adapter Kit
• EL-50334-14 Infotainment Test Cable
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC B124B is not set. Since occurrences of this DTC can be caused by an incompatible or faulty USB
device, review with the customer the conditions under which their concern occurred.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
2. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode. Infotainment system ON.
3. Connect the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) to the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input USB port and
select the USB test mode.
4. Verify the audio from the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) is heard through the infotainment
system while operating the system to play audio from the test tool.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
5. Verify the infotainment system can be switched to AUX as the audio source with the EL-50334-20 Multi-
Media Interface Tester (MIT) connected to the auxiliary audio input jack.
• If the infotainment system can not be switched to AUX as the audio source
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
6. Verify the audio from the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) is heard through the vehicle
infotainment system while operating the test tool to begin audio playback.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
7. All OK
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 6 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Verify the USB cable is properly connected at all components and in-line connections, and there is no damage
to the cable or connections.
• If connection problems or cable damage is noted.
Perform the appropriate repair or replacement to correct any issues.
• If no connection problems or cable damage is noted.
5. Connect the X1 harness connector at the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input.
6. Disconnect the vehicle USB cable X3 harness connector at the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module
and the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input Adapter.
7. Connect the EL-50334-14 Infotainment Test Cable and the EL-50334-2 Type-A Female to Mini-B Male Cable
together. Connect the assembled test cable to the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module and the X83
Auxiliary Audio Input.
8. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode. Infotainment system ON.
9. Connect the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) to the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input USB port and
select the USB test mode.
10. Verify the audio from the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) is heard through the infotainment
system while operating the system to play audio from the test tool.
• If audio is not heard from the test tool
1. Replace the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input Adapter. Connect all harness connectors.
2. Connect the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) to the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input USB
port and select the USB test mode.
3. Verify the audio from the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) is heard through the
infotainment system while operating the system to play audio from the test tool.
• If audio is not heard from the test tool, replace the K74 Human Machine Interface Control
Module.
• If audio is heard from the test tool
11. Connect the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) to the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input AUX port
and select the AUX test mode.
12. Verify the audio from the EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT) is heard through the infotainment
system while operating the system to play audio from the test tool.
• If audio is not heard from the test tool
1. Replace the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input Adapter. Connect all harness connectors.
• If audio is heard from the test tool.
13. Replace the vehicle USB cable between the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module and the X83
Auxiliary Audio Input Adapter.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Audio Disc Player and USB Receptacle Replacement
• Refer to Control Module References for human machine interface control module replacement,
programming, and setup.
BLUETOOTH MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
BluetoothA® wireless technology is a short-range communications technology intended to replace the cables
connecting portable and/or fixed devices while maintaining high levels of security. The operating range of the signal
is approximately 30 feet.
The available features and functions are determined by the type of device and the software within the devices being
used. For a feature or function to operate, it must be supported in both devices.
The BluetoothA® hardware is internal to the radio. The radio supports streaming of data (music, voice, information)
from cellular phones and other mobile devices that support those features. The radio may also be capable of
interfacing with cellular phones for hands-free features.
Refer to the vehicle owners manual, supplements, and the device manufacturers information for information on
devices, control, operation. and pairing instructions.
Diagnostic Aids
• Verify the mobile device is properly configured for the feature being used. Refer to the device manufacturers
information.
• Verify the function/feature that is being used is supported by the mobile device.
• The device must be paired to the radio to use the available BluetoothA® feature(s). The pairing process must
only be performed once for each device, unless that device's information is deleted.
• The system can store pairing information for multiple devices, but can only be actively connected to one at any
given time.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
• Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-50334-20 Multi-Media Interface Tester (MIT)
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify no DTCs are present.
• If any DTCs are present
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If no DTCs are present
2. Verify the radio calibrations are current.
• If the radio calibrations are not current
Reprogram the radio and re-evaluate the concern.
• If no update calibrations are available
NOTE: The MIT tool can be used to test either cellular phone or streaming audio
functions. Refer to the tool instructions, and perform the appropriate test(s)
related to the customers concern in the following steps.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode, infotainment system ON.
4. Verify the infotainment system successfully pairs with the MIT tool.
• If the infotainment system does not successfully pair with the MIT tool.
Replace the A11 radio.
• If the infotainment system successfully pairs with the MIT tool.
5. Verify the infotainment system successfully completes the desired feature test using the MIT tool.
• If the feature test is not successful
Replace the A11 radio.
• If the feature test is successful
6. All OK. Refer to Diagnostic Aids.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for radio replacement, programming, and setup.
DIGITAL RADIO POOR OR NO RECEPTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Satellite Antenna Circuit Short to Battery
Satellite Antenna Circuit Short to Ground
Satellite Antenna Circuit Open
Circuit/System Description
The digital radio receiver, located inside the radio, receives digital radio information from the digital radio antenna
located on the outside of the vehicle. The digital radio receiver is connected to the digital radio antenna via a shielded
coax cable. The digital radio antenna contains an amplifier which is powered by the radio through the coax cable.
Conditions for Running the DTC
This DTC is run every 300 milliseconds.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The radio detects a circuit fault in the digital radio antenna.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The radio displays No XM Signal or Check Antenna.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears after 100 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Diagnostic Aids
The digital radio antenna requires a clear line of sight to the sky to operate properly. Reception may be limited,
intermittent, or unavailable inside structures.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
EL-48028 Digital Radio Test Antenna
Circuit/System Verification
1. With the vehicle outside in an area with an unobstructed view of the southern sky, tune to XM.
2. Verify DTC B125C is not set as current and the No XM Signal message is not displayed on the radio.
• If DTC B125C is set as current or the No XM Signal message is displayed.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the digital radio antenna coax cable from the A11 Radio. Connect the
EL-48028 Digital Radio Test Antenna to the radio and place on the roof of the vehicle.
2. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, radio tuned to XM channel 1.
3. Verify DTC B125C is not set as current and XM reception is improved.
• If DTC B125C is set as current or XM reception is not improved
Replace the A11 Radio.
4. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the digital radio antenna coax cable from the T2RR Antenna - Roof
Rear.
5. Verify the digital radio antenna coax cable passes the coax cable component test. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the antenna coax cable
6. Test or replace the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
Component Testing
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
NOTE: Before testing the coax cable, check the cable exterior for being pinched, cut,
damaged, or having loose connections at the components, which can cause
reception issues.
To prevent false reading when testing the center coax terminals, use care not to
ground the test probe on the outer housing/shield.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable at both components.
2. Test for less than 5 Q between coax cable center terminal end to end.
Replace the coax cable
3. Test for less than 5 Q between the coax cable outer shield end to end.
Replace the coax cable
4. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield.
Replace the coax cable
5. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for radio replacement, programming, and setup.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
The telematics communication interface control module provides the Cellular Phone Microphone with a supplied
voltage on the cellular phone microphone signal circuit. When the cellular phone microphone is in use, voice data
from the user is sent back to the telematics communication interface control module on the signal circuit.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: It is necessary to have the vehicle in a quiet, open outside area where a cellular call
can be successfully placed and GPS data can be received from satellites.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC B2455 is not set.
• If DTC B2455 is set
Refer to DTC B2455.
3. Verify that a successful OnStar voice command can be made.
• If your voice can not be heard clearly
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Microphone Malfunction.
4. Verify that your voice is heard clearly by the OnStar Call Center after completing a blue button press.
• If your voice can not be heard clearly
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Cellular Telephone Voice Malfunction.
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B24 Cellular Phone Microphone, vehicle in Service
Mode.
2. Test for 8.0-10.5 V between the signal circuit terminal B and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface
Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground in the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the vehicle K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If greater than 10.5 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface
Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal A and ground.
• If greater than 1 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface
Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage in the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, repair the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
4. Test for greater than 8 V between the signal circuit terminal B and the signal circuit terminal A.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface
Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground in the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the vehicle K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If greater than 9 V
5. Test or replace the B24 Cellular Phone Microphone.
1. Vehicle OFF and vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module and the X4 harness connector at the A11 Radio, vehicle in Service
Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuits listed below and ground.
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit Terminal 6
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit Terminal 12
• If greater than 1 V
Repair the short to voltage in the circuit.
3. Vehicle OFF.
4. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuits listed below and ground.
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit Terminal 6
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit Terminal 12
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
5. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuits listed below end to end.
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit Terminal 6
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit Terminal 12
• If 2 fi or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
6. Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
7. Verify that your voice is heard clearly by the OnStar Call Center after completing a blue button press.
Replace the A11 Radio.
8. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair procedure.
• Refer to Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement,
programming, and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
When voice recognition for the navigation equipped infotainment system is started, voice signals from the cellular
phone microphone are passed through the telematics communication interface control module to the radio via the
voice recognition audio circuits.
Diagnostic Aids
• Refer to the Navigation System Owners Manual for voice recognition use and commands.
• Navigation voice commands are not available until the OK button has been selected.
• If the radio is off, the only commands available will be Hands Free and Help.
• When the system recognizes the command the system will either perform the function or ask to confirm the
choice by clearly saying "yes" or "no".
• If experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing a command, confirm that the command is correct.
• Background noise such as a climate control fan positioned on high, open windows, or very loud outside noises,
can cause voice commands to be misunderstood.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the OnStarA® voice recognition system is operating normally.
• If the OnStarA® voice recognition system is not operating normally.
Refer to OnStar Voice Recognition Malfunction.
• If the OnStarA® voice recognition system is operating normally.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode, radio ON.
NOTE: Refer to the Navigation System Owners Manual for voice recognition use and
commands.
3. Begin voice recognition for the radio and clearly speak one of the available commands.
4. Verify the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
• If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to the command.
1. Clearly speak a different command.
2. Verify the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
• If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to any commands, refer to Circuit/System
Testing.
• If the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
3. Refer to the navigation system owners manual for hints on speaking commands.
• If the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
5. All OK
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module Control Module and the X4 harness connector at the A11 Radio.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuits listed below and ground:
• voice recognition signal circuit A11 Radio X4 terminal 6
• voice recognition low reference circuit A11 Radio X4 terminal 16
• If 1 V greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
4. Vehicle OFF.
5. Test for infinite resistance between the circuits listed below and ground:
• voice recognition signal circuit A11 Radio X4 terminal 6
• voice recognition low reference circuit A11 Radio X4 terminal 16
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
6. Test for less than 5 Q between the terminals listed below:
• A11 Radio X4 terminal 6 and the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module Control
Module X2 terminal 6
• A11 Radio X4 terminal 16 and the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module Control
Module X2 terminal 12
• If 5 fi greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
7. Replace the A11 Radio. Connect all harness connectors.
NOTE: Refer to the Navigation System Owners Manual for voice recognition use and
commands.
8. Begin voice recognition for the radio and clearly speak one of the available commands.
9. Verify the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
• If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to the command
1. Clearly speak a different command.
2. Verify the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
• If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to any commands, replace the K73
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
10. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for radio or telematics communication interface control module replacement,
programming, and setup.
ONSTAR AUDIO MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
When an OnStarA® keypress is made, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio functions
and output OnStarA® originated audio. After the audio system is muted, the telematics communication interface
control module transmits signals to the audio system on the audio signal and audio common circuits.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
• Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode, radio ON.
2. Verify that audio is heard clearly through all speaker channels when tuning radio to a known good station.
• If audio is not heard clearly
Refer to Speaker Malfunction
• If audio is heard clearly
3. Verify that the Connecting to OnStarA® message is heard clearly through the audio system when the
OnStarA® blue button is pressed.
• If OnStar message is noisy or distorted
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio and the X2 harness connector at the K73
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminals listed below and ground:
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit terminal 1 X2
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit terminal 2 X2
• If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
3. Vehicle OFF.
4. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuits listed below and ground:
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit terminal 1 X2
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit terminal 2 X2
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
5. Test for less than 2 Q between the signal circuit terminals listed below:
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit terminal 1 X2 and the A11
Radio signal circuit terminal 20 X1
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit terminal 2 X2 and the A11
Radio signal circuit terminal 19 X1
• If 2 fi or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
6. Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
7. Verify that the Connecting to OnStarA® message is heard clearly through the audio system when the
OnStarA® blue button is pressed.
• If audio is not heard clearly
Replace the A11 Radio.
8. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for module replacement, programming, and setup.
NO GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) RECEPTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Global Positioning System Short to Ground
Global Positioning System Open
Circuit/System Description
The navigation antenna is connected to the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. The module
supplies 5 V to the antenna to power the internal amplifier through the center conductor of the antenna coax cable.
When the vehicle is equipped with the optional navigation system, a Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter is installed
to distribute the navigation signal to both the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module and the Human
Machine Interface Control Module. The Human Machine Interface Control Module supplies 5 V through the coax
cable to power the Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Radio On.
• System voltage is greater than 9 V and less than 16 V
• The navigation system/telematics communication interface control module tests the GPS antenna every 10 s.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module or Human Machine Interface Control Module detects a
short to ground on the GPS antenna signal circuit.
The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module or Human Machine Interface Control Module detects a
open/high resistance on the GPS antenna signal circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module or Human Machine Interface Control Module uses
the last reported position and the vehicle speed signal to calculate the vehicle position.
• Route guidance may be inaccurate.
• Turn by turn navigation may be inaccurate or inoperative.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction - free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
• The scan tool Telematics Communication Interface Control Module GPS signal parameter will display a Yes or
No dependent upon whether or not the module sees an increment of the seconds transmitted by GPS signals to
the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. Upon entering this screen, the GPS signal title will
initially display Yes, regardless of the presence of time increment, for at least 2 seconds, while the algorithm in
the scan tool determines the status of the clock. If increment is found, Yes is continually displayed. If the clock
remains static, No is displayed. The scan tool looks for increment every second, regardless of current display.
• Inaccurate or aged GPS position concerns which are no longer present may have been due to the temporary
loss of GPS signal reception by the vehicle. Conditions such as tunnels or parking structures will restrict the
cellular phone and navigation antenna from a clear view of the satellites in the sky and may have caused this
temporary data loss.
• The GPS requires a clear line of sight to the sky to operate properly. In most cases the GPS will not have
reception near tall buildings or inside structures.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
OnStar Description and Operation
Radio/Audio System Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-49903 OnStar Antenna Diagnostic Tool Kit
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: The following verification requires the vehicle to be outside with an unobstructed
view of the southern sky. Allow 5 minutes after turning the ignition ON for the
vehicle to acquire the GPS satellites signal.
1. Ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC B2462 is not set in the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If DTC B2462 is set in the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module and the vehicle is
not equipped with a navigation system
Refer to Circuit/System Testing Without Navigation System.
• If DTC B2462 is set in the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module and the vehicle is
equipped with a navigation system
Refer to Circuit/System Testing With Navigation System.
• If DTC B2462 is not set in the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
3. Verify an OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle after performing a blue button press.
• If the advisor can not locate the vehicle and the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system
Refer to Circuit/System Testing Without Navigation System
• If the advisor can not locate the vehicle and the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system
Refer to Circuit/System Testing With Navigation System.
• If the advisor can locate the vehicle
4. Verify DTC B2462 is not set in the Human Machine Interface Control Module.
• If DTC B2462 is set in the Human Machine Interface Control Module
Refer to Circuit/System Testing With Navigation System - Step 9.
5. Verify that the NO GPS symbol/message is not displayed on the radio display.
• If the NO GPS symbol/message is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing With Navigation System - Step 9.
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
without Navigation System
NOTE: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the GPS and cellular coax cable connector at the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module.
2. Attach both leads of the EL-49903-1 OnStar test antenna to the EL-49903-5 combiner. Using the EL-49903-6
coax cable attach the grey connector to the combiner and the brown connector to the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition ON.
3. Verify DTC B2462 is not set or that the OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle.
Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
4. Test the coax cable between the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module and the T2RR
Antenna - Roof Rear. Refer to component testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the coax cable.
5. Test or replace the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
with Navigation System
NOTE: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear coax cable at the T15 Navigation
Antenna Signal Splitter.
2. Attach both leads of the EL-49903-1 OnStar test antenna to the EL-49903-5 combiner. Using the EL-49903-7
coax cable attach one grey connector to the combiner and the other grey connector to the T15 Navigation
Antenna Signal Splitter. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition ON.
3. Verify DTC B2462 is not set or that the OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle.
1. Test the coax cable between the T15 Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter and the T2RR Antenna - Roof
Rear. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the coax cable.
• If the coax cable passes the test
2. Replace the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
4. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the GPS and cellular coax cable connector at the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module.
5. Attach both leads of the EL-49903-1 OnStar test antenna to the EL-49903-5 combiner. Using the EL-49903-6
coax cable attach the grey connector to the combiner and the brown connector to the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition ON.
6. Verify DTC B2462 is not set or that the OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle.
Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
7. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF.
8. Test the coax cable between the T15 Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter and the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test.
Replace the coax cable.
9. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the blue GPS coax cable connector at the K74 Human Machine
Interface Control Module.
10. Attach the EL-49903-1 OnStar test antenna blue connector to the K74 Human Machine Interface Control
Module and place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle.
11. Ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
12. Verify DTC B2462 is not set or that the NO GPS symbol/message is not displayed on the radio.
• If DTC B2462 is set or the NO GPS symbol/message is displayed
Replace the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module
13. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF.
14. Test the coax cable between the T15 Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter and the K74 Human Machine
Interface Control Module. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test.
Replace the coax cable.
• If the coax cable passes the test.
15. Test or replace the T15 Navigation Antenna Signal Splitter.
Component Testing
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
|
NOTE: |
|
Coax Cable Test
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable at both components.
2. Test for less than 5 Q between the coax cable center terminal end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable.
• If less than 5 fi
3. Test for greater than 5 Q between the coax cable outer shield end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable.
• If less than 5 fi
4. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield.
• If less than infinite resistance
Replace the coax cable.
• If infinite resistance
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to High Frequency Antenna Replacement
• Refer to Control Module References for Human Machine Interface control module or Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module replacement, programming, and setup.
ONSTAR BUTTON LED MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The OnStarA® status LEDs are located with the OnStar buttons. The green LED is illuminated when the system is
ON and operating normally. When the green LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress.
When the red LED is illuminated, a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the
OnStarA® system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. The OnStarA® LEDs are
controlled by the telematics communication interface control module via the keypad green LED signal circuit and the
keypad red LED signal circuit.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE:
If the green LED is off with the ignition ON and the LED does not function
when commanded with the scan tool, contact the OnStar Center to confirm the
vehicle has a current subscription.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
2. Verify no DTCs are set.
• If any DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
• If no DTCs are set
3. Verify that the green LED turns ON and OFF when commanding the Green Indicator ON and OFF with a scan
tool.
• If the green LED does not turn ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Green LED Test
4. Verify that the red LED turns ON and OFF when commanding the Red Indicator ON and OFF with a scan tool.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Red LED Test
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48B
Multifunction Switch - Overhead Console. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
Doors closed, courtesy lamps OFF.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
4. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 15 and ground while commanding the Green
Indicator OFF with a scan tool.
• If 1 V or greater
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 15 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
5. Test for greater than 8 V between the control circuit terminal 15 and ground while commanding the Green
Indicator ON with a scan tool.
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 15 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If greater than 8 V
6. Test or replace the S48B Multifunction Switch - Overhead Console.
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48B
Multifunction Switch - Overhead Console. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
Doors closed, courtesy lamps OFF.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
4. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 14 and ground while commanding the Red Indicator
OFF with a scan tool.
• If 1 V or greater
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 14 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
5. Test for greater than 8 V between the control circuit terminal 14 and ground while commanding the Red
Indicator ON with a scan tool.
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 14 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
6. Test or replace the S48B Multifunction Switch - Overhead Console.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair procedure.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The telematics communication interface control module has the capability of commanding the horn, initiating door
lock/unlock, or operating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions are commanded by the
OnStarA® Call Center per a customer request.
Diagnostic Aids
The customer concern may have been due to a lack of cellular service in a given area, or a failure in the National
Cellular Network infrastructure that has since been corrected.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
|
Circuit/System Verification | ||
|
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that the horn, lights, and the door locks on the vehicle operate properly.
• If an applicable vehicle system does not operate properly
Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle .
• If all applicable vehicle systems operate properly
3. Verify that a call can be successfully placed to the OnStar Call Center by pressing the blue OnStar button.
• If unable to contact the OnStarA® call center
Refer to Unable to Contact OnStar Call Center
• If able to contact the OnStar Call Center
4. Verify with the OnStar advisor that all remote functions (door locks, lights, and horn) work.
• If the remote functions do not operate when requested
Replace the K73 telematics communication interface control module
• If the remote functions operate when requested
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement,
programming and setup.
ONSTAR BUTTON MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The OnStarA® button assembly consists of 3 buttons, Call/Answer, OnStarA® Call Center, and OnStarA®
Emergency. The telematics communication interface control module supplies the OnStarA® button assembly with 10
V via the keypad supply voltage circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor
allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the telematics communication interface control module over the keypad
signal circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the telematics communication interface control module is
able to identify which button has been activated.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Contact the OnStarA® Call Center first before pressing the emergency button in
order to notify them of the test.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify no DTCs are set.
• If any DTCs are set
3. Verify that each OnStarA® button operates normally by pressing each button individually.
• If none of the buttons operate normally
Refer to Circuit System Testing.
Test or replace the S48B Multifunction Switch - Overhead Console.
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48B Multifunction Switch
- Overhead Console. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for 8.0 - 10.5 V between the 10 V reference circuit terminal 16 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 10 V reference circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the 10 V reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If greater than 10.5 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 10 V reference circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If between 8.0 - 10.5 V
5. Vehicle OFF.
6. Test for 500 - 900 Q between the signal circuit terminal 17 and ground.
1. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
1. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module,
vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Vehicle OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
7. Test or replace the S48B Multifunction Switch - Overhead Console.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair procedure.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
Some vehicles equipped with the OnStarA® system have the capability of accessing voice mailboxes and other
automated phone systems by means of the steering wheel controls, while the OnStarA® Personal Calling feature is
in use. If the "Talk" or "Mute" button (depending upon the vehicle) on the steering wheel controls is depressed
during an OnStarA® Personal Calling call, the telematics communication interface control module receives the
message on the serial data bus from either the radio or body control module. This message is interpreted as a request
to turn any spoken numbers into dual tone multi-frequency tones to be delivered over the airwaves to the phone
system the user is communicating with. Complete instructions for operation of these features can be found in the
information provided to the customer with the OnStarA® system.
The steering wheel controls are a resistor network that consist of multiple momentary contact switches and a series
of resistors. The switches and resistor network are arranged so that each switch has a different resistance value.
When a switch is pressed, a voltage drop occurs in the resistor network, which produces a specific voltage value
unique to the switch selected, to be interpreted by either the radio or BCM. In the event the OnStarA® steering
wheel control functions are inoperative, technicians should refer to Steering Wheel Controls Malfunction , to begin
diagnosis of the steering wheel control concern.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Antenna Signal Circuit Short to Ground
Antenna Signal Circuit Open Circuit
Antenna Signal Circuit Short to Battery
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The radio antenna for AM and FM radio reception is connected to the radio with a coaxial cable.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
• Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The radio detects a short to ground in the antenna signal circuit center conductor.
The radio detects an open in the antenna signal circuit center conductor.
The radio detects a short to battery in the antenna signal circuit center conductor.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Radio reception may be poor or not available.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clears after 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
Poor AM and FM radio reception is dependent on multiple influences, some of which may not be vehicle related.
Areas which have high RF traffic or block the signal path may cause a degradation in radio reception. Radio
reception may also be influenced by items within the vehicle, but are not part of the radio system. Such examples are
aftermarket electrical accessories or other items which may generate noise in the vehicle electrical system.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Inspect the antenna for proper mounting or physical damage.
• If damage is found
Repair or replace as necessary
2. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, A11 Radio ON.
3. Verify station reception is normal when tuned to several known good AM and FM stations.
• If AM or FM reception is poor.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the radio antenna coax cable from the A11 Radio and from the T2RR
Antenna - Roof Rear.
2. Verify the antenna coax cable passes the coax cable component test. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the antenna coax cable
3. Connect the antenna coax cable to the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
4. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield at the radio
end of the coax cable.
Replace the radio antenna base.
5. Test for less than 10 Q between the coax cable outer shield and ground at the radio end of the coax cable.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Clean the mounting surface of the radio antenna base.
2. Connect the antenna coax cable to the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
3. Test for less than 10 Q between the coax cable outer shield and ground at the radio end of the coax
cable.
• If 10 Q or greater, replace the antenna base.
• If less than 10 Q, connect all harness connectors. Verify station reception is normal when tuned to
several known good AM and FM stations. If AM or FM reception concerns are still present,
replace the A11 Radio.
6. Test or replace the A11 Radio.
Component Testing
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
NOTE: Before testing the coax cable, check the cable exterior for being pinched, cut,
damaged, or having loose connections at the components, which can cause
reception issues.
To prevent false reading when testing the center coax terminals, use care not to
ground the test probe on the outer housing/shield.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable at both components.
2. Test for less than 5 Q between coax cable center terminal end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable
3. Test for less than 5 fi between the coax cable outer shield end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable
4. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield.
Replace the coax cable
5. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.
• Refer to Control Module References for radio replacement, programming, and setup.
SPEAKER REPLACEMENT REFERENCE
|
Component |
Repair Instruction |
|
Front Center Speaker |
Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement |
|
Front Tweeter Speakers |
Radio Front Speaker Replacement |
|
Front Door Speakers |
Radio Front Side Door Speaker Replacement |
|
Rear Door Speakers |
Radio Rear Side Door Speaker Replacement |
|
Rear Subwoofer |
Radio Rear Compartment Speaker Replacement |
SPEAKER MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Each of the audio output channel circuits (+) and (-), at the radio and audio amplifier (if equipped) have a DC bias
voltage that is approximately one half of battery voltage. When using a DMM, each of the audio output channel
circuits will measure approximately 6.5 V DC. The audio being played on the system is produced by a varying AC
voltage that is centered around the DC bias voltage on the same circuit. The AC voltage is what causes the speaker
cone to move and produce sound. The frequency (Hz) of the AC voltage signal is directly related to the frequency of
the input (audio source playing) to the audio system. Both the DC bias voltage and the AC voltage signals are needed
for the audio system to properly produce sound.
Diagnostic Aids
• Improper speaker mounting or loose trim may cause an audible buzz or distortion. Inspect the appropriate
speaker and the surrounding interior trim for proper and secure mounting.
The EL-50334-6 Audio System Diagnostic CD contains audio tracks that can be used to duplicate and isolate
such concerns. Tracks 11 and 12 contain audio sweep tones for testing for speaker and grill rattles.
If the speaker or surrounding interior trim is found to be loose or improperly secured, correctly secure the item.
• When equipped with an amplifier, it is possible for some individual circuit faults to affect more than one
speakers operation. Perform diagnostic tests in the sequence listed to avoid misdiagnosis.
• The amplifier control circuit will measure less than 1 V when the mute function is OFF, and approximately 8
V DC when at full mute. When mute is active, the radio stops sending the varying AC voltage to the
amplifier/speakers.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-50334-50 USB Cable and Adapter Kit
Circuit/System Verification
Radio ON, Mute OFF, verify clear audio is heard from each audio speaker.
• If audio is inoperative from all speakers, replace the radio.
• If audio is inoperative from one or more, but not all, speakers or the audio emitted from the speakers is not
clear, refer to Speaker Circuit Malfunction - without Amplifier.
Radio ON, Mute OFF, verify clear audio is heard from each audio speaker.
• If audio is not heard from all speakers, or the audio emitted from the speakers is not clear, refer to Speaker
Circuit Malfunction- with Amplifier.
Circuit/System Testing
Speaker Malfunction - without Amplifier
NOTE: In the following tests, audio signal frequencies (Hz) will be tested. To prevent
misdiagnosis, the door chime must be OFF during testing. Ensure the driver
door latch is closed during testing.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate P19 Speaker. Vehicle in Service Mode, radio
ON, mute OFF.
2. Test for 5 - 7 V between each audio signal circuit terminal 1 and terminal 2 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the A11 Radio.
• If greater than 7 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the A11 Radio.
3. Insert the EL-50334-6 Audio Test CD from the EL-50334-50 USB cable and adapter kit. Play track number
three (50 Hz bass test tone) from the test CD.
4. Test for 49 - 51 Hz AC between each signal circuit terminal 1 and terminal 2 and ground.
Replace the A11 Radio.
5. Test or replace the P19 Speaker.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the T3 Audio Amplifier.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, refer to Power Mode Mismatch .
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the T3 Audio Amplifier.
4. Disconnect the X2 harness connector at the T3 Audio Amplifier.
5. Verify a test lamp does not illuminate between the control circuit terminal 14 and ground.
• If the test lamp illuminates
1. Disconnect the X1 harness at the A11 Radio.
2. Verify a test lamp does not illuminate between the control circuit and ground.
• If the test lamp illuminates, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate, replace the A11 Radio.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
6. Vehicle in Service Mode, A11 Radio ON.
7. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal 14 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF. Disconnect the X1 harness at the A11 Radio.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the A11 Radio.
• If the test lamp illuminates
8. Radio ON, mute ON.
9. Test for 7.5 - 8.5 V between the control circuit terminal 12 and ground.
• If greater than 8.5 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the A11 Radio.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the A11 Radio.
10. Radio ON, mute OFF.
11. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 12 and ground.
• If greater than 1 V
Replace the A11 Radio.
12. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the T3 Audio Amplifier.
13. Vehicle in Service Mode, A11 Radio ON.
14. Test for 5 - 7 V between the signal circuit terminals listed below and ground:
• Left front low level audio signal (+) terminal 14
• Left front low level audio signal (-) terminal 6
• Right front low level audio signal (+) terminal 5
• Right front low level audio signal (-) terminal 13
• Left rear low level audio signal (+) terminal 12
• Left rear low level audio signal (-) terminal 4
• Right rear low level audio signal (+) terminal 3
• Right rear low level audio signal (-) terminal 11
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the A11 Radio.
• If greater than 7 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the A11 Radio.
15. Insert the EL - 50334 - 6 Audio Test CD from the EL-50334-50 USB cable and adapter kit. Play track number
three (50 Hz bass test tone) from the test CD.
16. Test for 49 - 51 Hz AC between the audio signal circuit terminals listed below and ground:
• Left front low level audio signal (+) terminal 14
• Left front low level audio signal (-) terminal 6
• Right front low level audio signal (+) terminal 5
• Right front low level audio signal (-) terminal 13
• Left rear low level audio signal (+) terminal 12
• Left rear low level audio signal (-) terminal 4
• Right rear low level audio signal (+) terminal 3
• Right rear low level audio signal (-) terminal 11
Replace the A11 Radio.
17. Vehicle OFF, connect all harness connectors.
18. Disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate P19 Speaker. Vehicle in Service Mode, A11 Radio ON.
19. Test for 5 - 7 V between the appropriate signal circuit terminals listed below and ground:
• Door speaker or tweeter speaker signal (+): terminal 2
• Door speaker or tweeter speaker signal (-): terminal 1
• Subwoofer speaker signal (+) terminal B
• Subwoofer speaker signal (-) terminal A
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the T3 Audio Amplifier.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the T3 Audio Amplifier.
• If greater than 7 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the T3 Audio Amplifier. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the T3 Audio Amplifier.
• If between 5 - 7 V
NOTE: In the following tests, audio signal frequencies (Hz) will be tested. To prevent
misdiagnosis, the door chime must be OFF during testing. Ensure the driver
door latch is closed during testing.
20. Mute OFF, play track number three (50 Hz bass test tone) from the test CD.
21. Test for 49 - 51 Hz AC between the appropriate signal circuit terminals listed below and ground:
• Door speaker or tweeter speaker signal (+): terminal 2
• Door speaker or tweeter speaker signal (-): terminal 1
• Subwoofer speaker signal (+) terminal B
• Subwoofer speaker signal (-) terminal A
Replace the T3 Audio Amplifier.
22. Test or replace the P19 Speaker.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for amplifier or radio replacement, programming and setup
UNABLE TO CONTACT ONSTAR CALL CENTER
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Short to Ground
Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit
Circuit/System Description
The primary cellular phone antenna element is connected to the telematics communication interface control module
(violet connector) via a shielded coaxial cable. Cellular communication takes place on both the primary cellular
antenna signal circuit and the GPS/secondary cellular antenna signal circuit. This diagnostic only applies to the
primary cellular antenna signal circuit. Internal to the antenna on the cellular antenna signal circuit resistance is used
to apply a load, which the telematics communication interface control module uses to detect the presence of the
antenna.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition in the RUN or ACC position.
• System voltage is between 9.5 V and 15.5 V
• The above conditions are present for greater than 1 s.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The telematics communication interface control module detects a short to ground on the primary cellular antenna
signal circuit.
• The telematics communication interface control module detects an open or high resistance on the primary
cellular antenna signal circuit.
• The above conditions are present for greater than 1 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The OnStarA® status LED turns red.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The telematics communication interface control module detects the presence of a cellular antenna.
• A history DTC clears after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn
|
Circuit/System Testing | ||
|
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the violet primary cellular coax cable
connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all
vehicle systems to power down.
2. Using the EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn connect the violet coax cable to the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition
ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify the DTC does not set or a call can be completed to the OnStar Call Center while operating the vehicle
within the conditions for running the DTC.
• If the DTC sets or a call can not be completed to the OnStar Call Center
Replace the K73 Telematics Communications Interface Control Module.
• If the DTC does not set or a call can be completed to the OnStar Call Center
4. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF.
5. Disconnect the EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn from the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module
6. Test the coax cable. Refer to Component Testing.
• If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the coax cable.
• If the coax cable passes the test
7. Test or replace the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
Component Testing
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution
|
NOTE: |
|
Coax Cable Test
1. Test for less than 5 Q between the coax cable center terminal end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable.
• If less than 5 fi
2. Test for greater than 5 Q between the coax cable outer shield end to end.
• If 5 fi or greater
Replace the coax cable.
• If less than 5 fi
3. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield.
• If less than infinite resistance
Replace the coax cable.
• If infinite resistance
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair procedure.
• Refer to High Frequency Antenna Replacement
• Refer to Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement,
setup, and programming
ONSTAR VOICE RECOGNITION MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The telematics communication interface control module is capable of interpreting voice commands received over the
cellular microphone circuits. Speech recognition allows the user to speak to one computer in the vehicle, and one
reached over the cellular communication network. The module attempts to understand the users command, and
responds by speaking back, or by taking the appropriate action, e.g. dialing the phone.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
|
Circuit/System Verification | ||
|
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that your voice is heard clearly by the OnStar Call center.
• If your voice can not be heard clearly
Refer to OnStar Microphone Malfunction
3. Verify that the system responds appropriately to all voice commands by pressing the voice command button
and attempting to operate the system using multiple voice commands.
Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
Refer to OnStar Description and Operation for tips on proper pronunciation
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair procedure.
Refer to Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement,
programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
When voice recognition for the infotainment system is started, voice signals from the cellular phone microphone are
passed through the telematics communication interface control module to the Human Machine Interface Control
Module via the voice recognition audio circuits.
Diagnostic Aids
• Refer to the Owners Manual and/or the Navigation System Owners Manual for voice recognition use and
commands.
• When the system recognizes the command the system will either perform the function or ask to confirm the
choice by clearly saying "yes" or "no".
• If experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing a command, confirm that the command is correct.
• Background noise such as a climate control fan positioned on high, open windows, or very loud outside noises,
can cause voice commands to be misunderstood.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the OnStarA® voice recognition system is operating normally.
• If the OnStarA® voice recognition system is not operating normally.
Refer to OnStar Voice Recognition Malfunction.
• If the OnStarA® voice recognition system is operating normally.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode, infotainment system ON.
NOTE: Refer to the Owners Manual and/or the Navigation System Owners Manual for
voice recognition use and commands.
3. Begin voice recognition for the infotainment system and clearly speak one of the available commands.
4. Verify the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
• If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to the command.
1. Clearly speak a different command.
2. Verify the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
• If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to any commands, refer to Circuit/System
Testing.
• If the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
3. Refer to the Owners Manual and/or the Navigation System Owners Manual for hints on speaking
commands.
• If the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
5. All OK
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the low reference circuit terminal 2 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface
Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
3. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal listed below and ground.
• Voice recognition audio signal terminal 6
• Voice recognition audio low reference terminal 12
• If 1 V greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
5. Vehicle OFF.
6. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuits listed below and ground:
• Voice recognition audio signal terminal 6
• Voice recognition audio low reference terminal 12
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
7. Test for less than 5 Q between the terminals listed below:
• K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module signal circuit terminal 1 X1 and the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit terminal 6 X2
• K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module low reference circuit terminal 2 X1 and the K73
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module low reference circuit terminal 12 X2
• If 5 fi greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
8. Replace the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module. Connect all harness connectors.
NOTE: Refer to the Owners Manual and/or the Navigation System Owners Manual for
voice recognition use and commands.
9. Begin voice recognition for the infotainment system and clearly speak one of the available commands.
10. Verify the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
1. Clearly speak a different command.
2. Verify the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
• If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to any commands, replace the K73
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
11. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for Human Machine Interface Control Module or Telematics Communication
Interface Control replacement, programming and setup.
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
 |
|
Fig. 9: Mobile Telephone Microphone Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
| ||||||
|
MOBILE TELEPHONE ANTENNA CABLE REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 10: Mobile Telephone Antenna Cable |
| ||||||
|
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 11: Human Machine Interface Control Module |
| ||||||
|
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 12: Communication Interface Module |
| ||||||
|
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE BATTERY REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 13: Communication Interface Module Battery |
| ||||||
|
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 14: Communication Interface Module Bracket |
| ||||||||
|
RADIO REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 15: Radio Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||
|
RADIO CONTROL ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 16: Radio Control Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
AUDIO DISC PLAYER AND USB RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 17: Audio Disc Player And USB Receptacle |
| ||||||
|
RADIO SPEAKER AMPLIFIER REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 18: Radio Speaker Amplifier Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
NAVIGATION SIGNAL SPLITTER REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 19: Navigation Signal Splitter Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||
|
TELEVISION ANTENNA CABLE REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 20: Television Antenna Cable Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
MOBILE TELEPHONE ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 21: Mobile Telephone Antenna Coaxial Cable |
| ||||||
|
RADIO ANTENNA CABLE REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 22: Radio Antenna Cable Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||
|
NAVIGATION ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE REPLACEMENT (INLINE TO ONSTAR TO SPLITTER) | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 23: Navigation Antenna Coaxial Cable (Inline To Onstar To Splitter) |
| ||||||
|
NAVIGATION ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE REPLACEMENT (ONSTAR TO SPLITTER) | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 24: Navigation Antenna Coaxial Cable (Onstar To Splitter) |
| ||||||
|
NAVIGATION ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE REPLACEMENT (SPLITTER TO HMI) | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 25: Navigation Antenna Coaxial Cable (Splitter To HMI) |
| ||||||
|
RADIO FRONT CENTER SPEAKER REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 26: Radio Front Center Speaker Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
RADIO FRONT SPEAKER REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 27: Radio Front Speaker Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
HIGH FREQUENCY ANTENNA REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 28: High Frequency Antenna Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
RADIO FRONT SIDE DOOR SPEAKER REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 29: Radio Front Side Door Speaker Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
RADIO CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT - STEERING WHEEL (LEFT SIDE REAR) | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 30: Radio Control Switch - Steering Wheel (Left Side Rear) |
| ||||||||
|
RADIO CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT - STEERING WHEEL (RIGHT SIDE REAR) | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 31: Radio Control Switch - Steering Wheel (Right Side Rear) |
| ||||||||||
|
RADIO CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT - STEERING WHEEL (RIGHT SIDE FRONT) | ||||||||||
Fig. 32: Radio Control Switch - Steering Wheel (Right Side Front)
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Remove Steering Wheel Spoke Cover. Refer to Steering Wheel Spoke Cover Replacement | |
|
1 |
Radio Control Switch Bolt (Qty: 2) CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Tighten 1.5 N.m (13 lb in) |
|
2 |
Radio Control Switch - Right Side Front Procedure Remove the radio control switch from the steering wheel spoke cover. |
RADIO CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT - STEERING WHEEL (LEFT SIDE LOWER)
Removal Procedure
1. Remove Steering Wheel Spoke Cover. Refer to Steering Wheel Spoke Cover Replacement
 |
|
Fig. 33: Steering Wheel Spoke Lower Cover |
2. Remove Steering Wheel Spoke Lower Cover (1)
1. Use a flat bladed plastic tool to remove.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
 |
|
Fig. 34: Radio Control Switch And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
3. Remove Radio Control Switch Bolts (1) (Qty: 2)
4. Remove Radio Control Switch - Left Side Lower (2) @ Steering Wheel Spoke Lower Cover
Installation Procedure
 |
|
Fig. 35: Radio Control Switch And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
1. Install Radio Control Switch - Left Side Lower (2) @ Steering Wheel Spoke Lower Cover
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution .
2. Install and tighten Radio Control Switch Bolts (1) (Qty: 2) to 1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
 |
|
Fig. 36: Steering Wheel Spoke Lower Cover Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
3. Install Steering Wheel Spoke Lower Cover (1)
4. Install Steering Wheel Spoke Cover. Refer to Steering Wheel Spoke Cover Replacement
RADIO REAR SIDE DOOR SPEAKER REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 37: Radio Rear Side Door Speaker Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
RADIO REAR COMPARTMENT SPEAKER REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 38: Radio Rear Compartment Speaker |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Remove Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel (Right Side). Refer to Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel Replacement (Right Side) | |
|
1 |
Radio Rear Compartment Speaker Fastener (Qty: 3) CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Tighten 6 N.m (53 lb in) |
|
2 |
Radio Rear Compartment Speaker Procedure
|
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
This OnStarA® system consists of the following components:
• Telematics communication interface control module
• OnStarA® three button assembly
• Microphone
• Cellular antenna
• Navigation antenna
• BluetoothA® antenna (If equipped)
• Back up battery (If equipped)
• WiFi Hotspot (If equipped)
• TTY (Teletypewriter)
This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system.
|
1 C3 ■ Telematics Communication I Interface "I B24 ■ Cellular 1 Phone I Microphone 1 S51 I Telematics 1 Button I Assembly 1 T4G ■ Cellular ’ Phone. I Navigation. |
 |
 |
I Telematics I Interface Control Module |
Fig. 39: OnStar System Block Diagram
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
Callout
Component Name
| ||||||||||||||||||
|
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module |
The OnStar Generation 10 system uses Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) to communicate data and
voice signals over the national cellular network. The module may also have the ability to act as a Wireless Local
Area Network (WLAN) Wi-Fi hotspot similar to a home wireless router. The module houses an internal WLAN
antenna enabling hotspot connectivity and streaming high speed media to the entertainment system. The module also
may enable Teletypewriter (TTY) and be capable of Bluetooth communication utilizing an internal antenna. The
module is capable of up to 4G LTE speeds and houses 2 technology systems, one to process Global Positioning
System (GPS) data, and another for cellular information. The module sends and receives all cellular communications
over two cellular antennas and cellular antenna coax cables.
The OnStar Gen 10 system has two antenna inputs, a primary cellular signal and a combined GPS/secondary cellular
signal. The OnStarA® system uses the United States Global Positioning System (GPS) signals to provide location on
demand. GPS is a space-based satellite navigation system that provides location and time information in all weather
conditions, anywhere on or near Earth where there is an unobstructed line of sight to four or more GPS satellites.
The module also has the capability of activating certain features such as, the horn, remote starting, initiating door
lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded by the
OnStarA® Call Center per a customer request or mobile device app depending on vehicle and customer subscription.
Dedicated circuits are used to connect the telematics communication interface control module to a microphone, the
button assembly, radio, and if equipped the Back Up Battery (BUB). The telematics communication interface control
module communicates with the rest of the vehicle over the serial data bus.
Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached
to the module. The power mode state is determined by the telematics communication interface control module
through serial data messaging.
OnStarA® Three Button Assembly
• The OnStarA® button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button
assembly is comprised of 3 buttons or 3 capacitive touch buttons and status LED's or an error indicator. The
buttons are defined as follows:
• The answer/end button, which is black with a white phone icon or a white driver figure seated with voice
signals near its face, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition.
• The blue OnStarA® call center button, which displays the OnStarA® logo, allows the user to connect to
the OnStarA® call center.
• The emergency button, which displays white letters "SOS" with red background, sends a high priority
emergency call to the OnStarA® call center when pressed.
If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStarA® subscription is not active or has
expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status.
The telematics communication interface control module supplies 10 volts to the OnStarA® button assembly on the
keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific
voltage to be returned to the telematics communication interface control module on the keypad signal circuit.
Depending upon the voltage range returned the telematics communication interface control module is able to identify
which button has been pressed.
The OnStarA® status LED or error indicator is located near the buttons. The LED is green when the system is ON
and operating normally. When any indicator is illuminated and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress.
When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and
the OnStarA® system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call.
Each LED or error indicator is controlled by either the telematics communication interface control module over
dedicated LED signal circuits or by low speed GMLAN serial data depending on the inside rearview mirror option.
Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly.
Secondary OnStarA® Controls
Some vehicles may have an additional button that when pushed can engage the OnStarA® system. The button may
be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through
it.
By engaging the OnStarA® system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice
commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the
information is not available for reference, at any command prompt the user can say "HELP" and the telematics
communication interface control module will return an audible list of available commands.
OnStarA® Microphone
The cellular microphone can be part of the rearview mirror assembly, or a stand-alone unit in the headliner or roof
console. In either case, the telematics communication interface control module supplies approximately 10V to the
microphone on the cellular microphone signal circuit. The microphone modifies the 10V depending on the volume
and voice being detected. A cellular microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a ground for the
microphone. The microphone signal circuits pass through the telematics communication interface control module to
support entertainment voice recognition.
Cellular and GPS Antennas
The combination antenna will have any of the following antenna elements when equipped with OnStar:
• Primary cellular element
• Secondary cellular element
• GPS element
• Digital radio element
• AM/FM element
The Gen 10 OnStarA® system uses 2 cellular antenna elements to send and receive cellular data, the primary cellular
element and the secondary cellular element. The primary cellular signal is carried by a coax cable that connects the
antenna directly to the telematics communication interface control module. Details of the secondary cellular signal
are further described below.
The GPS antenna element is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a
low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. Also housed within the antenna is
circuitry to combine the GPS signal and the secondary cellular signal. Without navigation, the combination
GPS/secondary cellular signal is carried by a coax cable that connects directly to the telematics communication
interface control module. The cable also provides a path for DC current for powering the antenna. With navigation,
the combination GPS/secondary cellular signal is carried by a coax cable that connects to the navigation signal
splitter. The splitter supplies the GPS signal to the navigation/entertainment system and the GPS/cellular signal to the
telematics communication interface control module.
The digital radio element collects digital radio signals from two satellites and where necessary terrestrial repeaters.
The digital radio signal is carried by a coax cable and connected to the digital radio receiver. Refer to Radio/Audio
System Description and Operation for further details.
The radio signal is sent from a broadcast station and is then received by the AM/FM radio antenna element. The
AM/FM radio signal is carried by a coax cable and is connected to the radio. Refer to Radio/Audio System
Description and Operation for further details.
OnStarA® RemoteLink
OnStarA® RemoteLink is a mobile app to link mobile devices to a vehicle for limited diagnostics and feature
controls. After downloading the app and registering the device, vehicle owners with an eligible vehicle can use their
mobile devices to access real-time data from their vehicle and perform specific commands remotely.
All communication between the app and the vehicle is powered by OnStar'sA® advanced connected vehicle
technology. An active OnStarA® account as well as a valid OnStarA® username and password are required to use
the app. The remote commands must be enabled by logging into the user's OnStarA® account prior to using the app.
Refer to the owners manual for available vehicle data and control features.
Compass Heading
The telematics communication interface module has a compass feature to calculate vehicle direction which is
displayed via the instrument panel cluster or designated display. The compass heading is determined by dead
reckoning until the GPS 3d fix is established. The dead reckoning is accomplished by using the yaw rate sensors and
wheel ticks to determine heading changes from a GPS known heading. The GPS 3d fix heading is determined by the
deferential of two locations. If "CAL" is displayed on the Instrument Panel Cluster or designated display refer to the
owners manual for steps to calibrate the compass.
BluetoothA® (If Equipped)
BluetoothA® wireless technology is a short-range communications technology intended to replace the cables
connecting portable and/or fixed devices while maintaining high levels of security. Only vehicles with steering wheel
controls will have BluetoothA® functionality. In order to utilize the vehicle's BluetoothA® system, a BluetoothA®
equipped cellular phone is required.
The BluetoothA® antenna is internal to the telematics communication interface control module, radio or human
machine interface module and is used to send and receive signals from a BluetoothA® enabled cellular phone. The
available features and functions are determined by the software within the device being used and the telematics
communication interface control module. The operating range of the signal from the vehicle is approximately 30
feet. Note that the operating range is dependent upon the cellular phone being used and battery level of the phone.
With BluetoothA® technology customers can experience hands-free calling as their BluetoothA® capable cellular
phones are wirelessly connected to the vehicle. It will allow customers to place and receive calls using the steering
wheel controls and voice recognition. The vehicle audio system will allow you to listen to your call through the
vehicle speakers and adjust volume through steering wheel or radio controls.
Not all BluetoothA® cellular phones are guaranteed to work with the vehicle's BluetoothA® system. Based on the
cellular phone's service provider and the manufacturer's implementation of BluetoothA®, not all phones support all
available BluetoothA® functionality. BluetoothA® enabled cellular phones will be tested for vehicle compatibility
and a feature compatibility list will be provided via the GM BluetoothA® website: http://www.gm.com/vc/bluetooth/
BluetoothA® Features Supported
The following is a list of features supported by the BluetoothA® system. Note that not all devices will support all of
the listed functions.
• Automatic reconnection - highest priority phone will automatically be connected to vehicle when vehicle
ignition is on
• Hands-free dialing- via digits, redial, name tags (phone number saved to a nametag via voice recognition)
• Answering a call
• Ending a call
• Mute a Call
• Rejecting a call - ignore an incoming call
• Call Waiting
• Three-way Calling - initiated from hands-free system
• Send Number During a Call - this is used when calling a menu-driven phone system
• Transfer a Call - transfer call from vehicle to cellular phone and visa versa
• Voice Pass-Thru - allow access to the voice recognition commands on the cellular phone
Pairing a BluetoothA® Cellular Phone to the Vehicle
In order to use hands-free calling, the cellular phone must be paired to the vehicle. Up to five devices can be paired
to the vehicle at one time, but only one can be connected at any given time. To pair a phone, the customer must know
how to operate the BluetoothA® functionality of their phone. The pairing process must only be done one time for
each phone, unless that phone's information is deleted. The system will always generate a password and will provide
that password if the device you are pairing does not support Secure Simple Pairing (SSP). If the device being paired
does support SSP the system will not provide the password and automatically pair the device. For safety reasons, the
pairing process is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
Once the BluetoothA® cellular phone has been paired with vehicle, it will automatically connect to the vehicle when
the ignition is on and the device is on. When more than one paired phone is in the vehicle, the phone with the highest
priority will be connected. If the cellular phone is in use while getting into the vehicle, the phone can be switched to
hands-free mode with the press of a button. In addition, a call in progress can be transferred from the vehicle hands-
free mode to the phone to continue the call as the customer exits the vehicle.
Complete pairing instructions are provided in the Vehicle Owners Manual.
Back-up Battery (If Equipped)
NOTE: Do not disconnect the main vehicle battery or remove the OnStarA® fuse with the
ignition key in any position other than OFF. Disconnecting power to the OnStarA®
module in any way while the ignition is ON or with retained accessory power
activated may cause activation of the OnStarA® Back-Up Battery. This action is per
design as the back-up battery is designed to provide power to the telematics
communication interface control module so an emergency notification call can be
made after an event where the main battery is disabled. Once the Back-Up Battery is
activated it will stay on until the power is restored back to the telematics
communication interface control module. The telematics communication interface
control module naturally chooses the main supply voltage as it's default supply, but
if the main supply is removed or lost for any reason the OnStarA® module will use
the Back-Up Battery as a power supply as long as the default supply can not be
detected. The back-up battery is not rechargeable and once discharged below 9.5
volts the back-up battery must be replaced.
Certain OnStarA® equipped vehicles may also be equipped with a back-up battery. The back-up battery is a non-
rechargeable, lithium battery intended to provide an auxiliary power source for the telematics communication
interface control module in the event where power from the main vehicle battery is lost.
The back-up battery is intended to have a limited life span of approximately 4 years and is designed to maintain an
open circuit voltage between 16 V and 9 V throughout this period. This allows the battery to power the basic
functions of the telematics communication interface control module for least one 200 second (5 minute) call at the
end of the 4 year span, should the main vehicle battery be lost. In the case of a vehicle losing vehicle battery power,
OnStar will switch over to the backup battery based on an internal algorithm. It will look for an air-bag deploy, or
near-deploy, messages from the SDM. If there are no messages the OnStar module will stay wake for a few minutes
longer and monitor the buttons in the mirror. If not pressed, the modules will power down and shut off completely.
The back-up battery is connected to the telematics communication interface control module through the back-up
battery positive voltage circuit and back-up battery ground circuit and is protected from a short circuit by means of
an internal fuse. In the event the back-up battery, battery positive voltage circuit is shorted to the back-up battery
ground circuit or chassis ground, the fuse will open and render the back-up battery permanently inoperable. The
status of the back-up battery and its associated wiring is monitored by the telematics communication interface
control module.
WiFi Hotspot
The telematics communication interface control module acts as a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) WiFi
hotspot router and uses direct 4G LTE connectivity to the internet. It has the ability to connect up to 7 devices at one
time. A data plan is required and when purchased, a security default password is established. There are several ways
to change the SSID or password, by placing a call to the OnStar Call Center, by using the Gen 10 mobile app or
through the scan tool.
The system utilizes a secure autoconnect feature between the telematics communication interface control module and
the radio/HMI. No user interaction is required, it is always available and ready to connect to a dedicated in car
device. The ignition must be in Run, Accessory or RAP for WiFi to operate.
Audio System Interface
When the OnStarA® requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio
functions and transmit OnStarA® originated audio. The OnStarA® audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system
by a dedicated signal circuit and a low reference circuit.
The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with
the radio ON.
On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStarA® system is active to aid in reducing
interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting.
OnStarA® Sleep Cycle
The OnStarA® system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in
the OFF position and retained accessory power mode has ended. This cycle enables the telematics communication
interface control module to perform remote functions, such as door unlock, as commanded over the air by the
OnStarA® Call Center, and to continue to maintain an acceptable level of battery electrical drain.
The OnStarA® system uses 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when
the ignition is put into the OFF state:
• High power
• Low power
• Sleep
• Digital standby
The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, or retained accessory power is
enabled, and the OnStarA® system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function.
The low power state is in effect when the OnStarA® system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or
with retained accessory power enabled.
The sleep state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the retained accessory power has timed out while in
an analog cellular area. At a predetermined time recorded within the telematics communication interface control
module, the system re-enters the low power state to listen for a call from the OnStarA® Call Center for 1 minute.
After this interval, the system will again return to the sleep state for 9 minutes. If a call is sent during the 1 minute
interval, the OnStarA® system will receive the call and immediately go into the high power mode to perform any
requested functions. If no call is received during the 1 minute interval, the system will go back into the sleep mode
for another 9 minutes. This process will continue for up to 48 hours, after which the OnStarA® system will turn off
until the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position.
The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the retained accessory power has
timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStarA® module is able to perform all
remote functions as commanded by an OnStarA® advisor at any time, for a continuous 120 hours. After 120 hours,
the OnStarA® module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the telematics
communication interface control module. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog
mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals,
this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received.
If the OnStarA® system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain
OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position.
Features
The hands free, OnStarA® personal calling cellular phone feature is an additional feature of the OnStarA® system.
This feature is embedded within the telematics communication interface control module; however it must be
activated by an OnStarA® advisor. OnStarA® personal calling operates similar to most hand held cellular phones in
that the availability for its usage is based on minutes or units. The customer must have a current OnStarA®
subscription, as this feature cannot be utilized without it. To use OnStarA® personal calling, the customer must also
purchase units (minutes) as outlined in the owners guide provided with the OnStarA® system. Units begin to deplete,
1 unit is equal to 1 minute, as the customer makes outbound phone calls, answers inbound phone calls, or while
connected to the OnStarA® virtual advisor. In addition, units may also have an expiration date, depending upon the
type of units purchased.
Customers have the ability to store telephone numbers within the module, referenced by a nametag for the
convenience of frequently dialed numbers. After storing a nametag, the user can dial this number by initiating the
OnStarA® personal calling feature, speaking the word "call," and repeating the nametag assigned.
Turn by Turn Navigation allows the driver to contact OnStarA® to obtain directions for driving from a current
location to a desired location. The Turn by Turn Navigation system stores your planned route and continually checks
your position along that route, when you deviate from the planned route, the system will recognize this and prompt
the driver with verbal prompts for how to proceed. The driver then responds verbally to direct the system to continue
the current routing or to recalculate the route because of a missed turn.
The Advisor Record Feature allows the user to store any information given during a call with an OnStarA® Advisor.
Recording is activated by pressing the blue OnStar button during a call; pressing the button a second time stops the
recording. The stored information can be played back by pressing the phone button on the three button assembly and
using the voice command "Advisor Playback".
Teletypewriter (TTY) Users
OnStar has the ability to communicate to deaf, hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired customers while in the vehicle.
The available dealer-installed TTY system can provide in-vehicle access to all of the OnStar services, except Virtual
Advisor and OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
Deactivated OnStarA® Accounts
In the event a customer has not renewed their OnStarA® account after expiration or the account was never activated,
OnStarA® will make a discrete cellular call to the vehicle to deactivate the OnStarA® system. Before taking this
action, customers are notified that the OnStarA® system in their vehicle will be deactivated unless they elect to
renew the account. After the OnStarA® account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following:
• The OnStarA® status LED will not illuminate.
• The OnStarA® system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStarA® Call Center in the event of a collision or
if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason.
• An emergency button press will play a demo message indicating the service has been deactivated.
• An OnStarA® Call Center button press will connect the customer with a dedicated sales team who can sell an
OnStarA® subscription and reactivate the vehicle. Depending on the type of OnStarA® hardware in the
vehicle, the customer may first hear a demonstration message stating there is no current OnStarA®
subscription for the vehicle, and directing the customer what to do to activate services.
• OnStarA® personal calling will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current
OnStarA® account. Attempts to use this feature may result in cellular connection failure messages and the
inability to connect to the number dialed.
Certain vehicles that have never had an active OnStarA® account, or that have been deactivated, may be unable to
establish a connection with the OnStarA® Call Center. When normal published diagnostic procedures do not indicate
a possible cause for the no connect concern, the vehicle may have been deactivated. For deactivated vehicles, a no
connect response should be considered normal operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary
should the customer elect to become an active OnStarA® subscriber or renew the account subscription.
OnStarA® Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations
The proper operation of the OnStarA® System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated
into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the
network, and the GPS.
The cellular operation of the OnStarA® system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from an analog or
digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making
an OnStarA® key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will
result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the
OnStarA® Call Center. The OnStarA® system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers
for the module, station identification number, electronic serial number or manufacturers electronic ID, are not
recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers.
The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with
them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals
because of its location, i.e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStarA® call which
has reached the Call Center without vehicle data.
During diagnostic testing of the OnStarA® system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that
has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where analog or digital cellular calls have been
successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStarA® keypress in a known good
OnStarA® equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStarA® Call Center advisor. Such places can be
used as a permanent reference for future OnStarA® testing.
Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number
The telematics communication interface control module utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call
routing and connection, a mobile identification number and a mobile directory number. The mobile identification
number represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes while the mobile directory
number represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device.
Operation of the OnStarA® Speech Recognition Systems
OnStarA® users communicate with 2 speech recognition systems. Speech recognition allows the user to speak to one
computer in the vehicle, and one reached over a phone line. The computer tries to understand the users command,
and responds by speaking back, or by taking the appropriate action, e.g. dialing the phone.
• Personal Calling uses a speech recognition system that resides in the vehicle. When the user presses the phone
button, the system states, Ready, and listens for the user's command. The user can speak commands to control
the hands-free phone.
• Virtual advisor is a remote speech recognition system that the caller can access by making a phone call. The
user connects to virtual advisor by requesting it during personal calling use. The user is then transferred to the
virtual advisor server and talks to it via a cellular connection.
The OnStarA® speech recognition systems use speech technology that is designed to understand a wide range of
American English speakers. Although there is no one right way to speak English, the system will work best when
users try to modify their pronunciation should they encounter difficulty. Users who do not obtain good results are
advised to try the tips and workarounds found in the Infotainment System Manual or the Owners Manual.
The entertainment system on this vehicle may have several different configurations available to it. To determine the
specific configuration of the vehicle, please see the Service Parts ID Label, and refer to RPO Code List .
Each item in the list below represents topics covered in detail below.
• Radio Circuit Operation
• Information Display and Controls
• Antenna System
• Radio Reception
• Speaker Operation
• Audio Amplifier (If equipped)
• Theft Deterrent
• Auxiliary Audio Input Jack (If equipped)
• USB Port (If equipped)
• BluetoothA® (UP9) (if equipped)
• Applications (if equipped)
• Navigation System Components and Features (if equipped)
• OnStarA® (if equipped)
• Steering Wheel Controls (If equipped)
• Auto Volume Control
Radio Circuit Operation
The radio does not use a discrete ignition feed circuit for power moding. The power mode master provides the
system power mode to the radio via serial data messages. The power mode master determines the system power
mode by processing power mode information from ignition switch inputs. Serial data power modes supported by the
radio are OFF, ACCESSORY, RUN, and CRANK REQUEST.
The vehicle harness provides a ground for the radio circuits. The radio may also be case grounded.
The radio communicates with other modules via serial data.
Each of the audio output channel circuits (+) and (-), at the radio have a DC bias voltage that is approximately one
half of battery voltage. The audio being played on the system is produced by a varying AC voltage that is centered
around the DC bias voltage on the same circuit. The AC voltage is what causes the speaker cone to move and
produce sound. The frequency (Hz) of the AC voltage signal is directly related to the frequency of the input (audio
source playing) to the audio system. Both the DC bias voltage and the AC voltage signals are needed for the audio
system to properly produce sound.
The remote enable circuit is a discrete 12 V signal supplied to infotainment system components when the radio is
producing audio, needs the front display on, needs video entertainment system components on, or needs to produce
chimes. This signal is used to control the power state of the components. There is no output on radio the remote
enable circuit when the vehicle is in the CRANK powermode, this is to minimize current consumption from the
attached modules and also to avoid audio pops during crank events.
|
Information Display and Controls |
 |
|
Fig. 40: Navigation Radio Communications Flow Diagram |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
1 |
Radio/HVAC Controls |
|
2 |
Info Display Module |
|
3 |
Radio |
|
4 |
HVAC Control Module |
|
5 |
Data Link Connector |
|
a |
GMLAN |
|
b |
Local Interconnect Network |
|
c |
CAN Graphical Interface |
|
d |
Digital Video |
|
e |
Touch Screen Serial Data |
The info display module has continuous power and ground. When the radio is on, a discrete 12 V signal is supplied
on the remote enable circuit to the color display module. This signal is used to control the power state of the module,
which is active when the signal is high and inactive when the signal is low.
The info display module receives digital video data from the radio for on-screen display information through a
dedicated video cable. The radio communicates with the info display module over the touch screen serial data
circuits for touch screen inputs and backlighting dimming level.
The radio controls communicate radio control inputs directly to the radio through the CAN Graphical Interface (CGI)
data circuits. After receiving the message the radio will perform the requested function. Messages communicated
between the radio and the radio/HVAC controls include the following:
• Button presses/knob rotations
• Commands for the state of indicators
• Radio control back-lighting
The HVAC controls are a separate component from the radio controls. HVAC data for controls and status indicators
is communicated between the HVAC controls and the HVAC control module with a separate LIN serial data circuit.
HVAC status screen information from the HVAC control module is transmitted to the radio on the GMLAN serial
data circuit. The radio then displays the desired screen information on the info display using the video data circuits.
Antenna System
The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle. This type of antenna may be used with the AM/FM
radio, but is primarily for OnStarA® cellular and GPS signals and the XM™ Satellite Radio Service System, if the
vehicle has these features. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear reception. If the vehicle has a
sunroof, the performance of the system may be affected if the sunroof is open. Loading items onto the roof of the
vehicle can interfere with the performance of the system, ensure the multi-band antenna is not obstructed.
The radio provides battery voltage to the AM/FM amplifier in the antenna base using the center conductor of the
antenna coaxial cable. When a 12 V signal is seen by the amplifier, both AM and FM signals are amplified.
Radio Reception
The radio signal is sent from a broadcast station and is then received by an antenna. The strength of the signal
received depends on the following:
• The power output (wattage) of the broadcasting station
• The location of the vehicle (or receiver) relative to the broadcast tower.
• Height of the broadcast antenna
• Height of the receiving antenna
• Obstacles between the tower and the receiver
• Atmospheric conditions
• What band (AM or FM) the station is broadcasting
• Type of antenna and the ground plane
The XM satellite receiver is integrated into the radio. XM satellite radio provides digital radio reception. The XM
signal is broadcast from two satellites and, where necessary, terrestrial repeaters. The high power satellites allow the
antenna to receive the XM signal even when foliage and other partial obstructions block the antennas view of the
satellite. Terrestrial repeaters are used in dense urban areas. These repeaters will receive the satellite signal and re-
broadcast them at much higher power levels in order to ensure reception in areas with densely packed tall buildings.
A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The RDS feature is available only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon receiving
specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available. While the radio is tuned
to an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display. RDS data is carried in what is known as a "subcarrier".
A subcarrier is a frequency that the FM broadcaster is authorized to use to send data that is not audible in the main
audio program.
RDS functions will only work with FM broadcast stations that are broadcasting RDS data. Not all FM Broadcast
stations broadcast RDS data or offer all of the RDS services.
The information displayed is dependent upon the information broadcast by the particular station. The information
may vary greatly between stations. RDS functions may not work properly when reception is weak, reception is of
poor quality, or RDS is not implemented properly by the FM Broadcaster. In some cases, a radio station broadcasting
incorrect information may cause the RDS features of the radio to appear to work improperly.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Display text information such as: station identification, type of programming, and general information (artist
and song title, station messages, call in phone numbers, etc.).
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies
• Receive alert warnings of local or national emergencies. When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! displays. You will hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or a CD is playing.
If a CD is playing, play stops during the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be turned off. ALERT! is
not affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all RDS stations.
Speaker Operation
Speakers turn electrical energy into mechanical energy to move air, using a permanent magnet and an electromagnet.
The electromagnet is energized when the radio or amplifier (if equipped) delivers current to the voice coil on the
speaker. The voice coil will form a north and south pole that will cause the voice coil and the speaker cone to move
in relation to the permanent magnet. The current delivered to the speaker is rapidly changing alternating current
(A/C). This causes the speaker cone to move in two directions producing sound.
Audio Amplifier (If equipped)
A fused battery voltage circuit provides the main amplifier power. A switched 12 V output from the radio is used to
control the power - state of the amplifier. To respond quickly to audio input and control signals, the amplifier is ON
in all vehicle power modes except OFF and CRANK Request. The internal amplifier bridges are fully powered and
unmuted when the amplifier receives the switched 12 V input.
The purpose of the amplifier is to increase the power of a voltage or current signal. The output signal of an amplifier
may consist of the same frequencies as the input signal or it may consist of only a portion of the frequencies as in the
case of a subwoofer or midrange speaker. The radio creates a low level stereo audio output signal, which is sent at
the user-defined volume level to the audio amplifier. The audio amplifier amplifies the signal and sends it to the
appropriate speakers. Each of the audio output channel circuits (+) and (-), from the amplifier have a DC bias voltage
that is approximately one half of battery voltage. The audio being played on the system is produced by a varying AC
voltage that is centered around the DC bias voltage on the same circuit. The AC voltage is what causes the speaker
cone to move and produce sound. The frequency (Hz) of the AC voltage signal is directly related to the frequency of
the input (audio source playing) to the audio system. Both the DC bias voltage and the AC voltage signals are needed
for the audio system to properly produce sound.
Theft Deterrent
The radio theft deterrent system is intended to disable or limit radio functionality if incorrect vehicle information is
received by the radio. The radio disables functionality if the VIN information received by the radio does not match
the VIN information that has been learned by the radio. The radio receives this information via serial data. A possible
cause of incorrect VIN info could be the radio was originally installed in another vehicle.
The radio has the following theft operating modes as part of the theft deterrent system:
• Normal Mode: The radio has learned a correct VIN sequence and the VIN information received via serial data
matches the learned VIN sequence. In this mode the radio has full functionality.
• No VIN Mode: The radio has not received or learned a correct VIN sequence. In this mode the radio has
limited functionality.
• Theft Detected Mode: The radio has learned a correct VIN sequence and the VIN information received via
serial data does NOT match the learned VIN sequence. In this mode the radio may be disabled or have limited
functionality. The radio display will indicate that theft protection is active.
Auxiliary Audio Input Jack (If equipped)
The infotainment system may have a 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) auxiliary audio input jack located in the center console. The
auxiliary audio input jack may interface directly with the radio, or be connected to the infotainment system via a
Multimedia Player Interface Module. When a portable audio playback device is connected to the auxiliary jack, an
internal switch detects the connection and the radio will switch to AUX as the audio source. Audio signals from the
device are sent to the radio from the auxiliary jack via the left, right, and common audio signal circuits.
• When a device is first connected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in.) input jack the infotainment system automatically
switches to that device. If an auxiliary device has already been connected, press the AUX or CD/AUX button
to select the device.
• Playback of an audio device that is connected to the 3.5 mm jack can only be controlled using the controls on
the device.
• The volume control on the device may need to be adjusted to ensure sufficient playback volume through the
infotainment system.
USB Port (If Equipped)
The infotainment system may have a USB connector located in the center console. The USB connector may interface
directly with the radio, or be connected to the infotainment system via a Multimedia Player Interface Module. The
USB connector supports both USB standards 1.1 and 2.0.
USB Supported Devices:
• USB Flash Sticks (Thumb Drives)
• Portable USB Hard Drives
• Portable Digital Media Players (iPODA®, ZUNEA®, etc)
Depending on the USB device, some devices may not be recognized, or some features/functions may not be able to
be controlled with the radio controls. USB HUB devices are not supported.
BluetoothA® (If Equipped)
BluetoothA® wireless technology is a short-range communications technology intended to replace the cables
connecting portable and/or fixed devices while maintaining high levels of security. The operating range of the signal
is approximately 30 feet.
The available features and functions are determined by the type of device and the software within the devices being
used. For a feature or function to operate, it must be supported in both devices.
The first connection between devices is established through a process called pairing. In order to pair two devices, a
password (passkey) has to be exchanged between the two devices. One device will generate the password, the other
device accepts the password to complete the process. Once the devices are paired, future connections between the
devices will occur automatically when the devices are on and within range of each other.
The BluetoothA® hardware is internal to the radio. The radio supports streaming of data (music, voice, information)
from cellular phones and other mobile devices that support those features. The radio may also be capable of
interfacing with cellular phones for hands-free features.
• The device must be paired to the radio to use the available BluetoothA® feature(s). The pairing process must
only be performed once for each device, unless that device's information is deleted.
• Up to five devices can be paired to the system, but only one can be connected at any given time.
• Streaming Audio allows playing music from the mobile device wirelessly. Music stored on the mobile device
can be viewed and controlled from the display.
• To stream audio from a mobile device, the device must be unlocked, and any additional applications should be
closed.
Refer to the vehicle owners manual, supplements, and the device manufacturers information for pairing instructions.
Applications (If equipped)
When the system is equipped with BluetoothA®, the system may be capable of using applications, commonly
referred to as apps.
The term application refers to any piece of software that works on a system (hardware) that is being operated by it's
own software. Applications are typically small software programs which uses the hardware to perform a specific
task, as opposed to operating the entire system.
• For an application to be used, it must be installed on both the vehicle infotainment system and a compatible
mobile device.
• The device must be connected to the system. this may be done wirelessly via BluetoothA®, or via the vehicle
USB port. Refer to the device manufacturers information for the proper connection method.
• When the device is connected, the application on the radio is used to remotely access and control the
application on the mobile device.
• The application must work correctly on the device to work with the vehicle infotainment system.
• The user may be required to log-in to the application on the mobile device before using the application from
the vehicle controls.
• Using applications will use the device's data plan.
• The device must be unlocked, and any additional applications should be closed.
Refer to the owner's manual and supplements for information on mobile devices, control, and operation.
Navigation System Components and Features (if equipped)
The navigation system, if equipped, provides the following:
• Connection to the global positioning system (GPS) antenna, which provides the vehicle position information.
• Route guidance with verbal prompts to the operator.
• Map data for navigation and map route guidance, stored on the internal hard drive.
• Traffic and weather information for display on the navigation system map (with active subscription, where
available).
The global positioning system (GPS) antenna is part of the multi-band antenna located on the roof of the vehicle. The
GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise
amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The GPS antenna amplifier is powered
through the coaxial cable.
The antenna is connected to the navigation radio through a signal splitter. The signal splitter is a component for
dividing the navigation signal into two paths without any transmission loss. This allows the use of a single GPS
antenna to provide a signal to both the navigation radio and the telematics communication interface module.
The map will display the route to the selected destination. Voice prompts alert the operator of upcoming events
(turns) and arrivals at the destination. The navigation system will automatically recalculate if the route is not
followed. The navigation radio uses data received from the global positioning system (GPS) satellites, the vehicle
speed signal. and serial data information to accurately display the current position of the vehicle.
The map database provides point of interest information. Points of interests are locations that are frequently visited.
Points of interest can be can be displayed on the map or set as a destination. The following are some of the available
Points of interests:
• Gas Station
• Restaurant
• College
• Police Station
XM NavTraffic™ is a subscription based service that enhances the navigation system with live traffic information.
The service provides information on traffic conditions such as traffic speed, accidents, disabled vehicles,
construction and road closings.
The integrated XM satellite radio receives the information. When Traffic Information is turned ON in the
configuration menu, the available information will be displayed on the map screen.
The traffic information can vary based upon coverage in the area, and coverage is not available in all areas. No
information will be displayed if coverage is not available, if there is no traffic information for the area, or if there is
no subscription to receive the information.
A subscription fee is required in order to receive the XM NavTraffic™ service. No traffic data will be displayed
without a current subscription.
XM NavWeather™ is a subscription based service that transmits weather information to the integrated XM satellite
radio. Real time information such as current and future weather and road conditions, atmospheric conditions, and
National Weather Service warnings is provided, as well as 3 day forecasts for some cities. Received information is
available to be displayed on the Weather Info screen.
A subscription fee is required in order to receive the XM NavWeather™ service. No weather data will be displayed
without a current subscription.
OnStarA® (If equipped)
When OnStar is activated, a serial data message is sent to the radio that activates a software program. When the
software begins its process, the fade goes to the front, Bass and Treble are set to the mid range, the outputs are mono,
and the audio source is OnStar. OnStar takes priority over any other audio source. All of these actions are preset
values stored in the radio.
For additional OnStar information, refer to OnStar Description and Operation.
Steering Wheel Controls (If equipped)
Some audio functions are available using the steering wheel controls. The steering wheel controls duplicate the
function of the primary controls available on the radio.
For additional information on steering wheel controls, refer to Steering Wheel Controls Description and
Operation .
Auto Volume Control
With auto volume control, the audio system will adjust automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you
drive, by increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases. To use auto volume control, set the volume at the desired
level, and then select either Low, Medium, or High. To turn auto volume control off, select the Off screen button.
SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
SPECIAL TOOLS
|
Illustration |
Tool Number/Description |
 |
EL-50334-20 |
|
Illustration |
Tool |
|
EL-50334-50 |
|
Illustration |
Tool |
|
EL-48028 |
|
Illustration |
Tool |
|
У 0^^ |
EL-49903-1 Test Antenna, Navn- |
 |
EL-49903-2 |
 |
EL-49903-3A |
 |
EL-50334-12 |
 |
EL-50334-13 |
 |
EL-50334-14 |
|
Illustration |
Tool |
|
EL-50334-15 Video Bypass Cable |
SPECIAL TOOLS (MIT TOOL INSTRUCTIONS)
Bluetooth Pairing for Vehicles with Radio RPO: UF7
Either reset the pin code on the radio to 0000, or go under Device Info on the radio and see what the pin code is (to
enter it later on the MIT).
1. Turn the BT discoverable ON in the radio Bluetooth settings.
2. Press Pair Device on radio (DO NOT PRESS SEARCH BLUETOOTH DEVICES ON THE RADIO).
3. Press the Pair button on the MIT.
4. When the three LED lights begin flashing on the MIT, enter the pin code (either 0000 if you reset it to that or
what the radio pin code was).
5. MIT will then automatically connect with the radio and should show "MIT Connected" message.
Make test call and the audio streaming test.
Holden Radio Bluetooth Pairing Instructions
1. Using the radio controls, place the radio into "Discoverable Mode".
2. Place the MIT into Bluetooth mode by pressing TEST SELECTOR until the Bluetooth LED is illuminated.
3. With the MIT in Bluetooth mode Press and Release the #1 button (the Bluetooth LED will begin to slowly
blink).
4. Now Press and release the PAIR/CALL button on the MIT (the Bluetooth LED will begin to blink a little
faster).
5. On the radio Enter the PASSKEY when prompted: (press "0000" then Press "OK").
6. The MIT and radio will PAIR and CONNECT (the Bluetooth LED will be Fast Flashing).
7. Use as regular MIT at this point.
For all other Radios
1. Verify connection of the MIT to the USB port.
2. Press and release the TEST SELECTOR button until the Bluetooth LED illuminates.
3. Disable all other Bluetooth devices present in the vehicle (ie. cell phones, laptops, etc.).
1. Use the vehicle controls to place the radio into Bluetooth Pairing mode. The vehicle will prompt you with a
security code.
2. Press and release the PAIR/CALL button. The Bluetooth LED will blink slowly while preparing to have a
security code entered.
3. Wait for the all three LEDs to blink confirming it is ready to have the security code entered.
4. Enter the code with the MIT keypad and hit ENTER.
5. The Bluetooth LED will blink slowly while pairing/bonding and move to a quick flash once paired/bonded.
The vehicle should confirm pairing/bonding is complete.
1. Confirm pairing/bonding is complete - the Bluetooth LED will be in a quick flash mode.
2. On some radios the MIT automatically begins streaming audio via A2DP. The audio playback will confirm
that the Bluetooth connection using streaming and the audio is working correctly.
3. On other radios you will need to select Bluetooth Audio from the Source menu to verify Audio Streaming.
4. Audio playback confirms that the Bluetooth connection using Streaming Audio is working correctly.
5. Placing a test call will temporarily stop the streaming audio function, but upon disconnection of that test call,
the streaming audio from the MIT will resume.
1. Confirm pairing/bonding is complete - the Bluetooth LED will be in a quick flash mode. If the vehicle is
equipped with streaming audio, and the radio is set to play a Bluetooth audio file, the streaming audio
playback will be audible.
2. Press and release PAIR/CALL button to place a test call. Streaming audio will be temporarily turned off.
3. Use the vehicle controls to answer the call.
NOTE: If the call is not answered within several rings, the MIT's audio files will not
transmit, even though an active call is occurring.
4. Audio playback confirms that the Bluetooth connectivity is working correctly.
NOTE: The MIT will remain paired/bonded when the call is ended by the vehicle. To re-
test the call function, place the MIT in Bluetooth mode and press and release
the Pair button to reconnect. When testing is completed, delete MIT from the
audio system before returning the vehicle to the customer.
5. Use the vehicle controls to end the call. If applicable, streaming audio will resume.
1. Verify connection of the MIT as stated above.
2. Press and release the TEST SELECTOR button until the MIT AUX LED illuminates.
3. Use the vehicle controls to put the audio system into Audio (Line-In) mode.
4. Audio playback confirms that the audio input is working correctly.
1. Verify connection of the MIT as stated above.
2. Press and release the TEST SELECTOR button until the MIT USB LED illuminates.
3. Use the vehicle controls to put the audio system into USB mode.
NOTE: Volume levels may vary dependent upon vehicle audio system.
4. Audio playback confirms that the USB is working correctly.
Troubleshooting Guide
If the MIT unit is still not working properly after following the below troubleshooting, the unit is malfunctioning and
should be repaired or replaced.
• Verify the MIT is powered on correctly as indicated by the green Power LED.
• If Power LED is not illuminated, verify USB power source is working properly.
• If USB power adapter is being used to power the MIT, check and, if necessary, replace the fuse in adapter.
• Verify Aux/Line-In test cable is inserted properly into the vehicle audio input jack. Verify the MIT is in
Aux/Line-In mode as indicated by the red AUX LED.
• Verify the vehicle audio system is in Auxiliary or Line-in mode. Verify the vehicle audio system volume is
turned up and not in mute mode.
• Verify MIT is in USB mode as indicated by the red USB LED. Verify the vehicle audio system is in USB
mode.
• Verify the vehicle audio system volume is turned up and not in mute mode.
• Delete previous devices stored in the device list of the radio and the pair the MIT
• Remove USB cable, and then reconnect to reset the MIT. Carefully follow the bonding instructions for the
correct Passkey procedure.
• Verify the MIT is paired with the vehicle. This is indicated by the quick flashing Bluetooth LED.
• Audio system should have indicated the MIT is bonded.
Article GUID: A00884689
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Cruise Control - Volt
SPECIFICATIONS
FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS
|
Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications_______________ | |||||||
| |||||||
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
CRUISE CONTROL WIRING SCHEMATICS
Fig. 1: Cruise Control
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
DTC P0571: CRUISE CONTROL BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Cruise Control Brake Switch Circuit
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) monitors the brake pedal position sensor. When the brake pedal is applied,
the ECM detects a predetermined voltage signal. The ECM sends a serial data message to the body control
module (BCM) indicating the status of the stop lamps.
This diagnostic test functions on the assumption that a sudden decrease in vehicle speed is caused by a brake
pedal application. When the ECM detects that there is a 4.2 km/h (2.6 mph) or greater decrease in vehicle speed
within 0.25 s without a transition of the stop lamp switch, the ECM sets DTC P0571.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The engine speed is greater than 700 RPM.
• The traction control system or the antilock brake system are not active and have not malfunctioned.
• The vehicle speed is greater than 48 km/h (30 mph).
• The diagnostic will disable when the wheel speed is less than 16 km/h (10 mph).
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The BCM detects either a low voltage signal on the stop lamp switch signal circuit when the serial data message
from the ECM indicates the brakes are applied, or a high voltage signal on the stop lamp switch signal circuit
when the serial data message from the ECM indicates the brakes are not applied.
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
• The cruise control system is disabled.
• The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear after 40 malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify that the stop lamps operate properly and that no B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor related DTCs are
set.
• If brake pedal position sensor related DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
• If no brake pedal position sensor related DTCs are set
2. Verify that no DTCs are set, except DTC P0571.
• If any other DTC is set, except DTC P0571
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If only DTC P0571 is set
3. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
4. Verify DTC P0571 does not set when operating the vehicle within the conditions for running the DTC.
Replace the K9 Body Control Module.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for BCM or ECM replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P0572 OR P0573: BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1 LOW/HIGH VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Brake Switch Circuit 1 Low Voltage
DTC P0573
Brake Switch Circuit 1 High Voltage
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The brake pedal position sensor signal circuit is a B+ input from the body control module (BCM) to the engine
control module (ECM). The BCM and ECM monitor the brake pedal position sensor signal circuit to detect
when the brake pedal has been applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the BCM supplies B+ on the stop lamp
signal circuit and also sends a serial data message to the ECM indicating that the brake pedal has been applied.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The engine is running.
• Battery voltage is greater than 11.5 V.
• Brakes applied.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
This DTC will set when the ECM detects a short to ground or an open on the discrete brake signal circuit when
the serial data message from the BCM indicates the brakes are applied. This diagnostic will run when the serial
data message and the voltage signal on the brake switch signal circuit do not match for 8 out 10 times, and the
condition is present for greater than 2 s.
This DTC will set when the ECM detects a short to voltage on the discrete brake signal circuit when the serial
data message from the BCM indicates the brakes are not applied. This diagnostic will run when the serial data
message and the voltage signal on the brake switch signal circuit do not match for 8 out 10 times, and the
condition is present for greater than 2 s.
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
• The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
• The cruise control system is disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear after 40 malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that the stop lamps operate properly and that no B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor related DTCs are
set.
• If brake pedal position sensor related DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
• If no brake pedal position sensor related DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: All components may need to be disconnected on the cruise control brake signal
circuit to isolate a short to voltage, short to ground or an open/high resistance
condition. Use the schematic to identify the proper brake signal terminal (circuit
6311) at the K20 Engine Control Module.
1. Ignition/Vehicle Off, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, Ignition
On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Connect a test lamp between the signal circuit terminal and ground.
3. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when pressing and releasing the brake pedal.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Ignition/Vehicle Off, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If not infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Ignition/Vehicle Off, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, Ignition
On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the source of voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
4. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P0575: CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL MESSAGE COUNTER INCORRECT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Cruise Control Switch Signal Message Counter Incorrect
Circuit/System Description
When a cruise control function switch is activated, the body control module (BCM) detects a predetermined
voltage. The BCM sends a serial data message to the engine control module (ECM) indicating the function that
has been requested.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The ignition is ON.
• The vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and the cruise control is engaged.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The ECM receives an invalid cruise control switch status serial data message from the BCM.
• This diagnostic runs continuously.
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P0575 is a type C DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P0575 is a type C DTC.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify that no DTCs are set, except DTC P0575.
• If any other DTC is set, except DTC P0575
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If only DTC P0575 is set
2. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.
3. Verify DTC P0575 does not set when operating the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC.
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for BCM or ECM replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P0703: BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL MESSAGE COUNTER INCORRECT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Brake Switch Signal Message Counter Incorrect
Circuit/System Description
The body control module (BCM) monitors the brake pedal position sensor. When the brake pedal is applied, the
BCM detects a predetermined voltage signal. The BCM sends a serial data message to the engine control
module (ECM) indicating the status of the stop lamps.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The engine is ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The ECM receives an invalid brake pedal status serial data message from the BCM.
• This diagnostic runs continuously.
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
• The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
• The cruise control system is disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear after 40 malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify that no DTCs are set, except DTC P0703.
• If any other DTC is set, except DTC P0703
2. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.
3. Verify DTC P0703 does not set when operating the vehicle within the conditions for running the DTC.
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for BCM or ECM replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P158A: CRUISE CONTROL CALIBRATION INCORRECT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Cruise Control Calibration Incorrect
Circuit/System Description
The type of cruise control system the vehicle has is programmed into the body control module and the engine
control module. If this information is not the same in both modules DTC P158A will set.
Conditions for Running the DTC
This diagnostic runs continuously.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The type of cruise control system programmed into the body control module does not match what is
programmed into the engine control module.
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P158A is a Type C DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P158A is a Type C DTC.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify that no DTCs are set, except DTC P158A.
• If any other DTC is set, except DTC P158A
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If only DTC P158A is set
2. Reprogram the K9 Body Control Module and the K20 Engine Control Module one after the other. Do not
place the Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode between each programming event.
3. Verify DTC P158A does not set when operating the vehicle within the conditions for running the DTC.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming, and setup.
SYMPTOMS - CRUISE CONTROL
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables.
1. Before using the symptom diagnostic table, perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in order to
verify the following conditions:
• There are no DTCs set.
• The module can communicate via the serial data.
2. Review the system operation in order to understand the system functions. Refer to Cruise Control
Description and Operation.
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which can affect the operation of the Cruise Control System. Refer to
Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect the accessible system components or the visible system components for obvious damage or for
obvious conditions which can cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
Cruise Control Malfunction - DTC B3794, P0564, P0565, P0567, P0568, P056C, P0580, P0581,
P155A-P155C, or P162C
Cruise Control Indicator Malfunction
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The instrument cluster illuminates the cruise control engaged indicator based on serial data messages received
from the engine control module (ECM). The indicator is commanded ON when the cruise control system is
controlling vehicle speed, and turned OFF with the system disengaged.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Cruise Control Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Cruise Control Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the cruise control indicator turns ON and OFF when commanding the All Indicators ON and OFF
with a scan tool.
• If the indicator does not turn ON and OFF
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
• If the indicator turns ON and OFF
2. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for instrument cluster replacement, programming and setup.
CRUISE CONTROL MALFUNCTION - DTC B3794, P0564, P0565, P0567, P0568, P056C, P0580,
P0581, P155A-P155C, OR P162C
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC B3794
Cruise Control Function Request Circuit
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch Circuit
Cruise Control Switch Circuit
Cruise Control Resume Switch Circuit
Cruise Control Set Switch Circuit
Cruise Control Cancel Switch Circuit
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch Circuit Low Voltage
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch Circuit High Voltage
Cruise Control Switch State Undetermined
Cruise Control Set/Coast Switch 2 Circuit
Cruise Control Resume/Acceleration Switch 2 Circuit
Vehicle Speed Limiting/Warning Switch Circuit
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||
The cruise control switch is an input to the body control module (BCM). The BCM monitors the cruise control
on/off, set/coast, resume/accelerate and cancel switches via the cruise control switch signal circuit in order to
detect when the driver has requested to perform a cruise control function. The BCM detects a specific voltage
signal on the cruise control switch signal circuit when a switch is applied. The engine control module (ECM)
receives the requested cruise control switch function from the BCM via a serial data message.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The cruise control switch is ON.
• Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The BCM detects an invalid voltage signal on the cruise control switch signal circuit for 1 s.
Stuck switch for either Resume/Accel or Set/Coast button for 60 s.
• The BCM detects an invalid voltage signal on the cruise control switch signal circuit for greater than 2 s
and sends a serial data message to the ECM. The ECM sets these DTCs when the message is received.
• The ECM runs this diagnostic continuously.
• The ECM detects an invalid voltage signal on the cruise control switch signal circuit.
• The above condition is present for greater than 2 s.
• The ECM runs this diagnostic continuously.
The ECM is unable to determine the state of the cruise control switch.
The ECM is unable to determine the state of the vehicle speed limiting switch.
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
• The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
• The cruise control system is disabled.
DTCs P0564, P0565, P0567, P0568, P056C, P0580, P0581, P155A and P162C are type C DTCs
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear after 40 malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
DTCs P0564, P0565, P0567, P0568, P056C, P0580, P0581, P155A and P162C are type C DTCs.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that the stop lamps operate properly and that no B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor related DTCs are
set.
• If brake pedal position sensor related DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
• If no brake pedal position sensor related DTCs are set
3. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Cruise Control Switch Status parameter changes between
Off and On, Resume and Set when switching between each position on the cruise control switch.
• If the parameter does not change
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
• If the parameter changes
4. Verify that no conditions that may inhibit cruise control operation are present. Refer to the K20 Engine
Control Module scan tool data list Cruise Control Inhibit Reason parameter. Refer to the Cruise Control
Description and Operation for a list of inhibit reasons.
• If the cruise control system has a reason why it is inhibited
Repair the condition that is causing the inhibit reason.
• If the cruise control system does not have any reasons why it may be inhibited
5. Verify that no cruise control related DTCs are set.
• If any cruise control related DTCs are set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
• If no cruise control related DTCs are set
6. All OK.
|
Circuit/System Testing | ||
|
1. Ignition/Vehicle Off, disconnect the harness connector at the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch-Left,
Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Ignition/Vehicle Off, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for greater than 100 Q between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If 100 Q or less, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If greater than 100 Q
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, test or replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
3. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Cruise Control Switch Status parameter is Open/Short to
Ground or Undetermined State.
• If not Open/Short to Ground or Undetermined State
1. Ignition/Vehicle Off, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module,
Ignition/Vehicle On.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If Open/Short to Ground or Undetermined State
4. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit and the ignition circuit.
5. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Cruise Control Switch Status parameter is Short to Battery
or Undetermined State.
• If not Short to Battery or Undetermined State
1. Ignition/Vehicle Off, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If Short to Battery or Undetermined State
6. Test or replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch-Left.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT
Fig. 2: Cruise Control Switch
|
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY | ||||||||
| ||||||||
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
CRUISE CONTROL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Switch - |
Wheel
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
K20 |
K20 Engine Control Module |
|
S70L |
S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left |
|
P16 |
P16 Instrument Cluster |
|
K9 |
K9 Body Control Module |
Cruise control is a speed control system that maintains a desired vehicle speed under normal driving conditions
at speeds above 40 km/h (25 mph). Steep grades may cause variations in the selected vehicle speeds.
The following are the main components of the Cruise Control System:
• The accelerator pedal
• The brake pedal position (BPP) sensor
• The body control module (BCM)
• The cruise on/off switch
• The cruise control cancel switch
• The + RES switch (equivalent to resume/accelerate switch)
• The - SET switch (equivalent to set/coast switch)
• The engine control module (ECM)
• The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor (gasoline engines only)
• The vehicle speed sensor
The body control module (BCM) monitors the signal circuit of the cruise control switches, which are located on
the steering wheel. The BCM relays the cruise control switch status to the engine control module (ECM) via the
serial data circuit. The ECM uses the status of the cruise control switch to determine when to capture and
maintain the vehicle speed. The ECM monitors the vehicle speed signal circuit in order to determine the desired
vehicle speed.
Voltage is supplied to the cruise control switch via the steering wheel control switch reference voltage circuit
supplied by the BCM. The cruise control function switches are arranged in a resistive ladder design, with each
cruise control function switch having a different resistance value. The BCM detects a specific voltage value that
is associated with the cruise control function switch being activated. The BCM sends a serial data message to
the ECM indicating that the on/off switch is active. Similarly, when the normally open + RES switch or the
normally open - SET switch are pressed, the switch closes and the BCM detects the predetermined voltage
signal on the cruise control resume/accel and set/coast switch signal circuit. The BCM sends a serial data
message to the ECM indicating that the + RES switch or the - SET switch is active.
Cruise Control Engaged
The Cruise Control System will engage and adjust vehicle speeds, based on the activation of the following
cruise control switches, which are located on the steering wheel:
• On/Off
• + RES
• - SET
To engage the Cruise Control System, ensure that the vehicle speed is above 40.2 km/h (25 mph), turn the cruise
On/Off switch ON and momentarily press the - SET switch. The ECM will engage the Cruise Control System
and record the vehicle speed. The ECM sends a serial data message to the instrument panel cluster (IPC) in
order to illuminate the Cruise Engaged indicator in the IPC. Refer to the vehicle owner's manual for the location
and operation of the cruise control On/Off indicators and driver information center (DIC) messages.
Pressing the accelerator pedal while the Cruise Control System is engaged, allows the driver to override the
Cruise Control System in order to accelerate the vehicle beyond the current set vehicle speed. When the
accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will decelerate and resume the current set vehicle speed.
The driver can also override the current set vehicle speed via the - SET switch and the + RES switch. When the
Cruise Control System is engaged, pressing and holding the - SET switch will allow the vehicle to decelerate
from the current set vehicle speed without deactivating the Cruise Control System. When the - SET switch is
released, the ECM will record the vehicle speed and maintain the vehicle speed as the new set vehicle speed.
When the Cruise Control System is engaged, momentarily pressing the - SET switch will allow the vehicle to
decelerate at a vehicle specific calibratable increment, commonly 1 km/h or 1 mph, each time that the - SET is
momentarily pressed, with a minimum vehicle speed of 38 km/h (24 mph). Refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual
for more information.
Pressing and holding the + RES switch, when the Cruise Control System is engaged, will allow the vehicle to
accelerate to a greater vehicle speed than the current set vehicle speed. When the + RES switch is released, the
ECM will record the vehicle speed and maintain the vehicle speed as the new set vehicle speed. When the
Cruise Control System is engaged, momentarily pressing the + RES switch will allow the vehicle to accelerate
at a vehicle specific calibratable increment, commonly 1 km/h or 1 mph, each time that the + RES switch is
momentarily pressed. Momentarily activating the + RES switch will recall the previous vehicle speed, after the
cruise control system has been disengaged by pressing the brake pedal, or CANCEL switch. Refer to the vehicle
Owner's Manual for more information.
Cruise Control Disengaged
The engine control module (ECM) disengages the cruise control operation based on the signals from the
following switches:
• The brake pedal position (BPP) sensor
• The On/Off switch
• The cruise control cancel switch
The Cruise Control System will disengage when the brake pedal is applied. The body control module (BCM)
monitors the BPP sensor via the BPP sensor signal circuit as the voltage signal increases while the pedal is
further applied. The ECM monitors the BPP signal through a discrete input and a serial data message signal
from the BCM indicating the brake status. When either signal indicates the brake pedal is applied, the ECM will
disengage the cruise control system.
The Cruise Control System will also disengage when the cruise control on/off switch is switched OFF, or the
cruise control cancel switch is activated. The body control module (BCM) determines when the cruise control
cancel switch is activated. When the normally open cancel switch is closed, the BCM detects the predetermined
voltage signal on the cruise control function switch circuit. The vehicle speed stored in the memory of the
engine control module will be erased when the cruise control On/Off switch is turned OFF, or the ignition
switch is turned OFF. The BCM sends a serial data message to the ECM in order to disengage the cruise control
system. When the Cruise Control System has been disengaged, the ECM sends a serial message to the
instrument panel cluster (IPC) in order to turn OFF the Cruise Engaged indicator.
Every time the Cruise Control System is disengaged, the ECM will keep track of the reason for system
disengagement. The last 8 disengagement reasons will be recorded within the ECM memory. The scan tool will
display the last 8 Cruise Disengage History parameters, in which one out of approximately 50 possible reasons
will be displayed in each of these 8 parameters. For the disengagement reason to be displayed within the scan
tool parameter the Cruise Control System is active and disengagement is requested.
When engagement of the system is requested but an engagement inhibit is present, the most recent inhibit
reason is recorded in the ECM history. The scan tool will display the most recent inhibit reason, in which one
out of approximately 50 possible reasons will be displayed.
Cruise Control Inhibited
The engine control module (ECM) inhibits the cruise control operation when any of the following conditions
exist:
• The ECM has not detected a brake pedal activation from the body control module (BCM) this ignition
cycle.
• A Cruise Control System DTC has been set.
• The vehicle speed is less than 38.6 km/h (24 mph).
• The vehicle speed is too high.
• The vehicle is in PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or 1st gear.
• The engine RPM is low.
• The engine RPM is high.
• The system voltage is not between 9 volts and 16 volts.
• The Antilock Brake System (ABS)/Traction Control System (TCS) is active for more than a calibratable
time (typically 0.3 to 0.7 seconds).
Cruise Control Inhibit Reasons
This is a general list of inhibit reasons. Not every inhibit reason is applicable to all vehicles. Refer to the scan
tool inhibit reason list for the last 8 reasons that have been recorded during the current ignition cycle.
|
Scan Tool Name |
Description |
Long Description |
|
Acceleration Rate too High |
High acceleration |
The vehicle acceleration rate is too |
|
Acceleration Time |
Rate limiting fault |
Cruise torque request rate limiting |
|
Adaptive Cruise Control |
Adaptive cruise control option |
The cruise control type (adaptive |
|
Antilock Braking System |
Antilock Braking System Active |
The antilock braking system was |
|
Automatic Braking Engine |
Automatic braking engine torque |
An engine control module to electronic |
|
Automatic Braking Malfunction |
Brake system malfunction |
The electronic brake control module |
|
Axle Torque Serial |
Axle Torque Serial |
The adaptive cruise control is being |
|
Battery Voltage Too High |
Voltage above high voltage |
The ignition voltage is too high at the |
|
Battery Voltage Too Low |
Voltage below low voltage |
The ignition voltage is low at the |
|
Brake Pedal Applied |
Brake pedal apply |
The brake pedal was applied. |
|
Scan Tool Name |
Description |
Long Description |
|
Brake Pedal Not Initialized |
Brake before cruise |
The brake pedal has not been seen as |
|
Brake Pedal Position |
Brake pedal position signal |
A brake pedal apply circuit fault has |
|
Brake Pedal Position Signal |
DTC P0703 is active or |
A serial data fault is active or |
|
Brake Pedal Pressure Detected |
Brake pedal driver applied |
A brake pedal apply has been detected |
|
Brake Pedal Released Position |
Brake apply sensor home |
The brake pedal position sensor |
|
Brake System Malfunction |
Adaptive cruise control |
Adaptive cruise control automatic |
|
Calculated Torque |
Calculated engine torque |
The engine torque calculation is |
|
Clutch Pedal Applied |
Clutch switch active |
The clutch pedal was applied. |
|
Coast Below Minimum Speed |
Coast below low speed inhibit |
The Set/Coast switch was depressed |
|
Coast Mode |
Coast disengage |
Cruise control is in coast mode with |
|
Control Function Active |
DLC override |
A scan tool is plugged into the Data |
|
Control Module Memory |
Memory failure |
A control module memory failure has |
|
Control Module Processor |
Processor integrity fault (random |
An engine control module software |
|
Crawl Mode Active |
Crawl Mode Active |
Crawl mode is active and inhibiting |
|
Cruise Control Cancel Switch |
Cancel switch active |
The cruise control cancel switch was |
|
Scan Tool Name |
Description |
Long Description |
|
Cruise Control Software |
Sequence of completion checks |
A cruise control software execution |
|
Cruise Control Switch Inactive |
On/Off switch in Off state |
The cruise control On/Off switch is |
|
Cruise Control Switch Invalid |
Analog cruise switch input out of |
The cruise control switch voltage |
|
Cruise Control Switch Serial |
Serial data fault (cruise switch |
The cruise control switch serial data |
|
Deceleration Rate Too High |
High deceleration |
The vehicle deceleration rate is too |
|
Diagnostic Trouble Code |
Malfunction in PCM/ECM (DTC |
A DTC is active or in history that |
|
Distance Sensing Cruise |
Distance Sensing Cruise Control |
Adaptive cruise control is being |
|
Distance Sensing Cruise |
Distance Sensing Cruise Control |
Adaptive cruise control is being |
|
Distance Sensing Cruise |
Serial data fault for adaptive |
A distance sensing cruise control |
|
Distance Sensing Cruise |
Distance sensing cruise control |
The distance sensing cruise control |
|
Distance Sensing Cruise |
Distance Sensing Cruise Control |
Adaptive cruise control is being |
|
Distance Sensing Cruise |
Distance Sensing Cruise Control |
Adaptive cruise control is being |
|
Distance Sensing Cruise |
Distance Sensing Cruise Control |
Adaptive cruise control is being |
|
Driven Wheel Speed Higher |
Driven wheel speed greater |
The driven wheel speed is greater than |
|
Engine Control Module |
PCM/ECM inhibit (RAM |
Engine control module internal |
|
Scan Tool Name |
Description |
Long Description |
|
Engine Control Module (ECM) |
ECM running reset |
An engine control module running |
|
Engine Overspeed Protection |
Injectors disabled (engine |
Engine RPM limiter active with fuel |
|
Engine Overtemperature |
Engine metal overtemp active |
The engine is over temperature. The |
|
Engine Run Time |
Engine run time not elapsed |
The engine has not been running long |
|
Engine Speed |
Engine speed too low or too high |
The engine RPM is too low (near stall) |
|
Excessive Accelerator Position |
Pedal greater than cruise |
The driver has overridden cruise |
|
1st Gear |
First Gear |
Transmission is engaged in 1st gear. |
|
Gear Change without Applied |
Manual transmission out of gear |
Manual transmission shifted to Neutral |
|
Hill Descent Control Active |
Hill Descent Control System |
The hill descent control system has |
|
Hill Descent Control Serial |
Hill Descent Control Serial |
An electronic brake control module |
|
Hybrid/EV System |
Hybrid Cruise Disengage |
Cruise control is inhibited on hybrid |
|
Illegal Mode |
Illegal cruise mode |
The cruise control mode is incorrect |
|
Lane Center Control Serial |
Lane Center Control Serial |
Adaptive cruise control is being |
|
Non Driven Wheel Speed |
Non-driven wheel speed greater |
The non driven wheel speed is greater |
|
None |
None |
This disengagement reason may be |
|
Park Brake Applied |
Park brake switch signal active |
The parking brake is applied. |
|
Power Take-Off Active |
Power Take Off active |
The Power Take Off (PTO) system is |
|
Rear Axle in Low Range |
Rear axle in low |
The rear axle is in low range. |
|
Scan Tool Name |
Description |
Long Description |
|
Set/Coast and Resume/Accelerate Switches Active Simultaneously |
SET and RESUME switches |
The Set/Coast and Resume/Accelerate |
|
Set/Coast Switch Active With |
Over schedule tap-down |
The Set/Coast switch is selected, |
|
Speed Limiting/Warning System On |
Speed limiter/warning On/Off |
Driver has turned on the Speed |
|
Throttle Actuator Control |
Electronic throttle control |
The electronic throttle control system |
|
Traction Control Active |
Traction control active |
The traction control system was active. |
|
Traction Control System |
Traction Control System |
A fault is present in the traction control |
|
Traction Control System Off |
Traction Control System Off |
The traction control system has been |
|
Transfer Case in 4WD Low |
Transfer case in 4WD Low |
The transfer case is in low range. |
|
Transmission Gear Ratio |
Transmission gear fault |
A transmission DTC is active or in |
|
Transmission Not in Forward |
Transmission in neutral, reverse |
The transmission gear selector is not in |
|
Vehicle Overspeed Protection |
MPH limited fuel (vehicle |
The vehicle overspeed protection is |
|
Vehicle Speed Higher Than Set |
Over schedule |
Vehicle speed has exceeded driver |
|
Vehicle Speed Lower Than Set |
Under schedule |
The vehicle speed is below cruise |
|
Vehicle Speed Too High |
Vehicle speed exceeds high |
Vehicle speed has exceeded maximum |
|
Vehicle Speed Too Low |
Vehicle speed drops below low |
Vehicle speed dropped below the |
|
Scan Tool Name |
Description |
Long Description |
|
torque may contribute to this | ||
|
Vehicle Stability System Active |
Vehicle stability control active |
The vehicle stability control system |
|
Vehicle Stability System |
Vehicle Stability System |
A fault has been detected in the vehicle |
|
Vehicle Stability System Off |
Vehicle Stability System Off |
The vehicle stability control system |
Article GUID: A00884711
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The body control system consists of the body control module (BCM), communications, and various input and
outputs. Some inputs, outputs and messages require other modules to interact with the BCM. The BCM also has
discrete input and output terminals to control the vehicle's body functions. The BCM is wired to the high speed
GMLAN serial data bus, low speed GMLAN serial data bus and Multiple LIN buses and acts as a gateway
between them.
Power Mode Master
This vehicle body control module (BCM) functions as the power mode master (PMM). The ignition switch is a
low current switch with multiple discrete ignition switch signals to the PMM for determining the power mode
that will be sent over the serial data circuits to the other modules that need this information; the PMM will
activate relays and other direct outputs of the PMM as needed. Refer to Power Mode Description and
Operation for a complete description of power mode functions.
Gateway
The body control module (BCM) in this vehicle functions as a gateway or translator. The purpose of the
gateway is to translate serial data messages between the GMLAN high speed bus and the GMLAN low speed
bus for communication between the various modules. The gateway will interact with each network according to
that network's transmission protocol.
All communication between the BCM and a scan tool is on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits. A lost
communication DTC typically is set in modules other than the module with a communication failure.
Body Control
The various body control module (BCM) input and output circuits are illustrated in the corresponding functional
areas on the BCM electrical schematics. Refer to the Body Control System Schematics for more detailed
information.
DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
NOTE: This is an overview of different serial data buses used by GM control modules
to communicate with each others. Use schematics to find out which serial data
buses are configured for a specific vehicle.
Circuit Description
There are many components in a vehicle that rely on information from other sources, transmit information to
other sources, or both. Serial data communication networks provide a reliable, cost effective, way for various
components of the vehicle to "talk" to one another and share information.
GM uses a number of different communication buses to insure the timely and efficient exchange of information
between control modules. When compared to each other, some of these buses are different in nature as far as
speed, signal characteristics, and behavior. An example of this is the High Speed GMLAN and Low Speed
GMLAN buses.
On the other hand, when other buses are compared to each other they have similar characteristics and simply
operate in parallel. In this case they are used to group together components which have high interaction.
Examples are the High Speed GMLAN, Powertrain Expansion, and Chassis Expansion buses. This allows them
to communicate with each other on a bus with reduced message congestion insuring faster and the more timely
exchange of information than if all vehicle control modules were on a single bus.
The majority of information that exists within a given network generally stays local; however some information
will have to be shared on other networks. Control modules designated as Gateway's perform the function of
transferring information between the various buses. A Gateway module is connected to at least 2 buses and will
interact with each network according to its message strategy and transmission models.
GMLAN provides the capability for a receiving control module to monitor message transmissions from other
control modules in order to determine if messages of interest are not being received. The primary purpose is to
allow reasonable default values to be substituted for the information no longer being received. Additionally, a
control module may set a Diagnostic Trouble Code to indicate that the control module it is expecting
information from is no longer communicating.
High Speed GMLAN Circuit Description
A High Speed GMLAN Bus is used where data needs to be exchanged at a high enough rate to minimize the
delay between the occurrence of a change in sensor value and the reception of this information by a control
device using the information to adjust vehicle system performance.
The High Speed GMLAN serial data network consists of two twisted wires. One signal circuit is identified as
GMLAN-High and the other signal circuit is identified as GMLAN-Low. At each end of the data bus there is a
120 Q termination resistor between the GMLAN-High and GMLAN-Low circuits.
Data symbols (1's and 0's) are transmitted sequentially at a rate of 500 Kbit/s. The data to be transmitted over
the bus is represented by the voltage difference between the GMLAN-High signal voltage and the GMLAN-
Low signal voltage.
When the two wire bus is at rest the GMLAN-High and GMLAN-Low signal circuits are not being driven and
this represents a logic "1". In this state both signal circuits are at the same voltage of 2.5 V. The differential
voltage is approximately 0 V.
When a logic "0" is to be transmitted, the GMLAN-High signal circuit is driven higher to about 3.5 V and the
GMLAN-Low circuit is driven lower to about 1.5 V. The differential voltage becomes approximately 2.0 (+/-
0.5) V.
Chassis High Speed GMLAN Circuit Description
The GMLAN Chassis Expansion Bus is basically a copy of the High Speed GMLAN Bus except that its use is
reserved for chassis components. This implementation splits message congestion between two parallel buses
helping to insure timely message transmission and reception. Sometimes communication is required between
the Chassis Expansion Bus and the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus. This is accomplished by using the K17
Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) as the Gateway module. Since the High Speed GMLAN Chassis
Expansion Bus and primary High Speed GMLAN Bus operate in the same manner, the diagnostics for each are
similar.
Powertrain High Speed GMLAN Circuit Description
The GMLAN Powertrain Expansion Bus is basically a copy of the High Speed GMLAN Bus except that its use
is reserved for Hybrid powertrain components or Diesel powertrain components in some cases. The bus is
optional based upon feature content. Sometimes communication is required between the Powertrain Expansion
Bus and the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus. This is accomplished by using the K20 Engine Control Module
(ECM) as the Gateway module. Since the High Speed GMLAN Powertrain Expansion Bus and the primary
High Speed GMLAN Bus operate in the same manner, the diagnostics for each are similar.
All diagnostic information is available only through the primary high speed GMLAN bus.
High Voltage Energy Management High Speed GMLAN Circuit Description
The GMLAN High Voltage Energy Management Bus is basically a copy of the High Speed GMLAN Bus
except that its use is reserved for Hybrid charging components of an electric vehicle. Sometimes
communication is required between the Low Speed GMLAN Bus and the High Voltage Energy Management
Bus. This is accomplished by using the K114B Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 as the Gateway module.
Since the High Speed GMLAN High Voltage Energy Management Bus and primary High Speed GMLAN Bus
operate in the same manner, the diagnostics for each are similar.
All diagnostic information is available only through the primary high speed GMLAN bus.
Object High Speed GMLAN Circuit Description
The GMLAN Object Bus is basically a copy of the High Speed GMLAN Bus except that its use is reserved for
the enhanced safety system. This implementation is used to isolate the heavy communication among the
enhanced safety system devices from the other vehicle buses, reducing congestion. The K124 Active Safety
Control Module is connected to the Object Bus as well as the Primary High Speed GMLAN Bus, the Chassis
Expansion Bus, and the Low Speed GMLAN Bus. The K124 Active Safety Control Module acts as a Gateway
module for all required communication between the Object Bus devices and devices on these other vehicle
buses. The GMLAN Object Bus operates in the same manner as the Chassis Expansion and Primary High Speed
buses and so the diagnostics are similar. The Object Bus is physically partitioned into a Front Object Bus and a
Rear Object Bus with each partition having its own communication enable circuit to activate the partition, but
functional operation of both is identical. The Front Object Bus standard devices are the K124 Active Safety
Control Module, the K109 Frontview Camera Module, and the B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range. The
Front Object Bus optional devices are the B233LF Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Left Front and the
B233RF Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Right Front. The Rear Object Bus is optional and when present
will have the K124 Active Safety Control Module and B233R Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Rear on the
bus, and optionally the Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Right Rear. All Object Bus components are
powered by the K124 Active Safety Control Module via the communication enable circuits, except the K109
Frontview Camera Module which is powered directly by battery.
Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST) Circuit Description
The MOST Infotainment network is a dedicated high speed multimedia streaming data bus independent from
GMLAN. The MOST bus will be configured in a physical hardwired loop with each device within the bus sends
and receives data on an assigned MOST addresses in a set order. Each device on the MOST bus will be required
to have twisted pair copper wires (2 transmit TX, 2 receive RX, and 1 electronic control line which is a 12 V
wakeup signal line). The A11 Radio is the MOST Master and will monitor the bus for vehicle configuration,
Infotainment data messages and errors on the bus. The MOST initialization consists of a short 100 ms low
voltage pulse on the electronic control line (or MOST control line) connected to all devices contained on the
MOST ring. When the MOST devices receive this wakeup message, they will respond with a generic device
response. Once these initial responses on the MOST bus are reported successfully without error to the A11
Radio, the next responses will report the MOST device addresses, their functionality requirements and
capabilities within. The A11 Radio will learn this information and also record the address node sequence on the
MOST bus at this point. This node address list will now be stored within the A11 Radio as the MOST bus
configuration (called "Last Working MOST ID of Node 1 - 9" on scan tool data display).
When MOST receive, transmit, or control line faults are detected, transmit/receive messages will not be
received as expected from the wakeup request. The A11 Radio and the K74 Human Machine Interface Control
Module will then perform diagnostics to isolate these MOST faults. If the MOST control line is shorted low to 0
V for excess amount of time, the A11 Radio will set a U2098 DTC and K74 Human Machine Interface Control
Module will set a U0029 02 DTC. At this point the MOST bus will be unable to communicate until the shorted
MOST control line is repaired.
Once the shorted MOST control line diagnostics pass, the A11 Radio will attempt to resend the initial short
pulse attempts up to 3 times on the MOST control line. If the expected responses are not received, the A11
Radio continues into a failure mode setting a U0028 DTC and will continue on to send 300 ms long pulses
while DTC U0028 is current, which will enable the furthest upstream transmitting device to become the
surrogate MOST Master in this MOST fault/diagnostic mode. When the A11 Radio receives this new MOST
Master identity, the surrogate MOST master device can be identified based on scan tool data parameter
"Surrogate MOST Master Node Upstream Position". The scan tool and schematics will be used to determine the
MOST bus configuration and direction by utilizing the "Last Working MOST ID of Node 1 - 9" parameters
from the A11 Radio data display. When a fault is present, it will indicate the newly enabled "Surrogate MOST
Master Node Upstream Position" to the A11 Radio. This will assist in determining the location of the MOST
device/bus/control fault. The MOST device and circuits upstream from the surrogate MOST master device,
transmit, receive, or control lines will be the suspect areas for diagnostics at this point. These faults can be
associated with any of the MOST transmit, receive, or control line twisted copper wires or possibly an internal
device fault.
DTC U0028 will take approximately 10 s for diagnostics to set in the A11 Radio with an active fault condition.
With the latest software, the A11 Radio will report the Surrogate MOST Master Node Upstream Position value
when DTC U0028 is stored in history. When there is no MOST bus fault, this value is None. The U0028 DTC
state and the Number of MOST Communication Breaks parameter must be used with the Surrogate MOST
Master Node Upstream Position parameter for a successful diagnosis. This is used to help capture surrogate
information on intermittent fault conditions. The Number of MOST Communication Breaks counter will
increment each time the MOST bus state transitions from Normal Operation (Lock status) to Off State (Unlock
status) and will accumulate from 0-65535. After the Number of MOST Communication Breaks counter
increments 10 times, DTC U0028 will be set. It is important to clear DTC U0028 and reset the Surrogate MOST
Master Node Upstream Position value to None after a successful repair. The Surrogate MOST Master Node
Upstream Position value can be reset to None by disconnecting the A11 Radio power, disconnecting battery
cables, or 50 ignition power down cycles. This will also reset the Number of MOST Communication Breaks
counter to 0.
The K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module will set a U0029 00 DTC when it diagnoses a MOST bus
not communicating properly after one attempt. When the DTC U0029 00 is set by the K74 Human Machine
Interface Control Module without the corresponding DTC U0028 from the A11 Radio, it will be an indication
of an intermittent wiring/device condition. The A11 Radio may also set a U0029 7F DTC if there is an
intermittent wiring/device condition.
Low Speed GMLAN Circuit Description
Low Speed GMLAN Bus is used in applications where a high data rate is not required which allows for the use
of less complex components. It is typically used for operator controlled functions where the response time
requirements are slower than those required for dynamic vehicle control.
The Low Speed GMLAN Serial Data Network consists of a single wire, ground referenced bus with high side
voltage drive. During on road vehicle operation data symbols (1's and 0's) are transmitted sequentially at the
normal rate of 33.3 Kbit/s. For component programming only, a special high speed data mode of 83.3 Kbit/s
may be used.
Unlike the high speed dual wire networks, the single wire low speed network does not use terminating resistors
at either end of the network.
The data symbols to be transmitted over the bus are represented by different voltage signals on the bus. When
the Low Speed GMLAN Bus is at rest and is not being driven, there is a low signal voltage of approximately
0.2 V. This represents a logic "1". When a logic "0" is to be transmitted, the signal voltage is driven higher to
around 4.0 V or higher.
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Circuit Description
The Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus consists of a single wire with a transmission rate of 10.417 Kbit/s.
This bus is used to exchange information between a master control module and other smart devices which
provide supporting functionality. This type of configuration does not require the capacity or speed of either a
High Speed GMLAN Bus or Low Speed GMLAN Bus and is thus relatively simpler.
The data symbols (1's and 0's) to be transmitted are represented by different voltage levels on the
communication bus. When the LIN Bus is at rest and is not being driven, the signal is in a high voltage state of
approximately Vbatt. This represents a logic "1". When a logic "0" is to be transmitted, the signal voltage is
driven low to about ground (0.0 V).
Communication Enable Circuit Description
Control modules on GMLAN high speed type networks enable or disable communication based on the voltage
level of this circuit. When the circuit voltage is high (around 12 V), communications are enabled. When the
circuit is low, communications are disabled.
Data Link Connector (DLC)
The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16-cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated
by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following:
• Terminal 1: Low speed GMLAN communications terminal
• Terminal 2: Class 2 communications terminal
• Terminal 3: Object high speed GMLAN serial bus (+) terminal
• Terminal 4: Scan tool power ground terminal
• Terminal 5: Common signal ground terminal
• Terminal 6: High speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) terminal
• Terminal 7: Keyword communications terminal
• Terminal 11: Object high speed GMLAN serial bus (-) terminal
• Terminal 12: Chassis high speed GMLAN serial bus (+) terminal
• Terminal 13: Chassis high speed GMLAN serial bus (-) terminal
• Terminal 14: High speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) terminal
• Terminal 16: Scan tool power, battery positive voltage terminal
Serial Data Reference
The scan tool communicates over the various buses on the vehicle. When a scan tool is installed on a vehicle,
the scan tool will try to communicate with every control module that could be optioned into the vehicle. If an
option is not installed on the vehicle, the scan tool will display No Comm (or Not Connected) for that optional
control module. In order to avert misdiagnoses of No Communication with a specific control module, refer to
Data Link References for a list of control modules and the buses they communicate with. Use schematics and
specific vehicle build RPO codes to determine optional control modules.
Article GUID: A00884674
Data Communications - Diagnostic Information and Procedures - Volt
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
This list includes all Data Communications related U-code DTCs in alphanumeric order with descriptors for all
devices. Not all DTCs listed will be applicable to all vehicles.
|
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List . | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U010C |
Lost Communication with Turbocharger Boost Control Module |
|
U010E |
Lost Communication with Reductant Sensor Module |
|
U010F |
Lost Communication with Air Conditioning Control Module |
|
U0111 |
Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control Module |
|
U0112 |
Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control Module |
|
U0114 |
Lost Communication with Four Wheel Drive Clutch Control Module |
|
U0115 |
Lost Communication with Engine Control Module B |
|
U0117 |
Lost Communication With Power Take-Off Control Module |
|
U0121 |
Lost Communication With Electronic Brake Control Module |
|
U0122 |
Lost Communication With Vehicle Stability Control Module |
|
U0123 |
Lost Communication with Yaw Rate Sensor Module |
|
U0125 |
Lost Communication With Multi-Axis Acceleration Sensor Module |
|
U0126 |
Lost Communication With Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module |
|
U0128 |
Lost Communication With Park Brake Control Module |
|
U0129 |
Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module |
|
U012A |
Lost Communication With Chassis Control Module |
|
U0130 |
Lost Communication With Power Steering Control Module |
|
U0131 |
Lost Communication With Power Steering Control Module |
|
U0132 |
Lost Communication With Suspension Control Module |
|
U0133 |
Lost Communication With Air Suspension Control Module |
|
U0134 |
Lost Communication with Power Steering Control Module - Rear |
|
U0136 |
Lost Communication With Differential Control Module - Rear |
|
U0137 |
Lost Communication with Trailer Brake Control Module |
|
U0139 |
Lost Communication With Suspension Control Module 2 |
|
U0140 |
Lost Communication With Body Control Module |
|
U0146 |
Lost Communication with Serial Data Gateway Module |
|
U0151 |
Lost Communication With Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module |
|
U0154 |
Lost Communication with Passenger Presence Module |
|
U0155 |
Lost Communication With Instrument Cluster |
|
U0158 |
Lost Communication With Head-Up Display |
|
U0159 |
Lost Communication With Parking Assist Control Module |
|
U0160 |
Lost Communication With Chime Alarm Control Module |
|
U0164 |
Lost Communication with HVAC Control Module |
|
U0166 |
Lost Communication with Auxiliary Heater Control Module |
|
U0167 |
Lost Communication with Immobilizer Control Module |
|
U0168 |
Lost Communication With Keyless Entry Control Module |
|
U016B |
Lost Communication with Electric A/C Compressor Control Module |
|
U0170 |
Lost Communication with Passenger Presence Detection Sensor Module |
|
U017E |
Lost Communication with Seat Belt Retractor Motor Module |
|
U0181 |
Lost Communication with Automatic Headlamp Leveling Control Module |
|
U0182 |
Lost Communication With Lighting Control Module - Front |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U0184 |
Lost Communication With Radio |
|
U0186 |
Lost Communication With Speaker Amplifier Module |
|
U0196 |
Lost Communication With Rear Audio Control Module |
|
U0191 |
Lost Communication With Television |
|
U0193 |
Lost Communication With Digital Radio Receiver Control Module |
|
U0197 |
Lost Communication With Telephone Control Module |
|
U0198 |
Lost Communication with Telematics Communication Interface Control Module |
|
U019E |
Lost Communication With Transmission Range Control Module |
|
U01A0 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 1 |
|
U01A1 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 2 |
|
U01A2 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 3 |
|
U01A3 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 4 |
|
U01A4 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 5 |
|
U01A5 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 6 |
|
U01A6 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 7 |
|
U01A7 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 8 |
|
U01B0 |
Lost Communication with Battery Monitor Module |
|
U01B4 |
Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module 2 |
|
U0201 |
Lost Communication with Passenger Door Switch Panel Control Module |
|
U0203 |
Lost Communication With Left Rear Door Switch Panel Control Module |
|
U0204 |
Lost Communication With Right Rear Door Switch Panel Control Module |
|
U0207 |
Lost Communication With Moveable Roof Control Module |
|
U0208 |
Lost Communication with Seat Memory Control Module |
|
U0209 |
Lost Communication With Front Seat Heating Control Module |
|
U0210 |
Lost Communication With Rear Seat Heating Control Module |
|
U0230 |
Lost Communication With Liftgate Control Module |
|
U0231 |
Lost Communication with Rain Sensor Module |
|
U0232 |
Lost Communication with Side Object Detection Control Module - Left |
|
U0233 |
Lost Communication with Side Object Detection Control Module - Right |
|
U0236 |
Lost Communication With Steering Column Lock Module |
|
U0237 |
Lost Communication With Multimedia Player Interface Module |
|
U023A |
Lost Communication With Vehicle Direction Camera Control Module (without |
|
Lost Communication With Active Safety Control Module 1 (with UGN) | |
|
U023B |
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 2 |
|
U023C |
Lost Communication with Night Vision Camera Control Module |
|
U0241 |
Lost Communication With Left Headlamp High Beam Control Module |
|
U0242 |
Lost Communication With Right Headlamp High Beam Control Module |
|
U0248 |
Lost Communication with Remote Accessory Module |
|
U0249 |
Lost Communication with Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module |
|
U0250 |
Lost Communication with Impact Classification System Module |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U0252 |
Lost Communication With Trailer Interface Control Module |
|
U0253 |
Lost Communication with Accessory Protocol Interface Module |
|
U0254 |
Lost Communication With Remote Start Module |
|
U0255 |
Lost Communication With Info Display Module |
|
U0256 |
Lost Communication With Infotainment Faceplate Control Module |
|
U0257 |
Lost Communication With Info Display Module/Infotainment Faceplate Control |
|
U0259 |
Lost Communication with Special Purpose Vehicle Control Module |
|
U025B |
Lost Communication with Special Purpose Vehicle Control Module "C" |
|
U025C |
Lost Communication with Special Purpose Vehicle Control Module "D" |
|
U0264 |
Lost Communication With Camera Module - Rear |
|
U0265 |
Lost Communication with Left Front Short Range Radar Sensor Module |
|
U0266 |
Lost Communication with Night Vision Camera |
|
U0268 |
Lost Communication with Right Front Short Range Radar Sensor Module |
|
U0269 |
Lost Communication with Front Long Range Object Sensor |
|
U026A |
Lost Communication with Frontview Camera Module |
|
U026B |
Lost Communication with Rear Short Range Object Sensor |
|
Lost Communication with Left Rear Short Range Radar Sensor Module | |
|
U026C |
Lost Communication with Right Rear Short Range Radar Sensor Module |
|
U026D |
Lost Communication with Rear Middle Short Range Radar Sensor Module |
|
U0284 |
Lost Communication with Active Grille Air Shutter 1 Motor Module |
|
U0285 |
Lost Communication with Active Grille Air Shutter 2 Motor Module |
|
U0293 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module |
|
U0298 |
Lost Communication with DC/DC Converter Control Module |
|
U029D |
Lost Communication with NOx Sensor 1 Module |
|
U029E |
Lost Communication with NOx Sensor 2 Module |
|
U02A3 |
Lost Communication With Particulate Matter Sensor Module |
|
U0301 |
Software Incompatibility with Engine Control Module |
|
U0302 |
Software Incompatibility with Transmission Control Module |
|
U0305 |
Software Incompatibility With Cruise Control Module |
|
U0315 |
Software Incompatibility with Electronic Brake Control Module |
|
U031C |
Software Incompatibility With Brake System Control Module 2 |
|
U0401 |
Invalid Data Received From Engine Control Module |
|
U0402 |
Invalid Data Received From Transmission Control Module |
|
U0403 |
Invalid Data Received From Transfer Case Control Module |
|
U0405 |
Invalid Data Received From Cruise Control Module |
|
U0414 |
Invalid Data Received From Four Wheel Drive Clutch Control Module |
|
U0415 |
Invalid Data Received From Electronic Brake Control Module |
|
U0416 |
Invalid Data Received From Vehicle Dynamics Control Module |
|
U0417 |
Invalid Data Received From Park Brake Control Module |
|
U0418 |
Invalid Data Received From Brake System Control Module |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U0420 |
Invalid Data Received From Power Steering Control Module |
|
U0421 |
Invalid Data Received From Suspension Control Module |
|
U0422 |
Invalid Data Received From Body Control Module |
|
U0423 |
Invalid Data Received From Instrument Cluster |
|
U0424 |
Invalid Data Received From HVAC Control Module |
|
U0428 |
Invalid Data Received From Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module |
|
U042B |
Invalid Data Received From Chassis Control Module |
|
U0431 |
Invalid Data Received From Body Control Module "A" |
|
U0432 |
Invalid Data Received From Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module |
|
U0437 |
Invalid Data Received From Differential Control Module - Rear |
|
U0438 |
Invalid Data Received From Trailer Brake Control Module |
|
U0447 |
Invalid Data Received from Central Gateway Module |
|
U0452 |
Invalid Data Received From Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module |
|
U045A |
Invalid Data Received From Parking Assist Control Module "A" |
|
U0465 |
Invalid Data Received From Power Take-Off Control Module |
|
U0499 |
Invalid Data Received From Telematics Communication Interface Control Module |
|
U0513 |
Invalid Data Received From Yaw Rate Sensor Module |
|
U053B |
Invalid Data Received From Active Safety Control Module 1 |
|
U053C |
Invalid Data Received From Active Safety Control Module 2 |
|
U056B |
Invalid Data Received From Frontview Camera Module |
|
U0594 |
Invalid Data Received From Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module |
|
U063E |
Lost Communication with Exhaust Heat Exchanger Exhaust Bypass Valve |
|
U0656 |
Lost Communication with Turbocharger Boost Control Position Sensor |
|
U0657 |
Lost Communication with Turbocharger/Supercharger Bypass Valve "A" Position |
|
U1032 |
Lost Communication with Vehicle Dynamic Sensor 1 |
|
U1033 |
Lost Communication with Vehicle Dynamic Sensor 2 |
|
U1067 |
Lost Communication with Digital Map Control Module |
|
U1069 |
Lost Communication with Driver Monitoring System Control Module |
|
U106A |
Lost Communication with Multifunction Energy Storage Capacitor Control |
|
U106B |
Lost Communication with Multifunction Battery Isolator Control Module |
|
U1112 |
Lost Communication with Left Headlamp Leveling Device |
|
U1113 |
Lost Communication with Right Headlamp Leveling Device |
|
U1114 |
Lost Communication with Left Headlamp Vertical Motor |
|
U1115 |
Lost Communication with Right Headlamp Vertical Motor |
|
U1343 |
Chassis Control Module LIN Bus 1 |
|
U1345 |
Engine Control Module LIN Bus 1 |
|
U1347 |
Engine Control Module LIN Bus 3 |
|
U1359 |
Lost Communication with Transmission Range Indicator |
|
U135A |
Lost Communication with Shift to Park Range Actuator |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U135B |
Lost Communication with Sunload Sensor |
|
U135C |
Lost Communication with Start-Stop Capacitor Control Module |
|
U135D |
Lost Communication with Transmission Control Module on Chassis Control Module LIN Bus 2 |
|
U135E |
Lost Communication with Transmission Control Module on Engine Control |
|
U1501 |
LIN Bus |
|
U1502 |
LIN Bus |
|
U1505 |
LIN Bus |
|
U1509 |
LIN Bus |
|
A26 HVAC Controls / P17 Info Display Module Lost Communication with K33 | |
|
U150E |
LIN Bus |
|
A22 Radio Controls / P17 Info Display Module Lost Communication with A11 | |
|
U150F |
LIN Bus |
|
A22 Radio Controls / P17 Info Display Module Lost Communication with K74 | |
|
K161 Vehicle Performance Data Recorder Lost Communication with K74 Human | |
|
U1510 |
A11 Radio Lost Communication with A20 Radio/HVAC Control / P17 Info |
|
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with B67 Ultrasonic Intrusion | |
|
K20 Engine Control Module Lost Communication with M96 Active Grille Air | |
|
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with A26 HVAC Controls / A20 | |
|
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with A34 HVAC Controls - | |
|
K39 Liftgate Control Module Lost Communication with K171 Hands-Free Liftgate | |
|
P16 Instrument Cluster Lost Communication with S70D Steering Wheel Controls | |
|
U1511 |
K20 Engine Control Module Lost Communication with M60B Active Grille Air |
|
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost | |
|
K40 Seat Memory Control Module Lost Communication with K99 Steering | |
|
K183 UHF Short Range Low Energy Remote Control Access Transceiver Lost |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U1512 |
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost |
|
K124B Active Safety Control Module 2 Lost Communication with K187 Steering | |
|
K183 UHF Short Range Low Energy Remote Control Access Transceiver Lost | |
|
U1513 |
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost |
|
K183 UHF Short Range Low Energy Remote Control Access Transceiver Lost | |
|
U1514 |
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost |
|
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with A34 HVAC Controls - | |
|
K183 UHF Short Range Low Energy Remote Control Access Transceiver Lost | |
|
U1515 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M75 Windshield Wiper |
|
K183 UHF Short Range Low Energy Remote Control Access Transceiver Lost | |
|
U1516 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with B110 Battery Sensor Module |
|
U1517 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K62 Sunroof Sunshade Motor |
|
U1518 |
P16 Instrument Cluster Lost Communication with K78 Head-Up Display Module / |
|
U1519 |
K40 Seat Memory Control Module Lost Communication with S52 Outside |
|
K40 Seat Memory Control Module Lost Communication with K96 Mirror Control | |
|
U151A |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with B117 Rain Sensor / B177 |
|
U151B |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K61 Sunroof Control Module |
|
K40 Seat Memory Control Module Lost Communication with S79P Window | |
|
U151C |
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with A34 HVAC Controls - |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U151F |
A11 Radio Lost Communication with A20 Radio/HVAC Controls / A22 Radio |
|
U1520 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with P4 Security Siren / P25 Power |
|
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with M6CR Air Temperature | |
|
K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver Lost Communication with K134D | |
|
K40P Seat Memory Control Module - Passenger Lost Communication with K134P | |
|
U1521 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S48E Multifunction Switch - |
|
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost | |
|
U1522 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K65 Tire Pressure Indicator |
|
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost | |
|
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with M6UR Air Temperature | |
|
U1523 |
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost |
|
U1524 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K29 Seat Heating Control |
|
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost | |
|
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with K10 Coolant Heater | |
|
U1525 |
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with K10 Coolant Heater |
|
U1526 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K29R Seat Heating Control |
|
U1528 |
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with M37B Mode Door |
|
K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver Lost Communication with S64D | |
|
K40P Seat Memory Control Module - Passenger Lost Communication with S64P | |
|
U152A |
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with M6UL Air Temperature |
|
U152B |
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with K32 Steering Wheel |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U152C |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K18 Compass Module on |
|
U152D |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with P2 Transmission Shift Lever K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with V1 Air Ionizer on LIN Bus |
|
U1530 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M35P Window Motor |
|
U1531 |
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost |
|
U1532 |
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost |
|
U1534 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M74D Window Motor - |
|
U1538 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S79D Window Switch - |
|
U153A |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S79P Window Switch - |
|
U1540 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M74RR Window Motor - |
|
U1544 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M74LR Window Motor - Left |
|
U1548 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S79LR Window Switch - Left |
|
U1549 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M45 Rear Wiper Motor on |
|
U154A |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S79RR Window Switch - |
|
U154B |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K49 Rear Seat Control |
|
U1550 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S31D Seat Heating and |
|
U1551 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K33 HVAC Control Module |
|
U1555 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S100LR Seat Heating/Venting |
|
U1556 |
K38 Chassis Control Module Lost Communication with K133 Trailer Brake Power |
|
U1558 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S31P Seat Heating and |
|
U1559 |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K183 Short Range Remote |
|
U155D |
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S100RR Seat |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U156D |
K38 Chassis Control Module Lost Communication with S3 Transmission Shift |
|
U15E1 |
A11 Radio Lost Communication with A26 HVAC Controls / P17 Info Display |
|
U15F0 |
K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module Lost Communication with P17 |
|
A11 Radio Lost Communication with A20 Radio/HVAC Controls / A22 Radio | |
|
U15F1 |
K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module Lost Communication with K188 |
|
U15F3 |
K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module Lost Communication with K31 |
|
U1653 |
Chassis Systems High Speed Communication Enable Circuit |
|
U1725 |
Left Headlamp High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Left |
|
U1726 |
Right Headlamp High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Right |
|
U1727 |
Right Headlamp High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Right |
|
U1728 |
Left Headlamp High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Left |
|
U1729 |
Right High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Right Headlamp |
|
U172A |
Left High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Left Headlamp |
|
U1793 |
14V Power Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control |
|
U1795 |
14V Power Module Powertrain Expansion Communication Bus Off |
|
U179A |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 |
|
U179C |
Lost Communication with One or More Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control |
|
U179D |
Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module 2 on Chassis Expansion |
|
U1803 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 |
|
U1804 |
Lost Communication with Inside Rearview Mirror Control Module |
|
U1806 |
Battery Energy Control Module High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus Off |
|
U1807 |
Battery Charger Control Module High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus Off |
|
U180A |
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off |
|
U180B |
Battery Energy Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off |
|
U180C |
Battery Charger Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off |
|
U180D |
Electronic Brake Control Module Chassis Expansion CAN Bus Off |
|
U1811 |
Battery Energy Control Module Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus Off |
|
U1814 |
Powertrain Wake-Up Communication Circuit |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U1815 |
Lost Communication with Drive Motor Control Module 1 on Bus B |
|
U1816 |
Lost Communication with Drive Motor Control Module B on Bus B |
|
U1817 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module on Powertrain |
|
U1818 |
Lost Communication with Engine Control Module on Powertrain Expansion |
|
U1821 |
Lost Communication with 14V Power Module on Powertrain Expansion |
|
U1826 |
Lost Communication with Multi-Axis Acceleration Sensor Module on Powertrain |
|
U1827 |
Lost Communication with Steering Angle Sensor Module on Powertrain |
|
U182A |
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module Lost Communication with Battery Energy |
|
U182D |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 on Powertrain |
|
U182E |
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U182F |
Drive Motor Control Module 2 Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U1831 |
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U1833 |
Lost Communication with Electronic Brake Control Module on Chassis Expansion |
|
U1838 |
Lost Communication with Battery Charger Control Module on High Voltage |
|
U1839 |
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump Control Module Lost Communication with |
|
U183A |
Lost Communication with Telematics Communication Interface Control Module |
|
U183B |
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump Control Module Lost Communication with |
|
U183C |
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump Control Module Lost Communication with |
|
U183E |
Lost Communication with Telematics Communication Interface Control Module |
|
U1844 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U1845 |
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U1846 |
Drive Motor Control Module 2 Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U1847 |
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control |
|
U1849 |
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Transmission Control |
|
U184A |
Lost Communication with Body Control Module on Low Speed CAN Bus |
|
U184B |
Lost Communication with Remote Heater and Air Conditioning Control Module |
|
U184C |
Lost Communication with Instrument Cluster on Low Speed CAN Bus |
|
U184D |
Lost Communication with Radio on Low Speed CAN Bus |
|
U184E |
Lost Communication with Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module on |
|
U184F |
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Lost Communication with Engine |
|
U1850 |
Drive Motor Control Module 2 Lost Communication with Transmission Control |
|
U1858 |
Electronic Brake Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV |
|
U185A |
Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control Module on High Voltage Energy |
|
U185B |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U185C |
Battery Charger Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U185D |
Fuel Injector Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control Module |
|
U185E |
Fuel Injector Control Module Lost Communication with Body Control Module |
|
U1860 |
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV |
|
U1861 |
Battery Charger Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control |
|
U186A |
Electronic Brake Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control |
|
U186B |
Electronic Brake Control Module Lost Communication with Transmission Control |
|
U1875 |
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control |
|
U1876 |
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Engine Control Module |
|
U1879 |
Drive Motor Control Module 2 Lost Communication with Engine Control Module |
|
U1885 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U1886 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control Module |
|
U1888 |
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module Lost Communication with Battery Energy |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U18A1 |
Lost Communication with Coolant Temperature Control Module on High Voltage |
|
U18A2 |
Lost Communication with Fuel Pump Driver Control Module |
|
U18A3 |
Lost Communication with Human Machine Interface Control Module |
|
U18A4 |
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery DC Charging Communications |
|
U18A5 |
Lost Communication with Fuel Injector Control Module on Powertrain Expansion |
|
U18A6 |
Lost Communication with Right Object Detection Control Module on Dedicated |
|
U18A7 |
Lost Communication with Power Supply Transformer on Powertrain Expansion |
|
U18A9 |
Lost Communication With Transmission Range Control Module on Chassis |
|
U18AA |
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control |
|
U18AB |
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with Chassis Control |
|
U18AC |
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with Chassis Control |
|
U18AD |
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with Electronic Brake |
|
U18AE |
Lost Communication with Infotainment Control Touchpad on Dedicated Bus 1 |
|
U18AF |
Lost Communications With Telematics Communications Interface Control Module |
|
U18B0 |
Lost Communications With Instrument Cluster on Ethernet Bus |
|
U18B1 |
Lost Communications With Audio Amplifier on Ethernet Bus |
|
U18B2 |
Lost Communication with Rear Audio Control Module on Ethernet Bus |
|
U18B3 |
Lost Communications With Navigation Control Module on Ethernet Bus |
|
U18B4 |
Lost Communication with Radio on Ethernet Bus |
|
U18B5 |
Lost Communication With Hybrid Powertrain Control Module on Chassis |
|
U18B6 |
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 1 on Chassis Expansion |
|
U18B7 |
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 2 on Chassis Expansion |
|
U18B8 |
Lost Communication with Body Control Module on High Speed CAN Bus |
|
U18B9 |
Primary High Speed CAN Bus Subnet Configuration List |
|
U18BA |
Lost Communication with Power Steering Control Module on High Speed CAN |
|
U18BB |
Lost Communication with Power Steering Control Module on Chassis Expansion |
|
U18BF |
Secondary High Speed CAN Bus Subnet Configuration List |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U18C0 |
Lost Communication with Suspension Control Module on High Speed CAN Bus |
|
U18C1 |
Lost Communication with Suspension Control Module on Chassis Expansion CAN |
|
U18C2 |
Lost Communication with Frontview Camera Module on Flexray Bus |
|
U18C3 |
Lost Communication with Video Processing Control Module on High Speed CAN |
|
U18C4 |
Lost Communication with Video Processing Control Module on Low Speed CAN |
|
U18C5 |
Lost Communication with Electronic Brake Control Module on High Speed CAN |
|
U18CA |
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 1 on Flexray Bus |
|
U18CB |
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 2 on Flexray Bus |
|
U18CC |
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with ECM on |
|
U18CF |
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 1 on High Speed CAN |
|
U18D0 |
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 2 on High Speed CAN |
|
U18D1 |
Lost Communication with Transmission Range Control Module on Powertrain |
|
U18D2 |
Lost Communication with Transmission Range Selector Control Module on |
|
U18D3 |
Lost Communication with Transmission Range Selector Control Module on |
|
U1900 |
Lost Communication With Speech to Text Interface Module |
|
U1901 |
Lost Communication with Infotainment Multifunction Switch Module |
|
U2098 |
MOST Communication Enable Circuit |
|
U2099 |
High Speed Communication Enable Circuit |
|
U209E |
Object Detection Control Module High Speed Communication Enable Circuit 1 |
|
U209F |
Object Detection Control Module High Speed Communication Enable Circuit 2 |
|
U2100 |
CAN Bus Communication |
|
U2101 |
CAN Bus Maximum List of Control Modules |
|
U2103 |
Fewer Controllers On Bus Than Programmed |
|
U2105 |
Lost Communication with Engine Control Module |
|
U2106 |
Lost Communication with Transmission Control Module |
|
U2107 |
Lost Communication with Body Control Module |
|
U2108 |
Lost Communication with Electronic Brake Control Module |
|
U2125 |
Lost Communication with Telematic Unit |
|
U2127 |
Lost Communication with Front HVAC Control Module |
|
U2139 |
Lost Communication with Column Integration Module |
|
U2144 |
Lost Communication with Distance Sensing Cruise Control Module |
|
U216A |
Lost Communication with Front Object Detection Control Module |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U216B |
Lost Communication with Rear Object Detection Control Module |
|
U2176 |
Lost Communication with Power Take-Off Control Module |
|
U2178 |
Lost Communication With Trailer Interface Control Module |
|
U2400 |
Fuel Injector Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off |
|
U2401 |
Battery Energy Control Module Dedicated Bus 1 Off |
|
U2409 |
Transmission Range Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off |
|
U240A |
Transmission Range Control Module Chassis Expansion CAN Bus Off |
|
U240B |
Radio Dedicated Bus Off |
|
U240D |
Transmission Range Selector Control Module Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus Off |
|
U240E |
Transmission Range Selector Control Module Powertrain Sensor CAN Bus Off |
|
U240F |
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with EBCM on High |
|
U2410 |
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with BCM on High |
|
U2411 |
Transmission Range Control Module Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus Off |
|
U2412 |
Reductant Control Module Powertrain Sensor Bus Off |
|
U2501 |
Invalid Data Received From Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 |
|
U2502 |
Invalid Data Received From Electronic Brake Control Module on Chassis |
|
U2503 |
Invalid Data Received From Object Detection Control Module |
|
U2504 |
Invalid Data Received From Trailer Brake Driver Control Module |
|
U2505 |
Invalid Data Received from Human Machine Interface Control Module on MOST |
|
U2506 |
Invalid Data Received From Dual Battery Control Module |
|
U2507 |
Invalid Data Received from Instrument Cluster on MOST Bus |
|
U2508 |
Invalid Data Received from Audio Amplifier on MOST Bus |
|
U250B |
Invalid Data Received from Active Safety Control Module 1 on Chassis Expansion |
|
U250C |
Invalid Data Received from Active Safety Control Module 2 on Chassis Expansion |
|
U250D |
Invalid Data Received from Transmission Control Module on Chassis Control Module LIN Bus 2 |
|
U250E |
Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamic Sensor 1 |
|
U250F |
Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamic Sensor 2 |
|
U2510 |
Invalid Data Received from Multifunction Energy Storage Capacitor Control |
|
U2511 |
Invalid Data Received from Digital Map Control Module |
|
U2512 |
Invalid Data Received from Video Processing Control Module |
|
U2513 |
Invalid Data Received from Driver Monitoring System Control Module |
|
U2520 |
Invalid Data Received from Active Safety Control Module 1 on High Speed CAN |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U2602 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U2603 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2604 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2605 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2606 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2608 |
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV |
|
U2609 |
Battery Charger Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U2611 |
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump Control Module Lost Communication with |
|
U2612 |
Battery Charger Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U2613 |
Drive Motor 1 Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U2614 |
Drive Motor 2 Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
U2615 |
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump Control Module Lost Communication with |
|
U2616 |
Fuel Pump Driver Control Module Lost Communication with ECM |
|
U2617 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2618 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2619 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2620 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2621 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2622 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2623 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2624 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
U2625 |
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery |
|
DTC |
DTC Descriptor |
|
U2626 |
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication With Engine Control Module on |
|
U2627 |
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication with Reductant Level Sensor |
|
U2628 |
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication with Reductant Concentration |
|
U2629 |
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication with Reductant Tank Temperature |
|
U2630 |
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication with Reductant Tank Temperature |
|
U2631 |
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication with Reductant Pressure Sensor |
|
U3000 |
Control Module |
|
U3001 |
Control Module Improper Shutdown Performance |
|
U3012 |
Control Module Improper Wake-up Perfomance |
DTC B1000: ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Electronic Control Unit
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The internal fault detection is handled inside the device. The symptom byte information is for engineering
reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The device runs the program to detect an internal fault when power up is commanded. The only requirements
are voltage and ground. This program runs even if the voltage is out of the valid operating range.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device has detected an internal malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device refuses all additional inputs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• This DTC may be stored as a history DTC without affecting the operation of the device.
• If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the device.
• If this DTC is retrieved as both a current and history DTC, replace the device that set the DTC.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC B1000 is not set.
Replace the device that set the DTC.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC B1001: OPTION CONFIGURATION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Option Configuration
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
Some devices must be configured with serial numbers, vehicle options, or other information. If a device was not
properly configured after installation that device may set DTC B1001. The symptom byte information is for
engineering reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Battery voltage is between 9 - 16 V and data link communications operate normally.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device is not configured properly.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC B1001 is not set.
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the device that set the DTC.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC B1016: VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER INFORMATION NOT PROGRAMMED
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Vehicle Identification Number Information Not Programmed
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The device performs a self test and vehicle identification number (VIN) verification. This DTC indicates that a
VIN is not programmed or that the device has an internal fault. The internal fault detection is handled inside the
device, no external circuits are involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The only requirements are voltage and ground.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device has detected that the VIN is not programmed.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
• The history DTC will clear after 50 fault-free ignition cycles.
• The DTC can be cleared using a scan tool.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC B1016 is not set.
• If DTC B1016 is set
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the device that set the DTC.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC B101D: ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Electronic Control Unit Hardware
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The internal fault detection is handled inside the device. The symptom byte information is for engineering
reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The device runs the program to detect an internal fault when power up is commanded. The only
requirements are voltage and ground. This program runs even if the voltage is out of the valid operating
range.
• The keyless entry control module will set this DTC with symptom byte 39 when the keyless entry control
module antenna is activated.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device has detected an internal malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device refuses all additional inputs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• This DTC may be stored as a history DTC without affecting the operation of the device.
• Do not replace a device based only on DTC B101D being set in history with the exception of the
following devices:
• K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module
• K85 Passenger Presence Module
• If DTC B101D is set as current, replace the appropriate device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC B101D is not set.
• If DTC B101D is set with symptom byte 43
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the device that set the DTC.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
Replace the device that set the DTC.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Electronic Control Unit Software
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
Some devices must be configured with specific software, serial numbers, vehicle options, or other information.
If a device was not properly configured after installation that device may set DTC B101E. The symptom byte
information is for engineering reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Battery voltage is between 9 - 16 V and data link communications operate normally.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device is not configured properly.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Control Module References
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC B101E is not set.
• If DTC B101E is set
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the device that set the DTC.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
• If DTC B101E is not set
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC C056D: ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Electronic Control Unit Hardware
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The internal fault detection is handled inside the device. The symptom byte information is for engineering
reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The device runs the program to detect an internal fault when power up is commanded. The only requirements
are voltage and ground. This program runs even if the voltage is out of the valid operating range.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device has detected an internal malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device refuses all additional inputs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• This DTC may be stored as a history DTC without affecting the operation of the device.
• If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the device.
• If this DTC is retrieved as both a current and history DTC, replace the device that set the DTC.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC C056D is not set.
• If DTC C056D is set in a device that can be programmed
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the device that set the DTC.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
• If DTC C056D is set in a device that cannot be programmed
Replace the device that set the DTC.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC C056E: ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT SOFTWARE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Electronic Control Unit Software
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
Some devices must be configured with specific software, serial numbers, vehicle options, or other information.
If a device was not properly configured after installation that device may set DTC C056E. The symptom byte
information is for engineering reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Battery voltage is between 9 - 16 V and data link communications operate normally.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device is not configured properly.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool References
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC C056E is not set.
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the device that set the DTC.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC P0601-P0607, P060A-P060C, P062F, P16E9-P16F0, OR P262B: CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Control Module Read Only Memory Performance
Control Module Not Programmed
Control Module Long Term Memory Reset
Control Module Random Access Memory Performance
Control Module Programming Read Only Memory Performance
DTC P0606
Control Module Processor Performance
Control Module Performance
Control Module Monitoring Processor Performance
Control Module Analog to Digital Converter Performance
Control Module Main Processor Performance
Control Module Long Term Memory Performance
Control Module Serial Peripheral Interface Bus 2
Control Module Serial Peripheral Interface Bus 3
Control Module Serial Peripheral Interface Bus 4
Control Module Serial Peripheral Interface Bus 5
Control Module Serial Peripheral Interface Bus 6
Control Module Serial Peripheral Interface Bus 7
Control Module Serial Peripheral Interface Bus 8
Control Module Serial Peripheral Interface Bus 1
Control Module Power Off Timer Performance
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
This diagnostic applies to internal microprocessor integrity conditions within the device. This diagnostic also
addresses if the device is not programmed. The device monitors its ability to read and write to the memory. It
also monitors a timing function. No external circuits are involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle ON.
• The system voltage is greater than 9.5 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device detects an internal malfunction or incomplete programming.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• DTCs P0601 - P0607, P060A - P060C, and P16E9 - P16F0 are Type A DTCs.
• DTC P062F is a Type C DTCs.
• DTC P262B is a Type B DTC.
• The high voltage contactor relays may open.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• DTCs P0601 - P0607, P060A - P060C, and P16E9 - P16F0 are Type A DTCs.
• DTC P062F is a Type C DTCs.
• DTC P262B is a Type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• The DTC P0606 may set in Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 due to other faults. Do not replace
the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 until other DTCs are diagnosed first.
• The DTC P0606 can falsely set in Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 when the 12 V battery has
been disconnected/re-connected or if the 12 V battery has been overcharged (over 18 V). In this case, do
the following. If this DTC becomes history, use scan tool to clear this DTC. No further action is required:
• Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems off. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to
power down.
• Vehicle ON, verify that DTC P0606 is in history and contactors close. (If DTC P0606 remains
current and contactors do not close, repeat the above step again).
• Use scan tool to clear the DTC to turn off the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
• If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool References
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: The DTC P0606 can falsely set in K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
when disconnecting the 12 V battery. See Diagnostic Aids section for more
information.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P0606 is not set.
• If DTC P0606 is set with other DTCs set
Diagnose all other DTCs first. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If DTC P0606 is set without other DTCs set
Replace the device that set the DTC.
• If DTC P0606 is not set
3. Verify DTC P0602 is not set.
• If DTC P0602 is set
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the device that set the DTC.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
4. Verify DTC P0601, P0603, P0604, P0605, P0607, P060A, P060B, P060C, P062F, P16E9, P16EA,
P16EB, P16EC, P16ED, P16EE, P16EF, P16F0, or P262B is not set.
Replace the device that set the DTC.
5. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Control Module Wake-Up Circuit Performance
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||
The accessory wake up serial data 2 circuit is energized by the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
to immediately activate other devices connected to this circuit when the K9 Body Control Module signals the
K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 that serial data is required.
Depending on the option content, devices that may receive the wake up signal are as follows:
• K1 14 V Power Module
• T18 Battery Charger
• K16 Battery Energy Control Module
• K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
• G1 A/C Compressor
• K71 Transmission Control Module / T12 Automatic Transmission Assembly
• K20 Engine Control Module
• K114A Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 / T6 Power Inverter Module
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
• The vehicle power mode master requires serial data communication to occur.
• The K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 attempts to wake up the devices connected to its
control module output wake up circuit.
• Circuit check runs continuously.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 detects a fault in the control module output wake up
circuit.
• A circuit fault exists for greater than 6 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The DTC P06E4 is a type A DTC.
• The devices is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
• The vehicle will not start while the circuit is shorted to ground.
• The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will illuminate, along with several DIC messages.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The DTC P06E4 is a type A DTC.
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
Short to ground will also set multiple no communication codes for high speed GMLAN devices.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Control Module References
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, U1814, U2099, B097B, B1325, B1330, B1370,
B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1451, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: Use the schematic to determine which devices are on the K114B Hybrid/EV
Powertrain Control Module 2 terminal 69 X2 accessory wake up serial data 2
circuit. Use the connector end view to identify the B+, ignition, and accessory
wake up serial data 2 circuit terminals for each of those devices.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module
2.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wake up serial data circuit terminal 67 X2 and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X4 harness
connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for greater than 100 fi between the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 wake up
circuit terminal 67 X2 and ground.
• If 100 fi or less, repair the short to ground in the accessory wake up serial data circuit.
• If greater than 100 fi
3. Test for less than 2 fi between the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 wake up circuit
terminal 67 X2 and the K9 Body Control Module wake up circuit terminal 22 X4.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the accessory wake up serial data circuit.
• If less than 2 fi
4. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least
3 m (9.8 ft) away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
5. Test for greater than 100 fi, but less than infinite resistance, between the accessory wake up serial data 2
circuit terminal 69 X2 and ground.
Refer to Testing the Accessory Wake Up Serial Data 2 Circuits for a Short to Ground.
Test for an open/high resistance in the accessory wake up serial data 2 circuit.
6. Vehicle in Service Mode.
7. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
8. Vehicle in Service Mode.
9. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
10. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
1. Perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure before proceeding with this diagnostic. Refer to High
Voltage Disabling .
2. Reconnect the 12 V battery.
3. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at an easily accessible device that shares the K114B
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 terminal 69 X2 accessory wake up serial data 2 circuit. It may
take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
4. Test for less than 100 Q between the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 accessory wake up
serial data 2 circuit terminal 69 X2 and ground.
Replace the device that was just disconnected.
5. Repeat step 3 until all devices on the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 accessory wake up
serial data 2 circuit terminal 69 X2 have been disconnected.
6. Repair the short to ground on the accessory wake up serial data 2 circuit.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Battery Energy Control Module Performance
Battery Energy Control Module Long Term Memory Performance
Battery Energy Control Module Random Access Memory
Battery Energy Control Module Read Only Memory
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The Battery Energy Control Module will diagnose its own systems and determine when a fault condition is
present. Diagnostics and system status is communicated from the Battery Energy Control Module to the
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 through serial data. The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 is
the host controller for diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information.
This diagnostic applies to internal microprocessor integrity conditions within the Battery Energy Control
Module. This fault is internal to the Battery Energy Control Module and no external circuits are involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The Battery Energy Control Module is awake and communicating.
• The system voltage is at least 9 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The Battery Energy Control Module has detected an internal malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• DTCs P0A1F, P1A01, P1A05, and P1A06 are type A DTCs.
• Vehicle goes to reduced battery power mode. After vehicle is turned off, vehicle will not return to
propulsion active mode.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P0A1F, P1A01, P1A05, and P1A06 are type A DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool References
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
NOTE: If the power is interrupted at exactly the time the K16 Battery Energy
Control Module is writing to its memory, it may set a false P1A01 DTC.
2. Verify that DTC P1A01 is not set.
• If DTC P1A01 is set
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power
down.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify that the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
• If the DTC does not set
4. All OK.
• If DTC P1A01 is not set
3. Verify that DTC P0A1F, P1A05, or P1A06 is not set.
Replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
4. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Wake-Up Circuit Performance
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||
The accessory wake up serial data 2 circuit is energized by the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
to immediately activate the G1 A/C Compressor connected to this circuit when the body control module signals
the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 that serial data is required.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is greater than 10.25 V.
• The G1 A/C Compressor is awake.
• Vehicle ON.
• The G1 A/C Compressor receives serial data message from K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2 and "Propulsion System Active" is TRUE for 500 ms continuously.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The G1 A/C Compressor detects a fault in the wake up circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P16B7 is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P16B7 is a type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
Short to ground may set multiple no communication codes for high speed GMLAN devices.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P06E4 is not set.
• If DTC P06E4 is set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's accessory
wake up serial data 2 circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the G1 A/C Compressor. It may take up to 2 min for all
vehicle systems to power down.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wake up serial data 2 circuit terminal 2 X1 and
ground.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X2 harness
connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
2. Test for less than 2 Q between the G1 A/C Compressor wake up circuit terminal 2 X1 and the
K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 wake up circuit terminal 43 X2.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the accessory wake up serial data 2
circuit.
• If less than 2 Q
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
accessory wake up serial data circuit terminal 67 X2 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the accessory wake up serial data circuit for a short
to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 Body Control
Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
4. Test or replace the G1 A/C Compressor.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Random Access Memory Performance
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Read Only Memory Performance
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Long Term Memory Performance
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The A/C Compressor will diagnose its own systems and determine when a fault condition is present. This
diagnostic applies to internal microprocessor integrity conditions within the A/C compressor. This fault is
internal to the A/C compressor and no external circuits are involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• System voltage is greater than 10.25 V.
• The device is awake and communicating.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device has detected an internal malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P16B8, P16B9, and P16BA are type A DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• DTCs P16B8, P16B9, and P16BA are type A DTCs.
• After the vehicle has been OFF for a sufficient amount of time to allow the devices to enter a sleep mode,
the devices will re-enable the output on the following ignition cycle and the DTC will become history.
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC P16B8, P16B9, or P16BA is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Replace the G1 A/C Compressor.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC P1E8E-P1E91, P1E94-P1E97, P1E9A-P1E9D, P1EA0-P1EA3, P1F06-P1F09, P1FAC-P1FC2,
P1FCF-P1FD4, P1FF3, P3031-P3034, P3037, P303C-P303F, OR P3042: HYBRID/EV BATTERY
INTERFACE CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 1 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 1 Random Access Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 1 Read Only Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 1 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 2 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 2 Random Access Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 2 Read Only Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 2 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 3 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 3 Random Access Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 3 Read Only Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 3 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 4 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 4 Random Access Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 4 Read Only Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 4 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 1 Processor Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 2 Processor Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 3 Processor Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 4 Processor Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 5 Read Only Memory Performance
DTC P1FAD
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 7 Read Only Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 8 Read Only Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 9 Read Only Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 10 Read Only Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 5 Random Access Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 6 Random Access Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 7 Random Access Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 8 Random Access Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 9 Random Access Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 10 Random Access Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 5 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 6 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 7 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 8 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 9 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 10 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 5 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 6 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 7 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 8 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 9 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 10 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 5 Processor Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 6 Processor Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 7 Processor Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 8 Processor Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 9 Processor Performance
DTC P1FD4
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 10 Processor Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 6 Read Only Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 11 Read Only Memory
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 11 Random Access Memory
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 11 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 11 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 11 Processor Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 12 Read Only Memory
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 12 Random Access Memory
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 12 Long Term Memory Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 12 Performance
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 12 Processor Performance
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules will diagnose their own systems and determine when a fault
condition is present. This diagnostic applies to internal microprocessor integrity conditions within the
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules. This fault is internal to the Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control
Modules and no external circuits are involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The device is awake.
• The system voltage is at least 9 V.
• DTC U2603 - U2606 or U2617 - U2624 is not set.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device has detected an internal malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P1E8E - P1E91, P1E94 - P1E97, P1E9A - P1E9D, P1EA0 - P1EA3, P1F06 - P1F09, P1FAC - P1FC2,
P1FCF - P1FD4, P1FF3, P3031 - P3034, P3037, P303C - P303F, and P3042 are type A DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P1E8E - P1E91, P1E94 - P1E97, P1E9A - P1E9D, P1EA0 - P1EA3, P1F06 - P1F09, P1FAC - P1FC2,
P1FCF - P1FD4, P1FF3, P3031 - P3034, P3037, P303C - P303F, and P3042 are type A DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
• The Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules 1 - 12 are all internal to the Battery Energy Control
Module.
• If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool References
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC P1E8E - P1E91, P1E94 - P1E97, P1E9A - P1E9D, P1EA0 - P1EA3, P1F06 - P1F09,
P1FAC - P1FC2, P1FCF - P1FD4, P1FF3, P3031 - P3034, P3037, P303C - P303F, or P3042 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC P1EB1: HYBRID/EV BATTERY INTERFACE CONTROL MODULE SOFTWARE
INCOMPATIBLE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module Software Incompatible
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
This is the software incompatibility issue between the Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules and the
Battery Energy Control Module. No external circuits are involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle ON.
• The system voltage is at least 9 V.
• DTC U2401, U2603, U2604, U2605, or U2606 is not set.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• Any one of the Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module software revision does not match.
• Battery Energy Control Module software and Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module software are
incompatible.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Slave data that are incompatible with the Battery Energy Control Module software is set to Invalid, 0 V
and -40A°C (-40A°F).
• DTC P1EB1 is a type A DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P1EB1 is a type A DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the device.
Circuit/System Verification
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P1EB1 is not set.
• If DTC P1EB1 is set
1. Program the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets without other DTCs set, replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
• If the DTC sets along with any of the DTCs P1EB2, P1EB3, P1EB4, or P1EB5 set, refer to
DTC P1EB2-P1EB5, P1FA6-P1FAB, P3030, or P303B.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
• If DTC P1EB1 is not set
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC P1EB2-P1EB5, P1FA6-P1FAB, P3030, OR P303B: HYBRID/EV BATTERY INTERFACE
CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 1 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 2 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 3 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 4 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 5 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 6 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 7 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 8 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 9 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 10 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 11 Not Programmed
Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 12 Not Programmed
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When the Battery Energy Control Module is flash programmed, the Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control
Module operating software and calibrations are provided to the Battery Energy Control Module. The Hybrid/EV
Battery Interface Control Module software and calibrations are then loaded to each of the Hybrid/EV Battery
Interface Control Modules from the Battery Energy Control Module. This operation is automatic and requires
no operator action. At this point, if any of the Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules are not
programmed correctly, the appropriate DTC is set. This fault is internal to the Hybrid/EV Battery Interface
Control Modules and no external circuits are involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The Battery Energy Control Module is awake and communicating.
• The system voltage is at least 9 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module is not programmed correctly.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P1EB2, P1EB3, P1EB4, P1EB5, P1FA6, P1FA7, P1FA8, P1FA9, P1FAA, P1FAB, P3030, and P303B are
type A DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module is programmed correctly.
• DTCs P1EB2, P1EB3, P1EB4, P1EB5, P1FA6, P1FA7, P1FA8, P1FA9, P1FAA, P1FAB, P3030, and
P303B are type A DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
The Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules 1 - 12 are all internal to the Battery Energy Control Module.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool References
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P1EB2, P1EB3, P1EB4, P1EB5, P1FA6, P1FA7, P1FA8, P1FA9, P1FAA, P1FAB, P3030, or
P303B is not set.
1. Program the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC P1EB9: HIGH VOLTAGE ENERGY MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION BUS ENABLE
CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
High Voltage Energy Management Communication Bus Enable Circuit
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 activates the high voltage energy management communication
enable circuit when the vehicle is on. This circuit wakes up the devices for high voltage energy bus
communication.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
• The vehicle power mode master requires serial data communication to occur.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 detects a fault in the high voltage energy management
communication enable circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P1EB9 is a type A DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P1EB9 is a type A DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
Short to ground will also set multiple no communication codes for devices on high voltage energy serial data
bus.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: Use the schematics to determine which devices are on the K114B Hybrid/EV
Powertrain Control Module 2 terminal 65 X2 high voltage energy management
communication enable circuit. Use the connector end views to identify the B+,
ignition, and high voltage energy management communication enable circuit
terminals for each of those devices.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2. It
may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for greater than 100 fi, but less than infinite resistance, between the high voltage energy management
communication enable circuit terminal 65 X2 and ground.
• If 100 fi or less
Refer to Testing the High Voltage Energy Management Communication Enable Circuits for a Short
to Ground.
• If infinite resistance
Test for an open/high resistance in the high voltage energy management communication enable
circuit.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
1. Perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .
2. Reconnect the 12 V battery.
3. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at an easily accessible device that shares the K114B Hybrid/EV
Powertrain Control Module 2 terminal 65 X2 high voltage energy management communication enable
circuit. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
4. Test for less than 100 Q between the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 high voltage
energy management communication enable circuit terminal 65 X2 and ground.
• If 100 Q or greater
Replace the device that was just disconnected.
5. Repeat step 3 until all devices on the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 high voltage
energy management communication enable circuit terminal 65 X2 have been disconnected.
6. Repair the short to ground on the high voltage energy management communication enable circuit.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P1EB9: HIGH VOLTAGE ENERGY MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION BUS ENABLE
CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Battery Energy Control Module High Voltage Energy Management Communication Bus Enable Circuit
Low Voltage
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 activates the high voltage energy management communication
enable circuit when the vehicle is on. The high voltage energy management communication enable circuit
wakes up the Battery Energy Control Module for serial data communication.
The Battery Energy Control Module compares the high voltage energy management communication enable
hardwire signal with a Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 serial data message indicating that the high
voltage energy management communication enable signal is active. If the high voltage energy management
communication enable hardwire signal is low when the serial data message indicates it should be high, then
DTC P1EC1 is set.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The device is awake and communicating.
• The system voltage is at least 9 V.
• DTCs U2602, U180B, P1A0C, or P1A07 is not set.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ignition voltage on the high voltage energy management communication enable circuit is less than 5 V.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P1EC1 and P1EC2 are type A DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The ignition voltage on the high voltage energy management communication enable circuit is at least 5 V for 10
s.
DTCs P1EC1 and P1EC2 are type A DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
Short to ground will also set multiple no communication codes for devices on high voltage management serial
data bus.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
• Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
• EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
• EL-50211 Low Voltage Jumper Harness Extension
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC P1EB9 or U185B is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the devices' high
voltage energy management communication enable circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X357 harness connector at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the high voltage energy management communication enable
circuit terminal 5 X357 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the high voltage energy management communication enable
circuit terminal 5 X357 at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the high voltage energy management communication enable circuit end to
end between the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack terminal 5 X357 and the K114B Hybrid/EV
Powertrain Control Module 2 terminal 65 X2.
• If greater than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Vehicle OFF, connect the X357 harness connector at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
5. Perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure before proceeding with this diagnostic. Refer to High
Voltage Disabling .
6. Reconnect the 12 V battery.
7. Vehicle OFF, connect the EL-50211 low voltage jumper harness extension.
8. Disconnect the X8 harness connector at the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
9. Vehicle in Service Mode.
10. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the high voltage energy management communication enable
circuit terminal 10 X8 at K16 Battery Energy Control Module and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
11. Replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U0020: LOW SPEED CAN BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Low Speed CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
Devices connected to the GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal
vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
programmed information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits. The
messages are also supervised and some periodic messages are used by the receiver device as an availability
indication of the transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTCs
• Supply voltage to the devices is in the normal operating range.
• The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur.
• The DTC U2100 does not have a current status.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTCs Sets
The device uses a default value for the missing parameter.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
Circuit/System Verification
Diagnosis of this DTC is accomplished via the symptom or an additional DTC. Refer to Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device , or Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
DTC U0028: MOST BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
MOST Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST) bus consists of a physical ring in which multimedia devices
share audio, video and infotainment system control data. Each device on the MOST bus transmits and receives
data via the MOST Bus Serial Data (+/- transmit/receive) circuits. The MOST bus diagnostic master is the
Radio. The MOST control circuit is connected to each device on the MOST bus. Each device provides a 12 V
signal on the MOST control circuit. The Radio initiates communication on the MOST bus at Vehicle "On" by
toggling the MOST control circuit low for 100 ms. Once each device recognizes the wakeup signal from the
Radio on the MOST control circuit, they will respond to the Radio on the MOST bus to indicate no faults are
present and normal communications will commence.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
• The vehicle is ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A fault occurs on transmit, receive, electronic control lines, or internal device failure.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Some or all of the infotainment system audio and displays may be inoperative.
• While a current U0028 is set, the Radio will continually send 400 ms low pulses on the MOST control
circuit every 2.5 s. This is a Ring Break Diagnostic indication to the devices on the ring to report a
Surrogate Master Upstream Position Node.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The MOST initialization is successful without errors and the MOST bus resumes normal communications.
Diagnostic Aids
• The EL-51578 MOST Bus Diagnostic Tool Kit when utilized will cause false GMLAN DTC's to be set as
a result, along with loss of bypassed MOST device infotainment functionality. These DTC's and missing
functionality should be ignored unless the system is completely assembled and a DTC or symptom is
present during the repair verification steps.
• To troubleshoot the intermittent condition, manipulate or wiggle MOST wiring harness and observe the
Radio's DTC U0028 status and the Radio scan tool Number of MOST Communication Breaks parameter
value.
• If the issue still exists after performing all verification and test steps in this diagnostic procedure, bypass
each MOST device individually on the MOST bus (except the Radio) while monitoring DTC U0028
status. If DTC U0028 remains current after each MOST device has been bypassed, disconnect the Radio
MOST harness connector. The entire MOST ring can now be tested with all MOST devices (except the
Radio) bypassed to determine if any circuit faults exist.
• The Radio's DTC U0028 will be set current with all MOST devices bypassed.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
• Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-51578 MOST Bus Diagnostic Tool Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode. Radio ON.
2. If equipped, verify that the A33 Media Disc Player is operative by inserting or ejecting a disk.
• If the disk can not be inserted or ejected
Test the power, ground, and serial data circuits of the A33 Media Disc Player for an open/high
resistance.
3. Verify that the scan tool communicates with each MOST device, except the A33 Media Disc Player.
• If any MOST device does not communicate with the scan tool
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF to diagnose power, ground, and serial data circuits of that MOST
device.
4. Verify that DTC U2098 or DTC U0029 02 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to DTC U2098 .
• If none of the DTCs are set
5. Verify that DTC U0028 is not set.
1. Using the scan tool, select the MOST Bus Diagnostic Starting Point function from A11 Radio
Control Functions menu.
2. Determine the fault location from A11 Radio scan tool Control Functions, MOST Bus Diagnostic
Starting Point. Reference Node Locations of MOST Bus Communication Break parameter value.
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
6. Refer to Repair Verification.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: You must perform Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
NOTE: Use the Radio scan tool, schematics and specific vehicle build RPO codes to
determine optional devices and to identify the following:
• The MOST bus ring configuration
• Each MOST device's MOST control and serial data circuit terminals
NOTE: If the A11 Radio is the first node position in the "Node Locations of MOST
Bus Communication Break" range, proceed to step 8.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector containing the MOST circuits at the MOST device at the
first Node position reported by Node Locations of MOST Bus Communication Break parameter value.
2. Connect the appropriate connector from the EL-51578 MOST Bus Diagnostic Tool Kit to the harness
connector of the MOST device to bypass this MOST device.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
NOTE: MOST control (ECL) voltage will toggle from 9 - 13 V to 0 V while DTC
U0028 is current.
4. Test for 9 - 13 V between the ECL connector from the EL-51578 MOST Bus Diagnostic Tool Kit and
ground.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the A11 Radio.
2. Disconnect the EL-51578 MOST Bus Diagnostic Tool Kit from the harness connector of the first
Node location MOST device.
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the MOST control circuit end to end between the MOST device that was
just disconnected and the A11 Radio.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the A11 Radio.
• If greater than 13 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the A11 Radio.
2. Disconnect the EL-51578 MOST Bus Diagnostic Tool Kit from the harness connector of the first
Node location MOST device, Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the MOST control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage in the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the A11 Radio.
5. Verify that DTC U0028 status remains current.
• If the status of DTC U0028 changes from current to history
Replace the disconnected MOST device.
6. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the EL-51578 MOST Bus Diagnostic Tool Kit from the harness connector of the
first Node location MOST device.
7. Reconnect the harness connector containing the MOST circuits at the first Node location MOST device.
NOTE: If the A11 Radio is the last node position in the "Node Locations of MOST
Bus Communication Break" range, disconnect the harness connector
containing MOST circuits at the A11 Radio and proceed to step 13.
8. Disconnect the harness connector containing the MOST circuits at the last Node location MOST device
of the fault location identified by Node Locations of MOST Bus Communication Break parameter value.
9. Connect the appropriate connector from the EL-51578 MOST Bus Diagnostic Tool Kit to the harness
connector of the last Node location MOST device to bypass this MOST device.
10. Vehicle in Service Mode.
11. Verify that DTC U0028 status remains current.
• If the status of DTC U0028 changes from current to history
Replace the disconnected MOST device.
12. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the EL-51578 MOST Bus Diagnostic Tool Kit from the harness connector of the
last Node location MOST device.
13. Disconnect the harness connector containing the MOST circuits at the first Node location MOST device.
The following tests will be performed on the MOST serial data circuits between the two MOST devices
that are disconnected.
14. Vehicle in Service Mode.
15. Test for less than 1 V between each MOST serial data circuit and ground.
• If any serial data circuits are 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage in the circuit.
16. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, and all vehicle systems OFF.
17. Test for infinite resistance between each MOST serial data circuit and ground.
• If any serial data circuits are less than infinite resistance
Repair the short to ground in the circuit.
18. Test for infinite resistance between each pair of the MOST serial data circuits.
• If any pair of serial data circuits are less than infinite resistance
Repair the short between the circuits.
• If each pair of serial data circuits are infinite resistance
19. Test for less than 2 Q in each MOST serial data circuit end to end.
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit between the two MOST devices.
20. Replace the A11 Radio.
21. Vehicle in Service Mode. Radio ON.
22. Verify that DTC U0028 does not set.
Refer to Diagnostic Aids.
23. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Repair Verification
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Install any components or connectors that have been removed or replaced during diagnosis.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Clear the DTCs.
5. Verify the A11 Radio scan tool Surrogate MOST Master Node Upstream Position parameter value is
None.
Disconnect the A11 Radio power or the battery cables for 1 min to reset this value to None.
6. All OK.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
MOST Bus Performance
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST) bus master device shall set DTC U0029 when the MOST bus
interruptions lasts long enough to interrupt MOST communication and functions, but not long enough to break
the MOST bus ring.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
• The vehicle is ON.
• The Radio is ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A current DTC sets when MOST bus communication has been interrupted more than 10 times during the
monitoring cycle period.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Some or all of the infotainment system may be inoperative for brief periods of time.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
A current DTC is cleared when MOST bus communication interruptions are no longer detected and the Number
of MOST Communication Breaks counter remains at 0.
Diagnostic Aids
This is an intermittent connection detection DTC. All MOST device connectors should be checked for poor
connections on both MOST bus circuits.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode. Radio ON.
2. Verify that DTC U0029 is not set with symptom byte 02.
• If DTC U0029 is set with symptom byte 02
Refer to DTC U2098 .
• If DTC U0029 is set with other symptom bytes except 02
3. Verify that DTC U0028 is set.
• If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC U0028.
• If the DTC is not set
4. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections to test for an intermittent
condition.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Serial Data Circuit Wiring Repairs
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U0073 OR U2100: CONTROL MODULE COMMUNICATION BUS A OFF/CAN BUS
COMMUNICATION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC U0073
Control Module Communication Bus A Off
CAN Bus Communication
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The serial data circuits are used to communicate information between the devices. The serial data circuits also
connect directly to the data link connector (DLC).
Conditions for Running the DTCs
• Supply voltage to the devices is in the normal operating range.
• The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3
times in 5 s.
Action Taken When the DTCs Sets
• The device suspends all message transmission.
• The device uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits.
• In the transmission control module, DTC U0073 will cause the transmission to go into default gears.
• In the engine control module and transmission control module, DTC U0073 will cause the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate.
• If equipped with eAssist, DTC U0073 in the hybrid powertrain control module is a type B DTC and will
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to illuminate and result in the engine operating in conventional
engine mode and will maintain 14 V module operation.
• The device inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The engine control module or transmission control module turns OFF the MIL after 4 consecutive
ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
• If equipped with eAssist, the hybrid powertrain control module turns off the MIL after the diagnostic runs
and does not fail during subsequent ignition cycles. Normal operation will resume 5 s after subsequent
ignition cycle.
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Circuit/System Verification
1. Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data communication system is used for a
specific device.
2. This DTC may not be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the symptom.
Refer to Symptoms - Data Communications .
DTC U0074: CONTROL MODULE COMMUNICATION POWERTRAIN EXPANSION CAN BUS
OFF
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Control Module Communication Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus Off
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speeds up to 500 Kb/s. The twisted pair is
terminated with two 120 Q resistors, one is internal to the engine control module (ECM) and the other can be a
separate resistor in a connector assembly or in another device. The resistors are used as the load for the
powertrain high speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The powertrain high speed GMLAN is a
differential bus. The powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and powertrain high speed GMLAN
serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level of approximately 2.5 V. Driving the lines
to their extremes, adds 1 V to the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) circuit and subtracts 1 V
from the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) circuit. If serial data is lost, devices will set a no
communication code against the non-communicating device. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not
represent a failure of the device that set it.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the powertrain high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits more than 3 times.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The device suspends all message transmission.
• The MIL and battery indicators will illuminate, along with several DIC messages.
• DTC U0074 is a type A DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
• DTC U0074 is a type A DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial
data bus.
• Use Data Link References to determine which devices connect to the powertrain high speed GMLAN
serial data bus.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Control Module References
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Some devices with an internal terminating resistor have a loop in the harness
that connects the internal terminating resistor to the serial data circuit. When
wired this way, test these loop circuits for the appropriate failure mode short to
voltage, short to ground, or open/high resistance prior to replacing the device
for each of the following tests.
Each device may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the
schematics and connector end views to identify the following:
• Powertrain high speed GMLAN devices and terminating resistors the
vehicle is equipped with
• Device locations on the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and powertrain high speed GMLAN
serial data circuit terminals
1. Refer to Data Link References to determine which devices are on the powertrain expansion bus.
2. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connectors
containing the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible device that is not
communicating.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for less than 4.5 V between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit at the device that
was just disconnected and ground.
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage.
5. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
6. Test for greater than 100 fi between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit at the device
that was just disconnected and ground.
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground.
7. Test for 110 - 130 fi between each pair of the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the
device that was just disconnected.
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits.
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance.
8. Refer to Testing the Device Circuits.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each of the device's ground circuit terminals and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 10 fi, replace the device that was disconnected.
3. Repeat step 1 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors containing the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to ground.
3. Test for greater than 100 fi between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
• If all serial data circuits are 100 fi or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
4. Repeat step 2 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was previously disconnected.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors containing the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted together.
4. Test for greater than 110 fi between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 110 fi or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
5. Repeat step 2 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• Serial data circuits shorted together between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• Serial data circuits shorted together between a device and a terminating resistor.
• A shorted terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was previously disconnected.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors containing the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
another device, in the direction of the circuit with the open/high resistance.
4. Test for less than 130 fi between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 130 fi or less
Replace the device that was disconnected.
5. Repeat step 2 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
• An open/high resistance terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal at the device that was just disconnected and
ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which has a fuse in the
circuit, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which is controlled by a
control module, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the control module that
controls the ignition circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Replace the device that was disconnected.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U0075: CONTROL MODULE COMMUNICATION OBJECT DETECTION CAN BUS OFF
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Control Module Communication Object Detection CAN Bus Off
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
The devices connected to the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data
communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among
the devices when the ignition switch is in any position other than OFF. The object high speed GMLAN serial
data bus uses terminating resistors that are in parallel with the object high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Use the Data Link References to identify the object detection high speed GMLAN devices.
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between some devices and the scan tool with the object high speed
GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to those devices using multiple serial data
communication systems.
• An open in the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but not communicate
with the vehicle.
• Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTC).
• Some devices may not have internal protection for specific voltage outputs and may open a battery
positive voltage or ignition voltage source fuse. If a voltage input fuse is open and no short is found in
that circuit, ensure that no device output voltage circuit is shorted to ground before replacing the device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
2. Verify two or more devices are not communicating on the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
Refer to Data Link References to determine how many devices should be communicating on this bus.
• If only one device is not communicating
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Device Circuits.
3. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the scan
tool from the X84 Data Link Connector. The following tests will be done at the X84 Data Link
Connector.
4. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
5. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
6. Test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits listed below and ground:
• Terminal 3
• Terminal 11
• If 4.5 V or greater
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage.
7. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for greater than 100 Q between the serial data circuits listed below and ground:
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground.
9. Test for 50 - 70 Q between the serial data circuit terminals 3 and 11.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits.
There may be a third terminating resistor between the serial data circuits. This can happen if the
incorrect device is installed. Some devices are available with and without the terminating resistors
installed to reduce the need of terminating resistors in the wiring harness. Refer to Circuit/System
Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance.
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit between the X84 Data Link Connector and the first
splice/device in the serial data circuit.
10. Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Device Circuits.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Some devices with an internal terminating resistor have a loop in the harness
that connects the internal terminating resistor to the serial data circuit. When
wired this way, test these loop circuits for the appropriate failure mode short to
voltage, short to ground, or open/high resistance prior to replacing the device
for each of the following tests. Each device may need to be disconnected to
isolate a circuit fault. Use the schematics and connector end views to identify
the following:
• Object high speed GMLAN devices and terminating resistors the vehicle is
equipped with
• Device locations on the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and object high speed GMLAN serial
data circuit terminals
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification must be performed before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits at an easily accessible device, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
2. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m
(9.8 ft) away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each of the device's ground circuit terminals and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 10 Q, replace the device that was disconnected.
• If any serial data circuit is greater than 4.5 V
3. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service
Mode.
4. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m
(9.8 ft) away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each of the device's ground circuit terminals and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 10 Q, replace the device that was disconnected.
• If any serial data circuit is greater than 4.5 V
5. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness
connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible device.
2. Test for greater than 100 Q between each object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit at the device
connector that was just disconnected and ground.
• If each serial data circuit is 100 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to ground.
4. Test for greater than 100 Q between each object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit at the device
connector that was just disconnected and ground.
• If both serial data circuits are 100 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
5. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between the X84 Data Link Connector and the first
device or splice pack.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness
connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible device that is
not communicating.
2. Test for greater than 110 fi between each pair of object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the
device connector that was just disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 110 fi or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
3. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was disconnected.
4. Disconnect the harness connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
device, in the direction of the circuit shorted together.
5. Test for greater than 110 fi between each pair of object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the
device connector that was just disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 110 fi or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• Serial data circuits shorted together between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• Serial data circuits shorted together between a device and a terminating resistor.
• Serial data circuits shorted together between the X84 Data Link Connector and the first device or
splice pack.
• A shorted terminating resistor.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness
connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible device that is
not communicating.
2. Test for less than 130 fi between each pair of object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the device
connector that was just disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 130 fi or less
Replace the device that was disconnected.
3. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was disconnected.
4. Disconnect the harness connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
device, in the direction of the circuit with the open/high resistance.
5. Test for less than 130 fi between each pair of object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the device
connector that was just disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 130 fi or less
Replace the device that was disconnected.
6. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
• An open/high resistance terminating resistor.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness
connectors at an easily accessible device that is not communicating.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which has a fuse in the
circuit, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which is controlled by a
control module, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the control
module that controls the ignition circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for less than 2 Q in each object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit end to end between the device
harness connector and the appropriate X84 Data Link Connector terminals listed below.
• X84 Data Link Connector terminal 3
• X84 Data Link Connector terminal 11
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
9. Replace the device that was disconnected.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U0077: CONTROL MODULE COMMUNICATION CHASSIS EXPANSION CAN BUS OFF
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Control Module Communication Chassis Expansion CAN Bus Off
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
The GMLAN high speed chassis expansion bus functions the same as the GMLAN high speed bus, and the two
buses operate in parallel. The expansion chassis bus was added to reduce message congestion on the primary
high speed bus. Since the GMLAN high speed chassis bus and primary GMLAN high speed bus operate in the
same manner, the diagnostics for each are the same.
The chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits also connect directly to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the chassis high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits more than 3 times.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The device suspends all message transmission.
• The device uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits.
• The device inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs.
• DTC U0077 is a type A DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
• DTC U0077 is a type A DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify two or more devices are not communicating on the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
Refer to Data Link References to determine how many devices should be communicating on the bus.
• If only one device is not communicating
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Device Circuits.
3. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the scan tool from the
X84 Data Link Connector. The following tests will be done at the X84 Data Link Connector.
4. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. Test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits listed below and ground.
• Terminal 12
• Terminal 13
• If 4.5 V or greater
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage.
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for greater than 100 fi between the serial data circuits listed below and ground.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground.
9. Test for 50 - 70 fi between the serial data circuit terminals 12 and 13.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits.
There may be a third terminating resistor between the serial data circuits. This can happen if the
incorrect device is installed. Some devices are available with and without the terminating resistors
installed to reduce the need of terminating resistors in the wiring harness. Refer to Circuit/System
Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance.
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit between the X84 Data Link Connector and the first
splice/device in the serial data circuit.
10. Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Device Circuits.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Some devices with an internal terminating resistor have a loop in the harness
that connects the internal terminating resistor to the serial data circuit. When
wired this way, test these loop circuits for the appropriate failure mode short to
voltage, short to ground, or open/high resistance prior to replacing the device
for each of the following tests.
Each device may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the
schematics and connector end views to identify the following:
• Chassis high speed GMLAN devices the vehicle is equipped with
• Chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminating resistors
• Device locations on the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and chassis high speed GMLAN serial
data circuit terminals
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at an easily accessible device, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each of the device's ground circuit terminals and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 10 Q, replace the device that was disconnected.
• If any serial data circuit is greater than 4.5 V
3. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage, Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each of the device's ground circuit terminals and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 10 Q, replace the device that was disconnected.
• If any serial data circuit is greater than 4.5 V
5. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily
accessible device.
3. Test for greater than 100 Q between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
• If each serial data circuit is 100 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
4. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to ground.
5. Test for greater than 100 Q between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
• If both serial data circuits are 100 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
6. Repeat step 4 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between the X84 Data Link Connector and the first
device or splice pack.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily
accessible device that is not communicating.
3. Test for greater than 110 Q between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 110 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
4. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was disconnected.
5. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
device, in the direction of the circuit shorted together.
6. Test for greater than 110 Q between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 110 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
• If any pair of serial data circuits is less than 110 Q
7. Repeat step 4 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• Serial data circuits shorted together between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• Serial data circuits shorted together between a device and a terminating resistor.
• Serial data circuits shorted together between the X84 Data Link Connector and the first device or
splice pack.
• A shorted terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily
accessible device that is not communicating.
3. Test for less than 130 Q between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuit is 130 Q or less
Replace the device that was disconnected.
4. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was disconnected.
5. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
device, in the direction of the circuit with the open/high resistance.
6. Test for less than 130 Q between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 130 Q or less
Replace the device that was disconnected.
7. Repeat step 4 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
• An open/high resistance terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors at an easily accessible device that is not communicating.
3. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
4. Vehicle in Service Mode
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. Vehicle in Service Mode.
7. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which has a fuse in the
circuit, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
8. Vehicle in Service Mode
9. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which is controlled by a
control module, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the control module that
controls the ignition circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
10. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
11. Test for less than 130 Q between each pair of chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the device
connector that was just disconnected.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuits between the disconnected device and the
circuit splice in the serial data circuits.
12. Replace the device that was disconnected.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Control Module Communication Low Speed CAN Bus Off
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The low speed GMLAN serial data bus is used to communicate information between the devices. The serial
data is transmitted over a single wire to the appropriate devices. The low speed GMLAN serial data circuits also
connect directly to the data link connector (DLC).
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Supply voltage to the devices are in the normal operating range.
• The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3
times in 5 seconds.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The device suspends all message transmission.
• The device uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits.
• The device inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC U0078 is not set.
• If DTC U0078 is set
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device .
• If DTC U0078 is not set
3. All OK
DTC U007A: CONTROL MODULE COMMUNICATION HIGH VOLTAGE ENERGY
MANAGEMENT CAN BUS OFF
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Control Module Communication High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus Off
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
|
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for
serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are
exchanged among the devices when the vehicle is on. The high voltage energy management high speed
GMLAN serial data bus uses a terminating resistor that is in parallel with the high voltage energy management
high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the high voltage energy management
high speed GMLAN serial data circuits more than 3 times.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The device suspends all message transmission.
• The device uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits.
• The device inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• The engine may not start when there is a total malfunction of the high voltage energy management high
speed GMLAN serial data bus.
• Use Data Link References to determine which devices connect to the high voltage energy management
high speed GMLAN serial data bus.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: Some devices with an internal terminating resistor have a loop in the harness
that connects the internal terminating resistor to the serial data circuit. When
wired this way, test these loop circuits for the appropriate failure mode short to
voltage, short to ground, or open/high resistance prior to replacing the device
for each of the following tests.
Each device may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the
schematics and connector end views to identify the following:
• High voltage energy management high speed GMLAN devices and
terminating resistors the vehicle is equipped with
• Device locations on the high voltage energy management high speed
GMLAN serial data circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and high voltage energy management
high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals
1. Perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure before proceeding with this diagnostic. Refer to High
Voltage Disabling .
2. Reconnect the 12 V battery after performing the high voltage disabling procedure.
3. Refer to Data Link References to determine which devices are on the high voltage energy management
expansion bus.
4. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connectors
containing the high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily
accessible device that is not communicating.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. Test for less than 4.5 V between each high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN serial data
circuit at the device that was just disconnected and ground.
• If any serial data circuit is 4.5 V or greater
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage.
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for greater than 100 Q between each high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN serial
data circuit at the device that was just disconnected and ground.
• If any serial data circuit is 100 Q or less
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground.
9. Test for 110 - 130 Q between each pair of the high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits at the device that was just disconnected.
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits.
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance.
10. Refer to Testing the Device Circuits.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors containing the high voltage energy management high
speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage,
Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each of the device's ground circuit terminals and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 10 Q, replace the device that was disconnected.
• If any serial data circuit is greater than 4.5 V
3. Repeat step 1 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors containing the high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to ground.
3. Test for greater than 100 Q between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
• If all serial data circuits are 100 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
4. Repeat step 2 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was previously disconnected.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors containing the high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted together.
4. Test for greater than 110 Q between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 110 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
5. Repeat step 2 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• Serial data circuits shorted together between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• Serial data circuits shorted together between a device and a terminating resistor.
• A shorted terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was previously disconnected.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors containing the high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit with the open/high resistance.
4. Test for less than 130 fi between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 130 fi or less
Replace the device that was disconnected.
5. Repeat step 2 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
• An open/high resistance terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal at the device that was just disconnected and
ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which has a fuse in the
circuit, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which is controlled by a
control module, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the control module that
controls the ignition circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Replace the device that was disconnected.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U0100-U02FF: CONTROL MODULE U CODE LIST
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
For device DTC descriptors, refer to Control Module U Code List.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the Data Link Connector (DLC) on the driver side, the
scan tool can be used to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs). The Auxiliary Data Connector on the passenger side is used for expansion buses. When the vehicle is
on, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure that the
device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example if the
device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit disappears.
Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect its absence;
those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non-communicating device. The
DTC is unique to the device which is not communicating and one or more devices may set the same exact code.
A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the stored
DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Specific subsystems will not function.
• DTC U0100 in the Transmission Control Module will cause the transmission to go into default gears.
• Both DTC U0100 in the Transmission Control Module and DTC U0101 in the Engine Control Module
will cause the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The Engine Control Module or Transmission Control Module turns OFF the MIL after 4 consecutive
ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between some devices and the scan tool with either the low or high
speed GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to those devices using multiple serial
data communication systems.
• Use Data Link References to determine what serial data communications the device uses.
• Some devices may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the device.
• Some intermittent communication concerns may be caused by fretting corrosion on the serial data circuit
terminals. Inspect all connectors at the device that set the communication DTC, the device that the
communication DTC was set against, and any inline harness connectors between the two devices. Do not
replace a device based only on fretting corrosion. Refer to bulletin 09-06-03-004 for assistance with the
diagnosis and repair of this condition, if applicable.
• This diagnostic can be used for any device that is not communicating, regardless of the type of serial data
circuit it is connected to, providing the vehicle is equipped with the device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
Circuit/System Verification
1. Determine the device that is not communicating. Refer to Control Module U Code List.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325,
B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562
is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data, serial data communication enable,
accessory wake up serial data 2, high voltage energy management
communication enable, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Using the High Voltage Device Chart below, verify that the non-communicating device is not a high
voltage device. If the device is a high voltage device, perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure
before proceeding with this diagnostic. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .
2. If high voltage disabling is required, reconnect the 12 V battery after performing the high voltage
disabling procedure.
3. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect all the harness
connectors at the device that is not communicating.
4. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which is controlled by a
control module, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the control module that
controls the ignition circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Test for less than 4.5 V between each GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
• If 4.5 V or greater between a low speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device to test for a short
to voltage.
• If 4.5 V or greater between a high speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device to test for a short
to voltage.
10. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
11. Test for greater than 100 Q between each GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
• If 100 Q or less between a low speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device to test for a short
to ground.
• If 100 Q or less between a high speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device to test for a short
to ground.
12. Test for less than 2 Q in each of the serial data circuits end to end between the device harness connector
and the appropriate X84 Data Link Connector terminals listed below:
• X84 DLC low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal 1
• X84 DLC high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal 6 or 14
• X84 DLC object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal 3 or 11
• X84 DLC chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal 12 or 13
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit between the non communicating device
and the device setting the DTC or a serial data splice pack.
• If less than 2 Q
NOTE: The following test step is only applicable to a high speed GMLAN device
with 2 pairs of serial data circuits or a high speed GMLAN device with an
internal terminating resistor.
13. Test for 110 - 130 Q between each pair of high speed GMLAN serial data circuits.
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device to test for a short
to ground or a short between the serial data circuits.
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device to test for an
open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
14. Replace the device that is not communicating.
|
High Voltage Device Chart | ||||||
| ||||||
|
Repair Instructions |
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U0300-U0336: CONTROL MODULE U CODE LIST
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Refer to Control Module U Code List.
Circuit/System Description
Some devices must be configured with specific software, serial numbers, vehicle options, or other information.
If a device was not properly configured after installation that device may set the appropriate communication
DTCs. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Battery voltage is between 9 - 16 V and data link communications operate normally.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device is not configured properly.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC U0300-U0336 is not set.
1. Program the device specified by the DTC descriptor.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the device specified by the DTC descriptor.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U0400-U05FF: CONTROL MODULE U CODE LIST
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Refer to Control Module U Code List.
Circuit/System Description
Some devices are constantly receiving information from other devices through serial data communication
network. The invalid data code will be set when a receiving device detects a discrepancy in information it
receives from another device causing its integrity to be questioned. The symptom byte listed in the DTC
Descriptor is for engineering reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Battery voltage is between 9 - 16 V and data link communications operate normally.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device is not configured properly.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Control Module References
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Engine running for 10 seconds.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify DTC U0400-U05FF is not set.
• If DTC U0400-U05FF is set along with other DTCs set
Diagnose all other DTCs first. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If DTC U0400-U05FF is set without other DTCs set
1. Program the device specified by the DTC descriptor.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the appropriate device.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
• If DTC U0400-U05FF is not set
4. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U1340-U135F: CONTROL MODULE U CODE LIST
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
For device DTC descriptors, refer to Control Module U Code List.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus consists of a single wire with a transmission rate of 10.417 Kbit/s.
The serial data is transmitted over a LIN circuit between a master control module and other LIN devices within
a particular subsystem. If serial data communication is lost between any of the LIN devices on the LIN bus
network, the master control module will set a no communication code against the non-communicating LIN
device.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Some devices may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the device.
• An open in the LIN bus serial data circuit between the splice pack and a LIN device will only affect that
specific LIN device. This type of failure will set a loss of communication DTC for each LIN device
affected and the other LIN devices will still communicate.
• This diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the common LIN DTCs: U1340, U1341, U1342,
U1343, U1344, U1345, U1346, U1347, U1348, U1349, U134A, U134B, U134C, U134D, U134E, U134F,
U1350, U1351, U1352, U1353, U1354, U1355, U1356, U1357, U1358, U1359, U135A, U135B, U135C,
U135D, U135E, and U135F.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Determine the LIN device that is not communicating. Refer to Control Module U Code List.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify that DTC B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1,
P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Verify that DTC U0100 - U02FF is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF.
• If none of the DTCs are set
5. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics to determine the master control module and all LIN devices
on the same LIN serial data circuit. Use the connector end views to identify the
B+, ignition, ground, and LIN serial data circuit terminals for each of those
devices.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connector
at a LIN device that is not communicating.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected LIN device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected LIN device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which is controlled by a
control module, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the control module that
controls the ignition circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
NOTE: For accurate voltage reading, disconnect the battery charger prior to
performing the following test step.
7. Test for 2 - 12 V between the LIN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the control module setting the DTC and all LIN
devices that share the same LIN serial data circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q
4. Reconnect the control module that set the DTC, Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Test for 2 - 12 V between the LIN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
• If less than 2 V, replace the control module setting the DTC.
• If greater than 2 V, replace the LIN device that causes a current DTC to set when connected.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the control module setting the DTC and all LIN
devices that share the same LIN serial data circuit.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the serial data circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
4. Vehicle OFF, reconnect the control module that set the DTC, Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Test for 2 - 12 V between the LIN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
• If greater than 12 V, replace the control module setting the DTC.
• If less than 12 V, replace the LIN device that causes a current DTC to set when connected.
8. Replace the disconnected LIN device.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
For device DTC descriptors, refer to Control Module U Code List.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The serial data is transmitted over a Local Interconnect Network (LIN) single wire network circuit bus between
a master control module and other LIN devices within a particular subsystem. If serial data communication is
lost between any of the LIN devices on the LIN bus network, a no communication code against the non-
communicating LIN device will be set. A master control module is the one that reports the non communication
code. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the master control module that
set it.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication will be available between the master control module and the scan tool if there is a loss of
communications with any of the other LIN devices on the LIN bus network.
• Some devices may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the device.
• Some intermittent communication concerns may be caused by fretting corrosion on the serial data circuit
terminals. Inspect all connectors at the device that set the communication DTC, the device that the
communication DTC was set against, and any inline harness connectors between the two devices. Do not
replace a device based only on fretting corrosion. Refer to bulletin 09-06-03-004 for assistance with the
diagnosis and repair of this condition, if applicable.
• An open in the LIN bus serial data circuit between the splice pack and a LIN device will only affect that
specific LIN device. This type of failure will set a loss of communication DTC for each LIN device
affected and the other LIN devices will still communicate.
• This diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the common LIN DTCs: U1500, U1501, U1502,
U1503, U1504, U1505, U1506, U1507, U1508, U1509, U150E, U150F, U1510, U1511, U1512, U1513,
U1514, U1515, U1516, U1517, U1518, U1519, U151A, U151B, U151C, U1520, U1521, U1522, U1523,
U1524, U1526, U1528, U152C, U152D, U1530, U1531, U1532, U1534, U1538, U153A, U1540, U1544,
U1548, U1549, U154A, U154B, U1550, U1556, U1558, U15E1, U15E3, U15F0, and other DTCs within
the U1500 - U15FF range.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics to determine the master control module and all LIN devices
on the same LIN serial data circuit. Use the connector end view to identify the
B+, ignition, ground, and LIN serial data circuit terminals for each of those
devices.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connector
at a LIN device that is not communicating.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground, if equipped.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected LIN device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground, if equipped.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected LIN device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. Verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which is controlled by a control
module, and ground, if equipped.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the control module that
controls the ignition circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
NOTE: For accurate voltage reading, disconnect the battery charger prior to
performing the following test step.
7. Test for 2 - 12 V between the LIN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
• If less than 2 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the control module setting the DTC and all LIN
devices that share the same LIN serial data circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q
4. Reconnect the control module that set the DTC, Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Test for 2 - 12 V between the LIN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
• If less than 2 V, replace the control module setting the DTC.
• If greater than 2 V, replace the LIN device that causes a current DTC to set when connected.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the control module setting the DTC and all LIN
devices that share the same LIN serial data circuit.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the serial data circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
4. Vehicle OFF, reconnect the control module that set the DTC, Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Test for 2 - 12 V between the LIN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
• If greater than 12 V, replace the control module setting the DTC.
• If less than 12 V, replace the LIN device that causes a current DTC to set when connected.
8. Replace the disconnected LIN device.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the Data Link Connector (DLC), the scan tool can be
used to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). When the
vehicle is on, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure that
the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example if
the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC U179A is a type A DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC U179A is a type A DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380,
B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2. It
may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the accessory wakeup serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2 min for all
vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 fi in each serial data circuits end to end between the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain
Control Module 2 and the device setting the DTC.
• If 2 fi or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U179D: LOST COMMUNICATION WITH BRAKE SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE 2 ON
CHASSIS EXPANSION BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module 2 on Chassis Expansion Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• A driver information center message and/or a warning indicator may be displayed.
• The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K177 Brake Booster Control Module. It may
take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K177 Brake Booster Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K177 Brake Booster Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
7. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2
min for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for less than 2 Q in each Chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the
K177 Brake Booster Control Module and the device setting the DTC.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
9. Replace the K177 Brake Booster Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the Data Link Connector (DLC), the scan tool can be
used to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). When the
vehicle is on, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure that
the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example if
the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380,
B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2. It
may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2 min for all
vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 Q in each serial data circuits end to end between the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain
Control Module 2 and the device setting the DTC.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U1806: BATTERY ENERGY CONTROL MODULE HIGH VOLTAGE ENERGY
MANAGEMENT CAN BUS OFF
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Battery Energy Control Module High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus Off
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN serial data circuits are serial data buses used to
communicate information between the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2, the Battery Energy Control
Module, and the Battery Charger. If this serial data system is inoperative the devices will not communicate with
each other on this bus, but they still communicate with the scan tool through high speed GMLAN bus.
The scan tool does not communicate with devices through the high voltage energy management high speed
GMLAN bus. The high voltage energy high speed GMLAN serial data circuits connect directly to the auxiliary
data connector and do not connect with the scan tool.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle ON.
• The system voltage is at least 9 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits for more than
1.4 seconds without success.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTC U1806 is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC U1806 is a type B DTC.
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC U1806 is not set.
Refer to DTC U007A.
3. All OK
DTC U180B: BATTERY ENERGY CONTROL MODULE HIGH SPEED CAN BUS OFF
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Battery Energy Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The high speed GMLAN serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the
devices. The high speed GMLAN serial data circuits connect directly to the data link connector (DLC) for
programming purposes.
This diagnostic is used to check the high speed GMLAN communication bus status.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle ON.
• The system voltage is at least 9 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits for more than
1.4 seconds without success.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTC U180B is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC U180B is a type B DTC.
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC U180B is not set.
3. All OK
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Powertrain Wake-Up Communication Circuit
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||
The body control module activates the ignition circuit, when the ignition key is in ACC, ON or START. The
ignition circuit wakes up the devices for serial data bus communication.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
• The vehicle power mode master requires serial data communication to occur.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The body control module senses a short to ground on the ignition circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The output command is turned off while the malfunction is present.
• The devices use a default value for the missing parameters until the next ignition cycle.
• The device(s) is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystem(s) will not function.
• The vehicle will not start while the circuit is shorted to ground.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics to determine which devices are on the K9 body control
module's ignition circuit terminal 22 X4. Use the connector end view to identify
the ignition circuit terminal for each of those devices.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at an easily accessible device that shares the K9 body
control module's ignition circuit terminal 22 X4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that the DTC U1814 remains current.
• If the DTC becomes history
Replace the device that was just disconnected.
3. With the prior devices disconnected, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each device on the ignition circuit except the
K9 body control module.
4. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 body control module.
5. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit terminal 22 X4 at the K9 body control module and
ground.
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
6. Replace the K9 body control module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Article GUID: A00884665
Data Communications - Diagnostic Information and Procedures - Volt
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
DTC U1817: LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HYBRID POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE ON
POWERTRAIN EXPANSION CAN BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Hybrid Powertrain Control Module on Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data
communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among
the devices. The devices have prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the
serial data circuits, for each virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are
used by the receiver device as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the
identification number of the transmitter device.
The Motor Control Modules and the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1 are all internal to the Power Inverter
Module. All circuits to the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1 are also internal to the Power Inverter Module
and replaced as a single component.
Communication diagnostics for the serial data, including device power and ground as well as the wakeup
circuits for Motor Control Modules and the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1 are all diagnosed from
external sources only to the Power Inverter Module connector because any circuit fault condition within the
Power Inverter Module will cause a complete replacement.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is more than 10 V.
• The vehicle power mode master requires serial data communication to occur from this specific device.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC U1817 is a type A DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC U1817 is a type A DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0293 is not set.
• If DTC U0293 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0293 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
4. Verify that DTCs U1818, U1821, and U182D are not set.
• If all of the DTCs are set together
Refer to DTC U0074 .
• If all of the DTCs are not set together
5. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the X1 and X2 harness connectors at the T6 Power Inverter Module. It
may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the T6 Power Inverter Module case and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
Check the ground connection and ground strap for the open/high resistance.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 fi in each of the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end
between the T6 Power Inverter Module and the device setting the DTC.
• If 2 fi or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U1818: LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ENGINE CONTROL MODULE ON POWERTRAIN
EXPANSION COMMUNICATION BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Engine Control Module on Powertrain Expansion Communication Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is at least 10 V.
• The vehicle power mode master requires serial data communication to occur from this specific device.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC U1818 is a type A DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC U1818 is a type A DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0100 is not set.
• If DTC U0100 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0100 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Verify that DTCs U1817, U1821, and U182D are not set.
• If all of the DTCs are set together
Refer to DTC U0074 .
• If all of the DTCs are not set together
5. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K20 Engine Control Module. It may take up
to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 Q in each of the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end
between the K20 Engine Control Module and the device setting the DTC.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 on Powertrain Expansion
Communication Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the data link connector (DLC), the scan tool can be used
to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). When the
vehicle is on, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure that
the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example if
the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is at least 11 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received for 10
seconds.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTC U182D is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC U182D is a type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Verify that DTCs U1817, U1818, and U1821 are not set.
• If all of the DTCs are set together
Refer to DTC U0074 .
• If all of the DTCs are not set together
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 Q in each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the
K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 and the device setting the DTC.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U182E OR U182F: DRIVE MOTOR CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
HYBRID PCM 2 ON POWERTRAIN EXPANSION COMMUNICATION BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 on
Powertrain Expansion Communication Bus
Drive Motor Control Module 2 Lost Communication with Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 on
Powertrain Expansion Communication Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the data link connector (DLC), the scan tool can be used
to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). When the
vehicle is on, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure that
the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example if
the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is at least 10 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTCs U182E and U182F are type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTCs U182E and U182F are type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380,
B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module. It may take up
to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 Q in each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the
K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 and the T6 Power Inverter Module.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Electronic Brake Control Module on Chassis Expansion CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is at least 10 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• A driver information center message and/or a warning indicator may be displayed.
• The DTC U1833 is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC U1833 is a type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0121 or U0129 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K17 Electronic Brake Control Module. It may take up
to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K17 Electronic Brake Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K17 Electronic Brake Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2 min for all
vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 Q in each Chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the K17
Electronic Brake Control Module and the device setting the DTC.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K17 Electronic Brake Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Telematics Communication Interface Control Module on Low Speed CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the Data Link Connector (DLC), the scan tool can be
used to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). When
the vehicle is ON, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to
ensure that the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for
example if the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data
circuit disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message,
detect its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non
communicating device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices
that contain the stored DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0198 is not set.
• If DTC U0198 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0198 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, serial data communication enable, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the serial data communication enable circuit terminal
and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data communication enable circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the serial data communication enable circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2 min for all
vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 Q in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the K73
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module and the device setting the DTC.
• If 2 О or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U1845 OR U1846: DRIVE MOTOR CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
HYBRID POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Hybrid Powertrain Control Module
Drive Motor Control Module 2 Lost Communication with Hybrid Powertrain Control Module
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The Motor Control Modules and the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1 are all internal to the Power Inverter
Module. The Motor Control Modules communicate only with the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1 with the
Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1 sending out diagnostic trouble code information to other devices regarding
the Motor Control Modules. All circuits to the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1 and Motor Control
Modules are also internal to the Power Inverter Module and replaced as a single component.
Communication diagnostics for the serial data, including device power and ground as well as the wakeup
circuits for Motor Control Modules and the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1 are all diagnosed from
external sources only to the Power Inverter Module connector because any circuit fault condition within the
Power Inverter Module will cause a complete replacement.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is more than 10 V.
• The vehicle power mode master requires serial data communication to occur from this specific device.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
• If DTC U1845 or U1846 is only set current in the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1, the Power
Inverter Module must be replaced due to all circuits between the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1
and Motor Control Modules being internal to the Power Inverter Module.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0293 is not set.
3. Verify that DTC U1845 or U1846 is not set current only in the K114A Hybrid Powertrain Control Module
1.
Replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Body Control Module on Low Speed CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
|
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the data link connector (DLC), the scan tool can be used
to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). When the
vehicle is ON, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure
that the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example
if the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0140 is not set.
• If DTC U0140 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0140 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0078, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517,
C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module. It may take up to
2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for less than 2 Q in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the K9 Body
Control Module and the device setting the DTC.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
9. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U184B: LOST COMMUNICATION WITH REMOTE HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL MODULE ON LOW SPEED CAN BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Remote Heater and Air Conditioning Control Module on Low Speed CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the data link connector (DLC), the scan tool can be used
to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). When the
vehicle is ON, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure
that the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example
if the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0164 is not set.
• If DTC U0164 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0164 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0078, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517,
C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K33 HVAC Control Module. It may take up
to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
• If less than 10 Q
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K33 HVAC Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K33 HVAC Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for less than 2 Q in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the K33 HVAC
Control Module and the device setting the DTC.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
9. Replace the K33 HVAC Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U184C: LOST COMMUNICATION WITH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ON LOW SPEED CAN
BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Instrument Cluster on Low Speed CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the data link connector (DLC), the scan tool can be used
to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). When the
vehicle is ON, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure
that the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example
if the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0155 is not set.
• If DTC U0155 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0155 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0078, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517,
C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the P16 Instrument Cluster. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for less than 2 Q in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the P16
Instrument Cluster and the device setting the DTC.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
9. Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U184D: LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO ON LOW SPEED CAN BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Radio on Low Speed CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the data link connector (DLC), the scan tool can be used
to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). When the
vehicle is ON, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure
that the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example
if the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0184 is not set.
• If DTC U0184 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0184 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0078, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517,
C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the A11 Radio. It may take up to 2 minutes for
all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
• If less than 10 Q
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the A11 Radio.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the A11 Radio.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for less than 2 fi in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the A11 Radio and
the device setting the DTC.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
9. Replace the A11 Radio.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U184E: LOST COMMUNICATION WITH INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND
DIAGNOSTIC MODULE ON LOW SPEED CAN BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module on Low Speed CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the data link connector (DLC), the scan tool can be used
to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). When the
vehicle is ON, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure
that the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example
if the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0151 is not set.
• If DTC U0151 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0151 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0078, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517,
C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and
Diagnostic Module. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for less than 2 fi in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the K36 Inflatable
Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module and the device setting the DTC.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
9. Replace the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control Module on High Voltage Energy Management CAN
Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is more than 10 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received for more
than 500 ms.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC U185A is a type A DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC U185A is a type A DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Hybrid/EV Energy Storage Schematics
Control Module References
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
• EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
• EL-50211 Low Voltage Jumper Harness Extension
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0111 is not set.
• If DTC U0111 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0111 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, high voltage energy management
communication enable, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the X357 and X358
harness connectors at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the high voltage energy management communication
enable circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the high voltage energy management communication enable
circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the high voltage energy management communication enable circuit end to
end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
8. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connectors
at the device setting the DTC.
9. Test for less than 2 Q in each high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
end to end between the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack and the device setting the DTC.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
10. Vehicle OFF, reconnect the X357 and X358 harness connectors at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
11. Perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure before proceeding with this diagnostic. Refer to High
12. Reconnect the 12 V battery.
13. Vehicle OFF, connect the EL-50211 low voltage jumper harness extension.
14. Disconnect the X8 harness connector at the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
15. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
16. Vehicle in Service Mode.
17. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
Repair the short to ground or the open/high resistance in the circuit.
18. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
Repair the short to ground or the open/high resistance in the circuit.
19. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
Repair the short to ground or the open/high resistance in the circuit.
20. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the high voltage energy management communication
enable circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
Repair the short to ground or the open/high resistance in the circuit.
21. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the X357 harness
connector at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
22. Test for less than 2 fi in each high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
end to end between the K16 Battery Energy Control Module and the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
• If 2 fi or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
23. Replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U185B: BATTERY ENERGY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
HYBRID/EV POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE 2 ON HIGH VOLTAGE ENERGY
MANAGEMENT CAN BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 on
High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
This diagnostic is used to check the loss of communication with the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
on high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN bus. The Battery Energy Control Module supervises a
periodic serial data message to check the communication status of the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
If this message is not received within 1 s, this DTC is set.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The device is awake and communicating.
• The system voltage is at least 9 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received within 1 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• No Cell Balancing function. However, cell balancing switch diagnostics still run.
• DTC U185B is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC U185B is a type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0078, U007A, U1814, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428,
B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connectors
at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
• If less than 10 fi
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the X357 harness
connector at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
8. Test for less than 2 Q in each high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
end to end between the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 and the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery
Pack.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
9. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage system. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .
10. Reconnect the 12 V battery.
11. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the X8 harness
connector at the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
12. Test for less than 2 Q in each high voltage energy management high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
end to end between the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack and the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
13. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid Powertrain Control Module
2
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Diagnostic Fault Information
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is greater than 10.25 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The A/C Compressor is not able to receive the serial data message from the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module
2 for 3 seconds.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTC U1860 is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC U1860 is a type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0078, U007A, U1814, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428,
B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the G1 A/C Compressor. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 Q in each serial data circuits end to end between the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain
Control Module 2 and the G1 A/C Compressor.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U1876: DRIVE MOTOR CONTROL MODULE 1 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ENGINE
CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Engine Control Module
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is greater than 9.5 V.
• The vehicle power mode master requires serial data communication to occur from this specific device.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTC U1876 is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC U1876 is a type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0100 is not set.
• If DTC U0100 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0100 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K20 Engine Control Module. It may take up
to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 О or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module. It may take up
to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 Q in each serial data circuits end to end between the K20 Engine Control Module and
the T6 Power Inverter Module.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Drive Motor Control Module 2 Lost Communication with Engine Control Module
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is greater than 9.5 V.
• The vehicle power mode master requires serial data communication to occur from this specific device.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTC U1879 is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC U1879 is a type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of- communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U-code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U-code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U-code. The U-code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0100 is not set.
• If DTC U0100 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0100 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K20 Engine Control Module. It may take up
to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module. It may take up
to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 Q in each serial data circuits end to end between the K20 Engine Control Module and
the T6 Power Inverter Module.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U1885: BATTERY ENERGY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
HYBRID/EV POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
This diagnostic is used to check the loss of communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 on
high speed GMLAN bus. The Battery Energy Control Module supervises a periodic serial data message to
check the communication status of the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1. If this message is not received
within 3 s, then this DTC is set.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle ON.
• The system voltage is at least 9 V.
• The DTC U180B is not set.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received within 3 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTC U1885 is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC U1885 is a type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0293 is not set.
• If DTC U0293 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0293 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module. It may take up to 2 min
for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal (or T6 Power Inverter Module case) and
ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
Check the ground connection and ground strap for the open/high resistance.
• If less than 10 fi
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the X357 and X358 harness connectors at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack. It may
take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for less than 2 fi in each high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the T6 Power
Inverter Module and the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
9. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage system. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .
10. Reconnect the 12 V battery.
11. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the X8 harness connector at the K16 Battery Energy Control Module. It may take up
to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
12. Test for less than 2 Q in each high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the A4
Hybrid/EV Battery Pack and the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
13. Replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Lost Communication with Fuel Pump Driver Control Module
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0077, U0078, U2100, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370,
B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connectors
at the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV
Powertrain Control Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connectors
at the device setting the DTC.
10. Test for less than 2 fi in each serial data circuits end to end between the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control
Module and the device setting the DTC.
• If 2 fi or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U18B5: LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HYBRID POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE ON
CHASSIS EXPANSION CAN BUS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication With Hybrid Powertrain Control Module on Chassis Expansion CAN Bus
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the Chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data
communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among
the devices. The devices have prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the
serial data circuits, for each virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are
used by the receiver device as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the
identification number of the transmitter device.
The Motor Control Modules and the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1 are all internal to the Power Inverter
Module. Communication diagnostics for the serial data, including device power and ground as well as the
wakeup circuits for Motor Control Modules and the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 1 are all diagnosed
from external sources only to the Power Inverter Module connector because any circuit fault condition within
the Power Inverter Module will cause a complete replacement.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Control Module References
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0293 is not set.
• If DTC U0293 is set
Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
• If DTC U0293 is not set
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the X1 and X2 harness connectors at the T6 Power Inverter Module. It
may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between each ground circuit terminal (or module case) and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the ground circuit or ground strap.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
7. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 2
min for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for less than 2 Q in each of the Chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between
the T6 Power Inverter Module and the device setting the DTC.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
9. Replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Primary High Speed CAN Bus Subnet Configuration List
Secondary High Speed CAN Bus Subnet Configuration List
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The devices on the high speed GMLAN serial data bus and the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data bus must
be programmed with software that specifically identifies the correct type and quantity of devices on the bus
based on RPO configuration. If a device was not properly configured after installation, the appropriate U Code
may be set for that device. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Voltage supplied to the device is in the normal operating voltage range.
• The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The device is not configured properly.
• The device recognises a programming error.
• CAN-Bus configuration is invalid
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC U18B9-U18BF is not set.
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
2. Vehicle OFF, remove the scan tool, open and close the driver door. Wait 60 seconds. Vehicle in
Service Mode.
3. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the appropriate device.
• If the DTC does not set
4. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
MOST Communication Enable Circuit Malfunction
MOST Communication Enable Circuit Short to Ground
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
|
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
When the vehicle is ON, the A11 Radio initializes the Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST) bus by
sending a short 100 ms low voltage pulse on the electronic control line (or MOST control line) connected to all
MOST devices contained on the MOST ring. When MOST receive, transmit, or control line faults are detected,
transmit/receive messages will not received as expected from the wakeup request. The A11 Radio and the K74
Human Machine Interface Control Module will then perform diagnostics to isolate these MOST faults. If the
MOST control line is shorted low to 0 V for excess amount of time, the A11 Radio will set a U2098 DTC and
K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module will set a U0029 02 DTC. At this point the MOST bus will be
unable to communicate until the shorted MOST control line is repaired.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
• The vehicle is ON.
• The Radio is ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The Radio senses a short to ground on the MOST control circuit.
• A current DTC is set when a MOST control circuit initialization is invoked and the circuit is detected to
be pulled low (0 V) for longer than 1 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Many or all entertainment components may not function properly.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC current status is cleared upon a successful MOST control circuit initialization occurs and the circuit is
no longer pulled low.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics to determine which MOST devices are on the A11 Radio's
MOST control circuit 7 X2. Use the connector end views to identify the MOST
control circuit terminal for each of those MOST devices.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at an easily accessible MOST device that shares the A11
Radio's MOST control circuit 7 X2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that the DTC U2098 or DTC U0029 02 remains current.
• If the DTC becomes history
Replace the MOST device that was just disconnected.
3. With the prior devices disconnected, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each MOST device on the MOST control
circuit except the A11 Radio.
4. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the A11 Radio.
5. Test for infinite resistance between the MOST control circuit terminal 7 X2 at the A11 Radio and ground.
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
6. Replace the A11 Radio.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U2099: HIGH SPEED COMMUNICATION ENABLE CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
High Speed Communication Enable Circuit
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||
The body control module activates the ignition circuit, when the ignition key is in ACC, ON or START. The
ignition circuit wakes up the devices for serial data bus communication.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
• The vehicle power mode master requires serial data communication to occur.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The body control module senses a short to ground on the ignition circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The output command is turned off while the malfunction is present.
• The devices use a default value for the missing parameters until the next ignition cycle.
• The device(s) is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystem(s) will not function.
• The vehicle will not start while the circuit is shorted to ground.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics to determine which devices are on the K9 body control
module's ignition circuit terminal 23 X4. Use the connector end view to identify
the ignition circuit terminal for each of those devices.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at an easily accessible device that shares the K9 body
control module's ignition circuit terminal 23 X4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that the DTC U2099 remains current.
• If the DTC becomes history
Replace the device that was just disconnected.
3. With the prior devices disconnected, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each device on the ignition circuit except the
K9 body control module.
4. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 body control module.
5. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit terminal 23 X4 at the K9 body control module and
ground.
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
6. Replace the K9 body control module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U2160-U2231: CONTROL MODULE U CODE LIST
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
For device DTC descriptors, refer to Control Module U Code List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that
contain the stored code.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
• This diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the common no communication DTCs: U216A,
U216B, and other DTCs within U2160 - U2231 range.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Determine the device that is not communicating. Refer to Control Module U Code List .
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect all the harness
connectors at the device that is not communicating.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which is controlled by a
control module, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the control module that
controls the ignition circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
NOTE: This test step is only applicable to a low speed GMLAN device.
9. Test for less than 4.5 V between each low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
• If 4.5 V or greater
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device to test for a short
to voltage in the serial data circuit.
10. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
11. Test for less than 2 Q in each of the serial data circuits end to end between the device harness connector
and the appropriate X84 Data Link Connector terminals listed below.
• Low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal 1
• High speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal 6 or 14
• Chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal 12 or 13
• Object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal 3 or 11
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit between the non communicating device
and the device setting the DTC or a serial data splice pack.
• If less than 2 Q
NOTE: The following test step is only applicable to a high speed GMLAN device
with 2 pairs of serial data circuits or a high speed GMLAN device with an
internal terminating resistor.
12. Test for 110 - 130 Q between each pair of high speed GMLAN serial data circuits.
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device to test for a short
to ground or a short between the serial data circuits.
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device to test for an
open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
13. Replace the device that is not communicating.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U2401: BATTERY ENERGY CONTROL MODULE DEDICATED BUS 1 OFF
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Battery Energy Control Module Dedicated Bus 1 Off
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The Battery Energy Control Module dedicated bus is a communication bus used to communicate between the
Battery Energy Control Module and the Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules inside the Hybrid/EV
Battery Pack assembly. The Battery Energy Control Module dedicated bus does not communicate with the scan
tool.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle ON.
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device setting the DTC has received too many transmit errors on the Battery Energy Control Module
dedicated serial data circuits.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC U2401 is a type A DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• DTC U2401 is a type A DTC.
• No bus off status.
Diagnostic Aids
The Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules 1 - 12 are all internal to the Battery Energy Control Module.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Hybrid/EV Energy Storage Schematics
Control Module References
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Verification
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify each scan tool Hybrid/EV Battery 1 - 96 parameters are between 3.45 - 4.05 V and all readings are
within 0.03 V of each other.
• If not between 3.45 - 4.05 V or not within 0.03 V of each other
Refer to DTC P0B3B-P0BBB, P1B16-P1B2D, P1B45-P1BFE, P1E01-P1E06, or P1E4C-P1E8B
.
• If between 3.45 - 4.05 V and within 0.03 V of each other
3. Verify that DTC U2401 is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
• If the DTC is not set
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U2602: BATTERY ENERGY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
HYBRID/EV POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE 2
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
This diagnostic is used to check the loss of communication with the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
on high speed GMLAN bus. The Battery Energy Control Module supervises a periodic serial data message to
check the communication status of the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2. If this message is not received
within 400 ms, the Battery Energy Control Module increases its fail count. When this fail count is over X Cal
Value (7) during Y Cal Value (10 samples), the diagnostic status of this code is set to Failed and transmitted
over high voltage energy high speed GMLAN bus to the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle ON.
• The system voltage is at least 9 V.
• The DTC U180B is not set.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received within 400
ms.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTC U2602 is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC U2602 is a type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Control Module References
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0078, U007A, U1814, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428,
B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2. It
may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
• If less than 10 Q
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the accessory wakeup serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the X357 and X358 harness connectors at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack. It may
take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
10. Test for less than 2 fi in each serial data circuits end to end between the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain
Control Module 2 and the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
• If 2 fi or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
• If less than 2 fi
11. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage system. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .
12. Reconnect the 12 V battery.
13. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. Disconnect the X8 harness connector at the K16 Battery Energy Control Module. It may take up
to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
14. Test for less than 2 Q in each serial data circuits end to end between the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack and
the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
15. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
1
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
2
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
3
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
5
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
6
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
7
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
8
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
9
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
10
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
11
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module
12
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
The scan tool does not communicate the Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules 1 - 12 on Battery
Energy Control Module dedicated bus.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The device is awake and communicating.
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
There is no temperature report message from Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules 1 - 12 to Battery
Energy Control Module within 4 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTC U2603, U2604, U2605, U2606, U2617, U2618, U2619, U2620, U2621, U2622, U2623, and U2624
are type A DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC U2603, U2604, U2605, U2606, U2617, U2618, U2619, U2620, U2621, U2622, U2623, and U2624
are type A DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
The Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Modules 1 - 12 are all internal to the Battery Energy Control Module.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Hybrid/EV Energy Storage Schematics
Control Module References
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
• Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Special Tools
EL-48900 HEV Safety Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
Circuit/System Verification
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U2401 is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC U2401.
• If the DTC is not set
3. Verify each scan tool Hybrid/EV Battery 1 - 96 parameters are between 3.45 - 4.05 V and all readings are
within 0.03 V of each other.
• If not between 3.45 - 4.05 V or not within 0.03 V of each other
Refer to DTC P0B3B-P0BBB, P1B16-P1B2D, P1B45-P1BFE, P1E01-P1E06, or P1E4C-P1E8B
4. Verify that DTC U2603, U2604, U2605, U2606, U2617, U2618, U2619, U2620, U2621, U2622, U2623,
or U2624 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U2616: FUEL PUMP DRIVER CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Fuel Pump Driver Control Module Lost Communication with ECM
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Specific subsystems will not function.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with one or more GMLAN serial
data systems inoperative. This condition is due to the device using multiple GMLAN busses.
• Use Data Link References to determine what GMLAN serial data communications the non
communicating device uses.
• The device may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the non communicating device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0077, U0078, U2100, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370,
B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data 2, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connectors
at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit terminal and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the K114B Hybrid/EV
Powertrain Control Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the accessory wakeup serial data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp illuminates
9. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connectors
at the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
10. Test for less than 2 Q in each serial data circuits end to end between the K20 Engine Control Module and
the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U3000: CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Control Module
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The internal fault detection is handled inside the device. The symptom byte information is for engineering
reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The device runs the program to detect an internal fault when power up is commanded. The only requirements
are voltage and ground.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device has detected an internal malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device refuses all additional inputs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• This DTC may be stored as a history DTC without affecting the operation of the device.
• If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Scan Tool Reference
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC U3000 is not set.
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the device that set the DTC.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
Replace the device that set the DTC.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Control Module Improper Wake-up Perfomance
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
The internal fault detection is handled inside the device. The symptom byte information is for engineering
reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The device runs the program to detect an internal fault when power up is commanded. The only requirements
are voltage and ground.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device has detected an internal malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The device refuses all additional inputs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• This DTC may be stored as a history DTC without affecting the operation of the device.
• If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC U3012 is not set.
Replace the device that set the DTC.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
SYMPTOMS - DATA COMMUNICATIONS
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables.
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that
all of the following are true:
• There are no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) set.
• The devices can communicate via the serial data links.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Data
Link Communications Description and Operation .
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. Refer to Checking
Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
• Scan Tool Does Not Power Up
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT POWER UP
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated
by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following:
• Scan tool B+ voltage at terminal 16
• Scan tool ground at terminal 4
• Common ground at terminal 5
Diagnostic Aids
• The scan tool will power up with the vehicle OFF. Some devices however, will not communicate unless
the vehicle is ON and the power mode master device sends the appropriate power mode message.
• If the B+ circuit, ground circuits, and connections of the data link connector are functioning properly, the
malfunction must be due to the scan tool.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 2 Q between each of the X84 data link connector ground circuit terminals listed below
and ground.
• Ground circuit terminal 4
• Ground circuit terminal 5
• If 2 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 16 at the X84 data link connector and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Refer to the scan tool user guide.
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH HIGH SPEED GMLAN DEVICE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speeds up to 500 Kb/s. The twisted pair is
terminated with two 120 Q resistors, one is internal to the engine control module (ECM) and the other can be a
separate resistor in a connector assembly or in another device. The resistors are used as the load for the High
Speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high
speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from
a rest or idle level of approximately 2.5 V. Driving the lines to their extremes, adds 1 V to the high speed
GMLAN serial data bus (+) circuit and subtracts 1 V from the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) circuit. If
serial data is lost, devices will set a no communication code against the non-communicating device. Note that a
loss of serial data DTC does not represent a failure of the device that set it.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history
U-code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss-of-communication
U-codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss-of-communication U-code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between some devices and the scan tool with the high speed GMLAN
serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to those devices using multiple serial data
communication systems.
• An open in the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but not communicate
with the vehicle.
• The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data bus.
• Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTC) and no low speed GMLAN communications with the scan tool.
• These conditions may be caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio module (see
bulletins). Some customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns:
• Vehicle will not crank
• Vehicle cranks but will not start
• Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages
• PRNDL gear indicator position errors
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify two or more devices are not communicating on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. Refer to
Data Link References to determine how many devices should be communicating on the bus.
• If only one device is not communicating
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Device Circuits.
3. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the scan tool from the X84 data link connector. The following tests will be
done at the X84 data link connector. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
4. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. Test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuits listed below and ground.
• Terminal 6
• Terminal 14
• If 4.5 V or greater
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage.
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for greater than 100 fi between the serial data circuits listed below and ground.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground.
9. Test for 50 - 70 fi between the serial data circuit terminals 6 and 14.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits.
There may be a third terminating resistor between the serial data circuits. This can happen if the
incorrect device is installed. Some devices are available with and without the terminating resistors
installed to reduce the need of terminating resistors in the wiring harness. Refer to Circuit/System
Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance.
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit between the X84 data link connector and the first
splice/device in the serial data circuit.
10. Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Device Circuits.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Some devices with an internal terminating resistor have a loop in the harness
that connects the internal terminating resistor to the serial data circuit. When
wired this way, test these loop circuits for the appropriate failure mode short to
voltage, short to ground, or open/high resistance prior to replacing the device
for each of the following tests.
Each device may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the
schematics and connector end views to identify the following:
• High speed GMLAN devices the vehicle is equipped with
• High speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminating resistors
• Device locations on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and high speed GMLAN serial data
circuit terminals
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an
easily accessible device, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each of the device's ground circuit terminals and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 10 Q, replace the device that was disconnected.
• If any serial data circuit is greater than 4.5 V
3. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage, Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between each of the device's ground circuit terminals and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 10 Q, replace the device that was disconnected.
• If any serial data circuit is greater than 4.5 V
5. Repeat step 3 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible
device.
3. Test for greater than 100 Q between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
• If each serial data circuit is 100 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
4. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another device, in
the direction of the circuit shorted to ground.
5. Test for greater than 100 Q between each serial data circuit at the device connector that was just
disconnected and ground.
• If both serial data circuits are 100 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
6. Repeat step 4 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between the X84 data link connector and the first device
or splice pack.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible
device that is not communicating.
3. Test for greater than 110 Q between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 110 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
4. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was disconnected.
5. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another device, in
the direction of the circuit shorted together.
6. Test for greater than 110 Q between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 110 Q or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
7. Repeat step 4 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• Serial data circuits shorted together between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• Serial data circuits shorted together between a device and a terminating resistor.
• Serial data circuits shorted together between the X84 data link connector and the first device or
splice pack.
• A shorted terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at an easily accessible
device that is not communicating.
3. Test for less than 130 Q between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 130 Q or less
Replace the device that was disconnected.
4. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was disconnected.
5. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another device, in
the direction of the circuit with the open/high resistance.
6. Test for less than 130 Q between each pair of serial data circuits at the device connector that was just
disconnected.
• If each pair of serial data circuits is 130 Q or less
Replace the device that was disconnected.
7. Repeat step 4 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
• An open/high resistance terminating resistor.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors at an easily accessible device that is not communicating.
3. Test for less than 10 Q between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
4. Vehicle in Service Mode
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. Vehicle in Service Mode.
7. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which has a fuse in the
circuit, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
8. Vehicle in Service Mode
9. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which is controlled by a
control module, and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the control module that controls the ignition
circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
10. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 meters (9.8 feet)
away from vehicle. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
11. Test for less than 130 Q between each pair of high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the device
connector that was just disconnected.
• If any pair of serial data circuits is greater than 130 О
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuits between the disconnected device and the
circuit splice in the serial data circuits.
12. Replace the device that was disconnected.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH LOW SPEED GMLAN DEVICE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The serial data is transmitted over a single wire to the appropriate devices. The transmission speed for GMLAN
low speed is up to 83.33 Kbit/s. Under normal vehicle operating conditions, the speed of the bus is 33.33 Kbit/s.
The devices toggle the serial data circuit between 0 - 5 V during normal communications. To wake the devices
connected to the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit, a voltage wake up pulse of 10 V is sent out. If serial
data is lost, devices will set a no communication code against the non-communicating device. A loss of serial
data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the device that set it.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
• A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
• Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis
• A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
• Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
• If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with the low speed GMLAN serial
data system inoperative. This condition is due to the device using both the high and low speed GMLAN
systems.
• An open in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit between the splice pack and a device will only
affect that specific device. This type of failure will set a loss of communication DTC for each device
affected, and the other devices will still communicate.
• An open in the Data Link Connector ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but not
communicate with the vehicle.
• The engine may not start when there is a total malfunction of the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
• Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTC) and no low speed LAN communications with the scan tool.
• These conditions may be caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio device (see
bulletins). Some customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns:
• Vehicle will not crank
• Vehicle cranks but will not start
• Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages
• PRNDL gear indicator position errors
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Use the schematic to identify the following:
• Devices the vehicle is equipped with
• Device and splice pack locations on the low speed GMLAN serial data
circuit
• The low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals for each device or
splice pack
1. Attempt to communicate with all devices on the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. Refer to Data
Link References.
2. Verify which devices are communicating on the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
• If only one device is not communicating
Diagnose that device only. Refer to DTC U0100-U02FF .
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuit for an Open/High Resistance.
3. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the scan tool from the
X84 Data Link Connector. The following tests will be done at the X84 Data Link Connector.
4. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. Test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.
• If 4.5 V or greater
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage.
7. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Test for greater than 100 Q between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground.
9. Disconnect the appropriate harness connector at the first splice pack closest in the circuit to the X84 Data
Link Connector.
10. Test for less than 2 Q between the X84 Data Link Connector's serial data circuit terminal 1 and the splice
pack harness connector's serial data input terminal.
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
11. Replace the splice pack.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connectors at all low speed GMLAN serial data splice
packs, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuit terminal 1 at the X84 Data Link Connector and
ground.
• If 4.5 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the serial data circuit.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each low speed GMLAN serial data circuit at a splice pack and ground.
• If any serial data circuit is greater than 4.5 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect all devices on the failed serial data circuit, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between each section of the failed serial data circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage in the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Vehicle OFF, connect the splice pack and connect the first device on the failed serial data circuit,
Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify the scan tool communicates or not with the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
• If the scan tool does not communicate, replace the device that was just connected.
• If the scan tool communicates and there are more devices to connect, connect the next device
and repeat step 3.4.
• If the scan tool communicates and there are no more devices to connect
5. All OK.
4. All OK.
1. Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away from
vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the appropriate
harness connectors at all low speed GMLAN serial data splice packs.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data circuit terminal 1 at the X84 Data Link Connector and
ground.
• If less than infinite resistance
Repair the short to ground on the serial data circuit.
3. Test for greater than 100 Q between each low speed GMLAN serial data circuit at a splice pack and
ground.
• If any serial data circuit is 100 Q or less
1. Disconnect all devices on the failed serial data circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between each section of the failed serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground in the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Connect the splice pack and connect the first device on the failed serial data circuit, Vehicle in
Service Mode.
4. Verify the scan tool communicates or not with the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
• If the scan tool does not communicate, replace the device that was just connected.
• If the scan tool communicates and there are more devices to connect, connect the next device
and repeat step 3.4.
• If the scan tool communicates and there are no more devices to connect
5. All OK.
• If all serial data circuits are greater than 100 Q
4. All OK.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the splice pack containing the devices that are not
communicating on the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
2. Test for less than 2 Q between the X84 Data Link Connector terminal 1 and the disconnected splice pack.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
3. Disconnect all devices on the failed serial data circuit.
4. Test for less than 2 Q between each section of the failed serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
5. Connect the splice pack and connect the first device on the failed serial data circuit, Vehicle in Service
Mode.
6. Verify if the device communicates or not with the scan tool.
Replace the device.
Connect the next device on the failed serial data circuit and repeat step 6.
7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
This table identifies which serial data link that a particular module uses for in-vehicle data transmission. Some
modules may use more than one data link to communicate. Some modules may have multiple communication
circuits passing through them without actively communicating on that data link. This table is used to assist in
correcting a communication malfunction. For the description and operation of these serial data communication
circuits refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation .
|
Code |
Device |
Data Link Type |
Diagnostic Procedure |
|
Schematic Reference: Data Communication Schematics | |||
|
A11 |
Radio |
|
|
|
A26 |
HVAC Controls |
Network (LIN) |
|
|
B174 |
Frontview Camera |
|
|
|
B218L |
Side Object Sensor |
Low Speed GMLAN |
Scan Tool Does Not |
|
Code |
Device |
Data Link Type |
Diagnostic Procedure |
|
Schematic Reference: Data Communication Schematics | |||
|
B218R |
Side Object Sensor |
Low Speed GMLAN |
Scan Tool Does Not |
|
B233B |
Radar Sensor Module - |
Object High Speed GMLAN |
DTC U0075 |
|
B284 |
Vehicle Dynamic Sensor |
Chassis Expansion Bus |
DTC U0077 |
|
B305 |
Ambient Light/Sunload |
Local Interconnect Network |
DTC U1500-U15FF |
|
G1 |
A/C Compressor |
High Speed GMLAN |
Scan Tool Does Not |
|
K9 |
Body Control Module |
|
|
|
K10 |
Coolant Heater Control |
Local Interconnect Network |
DTC U1500-U15FF |
|
K16 |
Battery Energy Control |
|
|
|
K17 |
Electronic Brake Control |
|
|
|
K20 |
Engine Control Module |
Bus |
|
|
K29F |
Seat Heating Control |
Local Interconnect Network |
DTC U1500-U15FF |
|
K29R |
Seat Heating Control |
Local Interconnect Network |
DTC U1500-U15FF |
|
Code |
Device |
Data Link Type |
Diagnostic Procedure |
|
Schematic Reference: Data Communication Schematics | |||
|
K33 |
HVAC Control Module |
|
|
|
K36 |
Inflatable Restraint |
|
|
|
K43 |
Power Steering Control |
|
|
|
K73 |
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module |
|
|
|
K74 |
Human Machine Interface Control Module |
|
|
|
K84 |
Keyless Entry Control |
Low Speed GMLAN |
Scan Tool Does Not |
|
K85 |
Passenger Presence |
Low Speed GMLAN |
Scan Tool Does Not |
|
K111 |
Fuel Pump Driver Control |
Powertrain Expansion Bus |
DTC U0074 |
|
K114A / T6 |
Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
Bus |
|
|
Code |
Device |
Data Link Type |
Diagnostic Procedure |
|
Schematic Reference: Data Communication Schematics | |||
|
K114B |
Hybrid/EV Powertrain |
|
|
|
K124 |
Active Safety Control |
|
|
|
K132 |
Pedestrian Alert Sound |
High Speed GMLAN |
Scan Tool Does Not |
|
K177 |
Brake Booster Control |
|
|
|
K182 |
Parking Assist Control |
|
|
|
M74D |
Window Motor - Driver |
Local Interconnect Network |
DTC U1500-U15FF |
|
M75 |
Windshield Wiper Motor |
Local Interconnect Network |
DTC U1500-U15FF |
|
P2 |
Transmission Shift Lever |
Local Interconnect Network |
DTC U1500-U15FF |
|
P16 |
Instrument Cluster |
|
|
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Data Communications - Repair Instructions - Volt
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 1: Body Control Module Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
HYBRID POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE 2 REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 2: Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedures 1. Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection | |
| |
|
1 |
Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 Bracket Bolts (Qty: 2) CAUTION: Fastener Tighten 9 N.m (80 lb in) |
|
2 |
Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 Procedure
|
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
DATA COMMUNICATION WIRING SCHEMATICS
Communications Enable
 |
|
Fig. 1: Communications Enable |
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
Serial Data Wake-Up
 |
|
Fig. 2: Serial Data Wake-Up Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
High Voltage Management and Powertrain Expansion Busses
 |
|
Fig. 3: High Voltage Management and Powertrain Expansion Busses |
High Speed GMLAN
 |
|
Fig. 4: High Speed GMLAN Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Low Speed CAN
 |
|
Fig. 5: Low Speed CAN Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Chassis Expansion Bus
 |
|
Fig. 6: Chassis Expansion Bus Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Linear Interconnect Network (LIN)
 |
|
Fig. 7: Linear Interconnect Network (LIN) |
MOST Bus and Communication Enable
 |
|
Fig. 8: MOST Bus and Communication Enable |
Object High Speed GMLAN (UGN)
 |
|
Fig. 9: Object High Speed GMLAN (UGN) |
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING SCHEMATICS
Power, Ground and Data Communication
 |
|
Fig. 10: Power, Ground and Data Communication |
Subsystem References (1 of 3)
Fig. 11: Subsystem References (1 of 3)
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
Subsystem References (2 of 3)
 |
|
Fig. 12: Subsystem References (2 of 3) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Subsystem References (3 of 3)
 |
|
Fig. 13: Subsystem References (3 of 3) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Article GUID: A00884636
Data Communications - Special Tools and Equipment - Special Tools - Volt
SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration
Tool
Number/Description
EL - 51578
MOST Bus
Diagnostic Tool Kit
 |
EL - 51578 - 1 |
 |
EL - 51578 - 2 12 - Pin Gray Header |
 |
EL - 51578 - 3 32 - Pin Gray Header |
|
Illustration |
Tool |
|
EL - 51578 - 4 16 - Pin Brown |
 |
EL - 51578 - 5 |
 |
EL - 51578 - 6 |
Article GUID: A00884731
Data Communications - Specifications - Fastener Specifications - Volt
SPECIFICATIONS
FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS
Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications
NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
|
Application |
Specification |
|
Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 Bracket Bolt |
9 N.m (80 lb in) |
Article GUID: A00884708
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Wiring Systems and Power Management - Diagnostic Information and Procedures - Volt
DTC B097B: POWER MODE START SWITCH CIRCUIT (1 OF 2)
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Power Mode Start Switch Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The vehicle ON/OFF switch has a single LED that indicate the vehicle power mode. When the vehicle is in the
off mode, the LED is not illuminated. Pressing and holding the vehicle ON/OFF switch up to 10 s, without the
brake pedal applied, will enter the Vehicle Service Mode and the blue LED will illuminate. With the vehicle
OFF and the brake pedal applied, pressing the vehicle ON/OFF switch once, the vehicle will enter the Vehicle
ON mode and the blue LED will illuminate.
The vehicle ON/OFF switch contains two individual switches that provides redundant switch inputs to both the
body control module (BCM) and the keyless entry control module. The BCM supplies the vehicle ON/OFF
switch a constant B+ signal. The BCM monitors this signal to determine if the switch is released or pressed.
When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is not pressed, voltage on the signal circuit is pulled down through two
resistors in the switch. When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is pressed, voltage on the signal circuit is pulled down
through only one resistor, changing the voltage seen at the BCM and indicating that the vehicle ON/OFF switch
is pressed.
The keyless entry control module monitors voltage on the switch in the same manner as the BCM, but monitors
the s switch located in the vehicle ON/OFF switch. The keyless entry control module also controls the backup
power for the ignition run relay through the control circuit by applying voltage to the ignition voltage circuit.
This circuit is a pass-thru in the BCM and will energize the ignition circuit when the vehicle is in Service Mode,
the vehicle is ON, or when a remote start is requested.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Control module voltage is 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The voltage seen at the BCM monitored switch does not match the voltage seen at the keyless entry
control module monitored switch.
• The above condition exists for more than 1 s
• The control module detects a short to ground in the vehicle ON/OFF switch signal circuit
• The above condition exists for more than 1 s
• The control module detects an open in the vehicle ON/OFF switch signal circuit
• The above condition exists for more than 1 s
• The control module detects an open in the vehicle ON/OFF switch signal circuit
• The above condition exists for more than 1 s
• The control module detects a change in the ignition mode without observing a switch press
• The above condition occurs 4 consecutive times
• The control module detects a continuously closed vehicle ON/OFF switch
• The above condition exists for more than 1 min
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
No action is taken.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive module ignition cycles without a repeat of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC B097B 61 is not set.
Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle On/Off
Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Test for less than 10 Q between the low reference circuit terminal 7 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
4. Connect the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch, Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Disconnect the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
6. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is greater
than 11 V.
1. Connect the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
2. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module and S83 Vehicle
On/Off Switch.
3. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If greater than 11 V
7. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
8. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is less than
1 V.
• If 1 V or greater
1. Disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Test for less than 2 Q in signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
9. Connect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
10. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is 8 - 10 V,
with the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch released.
Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
11. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is 4 - 7 V,
with the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch pressed.
Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
12. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
13. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 11 and ground.
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
14. Vehicle in Service Mode.
15. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 11 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
16. Test for 4.5 - 5.5 k Q between the signal circuit terminal 11 and the low reference circuit terminal 12, with
the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch released.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
17. Test for 1 - 1.5 k Q between the signal circuit terminal 11 and the low reference circuit terminal 12, with
the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch pressed.
Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
18. Replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch.
2. Test for 4.5 - 5.5 k Q between the terminal listed below with the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch released:
• Signal terminal 6 and ground terminal 4
• Signal terminal 3 and low reference terminal 7
Replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
3. Test for 1 - 1.5k Q between the terminals listed below with the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch pressed, :
• Signal terminal 6 and ground terminal 4
• Signal terminal 3 and low reference terminal 7
Replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for the appropriate control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B097B: POWER MODE START SWITCH CIRCUIT (2 OF 2)
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Power Mode Start Switch Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Circuit/System Description
The vehicle ON/OFF switch has a single LED that indicate the vehicle power mode. When the vehicle is in the
off mode, the LED is not illuminated. Pressing and holding the vehicle ON/OFF switch up to 10 s, without the
brake pedal applied, will enter the Vehicle Service Mode and the blue LED will illuminate. With the vehicle
OFF and the brake pedal applied, pressing the vehicle ON/OFF switch once, the vehicle will enter the Vehicle
ON mode and the blue LED will illuminate.
The vehicle ON/OFF switch contains two individual switches that provides redundant switch inputs to both the
body control module (BCM) and the keyless entry control module. The BCM supplies the vehicle ON/OFF
switch a constant B+ signal. The BCM monitors this signal to determine if the switch is released or pressed.
When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is not pressed, voltage on the signal circuit is pulled down through two
resistors in the switch. When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is pressed, voltage on the signal circuit is pulled down
through only one resistor, changing the voltage seen at the BCM and indicating that the vehicle ON/OFF switch
is pressed.
The keyless entry control module monitors voltage on the switch in the same manner as the BCM, but monitors
the s switch located in the vehicle ON/OFF switch. The keyless entry control module also controls the backup
power for the ignition run relay through the control circuit by applying voltage to the ignition voltage circuit.
This circuit is a pass-thru in the BCM and will energize the ignition circuit when the vehicle is in Service Mode,
the vehicle is ON, or when a remote start is requested.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Control module voltage is 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The voltage seen at the BCM monitored switch does not match the voltage seen at the keyless entry
control module monitored switch.
• The above condition exists for more than 1 s
• The control module detects a short to ground in the vehicle ON/OFF switch signal circuit
• The above condition exists for more than 1 s
• The control module detects an open in the vehicle ON/OFF switch signal circuit
• The above condition exists for more than 1 s
• The control module detects an open in the vehicle ON/OFF switch signal circuit
• The above condition exists for more than 1 s
B097B 08
• The control module detects a change in the ignition mode without observing a switch press
• The above condition occurs 4 consecutive times
• The control module detects a continuously closed vehicle ON/OFF switch
• The above condition exists for more than 1 min
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
No action is taken.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive module ignition cycles without a repeat of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC B097B 61 is not set.
Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle On/Off
Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Test for less than 10 fi between the low reference circuit terminal 7 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
4. Connect the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch, Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Disconnect the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
6. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is greater
than 11 V.
1. Connect the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
2. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module and S83 Vehicle
On/Off Switch.
3. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If greater than 11 V
7. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
8. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is less than
1 V.
• If 1 V or greater
1. Disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Test for less than 2 fi in signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
9. Verify the scan tool K84 Keyless Entry Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is
greater than 11 V.
1. Connect the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
2. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module and
S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
3. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If greater than 11 V
10. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
11. Verify the scan tool K84 Keyless Entry Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is
less than 1 V.
• If 1 V or greater
1. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Test for less than 2 Q in signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
12. Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch.
2. Test for 4.5 - 5.5 k Q between the terminal listed below with the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch released:
• Signal terminal 6 and ground terminal 4
• Signal terminal 3 and low reference terminal 7
Replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
3. Test for 1 - 1.5k Q between the terminals listed below with the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch pressed, :
• Signal terminal 6 and ground terminal 4
• Signal terminal 3 and low reference terminal 7
Replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B097C: POWER MODE RUN/CRANK INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Power Mode Run/Crank Indicator Circuit Short to Ground
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The vehicle ON/OFF switch has a single LED that indicates the vehicle power mode. When the vehicle is in the
OFF mode, the LED is not illuminated. Pressing and holding the vehicle ON/OFF switch up to 10 s, without the
brake pedal applied, will enter the Vehicle Service Mode and the blue LED will illuminate. With the vehicle
OFF and the brake pedal applied, pressing the vehicle ON/OFF switch once, the vehicle will enter the Vehicle
ON mode and the blue LED will illuminate.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Control module voltage is 9 - 16 V
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The BCM detects a short to ground in the control circuit.
• The above condition exists for more than 1 min.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The BCM disables the control output.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the module power mode cycle counter reaches 40, without a repeat of the
malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the blue LED illuminates when the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch is pressed and held up to 10 s, with
the brake pedal released.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
2. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle On/Off
Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the low reference circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 1 V of greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, Vehicle in Service
Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
4. Vehicle OFF, connect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
6. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness at the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
2. Connect a jumper wire between the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch terminal 4 and ground.
3. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch terminal 5 and B+.
4. Verify the blue LED illuminates.
Replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for the body control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B1370: CONTROL MODULE IGNITION ON AND START CIRCUIT (INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER)
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Control Module Ignition On and Start Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The vehicle power mode master is the body control module (BCM). The vehicle ON/OFF switch contains two
individual switches that provides redundant switch inputs to both the body control module (BCM) and the
keyless entry control module. The BCM monitors this signal to determine if the switch is released or pressed.
When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is not pressed, voltage on the signal circuit is pulled down through two
resistors in the switch. When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is pressed, voltage on the signal circuit is pulled down
through only one resistor, changing the voltage seen at the BCM and indicating that the vehicle ON/OFF switch
is pressed. The power mode master will activate relays and other direct outputs of the power mode master as
needed according to the calculated power mode.
The keyless entry control module monitors voltage on the switch is the same manner as the BCM, but monitors
the second switch located in the vehicle ON/OFF switch.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Vehicle ON.
Vehicle ON, or Vehicle in Service Mode.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
Ignition circuit is shorted to voltage.
• Ignition circuit is open.
• Ignition circuit is shorted to ground.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The Instrument Cluster still functions except the malfunction indicator light is always off.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free Vehicle On/Off cycles have occurred.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
• Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify that DTC B144B is not set.
• If DTC B144B is set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If DTC B144B is not set
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P16 Instrument Cluster.
2. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the ignition circuit terminal 8 and ground.
• If the test lamp illuminates
Repair the short to voltage on the ignition circuit.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the ignition terminal 8 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the Ignition fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, refer to Power Mode Mismatch.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the Ignition fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B144A: RUN POWER RELAY CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Run Power Relay Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The body control module (BCM) feeds the ignition circuit by applying voltage when the vehicle is in Vehicle in
Service Mode or Vehicle ON mode.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
• The DTC can only run when the output is activated.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The BCM detects a short to ground in the ignition circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The module output driver will be shut down and not supply voltage to the ignition circuit.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The current DTC will clear when the module request for the output is removed or the malfunction is no
longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K33 HVAC control module.
2. Connect a test lamp between the ignition circuit terminal 9 and ground.
3. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when cycling the S83 vehicle ON/OFF switch between Vehicle in
Service Mode and Vehicle OFF.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
4. Test or replace the K33 HVAC control module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Control Module References for body control module and HVAC control module replacement,
programming and setup.
DTC B144B: RUN/CRANK POWER RELAY CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Run/Crank Power Relay Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The body control module (BCM) controls the ignition main relay through the control circuit by applying voltage
to the ignition main relay coil control circuit. The ignition main relay is energized when the vehicle is in Service
Mode, the vehicle is ON, or when a remote start is requested. This is part of the BCM's primary function in
controlling the vehicle power mode.
The keyless entry control module controls the backup power for the ignition main relay through the control
circuit by applying voltage to the ignition circuit. This circuit is a pass-thru in the BCM and will energize the
ignition circuit when the vehicle is in Service Mode, the vehicle is ON, or when a remote start is requested.
Conditions for Running the DTC
System voltage is greater than 9 V
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ignition output is not active and a short to battery is detected 3 consecutive times on the ignition voltage
circuit
A short to ground is detected on the ignition main relay coil control circuit
The ignition output is active and a short to ground is detected 3 consecutive times on the ignition voltage circuit
The ignition output is not active and an open is detected 20 consecutive times on the ignition voltage circuit
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
No action is taken
The ignition relay is deactivated when the fault is set. After 100 ms, the ignition main relay will be activated. If
the fault is still set, the relay will be deactivated. The ignition main relay will again be activated after 100 ms. If
this also results in a fault, the ignition main relay will be deactivated until a new ignition request is received.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The current DTC will clear when the malfunction is no longer present and an ignition request is received.
• A history DTC will clear after 40 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Diagnostic Aids
A short to voltage on the ignition main relay coil control will cause the engine to remain running after the
vehicle mode is changed to OFF.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
• Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the KR73 Ignition Main Relay clicks ON and OFF when commanding the Run/Crank Relay On
and Off with a scan tool.
• If the KR73 Ignition Main Relay does not click ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the ignition circuit terminal 6 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 6 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle OFF, connect the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
6. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the KR73 Ignition Main Relay. It may take up to 2
min for all vehicle systems to power down.
7. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
8. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 2 and the ground circuit terminal 1.
9. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Run/Crank Relay On and Off with a scan
tool.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
10. Test or replace the KR73 Ignition Main Relay.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B1451: ACCESSORY POWER CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Accessory Power Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List
Diagnostic Fault Information
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The keyless entry control module provides backup controls for the ignition power circuit, through the control
circuit, by applying voltage to the circuit. The ignition power circuit is energized when the vehicle power mode
is in Vehicle ON or Vehicle in Service Mode.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle power mode is Vehicle OFF
• Module is awake
• DTC B1451 not already set
• System voltage between 6 and 16 V
• Vehicle power mode is Vehicle ON or Vehicle in Service Mode
• Module is awake
• The DTC is only run when the output is active
• DTC B1451 is not already set
• System voltage between 6 and 16 V
Conditions for Setting the DTC
Ignition output is not active and a short to battery is detected 3 consecutive times.
Ignition output is active and a short to ground is detected 3 consecutive times.
Ignition output is not active and an open circuit is detected 20 consecutive times.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The ignition output is deactivated when a short to ground is detected. After 100 ms the output is activated again.
This happens 3 times and then the output is deactivated until a new Vehicle ON or Vehicle in Service Mode
request is received.
B1451 01, B1451 04
No action is taken.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The current DTC will clear when the malfunction is no longer present during a DTC check.
• A history DTC clears when the module power mode cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 40,
without a repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• A short to voltage in the ignition control circuit will keep the vehicle modules awake, which can drain the
vehicle's battery.
• A short to ground in the extension of this circuit through the body control module can back feed to the
keyless entry control module. Check for a short to ground on the ignition circuit on the other side of the
ignition pass thru, in the body control module, before replacing the body control module.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC U1814 is not set.
• If DTC U1814 is set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If DTC U1814 is not set
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle in Service Mode, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
2. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between B+ circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
3. Vehicle OFF, connect the X2 harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module and disconnect
the X3 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
4. Test for less than 1 V between the ignition circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF. remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for the body control module and keyless entry control module replacement,
programming and setup.
DTC B305E: INTERRUPTIBLE RAP RELAY CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Interruptible RAP Relay Circuit
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The keyless entry control module controls the retained accessory power relay through the control circuit by
applying voltage to the interruptible retained accessory power relay coil control circuit. The retained accessory
power relay is energized when the ignition is in the Vehicle In Service Mode or the Vehicle On mode. The relay
is also energized for approximately 10 min after shutting the vehicle OFF, providing no door is opened
Conditions for Running the DTC
• System voltage is greater than 6 V.
• The DTC can only set when the output is actively being requested by the module.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ignition output is not active and a short to battery is detected 3 consecutive times on the ignition voltage
circuit.
The ignition output is active and a short to ground is detected on the ignition voltage circuit.
The ignition output is active and an open or short to battery is detected on the ignition voltage circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
No action is taken.
The module output driver will be shut down and not supply voltage to the circuit.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The current DTC will clear when the malfunction is no longer present and the ignition output is active.
• A history DTC clears when the module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay clicks ON and OFF when cycling the S83 vehicle
ON/OFF switch between Vehicle in Service Mode and Vehicle OFF with the door open.
• If the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay does not click ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
• If the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay clicks ON and OFF
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay. It may
take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 85 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode, connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 86 and ground circuit
terminal 85.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when cycling the S83 vehicle ON/OFF switch between Vehicle in
Service Mode and Vehicle OFF with the door open.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry
Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry
Control Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
5. Test or replace the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P15B9 OR P15BA: ELECTRIC A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL MODULE IGNITION
ON/START SWITCH CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Ignition On/Start Switch Circuit Low Voltage
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Ignition On/Start Switch Circuit High Voltage
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The body control module (BCM) controls the ignition main relay by applying voltage to the run/crank coil
control circuit. The ignition circuit is energized when the vehicle power mode is Vehicle ON or Vehicle in
Service Mode. The hybrid powertrain control module 2 receives the power mode status from the A/C
compressor over serial data and compares this status to its own internal power mode status.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle power mode is Vehicle ON or Vehicle in Service Mode.
• Hybrid powertrain control module 2 is awake.
• DTC's P2534, P2535, or U016B is not set.
• System voltage greater than 10.2 V.
• Vehicle power mode is Vehicle OFF.
• Hybrid powertrain control module 2 is awake.
• DTC's P2534, P2535, or U016B is not set.
• System voltage greater than 10.2 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• Vehicle power mode is Vehicle ON or Vehicle in Service Mode.
• Hybrid powertrain control module 2 ignition input is active.
• A/C compressor ignition input is not active for more than 2 s.
• Vehicle power mode is Vehicle OFF.
• Hybrid powertrain control module 2 is awake.
• Hybrid powertrain control module 2 ignition input is not active.
• A/C compressor ignition input is active for more than 2 s
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P15B9 and P15BA are type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P15B9 and P15BA, are type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
A short to voltage in the ignition circuit will keep the vehicle modules awake, which can drain the vehicle's
battery.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
• Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC B144B is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B144B.
• If the DTC is not set
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the G1 A/C Compressor.
2. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the ignition circuit terminal 3 and ground.
• If the test lamp illuminates
Repair the short to voltage on the ignition circuit.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 3 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, refer to Power Mode Mismatch.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the G1 A/C Compressor and all devices that share
the same ignition circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit terminal 3 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
3. Connect each of the devices one at a time and test for greater than 10 Q between the ignition circuit
terminal 3 and ground.
• If 10 Q or less, disconnect the appropriate device and retest to verify if the short is in the
circuit or the component.
• If greater than 10 Q replace the appropriate device.
5. Replace the G1 A/C Compressor.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Battery Energy Control Module Ignition On/Start Switch Circuit Low Voltage
Battery Energy Control Module Ignition On/Start Switch Circuit High Voltage
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The body control module (BCM) controls the ignition main relay through the control circuit by applying voltage
to the run/crank coil control circuit. The ignition circuit is energized when the vehicle power mode is Vehicle
ON or Vehicle in Service Mode.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Hybrid powertrain control module 2 is awake.
• Vehicle power mode is Vehicle ON or Vehicle in Service Mode.
• Battery energy control module is awake.
• System voltage greater than 9 V.
• Hybrid powertrain control module 2 is awake.
• Vehicle power mode is Vehicle OFF.
• Battery energy control module is awake.
• System voltage greater than 9 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• Hybrid powertrain control module 2 is awake.
• Ignition input is active and not above 5 V.
• Hybrid powertrain control module 2 is awake.
• Ignition input is not active and not below 5 V.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P1A5E and P1A5F are type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
P1A5E, P1A5F
DTCs P1A5E and P1A5F are type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
A short to voltage in the ignition circuit will keep the vehicle modules awake, which can drain the vehicle's
battery.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Power Distribution Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Power Mode Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC B144B is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B144B.
• If the DTC is not set
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack. Refer to High Voltage
Disabling
2. Connect the 12 V battery, disconnect the X358 harness connector at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
3. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the ignition circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If the test lamp illuminates
Repair the short to voltage on the ignition circuit.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
4. Vehicle in Service Mode
5. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, refer to Power Mode Mismatch.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at all devices that share the same ignition circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
3. Vehicle OFF, remove the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack cover. Refer to High Voltage Battery Cover
Replacement
4. Connect the EL-50211 low voltage jumper harness extension.
5. Disconnect the X8 harness connector at the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
6. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit terminal 9 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
7. Connect each of the devices that share the same ignition circuit one at a time and test for greater
than 100 fi between the ignition circuit terminal 9 and ground.
• If 100 fi or less, disconnect the appropriate device and retest to verify if the short is in the
circuit or the component.
• If greater than 100 fi replace the appropriate device.
• If the test lamp illuminates
6. Vehicle OFF, remove the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack cover. Refer to High Voltage Battery Cover
Replacement
7. Connect the EL-50211 low voltage jumper harness extension.
8. Disconnect the X8 harness connector at the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
9. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the ignition circuit terminal 9 and ground.
• If the test lamp illuminates
Repair the short to voltage on the ignition circuit.
10. Vehicle in Service Mode
11. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 9 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate.
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If the test lamp illuminates
12. Replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P1A60: BATTERY ENERGY CONTROL MODULE IGNITION ACCESSORY SWITCH
CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Battery Energy Control Module Ignition Accessory Switch Circuit Low Voltage
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The hybrid powertrain control module 2 sends the serial data wake-up power mode status in a serial data
message to the battery energy control module. The hybrid powertrain control module 2 also powers up the serial
data wake-up circuit to the battery energy control module when the vehicle power mode is Vehicle ON or
Vehicle in Service Mode.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle power mode is Vehicle ON or Vehicle in Service Mode
• Battery energy control module is awake
• System voltage greater than 9 V
Conditions for Setting the DTC
Ignition input is active, and 500 ms after the ignition input transitions high, a voltage below 5 V is detected 3
consecutive times
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P1A60 is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P1A60 is a type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
A short to voltage in the serial data wake-up circuit will keep the vehicle bus awake, which can drain the
vehicle's battery.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Power Mode Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC U1814, U2099, or P06E4 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack. Refer to High Voltage
Disabling
2. Connect the 12 V battery, disconnect the X357 harness connector at the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack.
3. Connect a test lamp between the serial data wake-up circuit terminal 5 and ground.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when cycling the S39 Ignition Mode Switch between Vehicle in
Service Mode and Vehicle OFF.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the serial data wake-up circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
5. Vehicle OFF, remove the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack cover. Refer to High Voltage Battery Cover
Replacement
6. Connect the EL-50211 low voltage jumper harness extension.
7. Disconnect the X8 harness connector at the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
8. Connect a test lamp between the serial data wake-up circuit terminal 3 and ground.
9. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when cycling the S39 Ignition Mode Switch between Vehicle in
Service Mode and Vehicle OFF.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the EL-50211 low voltage jumper harness extension.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the serial data wake-up circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the EL-50211 low voltage jumper harness extension.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
10. Replace the K16 Battery Energy Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup,
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Ignition On/Start Switch Circuit Low Voltage
Ignition On/Start Switch Circuit High Voltage
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The body control module (BCM) controls the ignition relay through the control circuit by applying voltage to
the circuit. The ignition circuit is energized when the vehicle power mode is Vehicle ON or Vehicle in Service
Mode.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The control module is awake.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The control module detects 2 V or less on the ignition voltage circuit.
The control module detects greater than 5 V or greater on the ignition voltage circuit, with the ignition turned
OFF.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P2534 and P2535 are type A DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P2534 and P2535 are type A DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
A short to voltage in the ignition circuit will keep the vehicle modules awake, which can drain the vehicle's
battery.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC B144B is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B144B.
• If the DTC is not set
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
For European Regions
WARNING: High voltage enabling and disabling shall be only performed by High Voltage
Qualified Technicians. The procedures for high voltage enabling/disabling can
be found in the service instructions and must be strictly followed at all times.
The usage of the Protocol High Voltage Disabling / Enabling is mandatory. The
High Voltage Qualified Technician is responsible for the adherence to the
manufacturer's service instructions as well as current national legal
regulations.
Failure to follow the procedures exactly as written may result in serious injury
or death.
Questions regarding training can be answered by your national training center.
WARNING: Any hybrid/EV battery pack replacement shall be performed by High Voltage
Qualified Technicians only. The replacement procedure can be found in the
service instruction and must be strictly followed at all times. The High Voltage
Qualified Technician is responsible for adherence to the manufacturer's service
instructions as well as current national legal regulations. If the hybrid/EV
battery pack needs to be replaced contact the Technical Assistance Centre for
further instructions prior removal of the battery pack.
For Non-European Regions
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems off, disconnect the harness connector at the control module setting
the DTC.
2. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If the test lamp illuminates
Repair the short to voltage on the ignition circuit.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, refer to Power Mode Mismatch
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the control module setting the DTC.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Replace the control module setting the DTC.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for the appropriate control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P2537: IGNITION ACCESSORY SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Ignition Accessory Switch Circuit Low Voltage
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The control module continuously monitors the voltage on the ignition accessory circuit every 0.1s. Higher or
lower than normal voltage may cause erratic vehicle operation.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Propulsion system is active for.5 s.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The device detects the accessory voltage circuit is open for 0.1 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
P2537 is a Type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
P2537 is a Type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
Short to ground may set multiple no communication codes for high speed GMLAN devices.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Power Mode Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC U1814, U2099, or P06E4 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any
High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
and proper procedures must be followed.
The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:
• Identify how to disable high voltage.
• Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.
• Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and
personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be
followed.
Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50
feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors.
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when
working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system
is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module
2.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wake up serial data circuit terminal 67 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate.
1. Ignition OFF remove the test lamp, disconnect the X4 connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Q on the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems off, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control
Module.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the Accessory Wake up Serial Data 2 circuit terminal 13 and
ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the KR114B Hybrid/EV
Powertrain Control Module 2.
2. Test for less than 2 Q on the Accessory Wake up Serial Data 2 circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the KR114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
4. Replace the control module setting the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup,
SYMPTOMS - WIRING SYSTEMS
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables.
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that
all of the following are true:
• There are no DTCs set.
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data links.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to:
Power Mode Description and Operation
Retained Accessory Power Description and Operation
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. Refer to Checking
Aftermarket Accessories.
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections.
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
Power Mode Mismatch
Retained Accessory Power Malfunction
Vehicle ON/OFF Switch Indicator Malfunction
Vehicle Will Not Change Power Mode
IGNITION CAN/CANNOT BE TURNED OFF WITH TRANSMISSION IN ANY GEAR
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The electronic park lock system purpose is to prevent the ignition from being switched to the OFF position
when the transmission shift lever is in any position other than Park and the vehicle may still be moving. The
electronic park lock system incorporates the park position switch that located in the shift lock control switch.
When the transmission shift lever is in Park, the park position switch closes and the BCM allows the ignition to
be turned OFF.
If the vehicle is not in Park, the ignition will turn to ACC/ACCESSORY and display the message SHIFT TO
PARK in the Driver Information Center. When the vehicle is shifted into Park, the ignition system will switch to
OFF.
Diagnostic Aids
Verify that the transmission shift selector indicator matches the position of the gear shift lever while selecting
between the Park, Reverse, Drive and Low positions.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
• Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the scan tool Body Control Module In Park Switch Status parameter changes between On and Off
when shifting the S3 Transmission Shift Lever in and out of Park.
• If the parameter does not change
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S3 Transmission Shift
Lever. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 2 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify the scan tool Body Control Module In Park Switch Status parameter is Off.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 6 and the ground circuit terminal 2.
6. Verify the scan tool Body Control Module In Park Switch Status parameter is On.
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If On
7. Test or replace the S3 Transmission Shift Lever.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for the appropriate control module replacement, programming, and setup.
POWER MODE MISMATCH
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The body control module (BCM) controls the ignition main relay by applying voltage to the run/crank relay coil
control circuit. The ignition main relay is energized when the vehicle is in Service Mode, the vehicle is ON, or
when a remote start is requested.
The keyless entry control module controls the retained accessory power relay by applying voltage to the
interruptible retained accessory power relay coil control circuit. The retained accessory power relay is energized
during all power modes, except OFF-awake. The relay is also energized for approximately 10 min after shutting
the vehicle OFF providing, no door is opened and during transmitter authentication. The keyless entry control
module will deactivate components that may cause radio frequency (RF) interference when the vehicle on/off
switch is pressed which may result in NO REMOTE DETECTED displayed on the driver information center.
The engine control module (ECM) controls the engine controls ignition relay by applying voltage to the engine
controls relay control circuit.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Use schematics to determine which ignition relay supplies the ignition feed for
the appropriate devices. Use the connector end view to identify the ignition
circuit terminal for each of those devices.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that the appropriate devices controlled by the KR73 Ignition Main Relay turn ON and OFF when
commanding the Run/Crank Relay On and Off with a scan tool.
• If the devices do not turn ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Diagnostic A.
• If the devices turn ON and OFF
3. Verify that the appropriate devices controlled by the KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay turn ON and
OFF when cycling the between Vehicle in Service Mode and Vehicle OFF.
• If the devices do not turn ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Diagnostic B.
• If the devices turn ON and OFF
4. Verify that the appropriate devices controlled by the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay turn ON and
OFF when cycling the between Vehicle in Service Mode and Vehicle OFF.
• If the devices do not turn ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Diagnostic C.
• If the devices turn ON and OFF
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
WARNING: High voltage enabling and disabling shall be only performed by High Voltage
Qualified Technicians. The procedures for high voltage enabling/disabling can
be found in the service instructions and must be strictly followed at all times.
The usage of the Protocol High Voltage Disabling / Enabling is mandatory. The
High Voltage Qualified Technician is responsible for the adherence to the
manufacturer's service instructions as well as current national legal
regulations.
Failure to follow the procedures exactly as written may result in serious injury
or death.
Questions regarding training can be answered by your national training centre.
WARNING: Any hybrid/EV battery pack replacement shall be performed by High Voltage
Qualified Technicians only. The replacement procedure can be found in the
service instruction and must be strictly followed at all times. The High Voltage
Qualified Technician is responsible for adherence to the manufacturer's service
instructions as well as current national legal regulations. If the hybrid/EV
battery pack needs to be replaced contact the Technical Assistance Centre for
further instructions prior removal of the battery pack.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the KR73 Ignition Main Relay. It may take up to 2
min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 3 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
Replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
5. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 2 and the ground circuit terminal 1.
6. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Run/Crank Relay On and Off with a scan
tool.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
7. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the ignition circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp illuminates
Repair the short to voltage on the ignition circuit.
8. Vehicle in Service Mode, connect a 40 A fused jumper wire between the B+ circuit terminal 3 and the
ignition circuits listed below.
• Ignition circuit terminal 4
• Ignition circuit terminal 5
9. Verify the device is activated.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the device.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the device.
10. Test or replace the KR73 Ignition Main Relay.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay, Vehicle
in Service Mode.
2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
Replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 3 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
Replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
4. Connect a test lamp between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and the control circuit terminal 2.
5. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when cycling the S83 vehicle ON/OFF switch between Vehicle in
Service Mode and Vehicle OFF.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 engine control
module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Vehicle OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K20 engine control module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 engine control
module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K20 engine control module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
6. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the ignition circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp illuminates
Repair the short to voltage on the ignition circuit.
7. Vehicle in Service Mode, connect a 40 A fused jumper wire between the B+ circuit terminal 3 and the
ignition circuit terminal 5.
8. Verify device is activated.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the device.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit terminal 87 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the device.
9. Test or replace the KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay. It may
take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 85 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 30 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
Replace the X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel
5. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 86 and the ground circuit terminal 85.
6. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when cycling the between Vehicle in Service Mode and Vehicle
OFF.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry
Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry
Control Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
7. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the ignition circuit terminal 87 and ground.
• If the test lamp illuminates
Repair the short to voltage on the ignition circuit.
8. Vehicle in Service Mode, connect a 40 A fused jumper wire between the B+ circuit terminal 30 and the
ignition circuit terminal 87.
9. Verify device is activated.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the device.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the device.
10. Test or replace the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the appropriate relay.
2. Test for 70 - 150 Q between terminals (85 or 1) and (86 or 2).
• If less than 70 or greater than 150 Q
Replace the relay.
3. Test for infinite resistance between the terminals listed below:
• (30 or 3) and (86 or 2)
• (30 or 3) and (87 or 5)
• (30 or 3) and (85 or 1)
• (85 or 1) and (87 or 5)
• (86 or 2) and (87 or 5)
Replace the relay.
4. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between relay terminal (85 or 1) and 12 V. Install a jumper wire between
relay terminal (86 or 2) and ground.
5. Test for less than 5.0 Q between terminals (30 or 3) and (87 or 5).
• If 5.0 Q or greater
Replace the relay.
6. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The keyless entry control module controls the retained accessory power relay by applying voltage to the
interruptible retained accessory power relay coil control circuit. The retained accessory power relay is energized
during all power modes, except OFF-awake. The relay is also energized for approximately 10 min after shutting
the vehicle OFF providing, no door is opened and during transmitter authentication. The keyless entry control
module will deactivate components that may cause radio frequency (RF) interference when the vehicle on/off
switch is pressed which may result in NO REMOTE DETECTED displayed on the driver information center.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Use schematics to determine which devices are controlled by the KR76
Retained Accessory Power Relay. Use the connector end view to identify the
ignition circuit terminal for each of those devices.
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the appropriate devices controlled by the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay turn ON and
OFF when cycling the S83 vehicle ON/OFF switch between Vehicle in Service Mode and Vehicle OFF
with the door open.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay. It may
take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 85 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 30 and ground.
Replace the X51A Fuse Block - Instrument Panel
5. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 86 and the ground circuit terminal 85.
6. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when cycling the S83 vehicle ON/OFF switch between Vehicle in
Service Mode and Vehicle OFF with the door open.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry
Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry
Control Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
7. Connect the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay.
8. Disconnect the appropriate X80 Accessory Power Receptacle or T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger
Module.
9. Vehicle OFF.
10. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between each of the ignition circuits listed below and ground.
• X80H Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console - Ignition circuit terminal A
• X80L Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console Rear - Ignition circuit terminal A
• T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger Module - Ignition circuit terminal 1
• If the test lamp illuminates
Repair the short to voltage on the ignition circuit.
11. Vehicle in Service Mode.
12. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between each of the ignition circuits listed below and ground.
• X80H Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console - Ignition circuit terminal A
• X80L Accessory Power Receptacle - Center Console Rear - Ignition circuit terminal A
• T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger Module - Ignition circuit terminal 1
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit breaker or fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, test or replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit breaker or fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, test or replace the appropriate X80 Accessory Power Receptacle or T22
Mobile Device Wireless Charger Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
13. Test or replace the appropriate X80 Accessory Power Receptacle or T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger
Module.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay.
2. Test for 70 - 150 Q between terminals 85 and 86.
• If less than 70 or greater than 150 Q
Replace the relay.
3. Test for infinite resistance between the following terminals:
Replace the relay.
4. Test for less than 5.0 Q between terminals 30 and 87.
• If 5.0 Q or greater
Replace the relay.
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between relay terminal 41 and 12 V. Install a jumper wire between relay
terminal 40 and ground.
6. Test for less than 5.0 Q between terminals 30 and 87.
Replace the relay.
7. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The vehicle ON/OFF switch has a single LED that indicates the vehicle power mode. When the vehicle is in the
OFF mode, the LED is not illuminated. Pressing and holding the vehicle ON/OFF switch for at least 5 s,
without the brake pedal applied, will enter the Vehicle Service Mode and the blue LED will illuminate. With the
vehicle OFF and the brake pedal applied, pressing the vehicle ON/OFF switch once, the vehicle will enter the
Vehicle ON mode and the blue LED will illuminate.
The vehicle ON/OFF switch contains two individual switches that provides redundant switch inputs to both the
body control module (BCM) and the keyless entry control module. The BCM supplies the vehicle ON/OFF
switch a constant B+ signal. The BCM monitors this signal to determine if the switch is released or pressed.
When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is not pressed, voltage on the signal circuit is pulled down through two
resistors in the switch. When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is pressed, voltage on the signal circuit is pulled down
through only one resistor, changing the voltage seen at the BCM and indicating that the vehicle ON/OFF switch
is pressed.
The keyless entry control module monitors voltage on the switch is the same manner as the BCM, but monitors
the second switch located in the vehicle ON/OFF switch.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the blue LED illuminates when the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch is pressed and held for at least 5
s, with the brake pedal released.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
2. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF
Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the low reference circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 1 V of greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, Vehicle in Service
Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Test for less than 2 Q in control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
4. Vehicle OFF, connect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch.
6. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
7. Test or replace the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness at the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch.
2. Connect a jumper wire between the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch terminal 4 and ground.
3. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the S83 Vehicle ON/OFF Switch terminal 5 and B+.
4. Verify the blue LED illuminates.
Replace the S83 vehicle ON/OFF switch.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for the body control module replacement, programming and setup.
VEHICLE WILL NOT CHANGE POWER MODE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The vehicle ON/OFF switch has a single LED that indicate the vehicle power mode. When the vehicle is in the
off mode, the LED is not illuminated. Pressing and holding the vehicle ON/OFF switch for up to 10 s, without
the brake pedal applied, will enter the Vehicle Service Mode and the blue LED will illuminate. With the vehicle
OFF and the brake pedal applied, pressing the vehicle ON/OFF switch once, the vehicle will enter the Vehicle
ON mode and the blue LED will illuminate.
The vehicle ON/OFF switch contains 2 individual switches that provides redundant switch inputs to both the
body control module (BCM) and the keyless entry control module. The BCM supplies the vehicle ON/OFF
switch a constant B+ signal. The BCM monitors this signal to determine if the switch is released or pressed.
When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is not pressed, voltage on the signal circuit is pulled down through 2 resistors
in the switch. When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is pressed, voltage on the signal circuit is pulled down through
only one resistor, changing the voltage seen at the BCM and indicating that the vehicle ON/OFF switch is
pressed.
The keyless entry control module monitors voltage on the switch is the same manner as the BCM, but monitors
the second switch located in the vehicle ON/OFF switch. The keyless entry control module also controls the
backup power for the ignition run relay through the control circuit by applying voltage to the ignition voltage
circuit. This circuit is a pass-thru in the BCM and will energize the ignition circuit when the vehicle is in
Service Mode, the vehicle is ON, or when a remote start is requested.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC B097B 08 or B097B 61 is not set.
Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
2. Verify the blue LED illuminates when the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch is pressed and held for up to 10 s,
with the brake pedal released.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle On/Off
Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Test for less than 10 Q between the low reference circuit terminal 7 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
4. Connect the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch, Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Disconnect the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
6. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is greater
than 11 V.
1. Connect the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
2. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module and S83 Vehicle
On/Off Switch.
3. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If greater than 11 V
7. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 6 and ground.
8. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is less than
1 V.
• If 1 V or greater
1. Disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Test for less than 2 Q in signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
9. Connect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
10. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is 8 - 10 V,
with the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch released.
• If not between 8 - 10 V
Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
11. Verify the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Push Button Ignition Switch Voltage parameter is 4 - 7 V,
with the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch pressed.
Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
12. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
13. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 11 and ground.
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
14. Vehicle in Service Mode.
15. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 11 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
16. Test for 4.5 - 5.5 k Q between the signal circuit terminal 11 and the low reference circuit terminal 12, with
the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch released.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
17. Test for 1 - 1.5 k Q between the signal circuit terminal 11 and the low reference circuit terminal 12, with
the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch pressed.
Test or replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
18. Replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S83 vehicle ON/OFF switch.
2. With the S83 vehicle ON/OFF switch released, test for 4.5 - 5.5 kQ between the terminal listed below:
• Signal terminal 6 and ground terminal 4
• Signal terminal 3 and low reference terminal 7
Replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
3. With the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch pressed, test for 1 - 1.5k Q between the terminals listed below:
• Signal terminal 6 and ground terminal 4
• Signal terminal 3 and low reference terminal 7
Replace the S83 Vehicle On/Off Switch.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Control Module References for the appropriate control module replacement, programming and setup.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS
Basic Knowledge Required
Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the
service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (V),
current (A), and resistance (Q). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as
understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire.
CHECKING AFTERMARKET ACCESSORIES
WARNING: Refer to SIR Warning .
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams
with the SIR symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the
vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the
problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include:
• Power feeds connected to points other than the battery
• Antenna location
• Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring
• Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line
• Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
CIRCUIT TESTING
The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along
with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Probing Electrical Connectors
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Measuring Voltage
Measuring Voltage Drop
Measuring Frequency
Testing Ground and Low Reference Circuits
Testing for Continuity
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for a Short to Voltage
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure
Circuit Protection - Fuses
Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
USING CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTERS
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: This procedure should not be performed on high voltage circuits. Performing
this procedure on high voltage circuits may result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Do not insert test equipment probes (DMM etc.) into any connector or fuse
block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A
deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system
failure. Always use the J-35616-F GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit in
order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to
probe terminals.
When using the J-35616-F GM Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit, ensure the
terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do
not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal
cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger
terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616-F GM
Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit label on the inside of the J-35616-F GM
Approved Terminal Release Tool Kit for the correct adapter along with the
connector end view for terminal size.
PROBING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: This procedure should not be performed on high voltage circuits. Performing
this procedure on high voltage circuits may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal
position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.
Front probe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector.
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
NOTE: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter.
There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The
proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J-35616-64B which has a gold terminal
and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test
adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper
diagnosis.
NOTE: The proper adapter for probing the terminals for fuses, relays, or diodes in an
electrical center is J-35616-35. Using any other tool or adapter may damage the
terminal being tested.
|
Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for front probing connectors: | ||||||
|
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Backprobe |
|
NOTE: |
|
• Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care
in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe
too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe.
• After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal
damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact.
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector.
TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A DIGITAL MULTIMETER
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: High voltage circuits should only be tested using a digital multimeter (DMM)
and test leads with at least a CAT III rating, such as the J 39200-A Digital
Multimeter. Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
Digital Multimeter (DMM) Basic Requirements
Service information is validated using digital multimeters that meet or exceed the following requirements.
Using a multimeter that does not meet these basic requirements may give inaccurate readings which could lead
to an incorrect diagnosis.
1. Four digits displayed
2. Voltage, current, resistance, frequency, diode test settings, and min-max function
3. Display positive and negative values
1. Have at least 10 M fi input impedance
2. Test a DC voltage range of 0.1 - 1000 V.
3. Test an AC voltage range of 0.1 - 1000 V.
1. Test a DC current range of 0.1 pA - 10 A.
2. Test an AC current range of 0.1 pA - 10 A.
Test a resistance range of 0.1 fi - 40 Mfi and displays infinite for a value greater than 40 M fi (O.L. (Over-
load))
Test for a frequency range of 0.5 HZ - 199 K HZ
1. Apply at least 2 mA when performing the diode bias test
2. Display the break over voltage drop (0 - 3 V) of a forward biased diode
3. Display infinite (O.L. (Over-load)) when a diode is reverse biased
1. Can update at a 25 ms sample rate
2. Saves and displays minimum and maximum values
NOTE: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the engine
control module (ECM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter such as the EL-39200.
The DMM instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the
DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a
test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much
voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though
voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low
resistance in a circuit means good continuity.
NOTE: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance
with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage
to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance
reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If
the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
• Probe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or
tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving.
Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors.
• Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to
other harnesses.
• If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to
simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
TROUBLESHOOTING WITH A TEST LAMP
EL-35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: This procedure should not be performed on high voltage circuits. Performing
this procedure on high voltage circuits may result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A digital multimeter (DMM)
should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp
shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is
present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is
present.
The EL-35616-200 kit is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12 V light bulb with an attached pair of
leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following procedures.
When testing for voltage:
1. Attach one lead to ground.
2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested.
When testing for ground:
1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage.
2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present.
3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested.
USING FUSED JUMPER WIRES
EL 35616-20F Fused Jumper Wire
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
NOTE: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged.
 |
|
Fig. 1: Fused Jumper Wire Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
The EL 35616-20F Fused Jumper Wire includes banana jack connectors that provide adaptation to most
connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20 A fuse which may not be suitable for
some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
MEASURING VOLTAGE
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 50 feet of the
vehicle, either indoors or outdoors
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves at all times when working with the high
voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedure exactly as written may result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit.
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary.
2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods:
• Vehicle power mode to Vehicle in Service Mode or Vehicle On.
• Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls.
• Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested.
3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the digital multimeter (DMM).
4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested.
5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground.
6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP
EL - 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points.
 |
|
Fig. 2: Measuring Voltage Drop Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
1. Set the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested.
3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit.
4. Operate the circuit.
5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points.
MEASURING FREQUENCY
EL - 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal.
NOTE: Connecting the Digital Multimeter (DMM) to the circuit before pressing the Hz
button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range.
1. Apply power to the circuit.
2. Set the DMM to the V (AC) position.
3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested.
4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground.
5. Set to Hz on the DMM.
6. The DMM will display the frequency measured.
Because a test lamp can light with up to 200 Q in a ground or low reference circuit they are not recommended
to be used for this type of test. A low impedance test lamp can light and indicate the circuit is good when there
is as much as 20 - 30 Q present, while a high impedance test lamp can light with up to 200 Q present in the
circuit. This is why the Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) is used when validating a ground or low reference circuit
continuity.
When using the DMM there are many vehicle conditions that can affect the ground and low reference continuity
testing. If these conditions are not met, a ground or low reference circuit test can fail on a good circuit. This
may cause longer diagnosis time and incorrect component replacement.
Any current flow through a ground or low reference circuit, while being tested, will skew the DMM continuity
reading, or display a reading higher than when there is no current flowing. Performing a ground or low
reference circuit continuity test, in reference to the vehicles battery negative terminal, will have the highest risk
of failing a good ground or low reference circuit test than any other ground reference point. The best ground test
points would be a control module housing (if the control modules housing is metal and grounded), door jamb
striker (if attached to metal), under dash metal frame work, engine block, or body ground studs (other than
where the negative battery cable is attached).
A typical DMM ground or low reference circuit continuity reading can be as high as 100 Q with the vehicle
power mode in Vehicle ON or Vehicle in Service Mode, and drop to 15 - 25 Q after switching the vehicle off.
The reading will drop below 10 Q after 30 - 40 s, then below 5 Q after 60 s. Once the vehicle completely goes
to sleep (generally 3-10 min) the reading will drop below 0.3 Q.
The following list of conditions may need to be met to ensure a valid continuity reading on a ground or low
reference circuit:
• Vehicle off
• Transmitter out of range of the vehicle
• Retained Accessory Power off (open and close the driver door after vehicle off)
• Battery charger set at a 2 A or less charge rate
• Scan tool not communicating with any vehicle control module (in some cases it may need to be
disconnected from the DLC)
• All entry doors closed
• Headlamps off(auto headlamps disabled)
• Any delay lighting off
• HVAC after blow off
• Any accessory that can work when the vehicle power mode is Vehicle OFF
• Wait up to 60 s (after all other listed conditions are met)
Locking the doors with a remote transmitter can greatly reduce the time to achieve a valid ground or low
reference continuity test result.
There are some low reference circuits that use a driver to isolate the circuit while the ignition is off. This is done
in most cases for accidental reverse battery connections or reverse polarity jump starting. When this driver is
present, the ignition will need to be on to validate the circuit.
TESTING FOR CONTINUITY
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: This procedure should not be performed on high voltage circuits. Performing
this procedure on high voltage circuits may result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Set the DMM to the Q position.
2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit.
3. Disconnect the load.
4. Select the MIN MAX function on the DMM.
5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested.
6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit.
7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
NOTE: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit.
2. Disconnect the load.
3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested.
4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage.
5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground.
6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity.
TESTING FOR SHORT TO GROUND
WARNING: This procedure should not be performed on high voltage circuits. Performing
this procedure on high voltage circuits may result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit.
With a Digital Multimeter (DMM)
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit.
2. Disconnect the load.
3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the fi position.
4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested.
5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground.
6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit.
2. Disconnect the load.
3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage.
4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested.
5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open.
2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load.
3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered).
• When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch.
• If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted.
TESTING FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: This procedure should not be performed on high voltage circuits. Performing
this procedure on high voltage circuits may result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit.
2. Disconnect the load.
3. Set the digital multimeter (DMM) to the V (DC) position.
4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested.
5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground.
6. Switch the vehicle power mode to Vehicle in Service Mode and operate all accessories.
7. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 V, there is a short to voltage in the circuit.
TESTING FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS AND POOR CONNECTIONS
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: This procedure should not be performed on high voltage circuits. Performing
this procedure on high voltage circuits may result in serious injury or death.
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An
intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated.
Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an
intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following
items:
• Wiring broken inside the insulation
• Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
• Poor terminal to wire connection - Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps,
poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire
to terminal contact area, etc.
• Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor
can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire
in the suspect circuits.
• Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or
short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
• Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
• Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order
to verify the customer concern.
• Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high
resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions.
• Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder
operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up
of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The
oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the
connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause
fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and
hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since
vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin,
copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to
see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add dielectric grease / lubricant (Nyogel
760G or equivalent, meeting GM specification 9986087) to both sides of the connector terminals. Then
reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact
resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect
component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between
the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged
connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause
contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion,
causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always
use the EL-35616 kit when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining
the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the
female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in
a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use EL-35616 kit to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use EL-35616
kit can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves.
2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green
build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance,
intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of
contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal/terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different
between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire connectors on the harness side or the component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question.
2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the
connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to
ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in
question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
• Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to
a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may
also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any
intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM
may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current.
Operate the component to test the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit
Testing, and Power Distribution Schematics .
• Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground
circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested.
Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the
component and in splice packs, where applicable. Operate the component to test the ability of the circuit
to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing, and Ground Distribution Schematics .
Temperature Sensitivity
• An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the
component/connection is hot.
• Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of
intermittent condition, where applicable.
• If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
• High ambient temperatures
• Underhood/engine generated heat
• Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
• Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
• If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
• Low ambient temperatures - In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
• The condition only occurs on a cold start.
• The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
• Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature
related.
• If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition.
Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of
electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
• A mis-routed harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition
components, motors, generator, etc. - These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that
could interfere with normal circuit operation.
• Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or
switch - These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the
malfunctioning component is operating.
• Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios,
amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc. - These accessories may
create interference in other circuits while operating and the interference would disappear when the
accessory is not operating. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories.
• Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may
contain a clamping diode.
• The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
• There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
• A new service control module is installed.
• A control module from another vehicle is installed.
• Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
NOTE: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME
software/calibration files that are already present in the control module.
This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
• Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is
found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References for replacement, setup, and programming.
INDUCING INTERMITTENT FAULT CONDITIONS
Special Tools
EL-25070 Heat Gun
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following
Personal Protection Equipment:
• Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 50 feet of the
vehicle, either indoors or outdoors
• Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with
leather protectors
• Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.
• Wear the Insulation gloves at all times when working with the high
voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.
Failure to follow the procedure exactly as written may result in serious injury or
death.
Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by
vibration, torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary
to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can
consist of a wide variety of actions, including:
• Wiggling the harness
• Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting
• Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector
• Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation
• Relocating a harness or wires
All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected,
wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate
here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and
OFF by the scan tool, to move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the
vehicle ON, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring vehicle operation. If harness or connector
movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or vehicle operation, inspect and repair the
harness/connections as necessary.
You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floor
jacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by
manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their
connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to the Min/Max mode and connected to
the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents.
Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results
as well.
There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault
condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while
manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally
high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions.
High Temperature Conditions
If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the EL-25070 heat gun.
Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high
temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition.
The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating
temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not
allow for the same control, however.
Low Temperature Conditions
Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the
shade can have the desired effect.
If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or
cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18A°C (0A°F) from one
end and +71A°C (160A°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. In addition, circuit
cooling spray can be used to cool down a component or circuit.
Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in
an effort to duplicate the concern.
Duplicating Failure Conditions
• If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions.
• Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the
DTC set.
1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool.
3. Switch the vehicle power mode to Vehicle Off and wait 15 seconds.
4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records
data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running
the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being
diagnosed.
5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling
conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate
whether the DTC passed or failed.
• An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal
reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern.
TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL INTERMITTENTS
Special Tools
EL-39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: This procedure should not be performed on high voltage circuits. Performing
this procedure on high voltage circuits may result in serious injury or death.
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient
points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment.
Testing for Short to Ground
Testing for Continuity
Testing for a Short to Voltage
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the EL-39200 DMM.
This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the DMM. The DMM will generate
an audible tone when a change is detected.
NOTE: The DMM must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the
DMM can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum
(MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured.
1. Connect the DMM to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a
suspected circuit to the other. Refer to Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter for information on
connecting the DMM to the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) or V (DC) position.
3. Press the range button of the DMM in order to select the desired voltage range.
NOTE: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a
new value in order to record the full change.
4. Select the MIN MAX function of the DMM. The DMM displays the 100 ms RECORD and emits an
audible tone (beep).
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the
connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent
Fault Conditions.
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been
recorded.
7. Press the MIN MAX button until the MAX value is displayed and note the value.
8. Press the MIN MAX button until the MIN value is displayed and note the value.
9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values.
• If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 V or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
• If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 V an intermittent
open or high resistance condition does not exist.
SCAN TOOL SNAPSHOT PROCEDURE
Reviewing Stored Data in Global Diagnostic System (GDS)
A snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the
snapshot is being made. A snapshot is used to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. In
GDS 2 there is not a traditional snapshot as there has been in the past. GDS 2 saves all past VIN and diagnostic
data for future viewing. GDS 2 automatically records data whenever the user views Module Diagnostics,
Vehicle Diagnostics and/or Systems Diagnostics. Module Diagnostics includes DTC Data, Identification
Information, Data Display, Control Functions and Configuration/Reset Functions. Vehicle Diagnostics includes
Vehicle Wide DTCs. Systems Diagnostics includes Inspection/Maintenance Status and Inspection/Maintenance
Information.
The Review Stored Data function allows viewing and playing of previously recorded vehicle data. This
information can be used in analysis of vehicle problems and detection of trigger error conditions. The graph
function can be used to compare multiple parameters to see if a component is functioning properly. Recorded
sessions can be selected for viewing by the following two methods:
• From the Home Page, click on Review Stored Data. In the Review Stored Data page, highlight a vehicle
in the Sessions screen located in the upper pane and highlight the desired Stored Data in the lower pane,
then click the Review button.
• The user can view stored data without ending a current on-vehicle diagnostic session by clicking the
Vehicle Menu button (when active) or Back button until the Session Manager is displayed in the menu.
This is used when a user is viewing live data and wants the quickest way to review the data. Click on the
Session Manager button. Highlight the desired Stored Data in the lower pane and click the Review button.
The following information can be selected in the tabs at the top of the screen:
• Graphical Data Display - Allows a detailed review of parameter data. The buttons on the right side
modify the graph data
• Diagnostic Data Display - Displays incoming information from the file. The current value of the
parameters is displayed on the screen.
• Line Graph - Allows selected locked parameters to be graphed with parameters overlaid for data
comparison. The current value of the parameters is displayed on the screen. Use the buttons on the right
side to modify the graph data.
• Bookmarks - If bookmarks are present, this displays the Type, Description and Time of automatic and
manually generated bookmarks.
• System Information - Displays the GDS 2 Software Version and MDI Serial Number used when the
session was recorded.
• Selected Vehicle Configuration - Displays vehicle identifiers, such as transmission type, for the vehicle
selected on the Stored Data Review screen in the Sessions field.
• RPO - Displays vehicle build information.
On the Graphical Data Display tab there are multiple selections at the top of the page. The selections available
are:
• Create Report - Opens and internet browser page where a data display report can be printed or saved for
future reference.
• Unit Switch - Toggles graph units between English and metric.
• Lock - When a parameter is selected, clicking the lock button locks a selected parameter for viewing in
the Line Graph tab. In the Line Graph tab, locked parameters are isolated and overlaid for data
comparison.
• Up Arrow - Click the up arrow to move a highlighted parameter up a position on the list.
• Down Arrow - Click the down arrow to move a highlighted parameter down a position on the list.
• Save As - This selection is available in the Graphical Data Display and Diagnostic Data Display tabs.
This allows the user to export the graph data to a worksheet for in depth analysis and to timestamp data.
To review the session there are buttons at the bottom of the window to control the cursor. From left to right the
buttons are:
• Insert Bookmark - This button allows the user to insert bookmarks anywhere along the timeline. This
provision allows the user to record notes regarding the inserted bookmark.
• Return Bookmark - This button moves the cursor to the previous bookmark.
• Back - This button moves the cursor back 1 frame.
• Timeline Slider Control - This allows the user to slide and select any position on the Timeline required.
• Forward - This button moves the cursor forward 1 frame.
• Forward Bookmark - This button moves the cursor forward 1 bookmark.
• Bookmarks - Allows the user to toggle bookmark visibility ON and OFF.
The vertical side bar on the right side of the screen in the Graphical Data Display and Line Graph tabs toggles
the Graphical Selection Panel from hidden to visible. The graphical preference selections available are:
• Reset - Resets the graph display back to the initial standard GDS 2 setting.
• Grid Line Toggle - This toggle reverses the current state of showing or removing grid lines.
• Hash Mark Toggle - This toggle reverses the current state of showing or removing data acquisition points
or hash marks.
• Horizontal Graph Compression - Compresses the scale of the graph horizontally.
• Horizontal Graph Expansion - Expands the scale of the graph horizontally.
• Vertical Graph Compression - Compresses the scale of the graph vertically.
• Vertical Graph Expansion - Expands the scale of the graph vertically.
• Move Centerline of Graph Up - Moves the centerline of the graph up incrementally.
• Move Centerline of Graph Down - Moves the centerline of the graph down incrementally.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSES
EL - 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an
excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or
incomplete circuit. Fuses are a one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is
overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine if the element in the fuse is
broken (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) or a continuity tester.
If the element is broken or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating.
|
Fuse Types | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
CIRCUIT PROTECTION - CIRCUIT BREAKERS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the
rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current
will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used.
This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few
seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will
continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed.
This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current
heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high
that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the
circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit
breaker will re-close within a second or 2.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION - FUSIBLE LINKS
EL - 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
NOTE: When repairing a fusible link, fusible links cut longer than 225 mm
(approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection.
Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located
between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a Digital Multimeter
(DMM) at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must
be replaced with fusible link of the same gauge size.
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements
together will make wiring repair faster and easier:
Flat Wire Repairs
Serial Data Circuit Wiring Repairs
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs
Wire to Wire Repair
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs
Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector
manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector,
refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct
connector repair from the following list:
Connector Position Assurance Locks
Terminal Position Assurance Locks
AFL/EPC Connectors
Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors
(ECM)
Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To
Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-
Way) Delphi Connectors (Steering Gear)
FCI Connectors (Lever Lock) FCI Connectors (SIR)
FEP Connectors (Steering Gear)
JST Connectors
Kostal Connectors (Glow Plug Control Module) Kostal Connectors (Transmission)
Molex Connectors (Lever Lock) Molex Connectors (SIR)
Sumitomo Connectors
Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25
Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP
Connectors (Seat) Tyco/AMP Connectors (102-Way Inline) Tyco/AMP Connectors (SIR)
Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way)
Repairing Connector Terminals (Terminated Lead Repair) Repairing Connector Terminals
(Terminal Repair)
Connector Anatomy
 |
|
Fig. 4: Identifying Typical Connector Components |
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Identifying Connectors |
Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure.
There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the
connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector
manufactures.
The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles:
• AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components)
• Bosch
• Delphi
• FCI (Framatome Connectors International)
• JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics)
• JST (Japan Solderless Terminals)
• Kostal
• Molex
• Sumitomo
• Tyco/AMP
• Yazaki
Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a
connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify
marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and
descriptions of connector identification markings.
• Most of AFL's connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not
have any markings on them.
 |
|
Fig. 6: View Of Bosch Identification On Connector Body Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
• In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector,
look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear
anywhere on the connector and is often very small.
• In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector,
look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear
anywhere on the connector.
 |
|
Fig. 8: View Of FCI Identification On Connector Body Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
• FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above
it.
 |
|
Fig. 9: View Of JAF Identification On Connector Body |
• JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors.
 |
|
Fig. 10: View Of JST Identification On Connector Body Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
• JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the
logo will vary with the connector size and style.
 |
|
Fig. 11: View Of Kostel Connector Identifier Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
• Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions
connection.
Fig. 12: View Of Molex Identification On Connector Body
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
 |
|
Fig. 13: View Of Sumitono Identification On Connector Body |
• Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the
connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was
made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit.
Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to
that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most
common place is at the wire side of the housing.
• Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable
marks on them.
 |
|
Fig. 14: View Of Yazaki Identification On Connector Body |
• Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown.
Article GUID: A00884641
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Displays and Gauges - Volt
SPECIFICATIONS
|
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR RESISTANCE | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WIRING SCHEMATICS
Power, Ground, Data Communication and Indicators
 |
|
Fig. 1: Power, Ground, Data Communication and Indicators |
Driver Information Center
 |
|
Fig. 2: Driver Information Center Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
DRIVER INFORMATION SYSTEM WIRING SCHEMATICS
Shift Lever Position Indicator
 |
|
Fig. 3: Shift Lever Position Indicator Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
AUDIBLE WARNINGS WIRING SCHEMATICS
Audible Warning
 |
|
Fig. 4: Audible Warning Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
DTC B0158: AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC B0158 02
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B0158 05
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit High Voltage/Open
Diagnostic Fault Information
Short to
Open/High
Short to
Signal
Circuit
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 monitors the ambient air temperature sensor with a low reference
circuit and 5 V signal circuit. The Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 monitors the voltage drop across the
sensor, which is proportional to temperature. When the ambient air temperatures are cold, the resistance of the
sensor is high and the voltage signals are high. When the ambient air temperatures are hot, the resistance of the
sensors is low and the voltage signals are low. The Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 sends the ambient air
temperature signal to the Instrument Cluster via serial data. The Instrument Cluster displays the temperature on
the driver information center.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The instrument cluster detects the sensor signal circuit is more than 88A°C (190A°F).
The instrument cluster detects the sensor signal circuit is less than -40A°C (-40A°F).
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The Instrument Cluster uses a default air temperature value for further calculations. The driver information
center displays no ambient air temperature information.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC will become history if the instrument cluster no longer detects a malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Instrument Cluster Description and Operation
Driver Information Center (DIC) Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify no other Instrument Cluster or Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 DTCs are present.
• If other DTCs are present
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
• If no other DTCs are present
3. Verify the Instrument Cluster scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter between -40A°C (-40A°F) to
+88A°C (+190A°F) and changes with air temperature changes.
• If parameter is not between -40A°C (-40A°F) to +88A°C (+190A°F) or does not change with
air temperature changes
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
4. Verify the Hybrid Powertrain Control Module 2 scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter between
-40A°C (-40A°F) to +88A°C (+190A°F) and changes with air temperature changes.
• If parameter is not between -40A°C (-40A°F) to +88A°C (+190A°F) or changes with air
temperature changes
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification must be performed before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B9 Ambient Air
Temperature Sensor. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the low reference circuit terminal B and ground.
1. Disconnect the harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for less than 1 V between the low reference circuit terminal B and ground.
• If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
5. Verify the scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is greater than 98%.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If greater than 98%
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal A and the low reference circuit
terminal B.
7. Verify the scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is less than 8%.
• If 8% or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
8. Test or replace the B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor.
Component Testing
1. Test the B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor by varying the sensor temperature while monitoring the
sensor resistance.
Replace the B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B0550: ODOMETER CIRCUIT GENERAL MEMORY MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Odometer Circuit General Memory Malfunction
Circuit/System Description
The instrument cluster is equipped with odometers that indicate the distance traveled by the vehicle. One type of
odometer is the season odometer where the traveled distance can not be reset by the driver. This information is
also stored in the body control module (BCM). In addition to storing the season odometer value for the vehicle,
the instrument cluster and the BCM store the VIN. Software checks are performed to ensure these modules, and
their stored season odometer information, can not be moved or transferred between different vehicles.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The vehicle is ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The BCM has detected an internal memory malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC B0550 32 is stored in the BCM memory.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The BCM no longer detects a malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC B0550 32 is not set.
1. Program the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the K9 Body Control Module
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming and setup
DTC B071F: TRANSMISSION RANGE INDICATOR INTERNAL MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Transmission Range Indicator Internal Malfunction
Circuit/System Description
The transmission shift lever position indicator is located on the center console and indicates the current
transmission shift lever position. The transmission shift lever position indicator receives power and ground and
is controlled by the body control module (BCM) via serial data.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The ignition is ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The BCM has detected an internal malfunction in the transmission shift lever position indicator.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
No action is taken.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC will become history if the BCM no longer detects a malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC B071F 39 is not set.
Replace the P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Transmission Control Replacement (With Base) Transmission Control Replacement (Without
Base)
DTC B124F: MOST PROGRAMMING FAILURE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
MOST Programming Failure Files Not Available
MOST Programming Failure Not Programmed
MOST Programming Failure Security Access Not Activated
MOST Programming Failure Security Checksum Error
Circuit/System Description
The instrument cluster can communicate with other devices on a Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST)
protocol and through the USB port. Software checks are performed to ensure the internal MOST circuitry is
operating properly.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The Vehicle is ON or in Service Mode.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The Instrument Cluster has detected an internal memory malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The DTC is stored in the Instrument Cluster memory.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The Instrument Cluster no longer detects a malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC B124F is not set.
1. Program the P16 Instrument Cluster.
2. Verify the DTC is not set.
• If the DTC is set, replace P16 Instrument Cluster.
• If the DTC is not set
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for Instrument Cluster replacement, programming and setup
DTC P0071-P0074: AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Performance
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Intermittent
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The ambient air temperature sensor is located behind the grille. The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
monitors the ambient air temperature sensor utilizing a low reference circuit and signal circuit. The Hybrid/EV
Powertrain Control Module 2 monitors the voltage drop across the sensor, which is inversely proportional to
temperature. When the ambient air temperature is cold, the resistance of the sensor is high. When the ambient
air temperature is warm, the resistance of the sensor is low. The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
converts the voltage value to a temperature value. The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 also sends the
temperature value to other control modules via serial data.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode
• The 12 V battery voltage is greater than or equal to 10.2 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
During the first 20 s of run time after the 1 hour soaking period, the difference between the outside air
temperature and the A/C High Pressure Switch Signal is greater than 30A°C (86A°F).
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 detects the sensor signal is more than 60A°C (140A°F).
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 detects the sensor signal is less than -40A°C (-40A°F).
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 detects an unrealistic signal variance.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• DTC P0071 - P0074 are type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC will become history if the ECM no longer detects a malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the scan tool Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 Ambient Air Temperature parameter is
between -40A°C (-40A°F) and +60A°C (+140A°F) and changes with air temperature changes.
• If not between -40A°C (-40A°F) and +60A°C (+140A°F) or changes with air temperature
changes
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification must be performed before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B9 Ambient Air
Temperature Sensor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the low reference circuit terminal B (or 2) and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is less
than -39A°C (-38A°F).
• If -39A°C (-38A°F) or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal A (or 1) and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If less than -39A°C (-38A°F)
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal A (or 1) and the low reference circuit
terminal B (or 2).
6. Verify the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is
57A°C (+135A°F) or greater.
• If less than 57A°C (+135A°F)
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire and disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K114B
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Vehicle OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 fi in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If 57A°C (135A°F) or greater
7. Test or replace the B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
DTC P0461-P0464: FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Fuel Level Sensor Performance
Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Fuel Level Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The fuel level sensor changes resistance based on fuel level. The engine control module (ECM) monitors the
signal circuit of the fuel level sensor in order to determine the fuel level. When the fuel tank is full, the
resistances of the fuel level sensor is low and the ECM senses a low signal voltage on the signal circuit of the
fuel level sensor. When the fuel tank is empty, the resistance of the fuel level sensor is high and the ECM senses
a high signal voltage. The ECM uses the signal circuit of the fuel level sensor in order to calculate the
percentage of remaining fuel in the tank. The ECM sends the fuel level percentage via High Speed CAN-Bus to
the body control module (BCM). The BCM then sends the fuel level percentage via Low Speed CAN-Bus to the
instrument cluster in order to control the fuel gauge. When the fuel level falls below approximately 11% the
instrument cluster illuminates the low fuel level indicator.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The engine is running
• The system voltage is between 11 - 16 V
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects a change in fuel level of less than a specified amount (typically 3 - 10 L or 0.8 - 2.6 gal) over
a specified driving distance (typically 240 - 320 km or 150 - 200 miles).
• The signal voltage is less than 0.25 V.
• The above conditions must be met for 5 seconds.
• The signal voltage is greater than 4.7 V.
• The above conditions must be met for 5 seconds.
• The fuel level change is greater than 10%.
• The above conditions must be met for 30 seconds.
• DTC P0464 runs and fails 2 out of 3 test cycles.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• P0461, P0462, P0463, and P0464 are Type B DTCs
• The fuel gauge defaults to empty
• The low fuel indicator illuminates
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• P0461, P0462, P0463, and P0464 are Type B DTCs
• The DTC becomes history when the conditions for setting the DTC are no longer present.
• The history DTC clears after 40 malfunction-free warm-up cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the scan tool Fuel Remaining in Tank parameter is between 5 - 95% and varies with fuel level.
• If not between 5 - 95% or does not vary with fuel level
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
3. Verify that all fuel level gauge segments illuminate when performing the scan tool Driver Information
Center Segments control function.
• If any fuel level gauge segments do not illuminate
Replace the P16 instrument cluster
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification must be performed before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B46 fuel level sensor.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the low reference circuit terminal 6 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode, test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If greater than 5.2 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, Vehicle in
Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
4. Test or replace the B46 fuel level sensor.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the fuel level sender.
2. Sweep the fuel level sensor through its full range of motion while measuring resistance between the
signal terminal 5 and the low reference terminal 6.
3. Test for a minimum resistance value of 37-43 fi and a maximum value of 245-255 fi without any spikes
or dropouts.
Replace the fuel level sensor.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Performance
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Voltage.
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The engine oil pressure sensor changes voltage based on the engine oil pressure. The engine oil pressure sensor
is a 3-wire sensor comprising of the signal circuit, the low reference circuit and the 5 V reference circuit. The
engine control module (ECM) supplies 5 V to the engine oil pressure sensor via the 5 V reference circuit and
provides ground via the low reference circuit. The ECM monitors the signal circuit of the engine oil pressure
sensor to determine if the engine oil pressure sensor voltage is within the normal operating range of
approximately 1 - 4 V. When the engine oil pressure is high, the engine oil pressure sensor voltage is high and
the ECM senses a high signal voltage. When the engine oil pressure is low, the engine oil pressure sensor
voltage is low and the ECM senses a low signal voltage. The ECM sends the engine oil pressure information to
the instrument cluster via serial data. The instrument cluster will illuminate or display the engine oil pressure
indicator when the engine oil pressure is low.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The engine is running.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The ECM detects that measured oil pressure is at least 47 kPa (6.8 psi) less than or 50 kPa (7.3 psi) higher
than the predicted oil pressure.
• The engine oil pressure is outside of a calculated working range determined by engine speed and
temperature.
• The above condition is present for greater than 10 s.
• The ECM detects that the engine oil pressure sensor signal circuit is less than 0.2 V.
• The above condition is present for greater than 10 s.
• The ECM detects that the engine oil pressure sensor signal circuit is greater than 4.8 V.
• The above condition is present for greater than 10 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The ECM records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostics test fails. The ECM displays this
information in the Failure Records on the scan tool.
• The instrument cluster illuminates the engine oil pressure indicator.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The DTC becomes history when the conditions for setting the DTC are no longer present.
• The history DTC clears after 40 malfunction-free warm-up cycles.
Diagnostic Aids
DTC P0521 can set if engine oil pressure is outside the calculated engine oil pressure model stored in the engine
control module. This can be an indication of mechanical engine issues causing lower than expected engine oil
pressure.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Engine Oil Pressure Sensor parameter is 0 psi (0 kPa).
• If not 0 psi (0 kPa)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
3. Engine running.
4. Verify actual engine oil pressure is within specified range. Refer to Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing in
Displays and Gauges Component Replacement Reference.
5. Verify the scan tool Engine Oil Pressure parameter is within specified range.
• If not within specified range
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification must be performed before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B37B Engine Oil
Pressure Sensor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the low reference circuit terminal 2 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 3 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If greater than 5.2 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
5. Verify the scan tool Engine Oil Pressure parameter is less than 35 kPa (5 psi).
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If below 35 kPa (5 psi)
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and the 5 V reference circuit
terminal 3.
7. Engine running.
8. Verify the scan tool Engine Oil Pressure parameter is greater than 800 kPa (116 psi).
• If 800 kPa (116 psi) or less
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
• If greater than 800 kPa (116 psi)
9. Test or replace the B37B Engine Oil Pressure Sensor.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
|
DISPLAYS AND GAUGES COMPONENT REPLACEMENT REFERENCE | ||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||
|
SYMPTOMS - DISPLAYS AND GAUGES |
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom diagnostic
tables.
1. Before using the symptom diagnostic tables, perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle .
2. Review the system operation in order to understand the system functions. Refer to the following
description and operations:
Instrument Cluster Description and Operation
Indicator/Warning Message Description and Operation
Driver Information Center (DIC) Description and Operation
Audible Warnings Description and Operation
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which can affect the operation of the instrument panel cluster or the
audible warning systems. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect the accessible system components or the visible system components for obvious damage or for
obvious conditions which can cause the symptom.
• Inspect for the proper fluid levels.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
Gauges and Odometer
Instrument Cluster Display Malfunction
Instrument Cluster Gauges Malfunction
Fuel Gauge Malfunction
Speedometer and/or Odometer Malfunction
Outside Air Temperature Display Malfunction
Audible Warnings
Chime Malfunction
CHIME MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The radio generates the audible warnings. The instrument cluster, the body control module (BCM), the
inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) or the object alarm module request audible warnings
via Low Speed CAN-Bus signals.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Audible Warnings Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Audible Warnings Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Before performing this diagnostics, make sure no indicators are illuminated
after the instrument cluster performs a lamp test. If any indicators are
illuminated after the bulb test, perform the indicator diagnostics before this
diagnostics.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify all the radio speakers operate by adjust the radio balance and fade to each speaker.
• If any speaker does not operate properly
Refer to Speaker Malfunction .
• If the speakers operate properly
3. Verify the scan tool Driver Seat Belt Status and Passenger Seat Belt Status parameters are Buckled when
both front seat belts are buckled.
• If not Buckled
Refer to Seat Belt Indicator Malfunction - Driver .
4. Verify the scan tool Headlamp On Switch parameter is Inactive when the headlamps are OFF.
• If not Inactive
Refer to Headlamps Malfunction .
• If Inactive
5. Verify the scan tool Park Lamps Switch parameter is Inactive when the park lamp switch is OFF.
• If not Inactive
Refer to Park, License, and/or Tail Lamps Malfunction .
• If Inactive
6. Verify the scan tool Left Turn Signal Switch and Right Turn Signal Switch parameters are Inactive while
the turn signal switch is OFF.
• If not Inactive
Refer to Turn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators Malfunction .
• If Inactive
7. Verify the scan tool Park Brake Switch parameter is Inactive when the park brake is OFF.
• If not Inactive
Refer to Park Brake System Diagnosis .
• If Inactive
8. Verify that all scan tool parameters listed below are Inactive when all the doors are closed.
• Driver Door Ajar Switch
• Passenger Door Ajar Switch
• Left Rear Door Ajar Switch
• Right Rear Door Ajar Switch
• If not Inactive
Refer to Door Ajar Indicator Malfunction .
• If Inactive
9. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for BCM or Radio replacement, programming and setup
FUEL GAUGE MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Fuel Level Sensor Performance
Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Fuel Level Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The fuel level sensor changes resistance based on fuel level. The engine control module (ECM) monitors the
signal circuit of the fuel level sensor in order to determine the fuel level. When the fuel tank is full, the
resistances of the fuel level sensor is low and the ECM senses a low signal voltage on the signal circuit of the
fuel level sensor. When the fuel tank is empty, the resistance of the fuel level sensor is high and the ECM senses
a high signal voltage. The ECM uses the signal circuit of the fuel level sensor in order to calculate the
percentage of remaining fuel in the tank. The ECM sends the fuel level percentage via High Speed CAN-Bus to
the body control module (BCM). The BCM then sends the fuel level percentage via Low Speed CAN-Bus to the
instrument cluster in order to control the fuel gauge. When the fuel level falls below approximately 11% the
instrument cluster illuminates the low fuel level indicator.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The engine is running
• The system voltage is between 11 - 16 V
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P0461 00
The ECM detects a change in fuel level of less than a specified amount (typically 3 - 10 L or 0.8 - 2.6 gal) over
a specified driving distance (typically 240 - 320 km or 150 - 200 miles).
• The signal voltage is less than 0.25 V.
• The above conditions must be met for 5 seconds.
• The signal voltage is greater than 4.7 V.
• The above conditions must be met for 5 seconds.
• The fuel level change is greater than 10%.
• The above conditions must be met for 30 seconds.
• DTC P0464 runs and fails 2 out of 3 test cycles.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• P0461, P0462, P0463, and P0464 are Type B DTCs
• The fuel gauge defaults to empty
• The low fuel indicator illuminates
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• P0461, P0462, P0463, and P0464 are Type B DTCs
• The DTC becomes history when the conditions for setting the DTC are no longer present.
• The history DTC clears after 40 malfunction-free warm-up cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the scan tool Fuel Remaining in Tank parameter is between 5 - 95% and varies with fuel level.
• If not between 5 - 95% or does not vary with fuel level
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
3. Verify that all fuel level gauge segments illuminate when performing the scan tool Driver Information
Center Segments control function.
• If any fuel level gauge segments do not illuminate
Replace the P16 instrument cluster
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification must be performed before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B46 fuel level sensor.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the low reference circuit terminal 6 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode, test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, Vehicle in
Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
4. Test or replace the B46 fuel level sensor.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the fuel level sender.
2. Sweep the fuel level sensor through its full range of motion while measuring resistance between the
signal terminal 5 and the low reference terminal 6.
3. Test for a minimum resistance value of 37-43 Q and a maximum value of 245-255 Q without any spikes
or dropouts.
Replace the fuel level sensor.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The instrument cluster displays the engine coolant temperature, fuel level, vehicle speed and the engine speed
based on the information from the engine control module (ECM). The ECM sends information via serial data to
the body control module (BCM). The BCM then sends the information via serial data to the instrument cluster
to display the engine coolant temperature, fuel level, the engine speed, the vehicle speed and the distance
travelled, either in kilometers or miles, based on the vehicle requirements.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify all gauge segments illuminate when performing the Driver Information Center Segments test with
the scan tool.
• If any gauge segments do not illuminate
Replace the P16 instrument cluster
3. Drive the vehicle.
4. Verify the gauge values match the values on the scan tool.
Reprogram the P16 Instrument Cluster.
1. Drive the vehicle.
2. Verify the gauge values match the values on the scan tool.
• If the values do not match
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
5. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for Instrument Custer or ECM replacement, programming and setup
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The instrument cluster displays the engine coolant temperature, fuel level, vehicle speed and the engine speed
based on the information from the engine control module (ECM). The ECM sends information via serial data to
the body control module (BCM). The BCM then sends the information via serial data to the instrument cluster
to display the engine coolant temperature, fuel level, the engine speed, the vehicle speed and the distance
travelled, either in kilometers or miles, based on the vehicle requirements.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
• Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify all gauge segments illuminate when performing the Instrument Cluster Initialization test with the
scan tool.
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
3. Verify all segments illuminate White, Blue, Green, Red, Black and Off when performing the Driver
Information Center Segments test with the scan tool.
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for Instrument Cluster replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Performance
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Intermittent
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The ambient air temperature sensor is located behind the grille. The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
monitors the ambient air temperature sensor utilizing a low reference circuit and signal circuit. The Hybrid/EV
Powertrain Control Module 2 monitors the voltage drop across the sensor, which is inversely proportional to
temperature. When the ambient air temperature is cold, the resistance of the sensor is high. When the ambient
air temperature is warm, the resistance of the sensor is low. The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
converts the voltage value to a temperature value. The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 also sends the
temperature value to other control modules via serial data.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode
• The 12 V battery voltage is greater than or equal to 10.2 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
During the first 20 s of run time after the 1 hour soaking period, the difference between the outside air
temperature and the A/C High Pressure Switch Signal is greater than 30A°C (86A°F).
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 detects the sensor signal is more than 60A°C (140A°F).
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 detects the sensor signal is less than -40A°C (-40A°F).
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 detects an unrealistic signal variance.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• DTC P0071 - P0074 are type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The DTC will become history if the ECM no longer detects a malfunction.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the scan tool Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 Ambient Air Temperature parameter is
between -40A°C (-40A°F) and +60A°C (+140A°F) and changes with air temperature changes.
• If not between -40A°C (-40A°F) and +60A°C (+140A°F) or changes with air temperature
changes
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification must be performed before proceeding with
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B9 Ambient Air
Temperature Sensor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the low reference circuit terminal B (or 2) and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is less
than -39A°C (-38A°F).
• If -39A°C (-38A°F) or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
Module 2.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal A (or 1) and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If less than -39A°C (-38A°F)
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal A (or 1) and the low reference circuit
terminal B (or 2).
6. Verify the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is
57A°C (+135A°F) or greater.
• If less than 57A°C (+135A°F)
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire and disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K114B
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Vehicle OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 fi in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
• If 57A°C (135A°F) or greater
7. Test or replace the B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
SPEEDOMETER AND/OR ODOMETER MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The instrument cluster displays the engine coolant temperature, fuel level, vehicle speed and the engine speed
based on the information from the engine control module (ECM). The ECM sends information via serial data to
the body control module (BCM). The BCM then sends the information via serial data to the instrument cluster
to display the engine coolant temperature, fuel level, the engine speed, the vehicle speed and the distance
travelled, either in kilometers or miles, based on the vehicle requirements. The instrument cluster will display
dashes when its VIN does not match the VIN received from the BCM.
Diagnostic Aids
If the VIN mismatch is corrected the odometer will once again be displayed in the instrument cluster. If the
vehicle is driven for a calibrated distance with a VIN mismatch, it will cause the instrument cluster odometer to
enter into an error mode and lock itself. When this occurs the dashes will remain on the display even after
correcting the VIN mismatch. The vehicle odometer status data display on the scan tool can be used to identify
a locked odometer. The only way to unlock the instrument cluster (clear the dashes from the display) is to
perform an SPS programming event. Failure to follow the diagnostic and programming procedures may result in
either an improper odometer value or a module replacement.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify all gauge segments illuminate when performing the Driver Information Center Segments test with
the scan tool.
• If any gauge segments do not illuminate
Replace the P16 instrument cluster
• If all gauge segments illuminate
3. Drive the vehicle.
4. Verify the displayed Instrument Cluster speedometer value matches the vehicle speed parameter on the
scan tool.
• If the values do not match
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
• If the values match
5. Verify the odometer display and the displayed distance counts up while driving the vehicle.
• If the odometer displays only "-" (dashes)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
• If the odometer display does not count up
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
• If speedometer sweeps and displays the correct value, and the odometer display counts up
6. All OK.
|
Circuit/System Testing | ||
|
Correcting VIN mismatch: Instrument Cluster is Showing "-" (Dashes) odometer is still unlocked
1. Verify the scan tool Odometer Status parameter is Unlocked.
• If the reading is Locked
Refer to correcting VIN mismatch - odometer locked.
2. Verify the scan tool BCM VIN parameter matches the vehicle's VIN placard.
Reprogram the BCM, then proceed to Step 3.
3. Verify the scan tool Instrument Cluster VIN parameter matches the vehicle's VIN placard.
Reprogram the instrument cluster. Then proceed with step 4.
4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Verify the instrument cluster is displaying the correct value.
• If the instrument cluster is still displaying "-" (dashes)
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
6. All OK.
1. Verify the scan tool Odometer Status parameter is Locked.
• If the reading is Unlocked
Refer to Correcting VIN mismatch - odometer unlocked.
2. Verify the scan tool Instrument Cluster VIN parameter matches the vehicle's VIN placard.
Reprogram the Instrument Cluster. Then proceed with step 3.
3. Perform the BCM setup procedure in SPS.
4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Verify the instrument cluster is displaying the correct value.
• If the instrument cluster is still displaying "-" (dashes)
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 5: Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||
|
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 6: Instrument Cluster |
|
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY | ||||||||
| ||||||||
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The audible warnings alert the driver of a system concern or a critical vehicle condition. The radio generates the
audible warnings through the speakers. The radio receives audible warning requests via the serial data circuit. If
the radio receives multiple audible warning requests, the warning with the highest priority sounds first. On
vehicles without a radio, a chime module generates the audible warnings and receives audible warning requests
via the serial data circuit. Either the radio or the chime module is the chime producer. The following lists the
audible warning sounds:
1. Single pulse gong
2. Multiple pulse gong
3. Single pulse beep
4. Multiple pulse beep
5. Click
6. Clack
Auto Stop Mode
The chime producer activates when the vehicle comes to a stop and the driver or passenger door is opened as
requested by the body control module.
Fasten Safety Belt Warning
The chime producer activates the fasten safety belt audible warning as requested by the body control module
(BCM). The BCM sends a serial data message to the chime producer indicating the chime as a multiple gong.
The fasten safety belt warning sounds and the fasten safety belt indicator illuminates when the following occurs:
• The ignition switch transitions to ON.
• The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) detects that the drivers seat belt is not
buckled and the signal is low. The SDM sends a serial data message to the BCM indicating the seat belt
status. The instrument cluster receives a serial data message from the BCM indicating the driver seat belt
status.
If the seat belt is buckled when the ignition is turned ON, the chime does not sound. If the seat belt is buckled
while the chime is sounding, the chime stops. If the seat belt is unbuckled after the initial transition to ON, the
chime does not sound.
Lights On Warning
The chime producer activates the lights on warning as requested by the BCM. The BCM sends a serial data
message to the chime producer indicating the chime as a multiple gong. The lights on warning sounds when the
following occurs:
• The ignition is OFF.
• The BCM determines that the driver door is open and the signal circuit is low.
• The BCM determines that the headlamp switch is in the park or head position.
Brake Warning
The chime producer activates the brake audible warning as requested by multiple control modules. The BCM,
electronic brake control module or the parking brake control module sends a serial data message to the chime
producer indicating the chime as a multiple gong. The brake warning sounds and the BRAKE indicator
illuminates when the following occurs:
• The ignition is ON.
• The vehicle speed is greater than 8 km/h (4.9 mph). The instrument cluster receives a serial data message
from the engine control module (ECM) indicating the vehicle speed.
• The BCM determines that the parking brake is engaged and the signal circuit is low.
• The brake fluid is low.
Door Ajar Warning
The chime producer activates the door ajar audible warning as requested by the BCM. The BCM sends a serial
data message to the chime producer indicating the chime frequency of a medium rate and continuous duration.
The door ajar warning sounds and the appropriate door ajar indicator illuminates in the driver information
center when the following occurs:
• The BCM determines that a door (driver door, passenger door, left rear door, right rear door) is open and
the signal circuit is low. The instrument cluster also receives a serial data message from the BCM
indicating the door ajar status.
• The vehicle is not in PARK. The BCM receives a serial data message from the ECM/BCM indicating the
gear position.
Object Detection
The chime producer activates the object detection audible warning as requested by the object alarm module.
When an object is within the measuring range of the sensor, the ultrasonic pulse is reflected and is received by
the sending or a neighboring sensor. The sensor converts this signal into a voltage signal and sends this signal to
the object alarm module. The object alarm module evaluates the received sensor signals. As soon as an object is
within the measuring range, the object alarm module sends a message via CAN-Bus to the chime producer in
order to give out the acoustic distance signal. The measuring range is between 30 - 120 cm (11.81 - 47.24 in).
From a distance of 120 cm (47.24 in), the acoustic signal is active. The frequency of the beep sound increases
with decreasing distance. From a distance less than 30 cm (11.81 in), the sound becomes continuous.
Additional Warnings
The following warnings have an associated instrument cluster indicator or driver information center message:
• Turn Signal Indicators - The chime producer activates the audible warning as requested by the BCM. The
chime produces two different chimes, one when the turn signal turns off and another when the turn signal
turns on.
• Vehicle Overspeed Message - The chime producer activates the audible warning as requested by the
BCM. The BCM sends a serial data message to the chime producer.
• Fuel Level Low Message - The chime producer activates the audible warning as requested by the BCM.
The BCM sends a serial data message to the chime producer.
• Oil Pressure Indicator - The chime producer activates the audible warning as requested by the BCM. The
BCM sends a serial data message to the chime producer.
• Park Assist Fault Clean Rear Bumper Message - The chime producer activates the audible warning as
requested by the BCM. The BCM sends a serial data message to the chime producer.
• Tire Pressure Low Indicator - The chime producer activates the audible warning as requested by the
BCM. The BCM sends a serial data message to the chime producer.
Refer to Indicator/Warning Message Description and Operation.
The Driver Information Center display is in the instrument cluster. The Driver Information Center displays
information about the vehicle. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected. For more
information on Indicators and Warning messages, refer to Indicator/Warning Message Description and
Operation.
There are 3 switch functions for the driver information center:
• CONFIG: Press to select either the Simple or Enhanced instrument cluster configuration display.
• BACK: Press to return to the previous screen, exit a screen, or return to the main menu. Press BACK to
minimize the DIC menu display.
• SELECT: Press the center of the knob to select the highlighted item. Turn the knob to scroll through the
menu items.
Menu
Turn the SELECT knob to scroll through the possible menus. Press the center of the SELECT knob when a
menu is highlighted to enter that menu. The possible Driver Information Center menu's are:
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Oil Life
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Messages
• Units
• Tutorial Mode
Trip A and Trip B
The trip displays show fuel used, average fuel economy, and distance traveled since the last trip reset.
Reset the trip data by pressing and holding the SELECT button when either Trip A or Trip B is displayed.
Oil Life
This displays the percentage of remaining oil life. The lower the percentage, the closer the vehicle is to needing
an oil change.
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays. Change the oil as soon as
possible.
The oil life must be reset after each oil change. Avoid accidental resetting of the Engine Oil Life System. It
cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the Engine Oil Life System, refer to GM Oil Life
System Resetting GM Oil Life System Resetting (With Scan Tool) . The system is reset when 100%
displays.
Outside Air Temperature
The outside air temperature can be accessed through the driver information center Trip/Fuel switch function.
The driver information center shows the outside air temperature as a damped value. The time and rate of the
temperature update is based on an algorithm in the instrument cluster. Factors such as last temperature reading,
current temperature reading, length of time the vehicle was off, current vehicle speed, and the distance driven
effect when the displayed temperature is updated. To get the vehicle to display the most accurate temperature
faster, drive the vehicle. Constant moving traffic will update the display to the correct temperature more quickly
than stop and go traffic.
Tire Pressure
The display will show a vehicle with the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in
either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi).
If a low or high tire pressure is detected, a message is displayed advising to check the tire pressure in the
specified tire.
Vehicle Messages
Turn the SELECT knob to scroll through any active warning messages. Press SELECT to review the messages.
Units
Turn the SELECT knob to change the unit display to METRIC or US when the display is active. Press SELECT
to confirm the setting. This will change the displays on the cluster and DIC to either metric or English (US)
measurements.
Tutorial Mode
Select this menu item to view a screen that explains some of the unique features of the cluster.
Language
The driver information center is capable of displaying in different languages, corresponding to the radio
language settings. The instrument cluster receives a GMLAN message with language information from the
radio. This message is only sent one time, after a new language is selected. To set the language, see the owners
manual.
INDICATORWARNING MESSAGE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Indicator LIGHT ON
Refer to the owner's manual for the descriptions and explanations of all indicator lights.
For diagnosis and repair information related to an indicator light, refer to the System Diagnosis and the
Description of Operation that the message relates to.
Message Displayed
Refer to the owner's manual for descriptions and explanations of all messages displayed.
For diagnosis and repair information related to a displayed message, refer to the System Diagnosis and the
Description of Operation that the message relates to.
CHANGE TIMING BELT MESSAGE
The Instrument Cluster monitors the odometer mileage to determine when timing belt (if equipped) replacement
may be necessary. After the vehicle has accumulated approximately 100,000 miles (160,000 kilometers), the
Instrument Cluster may display the CHANGE TIMING BELT message. After the engine timing belt has been
replaced, reset the CHANGE TIMING BELT message by locating and removing the fuses that supply power to
the Instrument Cluster for two minutes.
Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
The Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator (if equipped) is located on the center console and indicates the
current transmission shift lever position. The Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator receives power and
ground and is controlled by the Body Control Module (BCM) via serial data. The Transmission Control Module
determines transmission shift lever position based on signals from the Transmission Internal Mode Switch and
sends the shift lever position information to the BCM via serial data.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Displays Test
The instrument cluster displays a preview of information that includes electric range, charging, odometer, and
battery status. This happens when the driver door is first opened, and following the welcome animation before
starting the vehicle.
A CHARGING OVERRIDE/INTERRUPTION OCCURRED message may display on the lower left of the
screen to indicate that a charging override or interruption has occurred due to:
• Override of charging settings by vehicle owner via OnStar.
• Unintended interruption of AC power at the vehicle's charge port.
• Interruption of charging by the utility company via OnStar as authorized by vehicle owner.
Refer to the owners manual for a complete list of vehicle charging status screen messages.
Indicators and Warning Messages
Refer to Indicator/Warning Message Description and Operation.
Battery and Driver Efficiency Gauges
Refer to the owner's manual for descriptions and explanations of Battery and Driver Efficiency Gauges.
Fuel Level Gauge
The instrument cluster displays the fuel level based on the information from the ECM. The ECM converts the
data from the fuel level sensors to a fuel level signal. The ECM sends the fuel level signal via a High Speed
CAN-Bus signal to the BCM. The BCM then sends the information via a Low Speed CAN-Bus signal to the
instrument cluster to display the fuel level. If the fuel level falls under 11% the instrument cluster switches on
the low fuel level indicator. The fuel gauge defaults to empty if:
• The ECM detects a malfunction in the fuel level sensor circuit.
• The BCM detects a loss of serial data communications with the ECM.
• The instrument cluster detects a loss of serial data communications with the BCM.
Speedometer
The instrument cluster displays the vehicle speed based on the information from the ECM. The ECM sends the
vehicle speed information via a High Speed CAN-Bus signal to the BCM. The BCM then sends the vehicle
speed information via a Low Speed CAN-Bus signal to the instrument cluster in order to display the vehicle
speed, either in kilometers or miles, based on the vehicle requirements. The speedometer defaults to 0 km/h (0
MPH) if:
• The BCM detects a loss of serial data communications with the ECM.
• The instrument cluster detects a loss of serial data communications with the BCM.
Odometer
The instrument cluster displays the vehicle odometer in the driver information center. The ECM send a distance
rolling count message on GMLAN to the body control module (BCM). The BCM uses this information to
calculate the vehicle odometer. This odometer value is then sent to the instrument cluster on GMLAN. The
instrument cluster does not calculate the odometer. The odometer displays miles or kilometers as selected in the
Units menu.
The odometer value is stored in multiple modules. The instrument cluster is a secondary storage module for the
odometer, while the BCM is the primary storage and accumulator.
In addition to storing the odometer value for the vehicle, the instrument cluster and the BCM store the VIN.
Software checks are performed to ensure these modules, and their stored odometer information, can not be
move or transferred between different vehicles.
If the VINs do not match, the instrument cluster will go into an error mode and display "—" (dashes). If the
VIN mismatch exists over a calibrated distance, the instrument cluster will "lock" the odometer display and
only show dashes, even if the VIN mismatch is subsequently correct. The only way to clear or "unlock" the
instrument cluster is to perform a BCM programming event using SPS.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass display on the Driver Information Center. The compass receives its heading
and other information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna. If applicable, the GPS antenna is
located with the telematics communication interface control module.
Driver Information Center Display
In the lower middle of the instrument cluster, an additional display is installed. Its task is to give additional
information, such as an odometer or error codes. This part of the instrument cluster is available in 4 different
variants, mostly depending on the assembled engine. For further information refer to Driver Information
Center (DIC) Description and Operation.
Article GUID: A00884718
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS
FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS
|
Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
MOVEABLE WINDOW WIRING SCHEMATICS
Driver
Passenger
 |
|
Fig. 1: Driver Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
 |
|
Fig. 2: Passenger |
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
Rear
Fig. 3: Rear
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
DEFOGGER WIRING SCHEMATICS
Defogger
 |
|
Fig. 4: Defogger Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
DTC B0283: REAR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check -
Vehicle
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
DTC B0283
Rear Defogger Circuit
Symptom Byte Information: Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation
|
Circuit |
Description |
|
Control - Relay Coil |
The output circuit is switched to 12 V to activate the |
|
Ground - Relay Coil |
Chassis Ground |
| ||||||
|
Conditions for Running the DTC |
Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• B0283 02 Control Circuit = Short to Ground
• B0283 05 Control Circuit = Open or Short to Battery
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
• B0283 02 E18 Rear Defogger Grid = Disabled
• B0283 05 E18 Rear Defogger Grid = Disabled or Always On
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will clear when the diagnostic runs and passes.
• A history DTC will clear after 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Component View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
2. Perform the scan tool control function: Rear Defogger - On and Off
Verify the component turns On and Off: E18 Rear Defogger Grid
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
2. Remove the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 85 & Ground
• If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect Ground Connection
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 85 & Ground Connection
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
4. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 & Ground circuit terminal 85
5. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
6. Perform the scan tool control function: Rear Defogger - On and Off
Verify the test lamp turns On and Off.
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K33 HVAC Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket &
Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket &
Terminal 19 X2 @ Control module harness
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K33 HVAC Control Module
• If the test lamp is always On
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K33 HVAC Control Module
3. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket & Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K33 HVAC Control Module
• If the test lamp turns On and Off
7. Test or replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
Component Testing
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Remove the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
3. Test for 70 to 110 ohms between the test points: Component terminal 85 & 86
Replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
4. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:
• Component terminal 30 & 85
• Component terminal 30 & 86
• Component terminal 30 & 87
• Component terminal 85 & 87
Replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
5. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Component terminal 86 & 12 V
Connect a jumper wire between the test points: Component terminal 85 & Ground
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Component terminal 30 & 87
• If 2 ohms or greater
Replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
• For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to: Control Module References
DTC B316B, B317A, B318A, OR B319A: WINDOW SWITCHES
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check -
Vehicle
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
Driver Window Switch
Passenger Window Switch
Left Rear Window Switch
Right Rear Window Switch
Symptom Byte Information: Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
|
1. Driver Left Front Window Switch - Down = Inoperative
2. Driver Left Front Window Switch - Up = Inoperative
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||
|
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Power Windows Description and Operation | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
|
Component |
Description |
|
S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver |
The S146 sends a serial data message to the K9 indicating the |
|
M74D Window Motor - Driver |
|
|
S79P Window Switch - Passenger |
The switch has a normally open contact. |
|
M74P Window Motor - Passenger |
An electric DC motor. |
|
S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear |
The switch has a normally open contact. |
|
M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear |
An electric DC motor. |
| ||||||||
|
Conditions for Running the DTC |
Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• Control module K9 detects: Right Front Window Switch @ S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch -
Driver = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
• Control module K9 detects: Left Rear Window Switch @ S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch -
Driver = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
• Control module K9 detects: Right Rear Window Switch @ S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch -
Driver = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
• Control module K9 detects: Signal - Down @ M74D Window Motor - Driver = Short to Ground - For greater
than 60 s
• Control module K9 detects: Signal - Up @ M74D Window Motor - Driver = Short to Ground - For greater
than 60 s
Control module K9 detects: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver = Signal Erratic
Control module K9 detects: S79P Window Switch - Passenger = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
Control module K9 detects: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
Control module K9 detects: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
Window Switch - Malfunction
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will clear when the diagnostic runs and passes.
• A history DTC will clear after 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles.
If set as a current DTC - Replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Component View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
2. S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver - Driver Left Front Window Switch - Not Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• Driver Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
• If not the specified state
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
3. S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver - No Button Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Left Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• Left Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
• Left Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• Right Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• Right Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
• Right Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
4. Operate the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver - Driver Left Front Window
Switch - Pressed & Pulled
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Active
• Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Active
• Driver Window Main Control Express Switch = Active
• If not the specified state
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
5. Operate the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver - Left Rear Window Switch -
Pressed & Pulled
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Left Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Active
• Left Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Active
• Left Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Active
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
6. Operate the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver - Right Rear Window Switch
- Pressed & Pulled
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Right Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Active
• Right Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Active
• Right Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Active
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
7. Operate the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver - Right Front Window
Switch - Pressed & Pulled
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Down Switch = Active
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Express Switch = Active
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Up Switch = Active
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
8. S79P Window Switch - Passenger - Not Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Window Switch at Door = Inactive
Test or replace the component: S79P Window Switch - Passenger
9. Operate the component: S79P Window Switch - Passenger - Pressed & Pulled
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Passenger Window Switch at Door = Up
• Passenger Window Switch at Door = Down
• Passenger Window Switch at Door = Express Down
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S79P Window Switch - Passenger
10. S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear - Not Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Left Rear Window Switch at Door = Inactive
Test or replace the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
11. Operate the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear - Pressed & Pulled
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Left Rear Window Switch at Door = Up
• Left Rear Window Switch at Door = Down
• Left Rear Window Switch at Door = Express Down
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
12. S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear - Not Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Right Rear Window Switch at Door = Inactive
Test or replace the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
13. Operate the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear - Pressed & Pulled
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Right Rear Window Switch at Door = Up
• Right Rear Window Switch at Door = Down
• Right Rear Window Switch at Door = Express Down
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
14. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 24 & Ground
• If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect Ground Connection
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 24 @ Component harness &
Ground Connection
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
4. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
5. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 23 & Ground
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 23 & Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance - Replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch -
Driver
• If the test lamp turns On
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• If not the specified state
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness &
Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If the specified state
7. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 & Ground
circuit terminal 24
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Active
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire(s)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
5. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness &
Signal circuit terminal 7 @ M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If the specified state
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• If not the specified state
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 11 @ Component harness &
Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If the specified state
9. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 11 & Ground
circuit terminal 24
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Active
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire(s)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 11 @ Component harness &
Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
5. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 11 @ Component harness &
Signal circuit terminal 3 @ M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If the specified state
10. Test for greater than 10 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 5 @ Component harness & Ground
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 5 @ Component harness &
Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If less than infinite resistance
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 5 @ Component harness &
Signal circuit terminal 5 @ M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If the specified state
11. Test or replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
• Refer to Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement (Right Side)
• Refer to Front Side Door Window Control Switch Replacement
• Refer to Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
• Refer to Front Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
• Refer to Rear Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
DTC B3205: DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check -
Vehicle
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
Driver Window Motor
Symptom Byte Information: Symptom Byte List
Circuit/System Description
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Power Windows Description and Operation
|
Circuit |
Description |
|
B+ - M74D Window Motor - Driver |
Supplied from a fuse. |
|
Ground |
Chassis Ground |
| ||||
|
Conditions for Running the DTC |
Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
Conditions for Setting the DTC
M74D Window Motor - Driver = Incompatible Hardware or Equipment
M74D Window Motor - Driver = Internal Malfunction
B3205 42
Calibration Update = Failed
• Battery - Disconnected/Replaced
• Front Side Door Wiring Harness - Disconnected
• M74D Window Motor - Driver - Disconnected
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
M74D Window Motor - Driver = Inoperative
• Window Express Up System Not Initialized
• Driver Information Display = Open, then Close Driver Window
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
M74D Window Motor - Driver - Replaced - A current DTC can be cleared after the procedure is performed.
M74D Window Motor - Driver - Replaced - A current DTC can be cleared after the procedure is performed.
M74D Window Motor - Driver - Normalized - A current DTC can be cleared after the procedure is performed.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Component View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
• Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
2. Perform the scan tool control function: Driver Window Motor - Up & Down
Verify the component works as specified: M74D Window Motor - Driver = Up & Down
Test or replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Perform the scan tool control function: Driver Window Motor - Down
4. Operate the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver - Pulled = Up & Release
Verify the component works as specified: M74D Window Motor - Driver = Express Up
• If not the specified state
Use the following procedure: Window Motor Programming - Express Function
• If the specified state
5. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off - For greater than 2 min
6. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
7. Perform the scan tool control function: Driver Window Motor - Down
8. Operate the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver - Pulled = Up & Release
Verify the component works as specified: M74D Window Motor - Driver = Express Up
Test or replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver.
9. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
Refer to Front Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
SYMPTOMS - FIXED AND MOVEABLE WINDOWS
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of
the following are true:
• There are no DTCs set.
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data link.
2. Review the power window system operation or rear window defogger system operation in order to familiarize
yourself with the system functions. Refer to the following:
Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation
Power Windows Description and Operation
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the rear window defogger. Refer to
Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
|
Intermittent | ||
|
Poor electrical connections or wiring cause most intermittent conditions. Perform a careful visual/physical check for
the following conditions:
• Poor mating of the connector halves or a terminal not fully seated in the connector body
• An improperly formed or damaged terminal
• Reform or replace connector terminals in the problem circuit in order to ensure proper contact tension.
• Poor terminal to wire connection requires removing the terminal from the connector body in order to perform
the check.
Use a scan tool in order to help detect intermittent conditions. The scan tool has several features that can be used to
locate an intermittent condition. The snapshot feature can capture and store data parameters within the scan tool
when the malfunction occurs. This information can then be reviewed in order to see what caused the malfunction.
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
Rear Window Defogger Malfunction
• Power Windows Malfunction
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check -
Vehicle
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation | ||||||||||||
|
| ||||||||||
|
Reference Information |
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Component View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
2. Operate the component: Rear Defogger Switch - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Rear Defogger Switch = Off & On
Replace the component: A26 HVAC Controls
3. Perform the scan tool control function: Rear Defogger - On and Off
Verify the component turns On and Off: E18 Rear Defogger Grid
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
4. Operate the component: Rear Defogger Switch - Pressed
5. Verify the component turns On and Off: Rear Defogger Indicator
• If the component does not turn On and Off
Replace the component: A26 HVAC Controls
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
2. Remove the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 85 & Ground
• If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect Ground Connection
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 85 & Ground Connection
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
4. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 & Ground circuit terminal 85
5. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
6. Perform the scan tool control function: Rear Defogger - On and Off
Verify the test lamp turns On and Off.
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 @ K33 HVAC Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket &
Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket &
Terminal 19 X2 @ Control module harness
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K33 HVAC Control Module
• If the test lamp is always On
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K33 HVAC Control Module
3. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket & Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K33 HVAC Control Module
• If the test lamp turns On and Off
7. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 30 & Ground
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 30 @ Relay Socket & Output
terminal @ Fuse
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 30 & Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 & X2 @ E18 Rear Defogger Grid
4. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 87 @ Relay Socket &
Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
5. Replace the component: Fuse
6. Install the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
7. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 1 X1 & Ground circuit terminal 1
X2
8. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
9. Perform the scan tool control function: Rear Defogger - On and Off
Verify the test lamp turns On and Off.
• If the test lamp does not turn On and Off - Test or replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger
Relay
• If the test lamp turns On and Off - Test or replace the component: E18 Rear Defogger Grid
• If the test lamp turns On
8. Momentarily connect a 40 A fused jumper wire between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 30 & Control
circuit terminal 87
Verify the component does not turn On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire: E18 Rear
Defogger Grid
Test or replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
9. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
10. Install the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
11. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 & X2 @ E18 Rear Defogger Grid
12. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 1 X2 & Ground
1. Disconnect Ground Connection
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 1 X2 @ Component harness &
Ground Connection
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
13. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 1 X1 & Ground circuit terminal 1 X2
14. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
15. Perform the scan tool control function: Rear Defogger - On and Off
Verify the test lamp turns On and Off.
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit: Control circuit
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit: Control circuit
16. Test or replace the component: E18 Rear Defogger Grid
Component Testing
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Remove the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
3. Test for 70 to 110 ohms between the test points: Component terminal 85 & Component terminal 86
Replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
4. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:
• Component terminal 30 & 85
• Component terminal 30 & 86
• Component terminal 30 & 87
• Component terminal 85 & 87
Replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
5. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Component terminal 86 & 12 V
Connect a jumper wire between the test points: Component terminal 85 & Ground
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Component terminal 30 & Component terminal 87
Replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
• For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to: Control Module References
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check -
Vehicle
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Power Windows Description and Operation | ||||||||||
|
|
Circuit |
Description |
|
Power Window Switch Driver Down Signal |
The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the |
|
Power Window Switch Driver Express Signal |
The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the |
|
Power Window Switch Driver Up Signal |
The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the |
|
Power Window Motor Passenger Down |
The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate |
|
Power Window Motor Passenger Up Control |
The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate |
|
Power Window Motor Left Rear Up Control |
The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate |
|
Power Window Motor Left Rear Down |
The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate |
|
Power Window Motor Right Rear Up Control |
The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate |
|
Power Window Motor Right Rear Down |
The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate |
|
Ground |
Chassis Ground |
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Diagnostic Aids |
M74D Window Motor - Driver - Window Express Up System Not Initialized
• Battery - Disconnected/Replaced
• Front Side Door Wiring Harness - Disconnected
• M74 Window Motor - Disconnected
M74D Window Motor - Driver - Normalized - Window Motor Programming - Express Function
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Component View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
2. Perform the scan tool control function: Driver Window Motor - Up & Down
Verify the component operates in both directions: M74D Window Motor - Driver
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing - Test 1
3. Operate the component: Driver Left Front Window Switch - Pressed & Pulled
Verify the component works as specified: M74D Window Motor - Driver = Up/Express Up/Down/Express
Down
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing - Test 2
4. S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver - Not Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Left Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• Left Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
• Left Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• Right Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• Right Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
• Right Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
5. Operate the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver-Left Rear Window Switch -
Pressed & Pulled
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Left Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Active
• Left Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Active
• Left Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Active
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
6. Operate the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver-Right Rear Window Switch -
Pressed & Pulled
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Right Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Active
• Right Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Active
• Right Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Active
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
7. Operate the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver-Right Front Window Switch
- Pressed & Pulled
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Down Switch = Active
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Express Switch = Active
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Up Switch = Active
• If not the specified state
Test or replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
8. Perform the scan tool control function: Passenger Window Motor - Up & Down
Verify the component works as specified: M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Up & Down
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing - Test 3
9. Perform the scan tool control function: Left Rear Window Motor - Up & Down
Verify the component works as specified: M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear = Up & Down
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing - Test 3
10. Perform the scan tool control function: Right Rear Window Motor - Up & Down
Verify the component works as specified: M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear = Up & Down
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing - Test 3
11. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
Test 1
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 1 & Ground
• If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect Ground Connection
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness &
Ground Connection
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
4. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
5. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 2 & Ground
• If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is OK
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: M74D Window Motor - Driver B+ circuit terminal 2
@ Output terminal @ F28UA Fuse
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 2 & Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If the test lamp turns On
6. Test or replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
Test 2
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 24 & Ground
• If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect Ground Connection
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 24 @ Component harness &
Ground Connection
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
• If less than 10 ohms
4. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
5. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 23 & Ground
• If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is OK
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 23 & Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance - Replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch -
Driver
• If the test lamp turns On
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• If not the specified state
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness &
Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If the specified state
7. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 & Ground
circuit terminal 24
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Active
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire(s)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
5. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness &
Terminal 7 @ M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If the specified state
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• If not the specified state
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 11 @ Component harness &
Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If the specified state
9. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 11 & Ground
circuit terminal 24
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Active
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire(s)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 11 @ Component harness &
Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
5. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 11 @ Component harness &
Terminal 3 @ M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
• If the specified state
10. Test for greater than 10 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 5 @ Component harness & Ground
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M35D Window Motor Module - Driver
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 5 @ Component harness &
Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If less than infinite resistance
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 5 @ Component harness &
Signal circuit terminal 5 @ M3 5D Window Motor Module - Driver
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: M35D Window Motor Module - Driver
• If greater than 10 V
11. Test or replace the component: S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
Test 3
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: S79P Window Switch - Passenger/S79LR Window Switch -
Left Rear/S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 7 & Ground
• If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect Ground Connection
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 7 @ Component harness &
Ground Connection
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
4. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
5. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 8 & Ground
• If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is OK
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 8 & Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance - Replace the component: S79 Window Switch
• If the test lamp turns On
6. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
7. Connect the electrical connector: S79 Window Switch
8. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74 Window Motor
9. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 1 & Control circuit terminal 2
10. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
11. Perform the scan tool control function: Window Motor
Verify the test lamp state:
Window Motor - Stop = Test lamp Off
Window Motor - Up = Test lamp On
Window Motor - Down = Test lamp On
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S79 Window Switch
3. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points:
• Control circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Ground
• Control circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
5. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
6. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:
• Control circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Ground
• Control circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
7. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:
• Control circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Control circuit terminal 10 @ S79 Window
Switch
• Control circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Control circuit terminal 9 @ S79 Window
Switch
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: S79 Window Switch
• If the specified state
12. Test or replace the component: M74 Window Motor
Component Testing
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector:
• M74P Window Motor - Passenger
• M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
• M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
3. Connect a 25 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control terminal 1 & B+
CAUTION: Complete the testing as quickly as possible in order to prevent overheating
and damaging the component.
4. Momentarily connect a jumper wire between the test points: Control terminal 2 & Ground
Reverse the jumper wires 2 times between the terminals.
Verify the component works as specified: M74 Window Motor = Up & Down
Replace the component:
• M74P Window Motor - Passenger
• M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
• M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
• If the specified state
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
• Refer to Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement (Right Side)
• Refer to Front Side Door Window Control Switch Replacement
• Refer to Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
• Refer to Front Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
• Refer to Rear Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
SIDE DOOR WINDOW MECHANICAL DIAGNOSIS
|
Cause |
Correction |
|
DEFINITION: A mechanical condition that requires a correction for proper operation of the side door Refer to Symptoms - Fixed and Moveable Windows prior to beginning this table. | |
|
Intermittent Operation |
Check proper glass alignment/attachment and door seal installation. |
|
Check switch and switch bezel to see if sticking. | |
|
Check wire harness for pinched/shorted wire. | |
|
THIS STEP APPLIES TO ALL TWO PIN MOTOR CONNECTORS | |
|
Glass Binds |
Check proper glass alignment/attachment. |
|
Check for defective seal and/or proper seal installation. | |
|
Check for debris in glass run channel. | |
|
Check for glass run channel position. | |
|
Regulator/Glass Rattles |
Check for loose fasteners and retorque if required. |
|
Check that the glass is in the channel and reinstall if not positioned | |
|
Noisy Operation |
Check for other components in the glass path such as wire harness, impact |
|
Check for proper glass alignment/attachment and door seal installation. | |
|
Windnoise |
Check seals, mirror patch, and glass alignment. |
|
False glass reversal, the glass goes |
Check seals, reinitialize the glass and/or realign the glass. |
|
Check for debris in the glass run channel. | |
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
WINDSHIELD REPLACEMENT
• BO-24402-A Glass Sealant Remover (Cold Knife)
• BO-39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool
• Use an adhesive that is approved by GM
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools
CAUTION: To avoid breakage of the windshield, protect the surrounding area of the part
which you are removing or installing.
NOTE: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape
around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim.
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove Windshield Wiper Arm. Refer to Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement
3. Remove Dash Upper Extension Panel Opening Cover. Refer to Dash Upper Extension Panel Opening Cover
Replacement
4. Remove Inside Rearview Mirror. Refer to Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement
5. Remove Front View Camera. Refer to Front View Camera Replacement
6. Disconnect the rain sensor connector, if equipped.
WARNING: If broken glass falls into the defroster outlets, it can be blown into the
passenger compartment and cause personal injury.
7. Cover to protect the following parts from broken glass:
• Upper dash pad
• Defroster outlets and A/C outlets
• Seats and carpeting
 |
|
Fig. 5: Separating Urethane Adhesive From Window Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
WA RNING: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning
NOTE: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. Use care Not to damage
the window corner retainers. If the window retainers get cut off when removing
the window it will be necessary to tape the window in place until cured.
8. This will allow the urethane adhesive to be separated from the window.
• Leave a base of urethane on the pinchweld flange.
• The only suitable lubrication is clear water.
• BO-24402-A Glass Sealant Remover (Cold Knife)
• BO-39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool
 |
|
Fig. 6: Separating Bottom Of Window Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
9. Remove the bottom of the windshield from the urethane adhesive using a long utility knife or similar tool.
Keep the cutting edge of the utility knife against the glass. Do this from inside the vehicle.
 |
|
Fig. 7: Windshield Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
10. Remove the windshield (1) from the vehicle with an assistant, place the window on a clean soft surface.
 |
|
Fig. 8: Lower Windshield Molding Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
11. Remove the molding (1) from the lower edge of the old windshield if the new windshield is not equipped.
Installation Procedure
2. Install Dash Upper Extension Panel Opening Cover. Refer to Dash Upper Extension Panel Opening Cover
Replacement
3. Install Windshield Wiper Arm. Refer to Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement
4. Install Inside Rearview Mirror. Refer to Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement
5. Install Front View Camera. Refer to Front View Camera Replacement
6. Connect the rain sensor connector, if equipped.
7. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim.
8. Close the hood.
Causes of Slow Moving Window
 |
|
Fig. 9: Internal Detail For Front Door Window Adjustment |
WARNING: Disconnect the power window switch when working inside the door. When
operated, the Express Up/Down Feature allows the door window to move very
quickly, without stopping, which could cause personal injury.
NOTE: Owners may comment that the windows operate slowly when going up or
down.
1. Listed below are conditions that may cause a slow moving window.
• The window run channel outboard lip at the rearview mirror is rolled over or the window run channel
outboard lip at the rear of door frame (2).
• The window is not seated in the run channel.
• The window is misaligned in the opening.
• The regulator is misaligned causing misalignment of the window.
• Inspect the power window motor for being loose.
2. After inspecting the conditions above, do the following:
Remove the front door trim panel.
3. Remove the water deflector.
4. Ensure that the window guide is fully seated and clipped.
5. Ensure that the window is fully seated into the window guide run channel.
6. Inspect the window for equal distance between the front and rear run channels.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Inspect for the following conditions before making adjustments.
• Using a flat-bladed tool, straighten the run channel lip by pulling it out to its correct position.
• Use a flat-bladed tool to push the run channel rearward to seat it in the door frame.
• Inspect the window guide retainer to window for the proper alignment to the slots in the window.
• Inspect the window to be straight up and down position.
 |
|
Fig. 10: Window Regulator Fastener Removal/Installation Sequence |
• Loosen the nuts that attach the window regulator (1) to the inner door panel, in the specified sequence
(2, 3, 4).
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution .
2. Tighten the nuts that attach the front side door window regulator (1) to the inner door panel in the specified
sequence (2, 3, 4) to 10 N.m (89 lb in).
3. Inspect the window for proper operation.
4. Install the water deflector.
5. Install the front door trim panel.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 11: Front Side Door Window Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Callout Component Name
WARNING:
Refer to
Express
Window
Down
Warning .
CAUTION:
When
removing
glass from
the vehicle,
apply tape to
corners of
glass and
adjacent
surfaces to
help prevent
paint
damage.
Preliminary Procedures
1. Remove Front Side Door Armrest Bracket. Refer to Front Side Door Armrest Bracket Replacement
2. Remove Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding. Refer to Front Side Door Window Garnish
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Molding Replacement
Retainer Replacement | |
|
1 |
Front Side Door Window Regulator Guide Procedure
|
|
2 |
Front Side Door Window Inspect the window for proper operation before installing the door trim panel. |
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW ADJUSTMENT
Causes of Slow Moving Window
NOTE: Owners may comment that the windows operate slowly when going up or
down.
1. Listed below are conditions that may cause a slow moving window:
• The window run channel outboard lip at the rear of door frame.
• The window is not seated in the run channel.
• The window is misaligned in the opening.
• The regulator is misaligned causing misalignment of the window.
2. After inspecting the conditions above, do the following:
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the water deflector.
3. Ensure that the window guide is fully seated and clipped.
Ensure that the window is fully seated in the window guide run channel.
4. Inspect the window for equal distance between the front and rear run channels.
5. Inspect the power window motor for being loose.
6. Inspect the window for alignment.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Remove the rear side door trim panel.
 |
|
Fig. 12: Window Regulator And Fasteners With Removal/Installation Sequence |
2. Inspect for the following conditions before making adjustments:
• Using a flat-bladed tool, straighten the run channel lip by pulling it out to its correct position.
• Use a flat-bladed tool to push the run channel rearward to seat it in the door frame.
• Inspect the window guide channel to window fasteners to ensure that they are in the proper slots and the
window is not tilted forward.
• Inspect the window to be straight up and down position.
• Loosen the nuts that attach the window regulator (1) to the inner door panel, in the specified sequence
(2, 3, 4).
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution .
3. Loosen the nuts that attach the rear side door window regulator (1) to the inner door panel in the specified
sequence (2, 3, 4).
Tighten the fasteners to 10 N.m (89 lb in).
4. Inspect the window for proper operation.
5. Install the water deflector.
6. Install the rear door trim panel.
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 13: Rear Side Door Window Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Callout Component Name
WARNING:
Refer to
Express
Window
Down
Warning .
CAUTION:
When
removing
glass from
the vehicle,
apply tape to
corners of
glass and
adjacent
surfaces to
help prevent
paint
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
damage. Preliminary
Replac
Brack
Strip R
Rear R |
Procedures e Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip. Refer to Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip e Rear Side Door Armrest Pull Cup Bracket. Refer to Rear Side Door Armrest Pull Cup *t Replacement e Rear Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip. Refer to Rear Side Door Window Inner Sealing |
|
Replacement e the water deflector. e Rear Side Door Window Channel Rear Retainer. Refer to Rear Side Door Window Channel Retainer Replacement | |
|
1 |
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Retainer CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Procedure
|
|
2 |
Rear Side Door Window Inspect the window for proper operation before install the door trim panel. |
REAR WINDOW REPLACEMENT
Special Tools
• BO-24402-A Glass Sealant Remover (Cold Knife)
• BO-39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool
• Use an adhesive that is approved by GM
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools
Removal Procedure
WA RNING: Refer to Cracked Window Warning
NOTE: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape
around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel. Refer to Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Cover the following parts to protect from broken glass:
• Seats
• Carpeting
WA RNING: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning
5. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the lace (1) from the sides and the top edge of the window to access the
urethane adhesive bead, if equipped.
Fig. 14: Separating Urethane Adhesive From Window
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
NOTE: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window. Use care Not to damage
the window corner retainers. If the window retainers get cut off when removing
the window it will be necessary to tape the window in place until cured.
6. Remove the window from the urethane adhesive.
• Leave a base of urethane approximately 2 mm (0.078 in) on the pinch-weld flange.
• The only suitable lubrication is clear water.
• BO-24402-A Glass Sealant Remover (Cold Knife)
• BO-39032 Stationary Glass Removal Tool
NOTE: Keep the cutting edge of the knife/tool against the window. Do this from inside
the vehicle.
7. If necessary, use a long utility knife or similar tool to remove the bottom corners of the window from the
urethane adhesive.
 |
|
Fig. 15: Window Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
8. With an assistant, remove the window (1) from the vehicle, place the window on a clean soft surface.
Installation Procedure
2. Connect the electrical connectors.
3. Install Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel. Refer to Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement
4. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim.
5. Close the liftgate.
 |
|
Fig. 16: Front Side Door Window Frame Rear Applique |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedures
NOTE: | |
| ||||||||
|
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW FRAME FRONT APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT |
Fig. 17: Rear Side Door Window Frame Front Applique
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
Callout Component Name
Preliminary Procedures
1. Remove Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding. Refer to Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal
Molding Replacement
2. Remove Rear Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip. Refer to Rear Side Door Window Inner Sealing
Strip Replacement
3. Remove Rear Side Door Window Upper Reveal Molding. Refer to Rear Side Door Window Upper
Reveal Molding Replacement
4. Remove Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip. Refer to Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip
Replacement
NOTE:
It is not
necessary to
completely
remove the
weatherstrip.
Reposition
the upper
front edge of
the rear side
door
weatherstrip.
Rear Side Door Window Frame Applique Upper Screw
CAUTION:
Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)_________________________________________________
Rear Side Door Window Frame Front Applique Outer Screw (Qty: 2)
CAUTION:
Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
| ||||
|
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 18: Front Side Door Window Control Switch |
| ||||||||
|
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT (RIGHT SIDE) | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 19: Front Side Door Window Switch (Right Side) |
| ||||||
|
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 20: Rear Side Door Window Switch Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||
|
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 21: Front Side Door Window Regulator |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
WARNING: Preliminary Procedure Release the window from the regulator and tape the window to the upper door frame | |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
1 |
Front Side Door Window Regulator Nut (Qty: 5) CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Tighten 11 N.m (97 lb in) |
|
2 |
Front Side Door Window Regulator Procedure
|
WINDOW MOTOR PROGRAMMING - EXPRESS FUNCTION
Window Motor Normalized Procedure
A window motor that has not been normalized will no longer perform the express up and express down functions,
this may occur during the following conditions:
• When a window motor has been disconnected
• When a door harness has been disconnected
• When the battery has been disconnected or replaced
NOTE: When DTC B3205 4B & 3210 4B are set, the following warnings will be displayed on
the driver information center:
Open, then Close Driver Window
Open, then Close Passenger Window
These warnings will clear once the windows have been "Normalized" and the
respective DTC will clear.
To normalize the window motor, follow these steps:
NOTE: The doors must be completely closed prior to normalizing the windows, a door
that is open or ajar may cause the power window to function abnormally or to
become inoperative while performing the normalizing procedure. If this occurs,
verify that the door is completely closed then repeat the normalizing
procedure.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Starting with the window completely UP, press and hold the power window switch until the window is fully
open and continue holding the switch down for approximately 5 seconds after the window is completely open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is fully closed and continue holding the switch up for
approximately 5 seconds after the window is completely closed.
The window should now be normalized and the window should perform the express up and express down functions.
Window Motor Relearn Procedure
A relearn procedure may need to be performed for any Local Interconnect Network (LIN) window motor for the
following conditions:
• When the window glass is out of alignment
• When the window glass has been replaced
• When the door has been replaced
• When the window regulator has been replaced
NOTE: Prior to performing the relearn procedure the vehicle must have all 4 wheels
properly inflated and mounted, the vehicle must be sitting on a level surface and all
doors must be completely closed.
To relearn the window motor, follow these steps:
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. With a scan tool, select Module Diagnosis, Body Control Module, Configuration/Reset Functions and then
select the appropriate Clear Window Learn Values for the window motor requiring the relearn procedure.
3. After the learn procedure, exit the scan tool learn procedure completely, the power window cannot be
normalized and will not function until you exit the program.
4. Starting with the window completely UP, press and hold the power window switch until the window is fully
open and continue holding the switch down for approximately 5 seconds after the window is completely open.
5. Pull the power window switch up until the window is fully closed and continue holding the switch up for
approximately 5 seconds after the window is completely closed.
The window is now reprogrammed.
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 22: Rear Side Door Window Regulator |
Callout Component Name
WARNING:
Disconnect
the power
window
switch when
working
inside the
door. When
operated,
the Express
Up/Down
Feature
allows the
door window
to move very
quickly,
without
stopping,
which could
cause
personal
injury.
Preliminary Procedure
| ||||||||
|
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW CHANNEL RETAINER REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
Fig. 23: Front Side Door Window Channel Retainer
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
| ||||||||
|
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW CHANNEL REAR RETAINER REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 24: Rear Side Door Window Channel Rear Retainer |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedures
| |
|
1 |
Rear Side Door Window Channel Rear Retainer Bolt (Qty: 2) CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Procedure Remove the bolts from the rear side door window channel rear retainer. Tighten 11 N.m (97 lb in) |
|
2 |
Rear Side Door Window Channel Rear Retainer Procedure
|
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW INNER SEALING STRIP REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1. Remove Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding. Refer to Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding
Replacement
2. Lower the window.
 |
|
Fig. 25: Front Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip |
3. Pull up on the front side door window inner sealing strip (1) to remove from door.
Installation Procedure
 |
|
Fig. 26: Front Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip |
1. Push down on the front side door window inner sealing strip (1) to install onto the door.
NOTE: Inspect the window for proper operation before installing the door trim.
2. Install Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding. Refer to Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding
Replacement
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW UPPER REVEAL MOLDING REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 27: Rear Side Door Window Upper Reveal Molding |
| ||||||
|
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW BELT REVEAL MOLDING REPLACEMENT | ||||||
Fig. 28: Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
| ||||||
|
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW BELT REVEAL MOLDING REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 29: Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding |
| ||||||
|
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW UPPER REVEAL MOLDING REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 30: Front Side Door Window Upper Reveal Molding |
| ||||||
|
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW INNER SEALING STRIP REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 31: Rear Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip |
| ||||||
|
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT | ||||||
Fig. 32: Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
| ||||||
|
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 33: Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip |
| ||||||||||
|
ADHESIVE INSTALLATION OF WINDSHIELDS | ||||||||||
WARNING: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning .
1. Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G.
2. Remove all but approximately 2 mm (3/64 in) of the existing bead of urethane adhesive from the pinch-weld
flange.
3. Remove all mounds or loose pieces of urethane adhesive from the pinch-weld area.
4. If the original window is being reused, remove all but a thin film of the existing urethane adhesive from the
window surface by using a clean utility knife or razor blade scraper.
5. Inspect for any of the following problems in order to help prevent future breakage of the window:
• The flange of the window opening
• High weld
• Solder spots
• Hardened sealer
• Any other obstruction or irregularity in the pinch-weld flange
NOTE: If corrosion of the pinch-weld flange is present or if sheet metal repairs or
replacements are required, the pinch-weld flange must be refinished in order
to restore the bonding area strength. If paint repairs are required, mask the
flange bonding area prior to applying the color coat in order to provide a clean
primer only surface. Materials such as BASF DE15A®, DuPont 2610A®,
Sherwin-Williams PSE 4600 and NP70A® and Martin-Semour 5120 and 5130A®
PPG DP90LF SPIES/HECKER 3688/8590 - 3688/5150 - 4070/5090 STANDOX
11158/13320 - 14653/14980 products are approved for this application.
6. After repairing the opening as indicated, perform the following steps:
1. Remove all traces of broken glass from the outer cowl panel, seats, floor, and defroster ducts.
2. Clean around the edge of the inside surface of the window with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and
water by volume on a dampened lint free cloth.
WARNING: Refer to Window Retention Warning .
7. Verify all primers and urethane adhesive are within expiration dates.
 |
|
Fig. 34: Applying Pinch-Weld Primer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
WARNING: Failure to prep the area prior to the application of primer may cause
insufficient bonding of urethane adhesive. Insufficient bonding of urethane
adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to be ejected from the vehicle
resulting in personal injury.
NOTE: Do not apply the black primer to the existing bead of the urethane adhesive on
the pinch-weld flange. Apply the primer only to nicks, scratches, or the primed
surfaces.
8. Shake the pinch-weld primer black for at least 1 minute.
9. Use a new dauber in order to apply the primer to the surface of the pinch-weld flange (1).
10. Allow the pinch-weld primer to dry for approximately 10 minutes.
 |
|
Fig. 35: Dry Fitting Window Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
11. With the aid of an assistant, dry fit the window (1) to the opening in order to determine the correct position.
 |
|
Fig. 36: Ensuring Proper Windshield Fit Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
12. Ensure the window (1) locator pins are positioned into the locator slots in the pinch-weld flange.
 |
|
Fig. 37: Marking Location Of Window In Opening |
13. Use masking tape in order to mark the locations (1) of the window (2) in the opening.
14. Cut the masking tape in the center and remove the window from the opening.
15. Place the window on a clean soft surface.
Install the lower windshield molding.
 |
|
Fig. 38: Applying Glass Prep Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
NOTE: Use care when applying glass prep clear on the window. This primer dries
almost instantly, and may stain the viewing area of the window if not applied
evenly.
16. Use a new dauber in order to apply glass prep clear to the area approximately 18 mm (0.71 in) around the
entire perimeter of the window inner surface.
Immediately wipe the glass primed area using a clean, lint-free cloth.
 |
|
Fig. 39: Applying Glass Prep Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
17. Apply a second coat of the glass prep clear to the same area of the glass.
Fig. 40: Applying Glass Primer
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
NOTE: The glass primer black is effective up to 8 hours after applying it to the glass.
The primed surface of the glass must be kept clean.
18. Shake the glass primer black for at least 1 minute.
19. Use a new dauber in order to apply the glass primer black to the same areas (2) that glass prep clear was
applied.
20. Allow the glass primer to dry for approximately 10 minutes.
 |
|
Fig. 41: Modified Applicator Nozzle Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
21. Cut the applicator nozzle in order to provide a bead of 12.7 mm (1/2 in) wide and 12.7 mm (1/2 in) high.
 |
|
Fig. 42: Applying Continuous Bead Of Urethane Adhesive Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
22. Use a cartridge-type caulking gun in order to apply a smooth, continuous bead of urethane adhesive.
 |
|
Fig. 43: Applying Urethane Adhesive To Inner Surface Of Window |
23. Use the edge of the window as a guide for the nozzle in order to apply the urethane adhesive (1) to the inner
surface of the window (3).
 |
|
Fig. 44: Windshield Placement Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
24. With the aid of an assistant, place the window (1) in the opening.
 |
|
Fig. 45: Aligning Tape Lines On Window To Body |
25. Align the masking tape (1) lines on the window (2) and the body.
Fig. 46: Pressing Window Into Place
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
NOTE: To prevent damage to the window due to objects impacting an exposed edge,
upon installation, the window must rest 1 mm (0.04 in) below the surface of the
sheet metal.
26. Press firmly around the entire periphery of the windshield in order to wet-out the urethane bead.
27. Tape the window to the body in order to minimize movement until the urethane adhesive cures.
 |
|
Fig. 47: Cleaning Excess Urethane Adhesive From Body |
28. Clean any excess urethane adhesive from the body.
Fig. 48: Performing Water Hose Test
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
NOTE: Do not direct a hard stream of high pressure water to the freshly applied
urethane adhesive.
29. Use a soft spray of warm water in order to immediately water test the window.
30. Inspect the window for leaks.
31. If any leaks are found, use a plastic paddle in order to apply extra urethane adhesive at the leak point.
32. Retest the window for leaks.
WARNING: Insufficient curing of urethane adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to
be ejected from the vehicle resulting in personal injury.
• For the moisture-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 6
hours at 21A°C (70A°F) or greater and with at least 30 percent relative
humidity. Allow at least 24 hours for the complete curing of the urethane
adhesive.
• For the chemical-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 1
hour.
Do NOT physically disturb the repair area until after these minimum times have
elapsed.
33. Maintain the following conditions in order to properly cure the urethane adhesive:
• Partially lower a door window in order to prevent pressure buildups when closing doors before the
urethane adhesive cures.
• Do not drive the vehicle until the urethane adhesive is cured. Refer to the above curing times.
• Do not use compressed air in order to dry the urethane adhesive.
34. Complete the window installation.
ADHESIVE INSTALLATION OF LIFTGATE WINDOWS
WARNING: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning .
1. Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G.
2. Remove all but approximately 2 mm (3/64 in) of the existing bead of urethane adhesive from the pinch-weld
flange.
3. Remove all mounds or loose pieces of urethane adhesive from the pinch-weld area.
4. If the original window is being reused, remove all but a thin film of the existing urethane adhesive from the
window surface by using a clean utility knife or razor blade scraper.
5. Inspect for any of the following problems in order to help prevent future breakage of the window:
• The flange of the window opening
• High weld
• Solder spots
• Hardened sealer
• Any other obstruction or irregularity in the pinchweld flange
NOTE: If corrosion of the pinch-weld flange is present or if sheet metal repairs or
replacements are required, the pinch-weld flange must be refinished in order
to restore the bonding area strength. If paint repairs are required, mask the
flange bonding area prior to applying the color coat in order to provide a clean
primer only surface. Materials such as BASF DE15A®, DuPont 2610A®,
Sherwin-Williams PSE 4600 and NP70A® and Martin-Semour 5120 and 5130A®
PPG DP90LF SPIES/HECKER 3688/8590 - 3688/5150 - 4070/5090 STANDOX
11158/13320 - 14653/14980 products are approved for this application.
6. After repairing the opening as indicated, perform the following steps:
1. Remove all traces of broken glass from the outer cowl panel, seats, floor and defroster ducts.
2. Clean around the edge of the inside surface of the window with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and
water by volume on a dampened lint free cloth.
WARNING: Refer to Window Retention Warning .
7. Verify all primers and urethane adhesive are within expiration dates.
WARNING: Failure to prep the area prior to the application of primer may cause
insufficient bonding of urethane adhesive. Insufficient bonding of urethane
adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to be ejected from the vehicle
resulting in personal injury.
NOTE: Do not apply the black primer to the existing bead of the urethane adhesive on
the pinch-weld flange. Apply the primer only to nicks, scratches or the primed
surfaces.
8. Shake the pinch-weld primer black for at least 1 minute.
9. Use a new dauber in order to apply the primer to the surface of the pinch-weld flange.
10. Allow the pinch-weld primer to dry for approximately 10 minutes.
11. With the aid of an assistant, dry fit the window (1) to the opening in order to determine the correct position.
 |
|
Fig. 49: Liftgate Window Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
12. Ensure the window (1) locator pins are positioned into the locator slots in the pinch-weld flange.
13. Use masking tape in order to mark the locations (1) of the window (2) in the opening.
14. Cut the masking tape in the center and remove the window from the opening.
15. Place the window on a clean soft surface.
 |
|
Fig. 50: Applying Glass Prep Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
NOTE: Use care when applying glass prep clear on the window. This primer dries
almost instantly, and may stain the viewing area of the window if not applied
evenly.
16. Use a new dauber in order to apply glass prep clear to the area approximately 18 mm (0.71 in) around the
entire perimeter of the window inner surface.
Immediately wipe the glass primed area using a clean, lint-free cloth.
 |
|
Fig. 51: Applying Glass Prep Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
17. Apply a second coat of the glass prep clear to the same area of the glass.
Fig. 52: Applying Glass Primer
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
NOTE: The glass primer black is effective up to 8 hours after applying it to the glass.
The primed surface of the glass must be kept clean.
18. Shake the glass primer black for at least 1 minute.
19. Use a new dauber in order to apply the glass primer black to the same areas (2) that glass prep clear was
applied.
20. Allow the glass primer to dry for approximately 10 minutes.
 |
|
Fig. 53: Modified Applicator Nozzle Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
21. Cut the applicator nozzle in order to provide a bead of 12.7 mm (1/2 in) wide and 12.7 mm (1/2 in) high.
 |
|
Fig. 54: Applying Continuous Bead Of Urethane Adhesive Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
22. Use a cartridge-type caulking gun in order to apply a smooth, continuous bead of urethane adhesive.
 |
|
Fig. 55: Applying Urethane Adhesive To Inner Surface Of Window |
23. Use the edge of the window as a guide for the nozzle in order to apply the urethane adhesive (1) to the inner
surface of the window (3).
24. With the aid of an assistant, place the window locator pins into the slots in the liftgate.
Fig. 56: Pressing Window Into Place
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
NOTE: To prevent damage to the window due to objects impacting an exposed edge,
upon installation, the window must rest 1 mm (0.040 in) below the surface of
the sheet metal.
25. Press firmly around the entire periphery of the window in order to wet-out the urethane bead.
26. Tape the window to the body in order to minimize movement until the urethane adhesive cures.
 |
|
Fig. 57: Cleaning Excess Urethane Adhesive From Body |
27. Clean any excess urethane adhesive from the body.
Fig. 58: Performing Water Hose Test
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
NOTE: Do not direct a hard stream of high pressure water to the freshly applied
urethane adhesive.
28. Use a soft spray of warm water in order to immediately water test the window.
29. Inspect the window for leaks.
30. If any leaks are found, use a plastic paddle in order to apply extra urethane adhesive at the leak point.
31. Retest the window for leaks.
WARNING: Insufficient curing of urethane adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to
be ejected from the vehicle resulting in personal injury.
• For the moisture-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 6
hours at 21A°C (70A°F) or greater and with at least 30 percent relative
humidity. Allow at least 24 hours for the complete curing of the urethane
adhesive.
• For the chemical-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 1
hour.
Do NOT physically disturb the repair area until after these minimum times have
elapsed.
32. Maintain the following conditions in order to properly cure the urethane adhesive:
• Partially lower a door window in order to prevent pressure buildups when closing doors before the
urethane adhesive cures.
• Do not drive the vehicle until the urethane adhesive is cured. Refer to the above curing times.
• Do not use compressed air in order to dry the urethane adhesive.
33. Complete the window installation.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
FULL-CUT METHOD DESCRIPTION
|
NOTE: |
|
Use only the full cut method, also known in the field as full strip method, when installing windows.
This method includes the following:
• The replacement of a majority of the urethane adhesive bead. Remove all but approximately 2 mm (3/64 in) of
the existing bead of urethane adhesive from the pinch-weld flange.
• Apply pinch-weld primer to any exposed painted areas on the pinch-weld flange.
No mounds or loose pieces of urethane adhesive should remain on the pinch-weld flange. Do not remove all traces of
urethane adhesive.
POWER WINDOWS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Power Windows System Components
The power window system consists of the following components:
• Driver window/outside rearview mirror switch
• Passenger window switch
• Left rear window switch
• Right rear window switch
• Right rear door latch
• Left rear door latch
• Window motors in each of the doors
• 25A Fuse
• Body control module (BCM)
Driver Express Up and Express Down Power Window Motor
The driver door contains a window motor is smart motor that will detect excessive resistance while performing the
express up function and automatically reverse direction to prevent injury to any occupants that may become trapped
between the closing window and the door frame. The automatic reverse safety feature can be overridden by pulling
and holding the window switch.
The logic circuit within the window motor monitors the up, down and express signal circuits which are normally
equal to B+ voltage. When a switch is used on the driver window/outside rearview mirror switch, the contacts close
causing a voltage drop within the appropriate signal circuit. The driver window motor will detect the voltage drop
and will command the window to move in the direction requested.
Passenger, Left Rear and Right Rear Express Down Window Motors
For the passenger, right rear and left rear doors, when their window switch is pressed in the down position, battery
positive voltage is applied to their respective window motor control circuit and ground to the other window motor
control circuit causing that window to open. When the individual window switch is pulled in the up position, voltage
and ground is applied to the window motor in the opposite direction causing that window to close. The return path to
ground is supplied through the inactive control circuit being normally grounded through the window switch.
Each passenger and rear window switch communicates to the BCM by a serial data circuit. When the driver wishes
to control the passenger, left rear or right rear window, the driver will use the appropriate switch on the driver
window/outside rearview mirror switch. When this switch is used, a serial data message is sent to the BCM
requesting a window motor command, the BCM will then send a serial data message to the appropriate door window
switch which will then command that window to move in the direction requested.
Lockout Switch Feature
The driver window/outside rearview mirror switch contains a window lockout switch, when the driver presses the
window lockout switch, a serial data message is sent to the BCM which will send a disable command to the rear
window switches, the rear window switches will then ignore all functions when a passenger uses the rear window
switch. The rear window motor commands will still function normally when the driver uses the appropriate switches
on the driver window/outside rearview mirror switch.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Rear Window Defogger System Components
The rear window defogger system consists of the following components:
• HVAC Control Module
• HVAC Controls Switch Assembly
• Rear Defogger Relay
• Rear Defogger Grid
• Driver Outside Rearview Mirror
• Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror
• 40A Fuse
|
S34 HVAC Controls Switch Assembly |
 |
1 E17D
■ Outside
Rearview
I Mirror
j Glass •
Dover
1 E18
■ Rear
Defogger
I Grid
Ч E17P
■ Outside
Rearview
I Mirror
j Glass -
Passenger
Fig. 59: S34-K33-X50A Defogger Block Diagram
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
| ||||||||||||
|
Rear Window Defogger Operation |
The rear defog control system utilizes a single zone backlight design, driven with a single relay configuration.
Additionally, up to two outside rear view mirrors can be heated if required. A switch for the customer to control the
system is provided within the HVAC controls switch assembly. Also included in the HVAC controls switch assembly
is an indicator to inform the customer with the current state of the system. The system is only operational when the
vehicle is ON/RUN.
Pressing the heated rear window switch causes the HVAC controls switch assembly to send a serial data message to
the HVAC control module requesting rear window defog operation. The HVAC control module upon receipt of the
serial data message will provide voltage to the coil side of the rear defogger relay, this will energize the relay causing
the relay switch contacts to close allowing B+ voltage to flow through the rear defogger grid control circuit to the
rear defogger grid.
When the rear heated rear window switch is pressed and the vehicle is ON/RUN, the rear window defogger grid will
activate and will turn off automatically depending upon the vehicle speed (refer to owner's manual for rear window
defogger operation cycles)
Heated Mirrors
The heated mirrors are also controlled through the rear defogger relay. Whenever the rear window defogger is turned
on battery voltage is supplied to the mirror heater elements through the left and right mirror heater element control
circuits.
Most stationary windows, specifically windshields, are retained to the body with adhesive which adheres the window
to the body, increasing structural integrity. The reinstallation of the windows with adhesive requires complete
replacement of the adhesive bead, and is known as the full cut method. All stationary windows must use a adhesive
systems which meet GM Specification GMW-15672.
For replacement of any adhesive-installed window, use the full cut method only.
Use an adhesive that is approved by GM, Specification GMW-15672.
Use these materials based on specific manufacturer. Do NOT intermix primers or adhesives from one manufacturer
to another.
Always follow the system manufacturers instructions for application, handling, and curing.
SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
SPECIAL TOOLS
|
Illustration |
Tool Number/Description |
|
Illustration |
Tool |
|
BO-24402-A J-24402-A |
|
Illustration |
Tool |
|
THE A Equalizerj6x\<K\ |
BO-39032 J-39032 Stationary Glass |
 |
BO-39040 J-39040 Quarter Window |
Article GUID: A00884692
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Horns - Volt
SPECIFICATIONS
FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS
|
Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications | |||||||
| |||||||
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
HORN WIRING SCHEMATICS
Horns
Fig. 1: Horns
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
DTC B010E: PEDESTRIAN FRIENDLY ALERT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check
- Vehicle
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis:Strategy Based Diagnosis
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here:Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
Pedestrian Friendly Alert Audio Output Circuit
Symptom Byte Information: Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
|
For an overview of the component/system, refer to:Pedestrian Alert Description and Operation | ||||||
|
|
Component |
Description |
|
P48 Pedestrian Alert Sound Speaker |
Each of the speaker output [+] and [-] circuits has a DC bias |
| ||||||
|
Conditions for Running the DTC |
Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode & Transmission in Drive
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• B010E 1B - Control Circuit=Signal Cross Coupled
• B010E 04 - Control Circuit=Open/High Resistance
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
Pedestrian Alert Sound System=Inoperative
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will clear when the diagnostic runs and passes.
• A history DTC will clear after 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Component View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode & Transmission in Drive
2. Verify the component is activated:P48 Pedestrian Alert Sound Speaker
• If the component does not produce a sound
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:P48 Pedestrian Alert Sound Speaker
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points:Low Reference terminal 1 & Ground
• If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect the electrical connector:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:Low Reference terminal 1 @Component harness
& Terminal 2 @Control module harness
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
4. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode & Transmission in Drive
5. Test for 5 to 7 V between the test points:Control circuit terminal 2 & Ground
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:Control circuit terminal 2 @Component harness
& Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:Control circuit terminal 9 @Component harness &
Terminal 2 @Control module harness
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
• If greater than 7 V
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
3. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points:Control circuit terminal 2 @Component harness &
Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V - Replace the component:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
6. Test or replace the component:P48 Pedestrian Alert Sound Speaker
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
• For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to: Control Module References
DTC B274E OR B274F: LOW NOTE HORN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check
- Vehicle
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis:Strategy Based Diagnosis
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here:Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
Low Note Horn Relay Control Circuit
Symptom Byte Information: Symptom Byte List
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||
For an overview of the component/system, refer to:Horns System Description and Operation
|
Circuit |
Description |
|
Control - Relay Coil |
The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the |
|
Component |
Description |
|
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood |
The fuse block houses various fuses and relays. |
|
K9 Body Control Module |
The module controls various vehicle functions like lighting, |
Conditions for Running the DTC
KR3 Horn Relay - The component is commanded On.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
Control Circuit=Short to Voltage
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
Horn Relay Command - Inoperative
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will clear when the diagnostic runs and passes.
• A history DTC will clear after 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Component View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
2. Perform the scan tool control function:Horn Relay - On and Off
Verify the component turns On and Off:P12 Horn
• Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:K9 Body Control Module
3. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points:Control circuit terminal 19 X5 &
Ground
Verify the component turns On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire:P12 Horn
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire(s)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2@X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
3. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points:Control circuit terminal 19 X5 @Control module
harness & Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
5. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
6. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:Control circuit terminal 19 X5@Control module
harness & Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
7. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:Control circuit terminal 19 X5 @Control module
harness & Control circuit terminal 51 X2@Fuse Block Harness
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Test or replace the component:X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
5. Replace the component:K9 Body Control Module
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
• For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to: Control Module References
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that
all of the following are true:
• There are no DTCs set.
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data link.
2. Review the horn operation or pedestrian alert sound system operation in order to familiarize yourself with
the system functions. Refer to the following:
Horns System Description and Operation
Pedestrian Alert Description and Operation
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the rear window defogger. Refer to
Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
|
Intermittent | ||
|
Poor electrical connections or wiring cause most intermittent conditions. Perform a careful visual/physical
check for the following conditions:
• Poor mating of the connector halves or a terminal not fully seated in the connector body
• An improperly formed or damaged terminal
• Reform or replace connector terminals in the problem circuit in order to ensure proper contact tension.
• Poor terminal to wire connection requires removing the terminal from the connector body in order to
perform the check.
Use a scan tool in order to help detect intermittent conditions. The scan tool has several features that can be
used to locate an intermittent condition. The snapshot feature can capture and store data parameters within the
scan tool when the malfunction occurs. This information can then be reviewed in order to see what caused the
malfunction.
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
Horns Malfunction
Pedestrian Alert System Malfunction
HORNS MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check
- Vehicle
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis:Strategy Based Diagnosis
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here:Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
|
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Horns System Description and Operation | ||||||||||||||||
|
|
Component |
Description |
|
P12 Horn |
The horn has an electromagnet which pulls a diaphragm |
| ||||||||||
|
Diagnostic Aids |
Rotate the steering wheel while pressing the horn pad to identify intermittent and poor connections within the
steering column.
If the horn produces only a weak noise, inspect the following:
• Debris or water in the horn.
• Incorrect MountingRefer to: Fastener Specifications.
• Debris on the component.
• Vehicle components that vibrate while the horn is sounding.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Component View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the scan tool parameter:Horn Switch=Inactive
• If not the specified state
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing - Test 1
2. Operate the component:S33 Horn Switch - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter:Horn Switch=Active
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing - Test 1
3. Perform the scan tool control function:Horn Relay Command - On and Off
Verify the component turns On and Off:P12 Horn & The horn should emit a clear and even tone.
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing - Test 2
• Refer to: Circuit/System Testing - Test 3
• If the component turns On and Off & If no abnormal noise is present
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
Test 1
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1& X2@S33 Horn Switch
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points:Ground circuit terminal X2 & Ground
• If 10 ohms or greater
1. Ground Connection - Disconnect
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:Ground circuit terminal A X2 @Component
harness & Ground Connection
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
4. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
5. Verify the scan tool parameter:Horn Switch=Inactive
• If not the specified state
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X3 @K9 Body Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:Signal circuit terminal A X1@Component
harness & Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance - Replace the component:K9 Body Control Module
• If the specified state
6. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points:Signal circuit terminal A X1 & Ground circuit
terminal A X2
7. Verify the scan tool parameter:Horn Switch=Active
• If not the specified state
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire(s)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X3 @K9 Body Control Module
3. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points:Signal circuit terminal A X1 @Component harness &
Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
5. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:Signal circuit terminal A X1 @Component
harness & Terminal 18 X3 @Control module harness
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component:K9 Body Control Module
• If the specified state
8. Test or replace the component:S33 Horn Switch
Test 2
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:P12 Horn
3. Test for less than 1 ohms between the test points:Ground circuit terminal 1 & Ground
• If 1 ohms or greater
1. Ground Connection - Disconnect
2. Test for less than 1 ohms between the test points:Ground circuit terminal 1 & Ground Connection
• If 1 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 1 ohms
4. Connect a test lamp between the test points:Control circuit terminal 2 & Ground circuit terminal 1
5. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
6. Perform the scan tool control function:Horn Relay Command - On and Off
Verify the test lamp does not turn On and Off.
Test or replace the component:P12 Horn
7. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
8. Connect the electrical connector:P12 Horn
9. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1@X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
10. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
11. Momentarily connect a 15 A fused jumper wire between the test points:Control circuit terminal 59 X1 &
B+
Verify the component turns On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire:P12 Horn
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire(s)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:P12 Horn
3. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points:Control circuit terminal 2 @Component harness &
Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
5. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
6. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:Control circuit terminal 2 @Component harness
& Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
7. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:Control circuit terminal 2 @Component harness &
Control circuit terminal 59 X1 @Fuse Block Harness
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Test or replace the component:P12 Horn
• If the component turns On and Off
12. Connect the electrical connector: X1 @X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
13. Disconnect the electrical connector: X5 @K9 Body Control Module
14. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
15. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points:Control circuit terminal 19 X5&
B+
Verify the component turns On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire:P12 Horn
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire(s)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:X2@X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
3. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points:Control circuit terminal 19 X5 @Control module
harness & Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
5. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
6. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:Control circuit terminal 19 X5 @Control module
harness & Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
7. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:Control circuit terminal 19 X5 @Control module
harness & Terminal 51 X2 @Fuse Block Harness
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Test or replace the component:X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
• If the component turns On and Off
16. Replace the component:K9 Body Control Module
Test 3
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:P12 Horn
3. Test for less than 1 ohms between the test points:Ground circuit terminal 1 & Ground
• If 1 ohms or greater
1. Ground Connection - Disconnect
2. Test for less than 1 ohms between the test points:Ground circuit terminal 1 & Ground Connection
4. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 @X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
5. Test for less than 1 ohms between the test points:Control circuit terminal 2 @Component harness &
Control circuit terminal 59 X1 @Fuse Block Harness
• If 1 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 1 ohms
6. Test or replace the component:P12 Horn
Component Testing
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:P12 Horn
3. Connect a jumper wire between the test points:Ground terminal 1 & Ground
4. Momentarily connect a 15 A fused jumper wire between the test points:Control terminal 2 & 12 V
Verify the component turns On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire:P12 Horn
Replace the component:P12 Horn
5. All OK.
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 & X2 @S33 Horn Switch
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:Signal terminal X1 & Ground terminal A X2 - Switch
Not Pressed
Replace the component:S33 Horn Switch
4. Test for less than 3 ohms between the test points:Signal terminal A X1 & Ground terminal A X2 - Switch
- Pressed
Replace the component:S33 Horn Switch
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
• For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to: Control Module References
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis:Strategy Based Diagnosis
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here:Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
For an overview of the component/system, refer to:Pedestrian Alert Description and Operation | ||||||||||
|
| ||||||
|
Reference Information |
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Component View Reference
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode & Transmission in Drive
2. Verify the component is activated:P48 Pedestrian Alert Sound Speaker
• If the component does not produce a sound
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points:Ground circuit terminal 3 & Ground
• If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect the ground connection: G302
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:Ground circuit terminal 3 & Terminal G302
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
4. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
5. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points:B+ circuit terminal 10 & Ground
• If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is OK
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 10 & Output terminal @
F9UA Fuse
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 10 & Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance - Replace the component:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
• If the test lamp turns On
6. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
7. Connect the electrical connector:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
8. Disconnect the electrical connector:P48 Pedestrian Alert Sound Speaker
9. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points:Low Reference terminal 2 & Ground
• If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect the electrical connector:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:Low Reference terminal 2 @Component harness
& Terminal 8 @Control module harness
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
10. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode & Transmission in Drive
11. Test for 5 to 7 V between the test points:Control circuit terminal 1 & Ground
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:Control circuit terminal 1 @Component harness
& Ground
• If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:Control circuit terminal 1 @Component harness &
Terminal 9 @Control module harness
• If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
• If greater than 7 V
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
2. Disconnect the electrical connector:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
3. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points:Control circuit terminal 1 @Component harness &
Ground
• If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V - Replace the component:K132 Pedestrian Alert Sound Control Module
• If between 5 and 7 V
12. Test or replace the component:P48 Pedestrian Alert Sound Speaker
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
Pedestrian Sound Alert Speaker Replacement
• For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to: Control Module References
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
WIRE TO WIRE REPAIR - HORNS
Special Tools
• EL-38125-10 Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool (non GMNA)
• J-38125-5A Ultra Torch Special Tool
• J-38125-8 Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool (GMNA)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, loss of high voltage isolation to
ground and higher system impedance, do not attempt to repair any HV wiring,
connector, or terminal that is damaged. High voltage coaxial type cables are not
repairable. Never attempt to repair a coaxial type cable. The entire
cable/harness or component must be replaced. In order to maintain system
integrity and personal safety, never attempt to repair any high voltage wiring,
cables, or terminals. Performing this procedure on high voltage circuits may
result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: If the wiring harness internal to the transmission is damaged, the wiring
harness must be replaced. The use of splice sleeves in an attempt to repair the
internal transmission wires, connectors, or terminals could result in
performance issues.
NOTE: Do not splice wires in Door Harness Grommets.
NOTE: The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
• A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat
shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside.
• A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low
resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits.
Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except high voltage and
specialty cables. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there are special requirements such as moisture sealing.
Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
|
Splice Sleeve Selection | ||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||
NOTE: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the
procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip
with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
• Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in
order to avoid wire insulation damage.
• Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except Tefzel and coaxial.
• Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the
location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness
branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
• When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
• Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
• Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
• If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and
work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
• Strip approximately 5.0 mm (0.20 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
• Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
• If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. For high temperature wiring, slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of
wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the
beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool
nests.
 |
|
Fig. 2: Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool With 4 Crimp Nests |
6. The EL-38125-10 splice sleeve crimping tool has four crimp nests. The largest crimp nest (4) is used for
crimping 10 and 12 gauge wires. The second largest crimp nest (3) is used for crimping 14 and 16 gauge
wires. The third largest crimp nest (2) is used for crimping 18 and 20 gauge wires. The smallest crimp
nest (1) is used for crimping 22 to 26 gauge wires. The crimp nests are referenced in the table (farther
above) under the crimp tool nest color.
 |
|
Fig. 3: Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool With 3 Crimp Nests |
7. The J-38125-8 splice sleeve crimping tool has three crimp nests. The largest crimp nest (3) is used for
crimping 10 and 12 gauge wires. The second largest crimp nest (2) is used for crimping 14 and 16 gauge
wires. The smallest crimp nest (1) is used for crimping 18 to 20 gauge wires. The crimp nests are
referenced in the table (farther above) under the crimp tool nest color.
8. Use the splice sleeve crimp tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of
the splice sleeve crimp tool. For the four crimp nest tool, use the three largest crimp nests to crimp the
splice sleeves. For the three crimp nest tool, use all three crimp nests to crimp the splice sleeves. Use the
four and three crimp tool diagrams (above) and the table (farther above) to match the splice sleeve with
the correct crimp nest. The crimp tool diagram callout numbers match the numbers in the table (under
crimp tool nest color).
9. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the
barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1)
from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice
sleeve in the proper nest.
 |
|
Fig. 5: Crimped Duraseal Splice Sleeve Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
10. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Refer to Folded-Over Wire
Repair for splicing wires of 0.35 mm or less (22, 24, 26 gauge sizes) and for splicing wires of different
gauges.
11. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice
sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 6 for the opposite end of the splice.
 |
|
Fig. 6: Crimped Duraseal Splice Sleeve |
12. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
13. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Weatherpack™ Wiring Repair
NOTE: Some replacement pigtail connectors may be delivered without the terminated
leads installed into the connector. For Weatherpack™ connectors, all
terminated leads included in the package should to be installed into the
connector. If the connector end view shows that a terminal is not occupied, the
extra terminated lead(s) need to be installed and the end(s) sealed using a
DuraSeal splice sleeve and taped back into the harness.
1. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Refer to Folded-Over Wire
Repair for splicing wires of 0.35 mm or less (22, 24, 26 gauge sizes) and for splicing wires of different
gauges.
 |
|
Fig. 7: Tightly Close Handles Of Crimp Tool |
2. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice
sleeve. Holding the DuraSEAL with one hand gently tug on the wire to ensure it is crimped in the
DuraSeal.
3. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
 |
|
Fig. 8: Heat To Crimped Area Of Barrel Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
4. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
5. Tape the extra terminated lead(s) back into the harness.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Use the following procedures to perform high temperature wiring repairs:
1. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve.
2. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing.
3. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
4. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been removed during the repair.
CONNECTOR RECONNECTION - HORNS
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An
intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated.
Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an
intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following
items:
• Loose, corroded, or painted terminal stud/fastener
• Wiring broken inside the insulation
• Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
• A terminal not seated all the way into the connector body
• Poor terminal to wire connection - Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps,
poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire
to terminal contact area, etc.
• Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor
can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire
in the suspect circuits.
• Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or
short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
• Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
• Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order
to verify the customer concern.
• Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high
resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions.
• Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder
operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up
of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The
oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the
connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause
fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and
hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since
vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin,
copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to
see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add dielectric grease / lubricant (Nyogel
760G or equivalent, meeting GM specification 9986087) to both sides of the connector terminals. Then
reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact
resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect
component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between
the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged
connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause
contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion,
causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always
use the EL-35616 kit when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining
the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the
female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in
a bussed electrical center. Use the EL-35616 kit to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use the EL-35616
kit can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves.
2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green
build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance,
intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of
contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal/terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different
between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire connectors on the harness side or the component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question.
2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the
connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to
ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter into the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
• Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to
a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may
also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any
intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM
may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current.
Operate the component to test the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing
, and Power Distribution Schematics .
• Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground
circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested.
Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point (screw or stud). Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Operate the component to test the
ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing , and Ground Distribution
Schematics .
Temperature Sensitivity
• An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the
component/connection is hot.
• Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of
intermittent condition, where applicable.
• If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
• High ambient temperatures
• Underhood/engine generated heat
• Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
• Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
• If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
• Low ambient temperatures - In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
• The condition only occurs on a cold start.
• The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
• Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature
related.
• If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition.
Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical
noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
• A mis-routed harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition
components, motors, generator etc. - These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could
interfere with normal circuit operation.
• Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or
switch - These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the
malfunctioning component is operating.
• Installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers,
electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc. - These accessories may create
interference in other circuits while operating and the interference would disappear when the accessory is
not operating. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may
contain a clamping diode.
• The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
• There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
• A new service control module is installed.
• A control module from another vehicle is installed.
• Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
NOTE: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME
software/calibration files that are already present in the control module.
This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
• Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is
found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References for replacement, setup, and programming.
HORN REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 10: Horn Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
STEERING WHEEL HORN CONTACT REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 11: Steering Wheel Horn Contact Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||
|
PEDESTRIAN SOUND ALERT MODULE REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 12: Pedestrian Sound Alert Module |
Callout Component Name
Preliminary Procedure
Reposition the right side front seat to gain access to the module. Driver or Passenger Seat Removal and
Installation
NOTE:
It is not
necessary to
remove the
seat from
the vehicle.
Pedestrian Sound Alert Module Bracket Bolt
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
| ||||||
|
PEDESTRIAN SOUND ALERT SPEAKER REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 13: Pedestrian Sound Alert Speaker Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Front Bumper Fascia Removal and Installation | |
|
1 |
Pedestrian Sound Alert Speaker Bolt CAUTION: Refer to Caution . |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) | |
|
2 |
Pedestrian Sound Alert Speaker Procedure Disconnect the electrical connector. |
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
HORNS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
System Description
The horn system consists of the following components:
• HORN fuse
• Underhood fuse block (contains PCB horn relay)
• Horn switch
• Horn-low note
• Horn-high note
• Body control module (BCM)
|
1 К73 I Telematics I Interface |
 |
Fig. 14: Horns System Block Diagram
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
| ||||||||||||||||
|
System Operation |
The vehicle horn system is activated under the following conditions:
• When the horn switch is depressed
• The BCM commands the horns ON under any of the following conditions:
• When the content theft deterrent system detects a vehicle intrusion - For further information refer to
Theft Systems Description and Operation .
• When the panic button is depressed on the remote control door lock transmitter - For further
information refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation .
• When the keyless entry system is used to lock the vehicle, a horn chirp may sound to notify the
driver that the vehicle has been locked. The notification feature may be enabled or disabled through
personalization. For further information refer to Keyless Entry System Description and
Operation .
• When the OnStarA® system is used to sound the horns if equipped - For further information, refer
to OnStar Description and Operation .
Circuit Operation
Battery positive voltage is applied at all times to the horn relay coil and the horn relay switch. Pressing either of
the horn switches applies ground to the horn relay control circuit. The BCM may also apply ground to the horn
relay control circuit as described above. When the horn relay control circuit is grounded, the horn relay is
energized and battery positive voltage is applied to the horns through the horn control circuit. The horns sound
as long as ground is applied to the horn relay control circuit.
Electric vehicles present a situation for visually impaired pedestrians who cannot hear an approaching electric
vehicle, the pedestrian alert module creates sounds from a dedicated speaker to alert a visually impaired
pedestrian, in a non-startling manner.
• Emit sound from 0 to 12 MPH (20 KM/H)
• Fade in and out control for the sound ON and OFF
• Change the pitch of the sound dependent of vehicle speed
Article GUID: A00884702
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Immobilizer - Volt
SPECIFICATIONS
FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS
|
Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications | |||||||
| |||||||
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
IMMOBILIZER WIRING SCHEMATICS
Immobilizer
Fig. 1: Immobilizer
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
DTC B2955: SECURITY SENSOR DATA CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Security Sensor Data Circuit Malfunction
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
When a keyless entry transmitter is inserted into the transmitter pocket/slot and the ignition mode switch is
pressed, the transponder embedded in the transmitter is energized by the immobilizer antenna exciter coil. The
transponder transmits a signal to the body control module (BCM). The BCM then compares this value to a
value stored in memory. If the value is correct, the BCM will send the prerelease password via the serial data
circuit to the engine control module (ECM). If the learned key code does not match or a transponder value is not
received, the BCM will send the start disable password to the ECM.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Vehicle is ON or in Service Mode.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The BCM detects a circuit fault on the immobilizer antenna circuits.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. A service message will be displayed
in the driver information center.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will be cleared when the condition for setting the DTC are no longer present.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free power mode cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K89 Immobilizer
Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the low reference circuit terminal 1 and B+.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If the test lamp illuminates
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
NOTE: In some instances, the K9 Body Control Module may only apply voltage for
3 s immediately after the ignition mode switch is pressed. It may be
necessary to monitor the DMM while pressing the ignition mode switch to
observe the voltage.
4. Test for greater than 9 V between the ignition circuit terminal 3 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If greater than 9 V
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. Test for 12 - 13 V between the serial data circuit terminal 2 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the serial data circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
• If greater than 13 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, vehicle ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
7. Replace the K89 Immobilizer Control Module.
8. Verify DTC B2955 is not set.
Replace the K9 Body Control Module.
9. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for body control module or immobilizer control module replacement,
programming, and setup
DTC B302A: MOBILE TELEPHONE COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE REQUESTED
IMMOBILIZATION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Mobile Telephone Communications Interface Requested Immobilization
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
As part of the vehicle telematics enhanced services, a request may be sent to the body control module (BCM) to
disable vehicle starting. If a valid message is received by the BCM requesting that starting be disabled, the start
enable message will not be sent to the engine control module (ECM).
Conditions for Running the DTC
The BCM continuously monitors for this DTC.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
A start disable message has been received from the telematics module.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
Vehicle starting will be suspended and the security indicator will be illuminated.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will clear when the telematics start disable request is no longer received.
• A history DTC will clear after 100 ignition cycles in which the telematic start disable request is not seen.
Diagnostic Aids
• DTC B302A is only an indicator that a start disable request has been received from the vehicle telematics
system and does not indicate a fault in the immobilizer or telematics system.
• To remove the start disable request, the vehicle account must be updated with the OnStar stolen vehicle
team. This will require that a law enforcement agency or the customer contact OnStar to indicate that the
vehicle has been successfully and safely recovered.
• If the OnStar system has been disabled or damage during a theft attempt, the system will not be able to
communicate and the start disable request will not be removed. OnStar must be functioning properly for
the start disable request to be removed.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the OnStar system is not damaged and is operating properly, with no DTCs set.
• If the OnStar system is damaged, inoperative, or any OnStar DTCs are set
These concerns must be corrected before the start disable can be removed.
2. Press the blue OnStar button and ask the advisor to be transferred to the stolen vehicle team to verify the
vehicle account has been updated.
3. Verify that OnStar is aware the vehicle has been recovered and that the vehicle account has been updated.
Contact the customer and advise them that for security purposes, they must contact OnStar and the
law enforcement agency to update the vehicle account.
4. Once the vehicle account has been updated and the start disable request has been removed, DTC B302A
will transition to a history DTC. Clear the history DTC.
DTC B3031: SECURITY CONTROLLER IN LEARN MODE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Security Controller In Learn Mode
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When learning a coded key, the body control module (BCM) is placed in learn mode. DTC B3031 will set
automatically as an indicator that the system is in learn mode and not as a fault indicator. On some model year
vehicles the instructions for adding keys includes the direction to always use two learned keys. This DTC will
set if that direction is not followed. If only one learned key is available then Replacing Keys must be performed.
Once the coded key is learned, learn mode will be exited and the DTC cleared. If the BCM does not exit learn
mode, DTC B3031 will remain current and indicate a fault. The instrument cluster security indicator will
illuminate and the driver information center will display a message.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The immobilizer system is the learn coded keys state.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The DTC will set any time the BCM enters the learn coded keys state.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The security indicator will illuminate. The driver information center will display a message.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC B3031 will be cleared upon the successful exit of learn mode.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify all available keys are correct for the vehicle. This can be accomplished by comparing the part
number that is laser etched on the key to the part number listed in the parts catalog.
NOTE: On some model year vehicles two learned keys are required to add
additional keys. If only one learned key is used, this DTC will set. If only
one learned key is available then Replacing Keys must be performed.
• If a key is not correct
Replace the key
• If all keys are correct
2. Verify the scan tool Immobilizer data displays two or more keys learned to the vehicle.
• If not
Add one additional key
• If two or more keys are learned to the vehicle
3. Perform the Replacing Keys procedure. Refer to Key with Integrated Transmitter Programming.
4. Verify the K9 Body Control Module learns the vehicle key and exits the learn coded key state. The scan
tool Master Keys Learned parameter should increment to 1.
• If the K9 Body Control Module does not exit the learn coded key state after the programming
attempt
Replace the K9 Body Control Module
• If the K9 Body Control Module exits the learn coded key state after the programming
attempt
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for body control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B3055: NO TRANSPONDER MODULATION OR NO TRANSPONDER
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
No Transponder Modulation or No Transponder
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When a vehicle key is inserted into the key slot and the vehicle on/off switch is pressed, the transponder
embedded in the head of the key is energized by the exciter coils. The energized transponder transmits a signal
that contains its unique value, which is received by the body control module (BCM). The BCM then compares
this value to a value stored in memory. If the value is not correct, the BCM disables engine start.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Vehicle is ON or in Service Mode.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The BCM is unable to measure the key transponder value.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
• The security indicator will illuminate. A service message will be displayed in the driver information
center.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will be cleared when the BCM detects a valid transponder value from the key.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free power mode cycles.
Diagnostic Aids
• Because DTC B3055 may be caused by a malfunctioning vehicle key, it is necessary to have all available
keys at the time of diagnosis. A possible scenario would be a customer leaving the vehicle with a spare
key during the service visit, but the key which they use everyday, not the spare key, is the cause of the
DTC. Not having all available keys in this instance would result in the customer concern not being
duplicate or a misdiagnosis.
• Ensure that the immobilizer control module is properly installed and fully seated. An audible and/or
tactile click will indicate that the immobilizer control module is fully seated. To ensure proper
transponder communication, the key must be in a specific location in relation to the immobilizer control
module. If the immobilizer control module is not fully seated, transponder communication may not occur
and DTC B3055 will set.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC B1370, B1380, or B1441 is not set.
• If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If none of the DTCs are set
3. Verify all available keys are correct for the vehicle.
• If a key is not correct
Replace the key
4. Remove the battery from each of the available vehicle keys.
5. Verify that DTC B3055 does not set while attempting to start the vehicle which each available key. To
start the vehicle with the key battery removed, the key must be placed in the key slot.
• If DTC B3055 sets when attempting to start the vehicle with only one of the available keys
Replace the appropriate key.
Replace the K89 Immobilizer Control Module.
6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for immobilizer control module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B305C: IMMOBILIZER TRANSPONDER OF WRONG TYPE PROGRAMMED
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Immobilizer Transponder of Wrong Type Programmed
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When a vehicle key/keyless entry transmitter is inserted into the key slot/transmitter pocket and the vehicle
on/off switch is pressed, the transponder embedded in the key/transmitter is energized by the immobilizer
antenna exciter coil. The transponder transmits a signal to the body control module (BCM). The BCM then
compares this value to a value stored in memory. If the value is correct, the BCM will send the prerelease
password via the serial data circuit to the engine control module (ECM). If the learned key code does not match
or a transponder value is not received, the BCM will send the start disable password to the ECM.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Battery voltage is greater than 9 volts
• Transponder authentication has occurred
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The programed transponder type does not match the equipped system on the vehicle.
• A transponder used for vehicles without BTM and/or ATH/ATS has been programmed to a vehicle with
BTM and/or ATH/ATS.
• A transponder used for vehicles with BTM and/or ATH/ATS has been programmed to a vehicle without
BTM and/or ATH/ATS.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
No action is taken.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will be cleared when the BCM detects a programed transponder type that matches the
equipped system on the vehicle.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free power mode cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Using each vehicle key, attempt to put the vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC B305C does not set after each attempt to put the vehicle in Service Mode.
Replace the appropriate key or keyless entry transmitter.
3. All OK.
DTC B3060: UNPROGRAMMED TRANSPONDER IDENTIFICATION CODE RECEIVED
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Unprogrammed Transponder Identification Code Received
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When a vehicle key is inserted into the key slot and the vehicle on/off switch is pressed, the transponder
embedded in the head of the key is energized by the exciter coils. The energized transponder transmits a signal
that contains its unique value, which is received by the body control module (BCM). The BCM then compares
this value to a value stored in memory. If the value is not correct, the BCM disables engine start.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Vehicle is ON or in Service Mode.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The transponder value measured by the BCM is incorrect or not learned to the vehicle.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. The driver information center will
display a service message.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will be cleared when the BCM detects a valid transponder value from the key.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free power mode cycles or when a scan tool is used
to clear DTCs.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Immobilizer Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Perform the Vehicle Key Relearn procedure. Refer to Key with Integrated Transmitter Programming.
2. Verify the scan tool Key Part Number parameter reads a Key Part Number when turning the vehicle ON
with each key.
• If a Key Part Number is not read
Replace the appropriate key.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Key with Integrated Transmitter Programming
DTC B3899: INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER IDENTIFIER RECEIVED
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Incorrect Immobilizer Identifier Received
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When certain modules are programmed and configured during installation, the module learns a specific
environment identifier which is unique to the vehicle. The environment identifier is used to prevent the
swapping modules between vehicles. The body control module (BCM) is the keeper of the environment
identifier. The instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control module, inflatable restraint
sensing and diagnostic module, engine control module (ECM), and steering column lock module (if equipped)
each learn the environment identifier during their configuration process. During vehicle operation, the BCM
sends the immobilizer identifier as a challenge and each module responds to the challenge by sending the
environment identifier back to the BCM. If the BCM sends an incorrect immobilizer identifier or a specific
number of incorrect environment identifiers are received, vehicle starting is disabled.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition is in the ACCESSORY or RUN position.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The control module's environment identifier does not match the environment identifier stored by the BCM.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
A current DTC will be cleared when the module learns a correct environment identifier.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Perform the Programming and Setup procedure for the control module that set DTC B3899.
NOTE:
When performing the following step, Immobilizer System Component
Programming, the module may also need to be reset by using the SPS
function Prepare For Removal.
2. Perform the Immobilizer System Component Programming. Refer to Immobilizer System Component
Programming.
3. Verify DTC B3899 does not set after programming.
Replace the control module that set the DTC.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for lock module replacement, programming, and setup.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Environment Identification
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When certain modules are programmed and configured during installation, the module learns a specific
environment identifier which is unique to the vehicle. The environment identifier is used to prevent the
swapping modules between vehicles. The body control module (BCM) is the keeper of the environment
identifier. The Instrument Cluster, Electronic Brake Control Module, HVAC Control Module, Inflatable
Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module, engine control module (ECM), and Steering Column Lock Module
(if equipped) each learn the environment identifier during their configuration process. During vehicle operation,
the BCM sends the immobilizer identifier as a challenge and each module responds to the challenge by sending
the environment identifier back to the BCM. If the BCM sends an incorrect immobilizer identifier or a specific
number of incorrect environment identifiers are received, vehicle starting is disabled.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition is in the ACCESSORY or RUN position.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
An incorrect immobilizer identifier was broadcast by the BCM.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
A current DTC will be cleared when the BCM broadcasts a correct immobilizer identifier.
Diagnostic Aids
If BCM programming is not completed after BCM replacement, the immobilizer identifier will not be learned.
If DTC B389A sets immediately after the replacement and programming of a BCM, perform the programming
procedure again.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify DTC B389A did not set immediately following the replacement and programming of the K9 Body
Control Module.
• If the DTC set immediately after the replacement and programming of the K9 Body Control
The immobilizer learn procedure was not properly completed. Perform the BCM immobilizer learn
using the body control module IMMO Function with Existing Transponder or Remote Key in SPS.
Refer to Immobilizer System Component Programming.
2. Verify DTC B3902 is not set in any of the control modules listed below:
• K20 Engine Control Module
• K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module
• K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
• K33 HVAC Control Module
• P16 Instrument Cluster
• K60 Steering Column Lock Module (if equipped)
• If DTC B3902 is set in any of the modules
Refer to DTC B3902.
3. Perform the K9 Body Control Module immobilizer learn using body control module IMMO Function
with Existing Transponder or Remote Key in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer System Component
Programming.
4. Verify DTC B389A does not set after programming.
• If the DTC sets after programming
Replace the K9 Body Control Module.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for body control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B3902: INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER IDENTIFIER RECEIVED
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Incorrect Immobilizer Identifier Received
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When certain modules are programmed and configured during installation, the module learns a specific
environment identifier which is unique to the vehicle. The environment identifier is used to prevent the
swapping modules between vehicles. The body control module (BCM) is the keeper of the environment
identifier. The instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control module, inflatable restraint
sensing and diagnostic module, engine control module (ECM), and steering column lock module (if equipped)
each learn the environment identifier during their configuration process. During vehicle operation, the BCM
sends the immobilizer identifier as a challenge and each module responds to the challenge by sending the
environment identifier back to the BCM. If the BCM sends an incorrect immobilizer identifier or a specific
number of incorrect environment identifiers are received, vehicle starting is disabled.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition is in the ACCESSORY or RUN position.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The control module's environment identifier does not match the environment identifier stored by the BCM.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
A current DTC will be cleared when the module learns a correct environment identifier.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Scan Tool Reference
Circuit/System Verification
1. Perform the Programming and Setup procedure for the control module that set DTC B3902.
NOTE: When performing the following step, Immobilizer System Component
Programming, the module may also need to be reset by using the SPS
function Prepare For Removal.
2. Perform the Immobilizer System Component Programming Immobilizer System Component
Programming.
3. Verify DTC B3902 does not set after programming.
Replace the control module that set the DTC.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control
module, inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module, engine control module, or steering column lock
module replacement, programming, and setup.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From HVAC Control Module
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Instrument Cluster
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Electronic Brake Control Module
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When certain modules are programmed and configured during installation, the module learns a specific
environment identifier which is unique to the vehicle. The environment identifier is used to prevent the
swapping of control modules between vehicles. The body control module (BCM) is the keeper of the
environment identifier. The instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control module,
inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module, and telematics communication interface control module each
learn the environment identifier during their configuration process. During vehicle operation, the BCM sends
the immobilizer identifier as a challenge and each module responds to the challenge by sending the environment
identifier back to the BCM. If the BCM sends an incorrect immobilizer identifier or a specific number of
incorrect environment identifiers are received, vehicle starting is disabled.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition is in the ACCESSORY or RUN position.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The control module's environment identifier does not match the environment identifier stored by the BCM.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
A current DTC will be cleared when the module learns a correct environment identifier.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Perform the Programming and Setup procedure for the control module that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set after programming.
• If the DTC sets after programming
Replace the control module that set the DTC.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control
module, inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module, or telematics communication interface control
module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B3935: TRANSPONDER AUTHENTICATION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Transponder Authentication
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When a vehicle key is inserted into the key slot and the vehicle on/off switch is pressed, the transponder
embedded in the head of the key is energized by the exciter coils surrounding the key slot. The energized
transponder transmits a signal that contains its unique value, which is received by the body control module
(BCM). The BCM then compares this value to a value stored in memory. If the value is not correct, the BCM
disables engine start.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle is ON or in Service Mode.
• A valid transponder value has been read.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The transponder value is valid and matches the value stored in the BCM memory.
• The transponder calculation of the challenge from the BCM does not match the BCM calculation.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
• The security indicator will illuminate. The driver information center will display a service message.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will be cleared when a valid transponder value has been read and authenticated.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free power mode cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
• Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Replace the suspected inoperative or malfunctioning key.
2. Verify DTC B3935 is not set as current.
Replace the K9 Body Control Module.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for body control module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B3976: UNCONFIGURED TRANSPONDER
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Unconfigured Transponder
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When a vehicle key is inserted into the key slot and the vehicle on/off switch is pressed, the transponder
embedded in the head of the key is energized by the exciter coils surrounding the key slot. The energized
transponder transmits a signal that contains its unique value, which is received by the body control module
(BCM). The BCM then compares this value to a value stored in memory. If the value is not correct, the BCM
disables engine start.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle is ON or in Service Mode.
• The BCM is in the learn coded key state.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The BCM has determined the current key is not configured as a proper vehicle key.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. A service message will be displayed
in the driver information center.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will be cleared when the BCM detects a properly configured vehicle key.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free power mode cycles or when a scan tool is used
to clear DTCs.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the engine starts with each available key.
• If the engine does not start with a key
Replace the key.
2. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B3978-B3982: INCORRECT ENVIRONMENTAL IDENTIFIER RECEIVED
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From HVAC Control Module
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Instrument Cluster
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Electronic Brake Control Module
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When certain modules are programmed and configured during installation, the module learns a specific
environment identifier which is unique to the vehicle. The environment identifier is used to prevent the
swapping of control modules between vehicles. The body control module (BCM) is the keeper of the
environment identifier. The instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control module,
inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic Module, and telematics communication interface control module each
learn the environment identifier during their configuration process. During vehicle operation, the BCM sends
the immobilizer identifier as a challenge and each module responds to the challenge by sending the environment
identifier back to the BCM. If the BCM sends an incorrect immobilizer identifier or a specific number of
incorrect environment identifiers are received, vehicle starting is disabled.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition is in the ACCESSORY or RUN position.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
An incorrect environment identifier was received by the BCM.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
A current DTC will be cleared when the module learns a correct environment identifier and it is received by the
BCM.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Perform the Programming and Setup procedure for the control module that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set after programming.
• If the DTC sets after programming
Replace the control module that set the DTC.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control
module, inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic Module, or telematics communication interface control
module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B3984: DEVICE 1 ENVIRONMENT IDENTIFIER NOT PROGRAMMABLE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Device 1 Environment Identifier Not Programmable
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When certain modules are programmed and configured during installation, the module learns a specific
environment identifier which is unique to the vehicle. The environment identifier is used to prevent the
swapping modules between vehicles. The body control module (BCM) is the keeper of the environment
identifier. The instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control module, inflatable restraint
sensing and diagnostic module, engine control module (ECM), and steering column lock module (if equipped)
each learn the environment identifier during their configuration process. During vehicle operation, the BCM
sends the immobilizer identifier as a challenge and each module responds to the challenge by sending the
environment identifier back to the BCM. If the BCM sends an incorrect immobilizer identifier or a specific
number of incorrect environment identifiers are received, vehicle starting is disabled.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition is in the ACCESSORY or RUN position.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
An incorrect environment identifier is programmed or no environment identifier is programmed.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
A current DTC will be cleared when the module learns a correct environment identifier.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Perform the Programming and Setup procedure for the control module that set DTC B3984.
2. Verify DTC B3984 does not set after programming.
• If the DTC sets after programming
Replace the control module that set the DTC.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control
module, inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module, engine control module, and steering column lock
module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P0513: IMMOBILIZER KEY INCORRECT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Immobilizer Key Incorrect
Circuit/System Description
The body control module (BCM) sends the pre - release information to the hybrid/EV powertrain control
module 1 via the serial data circuit. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 then sends a challenge to the
BCM. Both the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and BCM perform a calculation on this challenge. The
engine control module (ECM) also monitors this challenge and calculates it's own result. If the calculated
response from the BCM equals the calculation performed by the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and
ECM, the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and ECM will allow vehicle propulsion.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Vehicle is ON or in Service Mode.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The calculated response from the BCM does not equal the calculation performed by the hybrid/EV powertrain
control module 1.
The calculated response from the BCM does not equal the calculation performed by the ECM.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• Vehicle propulsion will be disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC P0513 will be cleared when a valid calculation is received.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 40 malfunction-free power mode cycles or when a scan tool is used to
clear DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
The key referenced in the DTC descriptor does not refer to the vehicle key. In this case, key is referring to the
challenge response.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Immobilizer Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify there are no immobilizer DTCs set in the K9 Body Control Module.
• If any immobilizer DTCs are set in the K9 Body Control Module
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If no immobilizer DTCs are set in the K9 Body Control Module
2. Perform the K9 Body Control Module immobilizer learn using the Body Control Module IMMO
Function with Existing Transponder or Remote Key in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer System Component
Programming.
3. Verify the K9 Body Control Module successfully completes the learn procedure and DTC P0513 is not
set.
• If the K9 Body Control Module does not successfully learn or DTC P0513 is set
Perform the appropriate immobilizer learn using the IMMO Learn in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer
System Component Programming.
• If the K9 Body Control Module successfully completes the learn and DTC P0513 is not set
4. All OK
DTC P0633: IMMOBILIZER KEY NOT PROGRAMMED
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0633
Immobilizer Key Not Programmed
Circuit/System Description
When learning the immobilizer data, as well as the challenge and response sequence, the engine control module
(ECM) is placed in learn mode. DTC P0633 will set automatically as an indicator that the system is in learn
mode and not as a fault indicator. Once the immobilizer data and challenge/response are learned, learn mode
will be exited when the engine is successfully started. If the ECM does not exit learn mode, DTC P0633 will
remain current and indicate a fault.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The ECM is in learn mode.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
DTC P0633 will set any time the ECM enters learn mode.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will be cleared upon a successful engine start after exit of learn mode.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: DTC P0633 will clear upon a successful engine start. Any malfunction that will
cause a no-start condition will prevent DTC P0633 from clearing. Prior to
diagnosing DTC P0633, ensure that all power moding and engine control
systems are operating properly and all conditions that may cause a no-start
have been corrected. Do not replace the K20 Engine Control Module. Replacing
the K20 Engine Control Module will not correct the no-start condition.
1. Verify there are no immobilizer DTCs set in the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Perform the K20 Engine Control Module immobilizer learn using the engine control module IMMO
Learn in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer System Component Programming.
3. Verify the engine starts after the K20 Engine Control Module completes the learn procedure.
An undiagnosed no-start condition exists. Refer to the appropriate subsection and diagnostic to
correct the no-start condition.
4. All OK.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Remote Vehicle Speed Limiting Signal Message Counter Incorrect
Circuit/System Description
When a remote slow-down request is sent from OnStar, the vehicle communication interface control module
sends a serial data message to the engine control module (ECM) indicating that reduced vehicle speed has been
requested. Once the request is active, the ECM begins reducing engine torque to match the requested vehicle
speed and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• The engine run time is greater than 5 s
• A remote slow-down request is sent from OnStar
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The VIN embedded in the slow-down request does not match the VIN stored in the ECM.
• The rolling code counter embedded in the slow-down request does not increment for ten consecutive
messages.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• ECM ignores all reduced vehicle speed request messages from the vehicle communication interface
module.
• The ECM stores DTC P162B in history.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear after 40 malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the vehicle is equipped with OnStar (RPO UE1) and DTC P162B is set
• If the vehicle is not equipped with OnStar (RPO UE1) and DTC P162B is set
Replace the ECM.
2. Perform the Remote Vehicle Speed Limiting Reset procedure with the scan tool.
3. Verify DTC P162B is not set.
1. Reprogram the ECM. Refer to Control Module References .
2. Verify the DTC does not set while operating the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the
DTC.
• If the DTC sets, replace the ECM. If the DTC continues to set after ECM replacement,
replace the vehicle communication interface module.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module or engine control
module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P1631: IMMOBILIZER FUEL ENABLE SIGNAL NOT CORRECT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Immobilizer Fuel Enable Signal Not Correct
Circuit/System Description
The body control module (BCM) sends the pre - release information to the hybrid/EV powertrain control
module 1 via the serial data circuit. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 then sends a challenge to the
BCM. Both the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and BCM perform a calculation on this challenge. The
engine control module (ECM) also monitors this challenge and calculates it's own result. If the calculated
response from the BCM equals the calculation performed by the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and
ECM, the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and ECM will allow vehicle propulsion.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Vehicle is ON or in Service Mode.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 receives incorrect immobilizer data from the BCM.
The ECM receives incorrect immobilizer data from the BCM.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC P1631 will be cleared when correct immobilizer data is received.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 40 malfunction-free power mode cycles or when a scan tool is used to
clear DTCs.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify there are no immobilizer DTCs set in the K9 Body Control Module.
• If any immobilizer DTCs are set in the K9 Body Control Module
2. Perform the K9 Body Control Module immobilizer learn using the Body Control Module IMMO
Function with Existing Transponder or Remote Key in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer System Component
Programming.
3. Verify the K9 Body Control Module successfully completes the learn procedure and DTC P1631 is not
set.
Perform the appropriate immobilizer learn using the IMMO Learn in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer
System Component Programming.
4. All OK
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Immobilizer Security Code Not Programmed
Circuit/System Description
When learning the security code, as well as the challenge and response sequence, the engine control module
(ECM) is placed in learn mode. Once the security code and challenge/response are learned, learn mode will be
exited when the engine is successfully started.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The ECM is in learn mode.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM has not learned a security code.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC will be cleared upon a successful engine start after exit of learn mode.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify there are no immobilizer DTCs set in the K9 Body Control Module.
• If any immobilizer DTCs are set in the K9 Body Control Module
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If no immobilizer DTCs are set in the K9 Body Control Module
2. Perform the K20 Engine Control Module immobilizer learn using the engine control module IMMO
Learn in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer System Component Programming.
3. Verify the engine starts after the K20 Engine Control Module completes the learn procedure.
• If the engine does not start
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for engine control module replacement, programming, and setup.
IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables.
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that
all of the following are true:
• There are no DTCs set.
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data links.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to
Immobilizer Description and Operation.
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. Refer to Checking
Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .
Symptom List
Refer to OnStar Stolen Vehicle Slowdown Active to diagnose the symptom.
ONSTAR STOLEN VEHICLE SLOWDOWN ACTIVE
Diagnostic Instructions
NOTE: This procedure is not used in Brazil.
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
When a remote slow-down request is sent from OnStar, the Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module sends a serial data message to the engine control module (ECM) indicating that reduced vehicle speed
has been requested. Once the request is active, the ECM begins reducing engine torque to match requested
vehicle speed and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
OnStar/Telematics Schematics
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the vehicle is not in the OnStar initiated Stolen Vehicle Slowdown mode. This can be
accomplished by verifying the scan tool Telematics Enhanced Service Immobilization parameter is No.
• If the scan tool Telematics Enhanced Service Immobilization parameter is Yes
1. Perform the Remote Vehicle Speed Limiting Reset procedure with the scan tool.
2. Press the blue OnStar button and inform the advisor that you need to be transferred to the stolen
vehicle team to update the vehicle account.
• If the scan tool BCM Telematics Enhanced Service Immobilization parameter is No
2. All OK.
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
THEFT DETERRENT MODULE REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 2: Theft Deterrent Module |
|
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY | ||||||||
| ||||||||
This procedure will learn the immobilizer function. If the battery voltage is low, charge the battery before
proceeding with the learn. If the body control module (BCM), power inverter module (PIM), or engine control
module (ECM) have been replaced, they must be programmed before performing this learn procedure.
Depending on the immobilizer function being learned or the component replaced, different learn functions are
required to be performed. These learn functions are as follows:
|
Function name on SPS |
Function description: |
When the function |
Notes: |
|
Body Control Module |
The BCM will relearn the |
The BCM has been |
- |
|
Body Control Module |
The BCM will relearn the |
The BCM has been |
- |
|
Engine Control Module |
The ECM and PIM will |
The ECM or PIM has |
- |
|
Engine Control Module, |
The ECM, PIM, and BCM |
The ECM, PIM, and |
Because both the ECM |
|
Program Transponder or |
A new vehicle key will |
A new vehicle key is |
This function may not be |
|
Program Transponder or |
All existing vehicle keys |
All vehicle keys are |
This procedure may be |
1. Connect a scan tool to the vehicle and access SPS.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode, engine OFF.
3. Ensure that all power consuming devices are turned OFF on the vehicle.
4. Select SPS application and follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Select Reprogram ECU.
6. Select IMMO Immobilizer Learn - Setup.
7. Select the appropriate programming function based on the component that was replaced or is being
programmed. Refer to the table at the top of this document for assistance in choosing the correct
programming function.
NOTE:
• At multiple times during the learn procedure, SPS will instruct you to
turn the vehicle to Service Mode. Make sure the vehicle is actually in
the Service Mode before continuing on the SPS terminal. If the
vehicle is not in the Service Mode, the learn procedure will fail.
• The transmitter slot is located in the bottom of the center console
storage compartment. The rubber mat lining the bottom of the
compartment needs to be removed to access the slot.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions.
NOTE:
If the programming does not complete or hangs during the programming
operation, refer to Unable to Complete Programming below.
9. After programming all keys "Programming Complete" is displayed.
10. Press and hold the vehicle ON/OFF switch for 15 s.
11. Press the lock and unlock button on each transmitter that was programmed. This will awaken each
transmitter and allow passive and active keyless entry functions to be established.
12. With a scan tool, clear any DTCs.
13. Verify each key is operating properly. Operate each of the keyless entry functions using the buttons on the
transmitter and then start the vehicle. When verifying operation, make sure that no other keys are near the
vehicle.
Unable to Complete Programming
When attempting to program immobilizer components, various conditions may prevent the programming
operation from completing. These conditions may be caused by normal system operation, a system malfunction,
or an external influence. Common symptoms of a incomplete programming is receiving an error message during
the attempt or having the SPS application become unresponsive.
• DTCs are set in the body control module (BCM)
The immobilizer system is a function of the BCM software. If immobilizer DTCs are set in the BCM,
such as DTC B2955, a fault has been identified in the immobilizer system. If this is not corrected before
attempting to program components, the programming may not complete. Correct all immobilizer DTCs
before attempting to program any immobilizer components.
• The key has been programmed to another vehicle or is not the correct type for the vehicle
A key can only be programmed to a single vehicle. Once a key is programming to a vehicle, it is paired
for the life of the key. The key can be learned to the same vehicle again and again, but it is not able to be
programmed to a different vehicle.
Many vehicle are available with both a base keyless entry system and an optional passive entry system.
These keys typically look identical but cannot be substituted for one another. To verify the key is correct,
compare the part number that is etched on the key to the part number identified in the parts catalog. The
key should be correct for the system installed in the vehicle.
• The theft deterrent module is not properly secured or the key is not properly positioned in the pocket/slot.
A theft deterrent module that is not fully seated or is otherwise not properly secured may prevent a
coupling between the transponder located in the key and the theft deterrent module. Being out of place by
as little as 1 mm may prevent programming from completing. Make sure the theft deterrent module is
properly installed and fully seated in it's clip.
The key shank must be fully extended so that the entire key shank fits into the programming slot.
To determine if the theft deterrent module is properly secured, remove the battery from the key and place
the key into the pocket/slot. Attempt to change the vehicle mode by pressing the vehicle ON/OFF switch.
The vehicle should change modes. If the NO REMOTE DETECTED message is displayed on the DIC,
the theft deterrent module may not be properly secured.
• External interference is interrupting the programming operation
External RF interference and EMI may interrupt the low frequency coupling between the key and theft
deterrent module. This interference may come from many different locations. Devices plugged into the
vehicle power outlets such as cell phone chargers, laptop computers, GPS devices, etc. may cause
interference. Vehicle location may also cause interference. Locations near airports and military
installations may causer interference. Remove all customer installed devices and, if necessary, move the
vehicle if interference is suspected.
Keys can be programming in various ways using the procedures outlined below. Using the Replacing Keys
procedures will first erase all the known keys from the vehicle. Any existing keys and any new keys will then
be programmed. This procedure should be used any time a key is required to be unlearned or erased from a
vehicle. If a new key is being learned to a vehicle to replace a damaged, inoperative, or stolen key, the
Replacing Keys procedure must be used. This ensures that the old key cannot be used to access or start the
vehicle after programming.
The Adding Keys procedure does not erase any keys prior to programming. The procedure will simply program
the key into the next available slot. The Adding Keys procedure should only be used when adding an additional
key to the vehicle. The Adding Keys procedure should never be used to program a key to a vehicle that is
having a key replaced, regardless of the cause for the replacement.
|
Replacing Keys (Without SPS) | ||
|
additional key only partially learned as it must remain in the key pocket
during the procedure.
• This procedure will only learn the vehicle key information. This procedure
will not learn any immobilizer information between the body control
module (BCM) and engine control module (ECM).
• This procedure may be used with or without existing learned keys being
present. If existing keys are present, keep the keys away from the vicinity
of the vehicle. Failure to keep learned keys away from the vehicle will
result in the learn changing to the Adding Keys procedure.
• The keys to be learned must duplicate the mechanical cut of the current
key.
1. Insert the mechanical key of the new key into the key lock cylinder located on the outside of the driver
door and turn the key to the unlock position five times within ten seconds. The Driver Information Center
(DIC) will display Remote Learn Pending, Please Wait.
2. After ten minutes, the DIC will display Press Engine Start Button To Learn. Press the vehicle ON/OFF
switch. The DIC will again display Remote Learn Pending, Please Wait.
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional times, for a total of thirty minutes. All previously known keys have now
been unlearned. Remaining keys can be relearned during the next steps. The DIC display will now display
Ready For Remote # 1.
NOTE:
The key slot is located on the bottom of the center console storage
compartment. The rubber mat lining the bottom of the compartment needs
to be removed to access the slot.
4. Remove the rubber mat in the instrument panel storage compartment. Extend the key blade on the new
key and insert the key into the key slot.
NOTE:
If the programming does not complete or hangs during the programming
operation, refer to Unable to Complete Programming below.
5. Press the vehicle ON/OFF switch. When the key is learned the DIC will indicate that it is ready to
program the next key.
6. Remove the key from the key pocket and press the unlock button. To program additional keys, repeat
Steps 4 through 6.
7. When all additional keys are programmed, press and hold the vehicle ON/OFF switch for 5 seconds to
exit programming mode.
Replacing Keys (With SPS)
NOTE:
• This procedure will unlearn all previously learned keys. All keys that are to
be programmed must be with the vehicle.
• This procedure may be used with or without existing learned keys being
present.
• A total of seven keys maybe be learned to a single vehicle with one
additional key only partially learned as it must remain in the key pocket
during the procedure.
• This procedure will only learn the vehicle key information. This procedure
will not learn any immobilizer information between the body control
module (BCM) and engine control module (ECM).
• If the battery voltage is low, charge the battery before continuing with the
procedure.
1. Connect a scan tool to the vehicle and access SPS.
2. Ensure that all power consuming devices are turned OFF on the vehicle.
3. Select the SPS application and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Select Reprogram ECU.
5. Select IMMO Immobilizer Learn - Setup.
6. Select the Program Transponder or Remote Key (Delete) function.
| ||
|
7. Follow the on-screen instructions. |
NOTE: If the programming does not complete or hangs during the programming
operation, refer to Unable to Complete Programming below.
8. After programming all keys, Programming Complete, is displayed.
9. Press and hold the vehicle ON/OFF switch for 15 seconds.
10. Press the lock and unlock button on each key that was programmed. This will awaken each key and allow
passive and active keyless entry functions to be established.
11. With a scan tool, clear any DTCs.
12. Verify each key is operating properly. Operate each of the keyless entry functions using the buttons on the
key and then start the vehicle. When verifying operation, make sure that no other keys are near the
vehicle.
Adding Keys (Without SPS)
NOTE:
• To initiate, this procedure requires that 2 learned keys be available.
• A total of seven keys maybe be learned to a single vehicle with one
additional key only partially learned as it must remain in the key pocket
during the procedure.
• This procedure adds keys only. The procedure does not erase previously
learned keys.
• The keys to be learned must duplicate the mechanical cut of the current
key.
1. Place the recognized keys in the vehicle cupholder.
2. Insert the mechanical key of the new key into the key lock cylinder located on the outside of the driver
door and turn the key to the unlock position five times within ten seconds. The Driver Information Center
(DIC) will display Ready For Remote #2, 3, 4 or 5.
NOTE:
The key slot is located on the bottom of the center console storage
compartment. The rubber mat lining the bottom of the compartment needs
to be removed to access the slot.
3. Remove the rubber mat in the instrument panel storage compartment. Extend the key blade on the new
key and insert the key into the key slot.
NOTE:
If the programming does not complete or hangs during the programming
operation, refer to Unable to Complete Programming below.
4. Press and hold the vehicle ON/OFF switch for two seconds. When the key is programmed, the DIC will
show that it is ready to program the next key.
5. Remove the key from the slot and press the unlock button. To program additional keys, repeat Steps 3
through 5.
6. When all additional keys are programmed, press and hold the vehicle ON/OFF switch for 10 seconds to
exit programming mode.
Adding Keys (With SPS)
NOTE:
• This procedure may be used with or without existing learned keys being
present.
• A total of seven keys maybe be learned to a single vehicle with one
additional key only partially learned as it must remain in the key pocket
during the procedure.
• This procedure will only learn the vehicle key information. This procedure
will not learn any immobilizer information between the body control
module (BCM) and engine control module (ECM).
• If the battery voltage is low, charge the battery before continuing with the
procedure.
1. Connect a scan tool to the vehicle and access SPS.
2. Ensure that all power consuming devices are turned OFF on the vehicle.
3. Select the SPS application and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Select Reprogram ECU.
5. Select IMMO Immobilizer Learn - Setup.
|
NOTE: |
|
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: If the programming does not complete or hangs during the programming
operation, refer to Unable to Complete Programming below.
8. After programming all keys, Programming Complete, is displayed.
9. Press and hold the vehicle ON/OFF switch for 15 seconds.
10. Press the lock and unlock button on each key that was programmed. This will awaken each key and allow
passive and active keyless entry functions to be established.
11. With a scan tool, clear any DTCs.
12. Verify each key is operating properly. Operate each of the keyless entry functions using the buttons on the
key and then start the vehicle. When verifying operation, make sure that no other keys are near the
vehicle.
Unable to Complete Programming
When attempting to program immobilizer components, various conditions may prevent the programming
operation from completing. These conditions may be caused by normal system operation, a system malfunction,
or an external influence. Common symptoms of a incomplete programming is receiving an error message during
the attempt or having the SPS application become unresponsive.
• DTCs are set in the body control module (BCM)
The immobilizer system is a function of the BCM software. If immobilizer DTCs are set in the BCM,
such as DTC B2955, a fault has been identified in the immobilizer system. If this is not corrected before
attempting to program components, the programming may not complete. Correct all immobilizer DTCs
before attempting to program any immobilizer components.
• The key has been programmed to another vehicle or is not the correct type for the vehicle
A key can only be programmed to a single vehicle. Once a key is programming to a vehicle, it is paired
for the life of the key. The key can be learned to the same vehicle again and again, but it is not able to be
programmed to a different vehicle.
Many vehicle are available with both a base keyless entry system and an optional passive entry system.
These keys typically look identical but cannot be substituted for one another. To verify the key is correct,
compare the part number that is etched on the key to the part number identified in the parts catalog. The
key should be correct for the system installed in the vehicle.
• The theft deterrent module is not properly secured or the key is not properly positioned in the pocket/slot.
A theft deterrent module that is not fully seated or is otherwise not properly secured may prevent a
coupling between the transponder located in the key and the theft deterrent module. Being out of place by
as little as 1 mm may prevent programming from completing. Make sure the theft deterrent module is
properly installed and fully seated in it's clip.
The key shank must be fully extended so that the entire key shank fits into the programming slot.
To determine if the theft deterrent module is properly secured, remove the battery from the key and place
the key into the pocket/slot. Attempt to change the vehicle mode by pressing the vehicle ON/OFF switch.
The vehicle should change modes. If the NO REMOTE DETECTED message is displayed on the DIC,
the theft deterrent module may not be properly secured.
• External interference is interrupting the programming operation
External RF interference and EMI may interrupt the low frequency coupling between the key and theft
deterrent module. This interference may come from many different locations. Devices plugged into the
vehicle power outlets such as cell phone chargers, laptop computers, GPS devices, etc. may cause
interference. Vehicle location may also cause interference. Locations near airports and military
installations may causer interference. Remove all customer installed devices and, if necessary, move the
vehicle if interference is suspected.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
IMMOBILIZER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
|
1 К84 |
 |
1 P16
| Instrument
1 Cluster
1 К20
■ Engine
Control
I Module
1 K77
■ Remote
Control
I Door Lock
■ Receiver
1 K89
■ Immobilizer
Control
I Module
The immobilizer system functions are provided by the keyless entry control module, remote control door lock
receiver, body control module (BCM), hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1, and engine control module
(ECM), as well as any modules which store and report the environment identifier. The keyless start system use
low frequency antennas in three different locations on the vehicle to determine the location of the transmitter.
Multiple antenna are used to ensure complete coverage of the vehicle interior and rear compartment.
When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is pressed, the low frequency antennas emit a challenge to the keyless entry
transmitter. The transmitter receives this challenge and emits it's response as an RF message. The transmitter
transmits a signal that contains its unique value, which is received by the BCM through the remote control door
lock receiver. The BCM then compares this value to a value stored in memory. The BCM also monitors various
modules to determine if the stored environment identifiers match.
If both the environment identifier and the value received from the transponder match, the BCM will send the
prerelease password via serial data to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. If the encrypted code's
unique value is incorrect or the environment identifier does not match, the BCM will send the fuel disable
message to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1.
When the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 receives the BCM prerelease password, the hybrid/EV
powertrain control module 1 will challenge the password. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 sends
this challenge to the BCM via serial data. Both the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and BCM perform a
calculation on this challenge. Additionally, the ECM will also monitor this challenge and calculate it's own
response. If the BCM calculated response to the challenge equals the calculation performed by the hybrid/EV
powertrain control module 1 and ECM, the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and ECM will allow vehicle
propulsion.
If RF communication is interrupted, a "No Remote Detected" message will be displayed on the DIC. In these
cases, the extended transmitter key blade can be placed in the transmitter slot located in the upper instrument
panel storage compartment, under the rubber mat. The immobilizer antenna coil is located directly beneath the
transmitter slot. Placing the transmitter in the pocket will create a low powered coupling between the transmitter
and immobilizer antenna, allowing communications to occur and enabling vehicle starting.
The components of the theft system are as follows:
• BCM
• Hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1
• ECM
• Immobilizer antenna
• Ignition key or keyless entry transmitter
• Security indicator
• Various modules which store and report the environment identifier
Body Control Module (BCM)
The immobilizer system is an integral part of the BCM and is controlled internally within the BCM. The BCM
can learn up to 8 keys (transponder values).
The BCM uses the following inputs:
• Environment identifier exchange with various modules
• Encrypted code from the vehicle key, received by the immobilizer antenna
The BCM uses the following outputs:
• Prerelease password communication with ECM
• Challenge/response with ECM
When the vehicle ON/OFF switch is pressed, the low frequency antennas emit a challenge to the keyless entry
transmitter. The transmitter receives this challenge and emits it's response as an RF message. The transmitter
transmits a signal that contains its unique value, which is received by the BCM through the remote control door
lock receiver. The BCM then compares this value to a value stored in memory. The BCM then performs one of
the following functions:
• If the encrypted code value matches the values stored in the BCM memory, the BCM will send the
prerelease password to the ECM via serial data.
• If the encrypted code unique value does not match the value stored in the BCM, the BCM will send the
start disable message to the ECM via serial data.
• If the BCM is unable to measure the ignition key encrypted code value, the BCM will not send any
messages to the ECM.
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1
When the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 receives the BCM prerelease password, the hybrid/EV
powertrain control module 1 will challenge the password. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 sends
this challenge to the BCM via the serial data circuit. Both the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and BCM
perform a calculation on this challenge. If the calculated response from the BCM equals the calculation
performed by the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1, the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 will
allow vehicle propulsion.
The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 will disable vehicle propulsion if any of the following
immobilization conditions occur:
• The prerelease password is invalid.
• The start disable password is sent by the BCM.
• No passwords are received. There is no communication with the BCM.
• The BCM calculated response to the challenge does not equal the calculation performed by the hybrid/EV
powertrain control module 1.
Engine Control Module (ECM)
The ECM functions in the immobilizer system as a type of slave device. It does not general the password
challenge, but it does monitor the challenge and response messages between the BCM and hybrid/EV
powertrain control module 1. The ECM will calculate it's own result to the challenge. If the ECM response does
not equal the BCM response, the ECM may also disable vehicle propulsion. To allow vehicle propulsion, the
response from the BCM, ECM, and hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 must all match.
The ECM will disable vehicle propulsion if any of the following immobilization conditions occur:
• The start disable password is sent by the BCM.
• No passwords are received. There is no communication with the BCM or hybrid/EV powertrain control
module 1.
• The BCM calculated response to the challenge does not equal the calculation performed by the ECM.
Immobilizer Antenna
The immobilizer antenna contains an immobilizer coil. The coil passively powers the transponder located in the
ignition key when the key is in the transmitter slot. When powered, the key transmits its unique value to the
immobilizer antenna, which is then relayed to the BCM via a LIN serial data circuit. The immobilizer antenna
also receives B+ and ground from the BCM.
The immobilizer antenna is used to:
1. Learn keys
2. To start vehicle with or without RF interference
3. To start vehicle when key battery is dead
Keyless Entry Transmitter
Each keyless entry transmitter contains a transponder with a unique encrypted value. The transponder's
encrypted value is fixed and unable to be changed. The immobilizer system uses the transponder value to
determine if a valid transmitter is being used to start the vehicle.
Environment Identifier
Various modules throughout the vehicle learn a specific environment identifier during the module programming
process. The environment identifier is learned by each individual module and matches the environment
identifier stored in the BCM. Prior to starting after a battery disconnect, each of the modules which store a
environment identifier will compare their identifier to that of the identifier stored in the BCM. If all the
identifiers match, the engine starting process will continue. If the environment identifiers do not match, engine
starting will be disabled.
Security Indicator
The BCM will command the instrument panel cluster to illuminate the security indicator when the vehicle is in
Service Mode to indicate a fault has occurred within the immobilizer system and when the engine starting is
disabled.
Certain vehicles equipped with OnStarA® now have an additional feature that allows for remote limiting of the
vehicle's speed. This OnStarA® feature is called Stolen Vehicle Slow-Down and is now part of the OnStarA®
Stolen Vehicle Assistance service. This feature, when used in conjunction with local law enforcement and strict
guidelines at the OnStarA® Call Center, will slow the vehicle by interacting with the engine control system.
When the engine control system receives a valid request from the OnStarA® telematics communications
interface module, it will enter into a reduced engine power/vehicle speed limiting mode, which will decelerate
the vehicle. Once the request is active the engine control module begins reducing engine torque to match
requested vehicle speed and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER indication is displayed. No DTCs will be set
during this process.
Article GUID: A00884720
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS
FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS
|
Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
NOTE: All fasteners | |
|
Application |
Specification |
|
Metric (English) | |
|
Wiring Harness Ground Nut |
2.5 N.m (22 lb in) |
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER TRIM PANEL INSULATOR REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 1: Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator |
Callout
Component Name
WARNING:
Refer to SIR
Warning .
Preliminary Procedure SIR Disabling and Enabling
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Bolt
| ||||||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH TRIM PLATE REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 2: Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Replacement | |
|
1 |
Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate Bolt (Qty: 2) CAUTION: Refer to Caution . |
| ||||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL EXTENSION REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 3: Instrument Panel Extension Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Windshield Garnish Molding Replacement | |
|
1 |
Instrument Panel Extension Procedure
|
| ||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL KNEE BOLSTER REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 4: Instrument Panel Compartment Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure
| |
|
1 |
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Bolt (Qty: 3) CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) |
| ||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL TRIM PLATE APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE |
Removal Procedure
 |
|
Fig. 5: Instrument Panel Compartment Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
1. Remove Instrument Panel Compartment (2)Instrument Panel Compartment Replacement
 |
|
Fig. 6: Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet |
2. Depress the three tabs on the instrument panel outer air outlet (1) from behind the instrument panel to
properly release the outlet.
3. Remove Instrument Panel Bolt (1)
4. Remove Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique - Right Side (2)
5. Use a flat bladed plastic tool to remove.
 |
|
Fig. 8: Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet |
6. Release the plastic retaining tabs to separate the instrument panel outer air outlet (1) from the instrument
panel trim plate applique (2).
7. Transfer components as necessary.
Installation Procedure
 |
|
Fig. 9: Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
1. Install the instrument panel outer air outlet (1) to the instrument panel trim plate applique (2).
Fig. 10: Instrument Panel Bolt
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
2. Install Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique - Right Side (2)
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution .
3. Install Instrument Panel Bolt (1) and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
 |
|
Fig. 11: Instrument Panel Compartment Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
4. Install Instrument Panel Compartment (2) Instrument Panel Compartment Replacement
INSTRUMENT PANEL TRIM PLATE APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE
Removal Procedure
 |
|
Fig. 12: Instrument Panel Compartment Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
1. Remove Instrument Panel Knee Bolster (2)Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Replacement
 |
|
Fig. 13: Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate |
2. Remove Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate (2)Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate Replacement
 |
|
Fig. 14: Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet |
3. Depress the three tabs on the instrument panel outer air outlet (1) from behind the instrument panel to
properly release the outlet.
4. Remove Instrument Panel Bolt (1)
5. Remove Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet - Left Side (2)
6. Use a flat bladed plastic tool to remove.
 |
|
Fig. 16: Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet |
7. Release the plastic retaining tabs to separate the instrument panel outer air outlet (1) from the instrument
panel trim plate applique (2).
8. Transfer components as necessary.
Installation Procedure
 |
|
Fig. 17: Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
1. Install the instrument panel outer air outlet (1) to the instrument panel trim plate applique (2).
 |
|
Fig. 18: Instrument Panel Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
2. Install Instrument Panel Outer Air Outlet - Left Side (2)
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution .
3. Install Instrument Panel Bolt (1) and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
 |
|
Fig. 19: Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate |
4. Install Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate (2) Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate Replacement
Fig. 20: Instrument Panel Compartment
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
5. Install Instrument Panel Knee Bolster (2)Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Replacement
FORWARD COLLISION ALERT DISPLAY BEZEL REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 21: Forward Collision Alert Display Bezel |
| ||||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BLOCK ACCESS HOLE COVER REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 22: Instrument Panel Fuse Block Access Hole Cover |
| ||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER TRIM PLATE REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 23: Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate |
Callout Component Name
NOTE:
The
instrument
panel cluster
trim plate
and the
steering
column
upper trim
cover must
be removed
as an
assembly,
do not
attempt to
separate.
Preliminary Procedure
1. SIR Disabling and Enabling
2. Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique Replacement - Left Side
3. Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Replacement
INSTRUMENT PANEL OUTER TRIM COVER REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 24: Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover |
| ||||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT (UPPER) |
 |
|
Fig. 25: Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel (Upper) |
| ||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT (LOWER) |
 |
|
Fig. 26: Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel |
| ||||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPARTMENT REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 27: Instrument Panel Compartment Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
| ||||||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPARTMENT DOOR DAMPENER REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 28: Instrument Panel Compartment Door Dampener |
| ||||||
|
INSTRUMENT PANEL AIRBAG LOWER BRACKET REPLACEMENT (PASSENGER SIDE) | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 29: Instrument Panel Airbag Lower Bracket (Passenger Side) |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure
| |
|
1 |
Instrument Panel Lower Airbag Nut (Qty: 2) CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Tighten 9 N.m (80 lb in) |
|
2 |
Instrument Panel Airbag Lower Bracket |
INSTRUMENT PANEL AIRBAG LOWER BRACKET REPLACEMENT (DRIVER SIDE)
Removal Procedure
WARNING: Refer to SIR Inflator Module Handling and Storage Warning .
WARNING: Refer to SIR Warning .
1. Disable the SIR system. SIR Disabling and Enabling
 |
|
Fig. 30: Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Bolt |
2. Remove Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Bolt (1)
3. Remove Instrument Panel Lower Airbag Nut (2)
 |
|
Fig. 31: Instrument Panel Lower Airbag - Driver Side |
NOTE: The bracket may disassembly with the airbag.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Remove Instrument Panel Lower Airbag - Driver Side (1)
 |
|
Fig. 32: Panel Airbag Lower Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
6. Remove Instrument Panel Airbag Lower Bracket (1)
Installation Procedure
 |
|
Fig. 33: Panel Airbag Lower Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
1. Install Instrument Panel Airbag Lower Bracket (1)
 |
|
Fig. 34: Instrument Panel Lower Airbag - Driver Side |
2. Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install Instrument Panel Lower Airbag - Driver Side (1)
 |
|
Fig. 35: Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Bolt |
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution .
4. Install Instrument Panel Lower Airbag Nut (2) and tighten 9 N.m (80 lb in)
5. Install Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Bolt (1) and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
6. Enable the SIR System. SIR Disabling and Enabling
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1. Disable the SIR system. SIR Disabling and Enabling
 |
|
Fig. 36: Steering Column Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
2. Remove Steering Column Replacement (1)
 |
|
Fig. 37: Front Floor Console Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
3. Remove Front Floor Console Replacement(3)
 |
|
Fig. 38: Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel |
4. Remove Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel Replacement (Upper)Instrument Panel Lower
Center Trim Panel Replacement (Lower)(1)
Fig. 39: Instrument Cluster
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
5. Remove Instrument Cluster Replacement (2)
 |
|
Fig. 40: Radio Front Speaker Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
6. Remove Radio Front Speaker Replacement (2)
 |
|
Fig. 41: Radio Front Center Speaker Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
7. Remove Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement (2)
Fig. 42: Human Machine Interface Control Module
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
8. Remove Human Machine Interface Control Module Replacement (1)
 |
|
Fig. 43: Heater and Air Conditioning Remote Control |
9. Remove Heater and Air Conditioning Remote Control Replacement (1)
 |
|
Fig. 44: Forward Collision Alert Display Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
10. Remove Forward Collision Alert Display Replacement (2)
Fig. 45: Instrument Panel Bolt
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
11. Remove Instrument Panel Bolt (1)
 |
|
Fig. 46: Instrument Panel Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
12. Remove Instrument Panel Bolt (1)
 |
|
Fig. 47: Instrument Panel Bolt |
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
13. Remove Instrument Panel Bolt (1)
14. Remove Instrument Panel Airbag Bolt (1)
15. Disconnect the electrical connector.
 |
|
Fig. 49: Instrument Panel Carrier Assembly |
16. Note the location and routing of the instrument panel wiring harness prior to removal to ensure proper
installation.
17. Disconnect the wiring harness from the instrument panel carrier.
18. With the aid of an assistant, remove the instrument panel carrier assembly from the vehicle.(1)
19. Transfer components as necessary.
Installation Procedure
 |
|
Fig. 50: Instrument Panel Carrier Assembly |
1. With the aid of an assistant, position the instrument carrier in the vehicle.(l)
2. Reposition the instrument panel wiring harness into the vehicle position as was noted in the removal and
connect the fasteners securing the instrument panel wiring harness to the instrument carrier.
 |
|
Fig. 51: Instrument Panel Airbag Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution .
3. Install Instrument Panel Airbag Bolt (1) and tighten 9 N.m (7 lb ft)
4. Connect the electrical connector.
 |
|
Fig. 52: Instrument Panel Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
5. Install Instrument Panel Bolt (1) and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
6. Install Instrument Panel Bolt (1) and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
 |
|
Fig. 54: Instrument Panel Bolt |
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
7. Install Instrument Panel Bolt (1) and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
 |
|
Fig. 55: Forward Collision Alert Display Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
8. Install Forward Collision Alert Display Replacement (2)
Fig. 56: Heater and Air Conditioning Remote Control
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
9. Install Heater and Air Conditioning Remote Control Replacement (1)
 |
|
Fig. 57: Human Machine Interface Control Module |
10. Install Human Machine Interface Control Module Replacement (1)
 |
|
Fig. 58: Radio Front Speaker Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
11. Install Radio Front Speaker Replacement (2)
Fig. 59: Radio Front Center Speaker
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
12. Install Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement (2)
 |
|
Fig. 60: Instrument Cluster |
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
13. Install Instrument Cluster Replacement (2)
 |
|
Fig. 61: Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel |
14. Install Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel Replacement (Upper)Instrument Panel Lower
Center Trim Panel Replacement (Lower) (1)
Fig. 62: Front Floor Console
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
15. Install Front Floor Console Replacement (3)
 |
|
Fig. 63: Steering Column Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
16. Install Steering Column Replacement (1)
17. Enable the SIR System. SIR Disabling and Enabling
INSTRUMENT PANEL TIE BAR REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1. Remove Instrument Panel Assembly Replacement
 |
|
Fig. 64: Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
2. Remove Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator Replacement (3)
Fig. 65: Instrument Panel Lower Airbag - Passenger Side
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
3. Remove Instrument Panel Lower Airbag Replacement - Passenger Side (2)
 |
|
Fig. 66: Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
4. Remove Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement (1)
 |
|
Fig. 67: Communication Interface Module Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
5. Remove Communication Interface Module Bracket Replacement (2)
Fig. 68: Front Side Door
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
6. Remove Front Side Door Replacement (4)
 |
|
Fig. 69: Windshield Wiper System Module |
7. Remove Windshield Wiper System Module Replacement (2)
 |
|
Fig. 70: Instrument Panel Upper Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
8. Remove Instrument Panel Upper Bolt (1)
9. Remove Body Hinge Pillar Outer Panel Hole Plug (1)
10. Remove Instrument Panel Bolt (2)
 |
|
Fig. 72: Body Hinge Pillar Outer Panel Hole Plug And Bolt |
11. Remove Body Hinge Pillar Outer Panel Hole Plug (1)
12. Remove Instrument Panel Bolt (2)
 |
|
Fig. 73: Data Link Connector And Bolt |
13. Remove Data Link Connector Bolt (1)
14. Reposition away Data Link Connector (2)
15. Use a suitable tool to release the Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block (1) from the Instrument
Panel Tie Bar and position out of the way.
 |
|
Fig. 75: Wiring Harness Ground Nut Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
16. Remove Wiring Harness Ground Nut (1)
 |
|
Fig. 76: Brake Pedal Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
17. Remove Brake Pedal Bolt (1)
Fig. 77: Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Nut
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
18. Remove Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Nut (1)
 |
|
Fig. 78: Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator Module Bolt |
19. Remove Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator Module Bolt (1)
 |
|
Fig. 79: Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace Bolt |
20. Remove Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace Bolt (1)
Fig. 80: Wiring Harness Ground Nut
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
21. Remove Wiring Harness Ground Nut (1)
 |
|
Fig. 81: Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Bolt |
22. Remove Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Bolt (1)
 |
|
Fig. 82: Instrument Panel Tie Bar Reinforcement Bolt |
23. Remove Instrument Panel Tie Bar Reinforcement Bolt (1)
24. Note the location and routing of the instrument panel wiring harness prior to removal to ensure proper
installation.
25. Support the HVAC module in order to prevent damage.
26. With the aid of an assistant, remove the instrument panel tie bar assembly from the vehicle.(2)
27. Transfer components as necessary.
Installation Procedure
1. With the aid of an assistant, position the instrument panel tie bar assembly into the vehicle.
2. Install the instrument panel wiring harness assembly to the position noted in the removal procedure.
 |
|
Fig. 83: Instrument Panel Tie Bar Reinforcement Bolt |
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution .
3. Install Instrument Panel Tie Bar (2)
4. Install Instrument Panel Tie Bar Reinforcement Bolt (1) and tighten 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
 |
|
Fig. 84: Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Bolt |
5. Install Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Bolt (1) and tighten 5 N.m (44 lb in)
 |
ii |
|
Fig. 86: Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace Bolt | |
7. Install Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace Bolt (1) and tighten 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
 |
|
Fig. 87: Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator Module Bolt |
8. Install Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator Module Bolt (1) and tighten 5 N.m (44 lb in)
9. Install Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Nut (1) and tighten 5 N.m (44 lb in)
 |
|
Fig. 89: Brake Pedal Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
10. Install Brake Pedal Bolt (1) and tighten 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
 |
|
Fig. 90: Wiring Harness Ground Nut Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
11. Install Wiring Harness Ground Nut (1) and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
12. Install the Instrument Panel Wiring Harness Junction Block (1) to the Instrument Panel Tie Bar.
 |
|
Fig. 92: Data Link Connector And Bolt |
13. Install Data Link Connector (2)
14. Install Data Link Connector Bolt (1) and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
 |
|
Fig. 93: Body Hinge Pillar Outer Panel Hole Plug And Bolt |
15. Install Instrument Panel Bolt (2) and tighten 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
16. Install Body Hinge Pillar Outer Panel Hole Plug (1)
17. Install Instrument Panel Bolt (2) and tighten 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
18. Install Body Hinge Pillar Outer Panel Hole Plug (1)
 |
|
Fig. 95: Instrument Panel Upper Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
19. Install Instrument Panel Upper Bolt (1) and tighten 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
 |
|
Fig. 96: Windshield Wiper System Module |
20. Install Windshield Wiper System Module Replacement (2)
Fig. 97: Front Side Door
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
21. Install Front Side Door Replacement (4)
 |
|
Fig. 98: Communication Interface Module Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
22. Install Communication Interface Module Bracket Replacement (2)
 |
|
Fig. 99: Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
23. Install Front Side Door Sill Trim Plate Replacement (1)
Fig. 100: Instrument Panel Lower Airbag - Passenger Side
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
24. Install Instrument Panel Lower Airbag Replacement - Passenger Side (2)
 |
|
Fig. 101: Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator |
25. Install Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator Replacement (3)
26. Install Instrument Panel Assembly Replacement
INSTRUMENT PANEL TIE BAR BRACE REPLACEMENT
Fig. 102: Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
| ||||||||||||||
|
WIRE TO WIRE REPAIR - INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE | ||||||||||||||
Special Tools
• EL-38125-10 Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool (non GMNA)
• J-38125-5A Ultra Torch Special Tool
• J-38125-8 Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool (GMNA)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, loss of high voltage isolation to
ground and higher system impedance, do not attempt to repair any HV wiring,
connector, or terminal that is damaged. High voltage coaxial type cables are not
repairable. Never attempt to repair a coaxial type cable. The entire
cable/harness or component must be replaced. In order to maintain system
integrity and personal safety, never attempt to repair any high voltage wiring,
cables, or terminals. Performing this procedure on high voltage circuits may
result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: If the wiring harness internal to the transmission is damaged, the wiring
harness must be replaced. The use of splice sleeves in an attempt to repair the
internal transmission wires, connectors, or terminals could result in
performance issues.
NOTE: Do not splice wires in Door Harness Grommets.
NOTE: The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
• A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat
shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside.
• A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low
resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits.
Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except high voltage and
specialty cables. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there are special requirements such as moisture sealing.
Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
|
Splice Sleeve Selection | ||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||
NOTE: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the
procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip
with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
• Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in
order to avoid wire insulation damage.
• Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except Tefzel and coaxial.
• Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the
location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness
branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
• When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
• Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
• Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
• If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and
work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
• Strip approximately 5.0 mm (0.20 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
• Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
• If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. For high temperature wiring, slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of
wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the
beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool
nests.
 |
|
Fig. 103: Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool With 4 Crimp Nests |
6. The EL-38125-10 splice sleeve crimping tool has four crimp nests. The largest crimp nest (4) is used for
crimping 10 and 12 gauge wires. The second largest crimp nest (3) is used for crimping 14 and 16 gauge
wires. The third largest crimp nest (2) is used for crimping 18 and 20 gauge wires. The smallest crimp
nest (1) is used for crimping 22 to 26 gauge wires. The crimp nests are referenced in the table (farther
above) under the crimp tool nest color.
 |
|
Fig. 104: Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool With 3 Crimp Nests |
7. The J-38125-8 splice sleeve crimping tool has three crimp nests. The largest crimp nest (3) is used for
crimping 10 and 12 gauge wires. The second largest crimp nest (2) is used for crimping 14 and 16 gauge
wires. The smallest crimp nest (1) is used for crimping 18 to 20 gauge wires. The crimp nests are
referenced in the table (farther above) under the crimp tool nest color.
8. Use the splice sleeve crimp tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of
the splice sleeve crimp tool. For the four crimp nest tool, use the three largest crimp nests to crimp the
splice sleeves. For the three crimp nest tool, use all three crimp nests to crimp the splice sleeves. Use the
four and three crimp tool diagrams (above) and the table (farther above) to match the splice sleeve with
the correct crimp nest. The crimp tool diagram callout numbers match the numbers in the table (under
crimp tool nest color).
9. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the
barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1)
from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice
sleeve in the proper nest.
 |
|
Fig. 106: Crimped Duraseal Splice Sleeve Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
10. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Refer to Folded-Over Wire
Repair for splicing wires of 0.35 mm or less (22, 24, 26 gauge sizes) and for splicing wires of different
gauges.
11. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice
sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 6 for the opposite end of the splice.
 |
|
Fig. 107: Crimped Duraseal Splice Sleeve Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
12. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
13. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Weatherpack™ Wiring Repair
NOTE: Some replacement pigtail connectors may be delivered without the terminated
leads installed into the connector. For Weatherpack™ connectors, all
terminated leads included in the package should to be installed into the
connector. If the connector end view shows that a terminal is not occupied, the
extra terminated lead(s) need to be installed and the end(s) sealed using a
DuraSeal splice sleeve and taped back into the harness.
1. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Refer to Folded-Over Wire
Repair for splicing wires of 0.35 mm or less (22, 24, 26 gauge sizes) and for splicing wires of different
gauges.
 |
|
Fig. 108: Tightly Close Handles Of Crimp Tool |
2. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice
sleeve. Holding the DuraSEAL with one hand gently tug on the wire to ensure it is crimped in the
DuraSeal.
3. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
 |
|
Fig. 109: Heat To Crimped Area Of Barrel |
4. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
5. Tape the extra terminated lead(s) back into the harness.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Use the following procedures to perform high temperature wiring repairs:
1. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve.
2. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing.
3. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
4. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been removed during the repair.
CONNECTOR RECONNECTION - INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An
intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated.
Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an
intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following
items:
• Loose, corroded, or painted terminal stud/fastener
• Wiring broken inside the insulation
• Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
• A terminal not seated all the way into the connector body
• Poor terminal to wire connection - Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps,
poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire
to terminal contact area, etc.
• Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor
can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire
in the suspect circuits.
• Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or
short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
• Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
• Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order
to verify the customer concern.
• Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high
resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions.
• Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder
operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up
of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The
oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the
connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause
fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and
hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since
vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin,
copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to
see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add dielectric grease / lubricant (Nyogel
760G or equivalent, meeting GM specification 9986087) to both sides of the connector terminals. Then
reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact
resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect
component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between
the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged
connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause
contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion,
causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always
use the EL-35616 kit when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining
the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the
female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in
a bussed electrical center. Use the EL-35616 kit to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use the EL-35616
kit can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves.
2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green
build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance,
intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of
contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal/terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different
between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire connectors on the harness side or the component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question.
2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the
connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to
ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter into the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
• Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to
a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may
also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any
intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM
may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current.
Operate the component to test the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing
, and Power Distribution Schematics .
• Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground
circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested.
Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point (screw or stud). Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Operate the component to test the
ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing , and Ground Distribution
Schematics .
Temperature Sensitivity
• An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the
component/connection is hot.
• Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of
intermittent condition, where applicable.
• If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
• High ambient temperatures
• Underhood/engine generated heat
• Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
• Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
• If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
• Low ambient temperatures - In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
• The condition only occurs on a cold start.
• The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
• Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature
related.
• If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition.
Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical
noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
• A mis-routed harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition
components, motors, generator etc. - These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could
interfere with normal circuit operation.
• Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or
switch - These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the
malfunctioning component is operating.
• Installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers,
electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc. - These accessories may create
interference in other circuits while operating and the interference would disappear when the accessory is
not operating. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may
contain a clamping diode.
• The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
• There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
• A new service control module is installed.
• A control module from another vehicle is installed.
• Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
NOTE: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME
software/calibration files that are already present in the control module.
This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
• Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is
found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References for replacement, setup, and programming.
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE COMPARTMENT DIVIDER REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 111: Front Floor Console Compartment Divider |
Callout
Component Name
Front Floor Console Compartment Divider
Procedure
Use a flat bladed plastic trim tool.
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE FRONT COMPARTMENT LINER REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 112: Front Floor Console Front Compartment Liner |
Callout
Component Name
Front Floor Console Front Compartment Liner
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE CUP HOLDER LINER REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 113: Front Floor Console Cup Holder Liner |
Callout
Component Name
Front Floor Console Cup Holder Liner (Qty: 2)
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE REAR CUP HOLDER REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 114: Front Floor Console Rear Cup Holder |
| ||||||||
|
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE COMPARTMENT LINER REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 115: Front Floor Console Compartment Liner |
| ||||
|
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE CENTER COMPARTMENT LINER REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 116: Front Floor Console Center Compartment Liner |
Callout
Component Name
Front Floor Console Center Compartment Liner
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE ACCESSORY TRIM PLATE REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 117: Front Floor Console Accessory Trim Plate |
| ||||||
|
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE EXTENSION PANEL REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 118: Front Floor Console Extension Panel - Right Side |
| ||||||
|
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE EXTENSION PANEL REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 119: Front Floor Console Extension Panel - Left Side |
| ||||||||
|
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE REPLACEMENT | ||||||||
 |
|
Fig. 120: Front Floor Console Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure
| |
| |
|
1 |
Front Floor Console Retainer Bolt (Qty: 2) CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Tighten 9 N.m (80 lb in) |
|
2 |
Front Floor Console Bracket Bolt (Qty: 4) Tighten 9 N.m (80 lb in) |
| ||||
|
FRONT FLOOR LOWER CONSOLE REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 121: Front Floor Lower Console Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Callout
Component Name
Preliminary Procedure
1. Front Floor Console Armrest Replacement
2. Front Floor Console Accessory Trim Plate Replacement
3. Front Floor Console Compartment Divider Replacement
Front Floor Lower Console
Procedure
1
1. Use a plastic trim tool if necessary.
| ||||
|
FRONT FLOOR REAR CONSOLE SIDE TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE |
 |
|
Fig. 122: Front Floor Rear Console Side Trim Panel - Left Side |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure
| |
|
1 |
Front Floor Console Rear Cover Bolt CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Tighten 1 N.m (9 lb in) |
| ||||
|
FRONT FLOOR REAR CONSOLE SIDE TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE |
 |
|
Fig. 123: Front Floor Rear Console Side Trim Panel - Right Side |
Callout
Component Name
Preliminary Procedure
1. Front Floor Lower Console Replacement
2. Front Floor Console Extension Panel Replacement - Right Side
| ||||||
|
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE ARMREST LATCH REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 124: Front Floor Console Armrest Latch |
Callout
Front Floor Console Armrest Bolt (Qty: 6)
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
CAUTION: 2 N.m (18 lb in) | |
|
2 |
Front Floor Console Armrest |
|
3 |
Front Floor Console Armrest Latch Procedure Release the retaining tab. |
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE ARMREST REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1. Remove Front Floor Console Rear Cup Holder Replacement
 |
|
Fig. 125: Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Washer |
2. Use a suitable tool to release the Front Floor Console Armrest Clip Hinge Retention (1) from the Hinge
Pin.
3. Remove Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Washer (2)
4. Position the front seat as needed to access the Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Pin.
 |
|
Fig. 126: Front Floor Rear Console Side Trim Panel |
5. Release the lower clips of the front floor rear console side trim panel (1) to allow the door hinge pin to be
to removed. Careful not to damage the tabs on the top of the panel and the forward hidden fastener.
 |
|
Fig. 127: Front Floor Console Compartment Door Hinge Pin |
6. Remove Front Floor Console Compartment Door Hinge Pin (1) @Armrest Assembly
 |
|
Fig. 128: Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge |
7. Use a suitable tool to release the ends of the Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge (1) from the Hinge Arm.
 |
|
Fig. 129: Front Floor Console Armrest Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
8. Remove Front Floor Console Armrest (1) @Front Floor Console Assembly
Installation Procedure
 |
|
Fig. 130: Front Floor Console Armrest Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
1. Install Front Floor Console Armrest (1) @Front Floor Console Assembly
 |
|
Fig. 131: Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge |
2. Attach the ends of the Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge (1) to the Hinge Arm.
 |
|
Fig. 132: Front Floor Console Compartment Door Hinge Pin |
3. Install Front Floor Console Compartment Door Hinge Pin (1) @ Armrest Assembly
 |
|
Fig. 133: Front Floor Rear Console Side Trim Panel |
4. Install Front Floor Rear Console Side Trim Panel - Right Side (1)
 |
|
Fig. 134: Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Washer |
5. Install Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Washer (2)
6. Install Front Floor Console Armrest Clip Hinge Retention (1) @Hinge Pin
7. Install Front Floor Console Rear Cup Holder Replacement
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE ARMREST HINGE REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1. Remove Front Floor Console Rear Cup Holder Replacement
 |
|
Fig. 135: Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Washer |
2. Use a suitable tool to release the Front Floor Console Armrest Clip Hinge Retention (1) from the Hinge
Pin.
3. Remove Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Washer (2)
4. Position the front seat as needed to access the Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Pin.
 |
|
Fig. 136: Front Floor Rear Console Side Trim Panel |
5. Release the lower clips of the front floor rear console side trim panel (1) to allow the door hinge pin to be
to removed. Careful not to damage the tabs on the top of the panel and the forward hidden fastener.
 |
|
Fig. 137: Front Floor Console Compartment Door Hinge Pin |
6. Remove Front Floor Console Compartment Door Hinge Pin (1) @Armrest Assembly
 |
|
Fig. 138: Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge |
7. Use a suitable tool to release the ends of the Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge (1) from the Hinge Arm.
 |
|
Fig. 139: Front Floor Console Armrest Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
8. Remove Front Floor Console Armrest (1) @Front Floor Console Assembly
 |
|
Fig. 140: Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge |
9. Remove Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge (1) @ Hinge Arm
Installation Procedure
 |
|
Fig. 141: Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
1. Install Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge (1) @ Hinge Arm
 |
|
Fig. 142: Front Floor Console Armrest Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
2. Install Front Floor Console Armrest (1) @Front Floor Console Assembly
 |
|
Fig. 143: Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge |
3. Attach the ends of the Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge (1) to the Hinge Arm.
 |
|
Fig. 144: Front Floor Console Compartment Door Hinge Pin |
4. Install Front Floor Console Compartment Door Hinge Pin (1) @ Armrest Assembly
 |
|
Fig. 145: Front Floor Rear Console Side Trim Panel |
5. Install Front Floor Rear Console Side Trim Panel - Right Side (1)
 |
|
Fig. 146: Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Washer |
6. Install Front Floor Console Armrest Hinge Washer (2)
7. Install Front Floor Console Armrest Clip Hinge Retention (1) @Hinge Pin
8. Install Front Floor Console Rear Cup Holder Replacement
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE
 |
|
Fig. 147: Front Floor Console Applique - Right Side |
Callout
Component Name
Front Floor Console Applique - Right Side
Procedure
Use a flat bladed plastic trim tool.
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE
 |
|
Fig. 148: Front Floor Console Applique - Left Side |
Callout
Component Name
Front Floor Console Applique - Left Side
Procedure
Use a flat bladed plastic trim tool.
ROOF CONSOLE REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 149: Roof Console Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
1 |
Roof Console Procedure
|
Article GUID: A00884647
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Mirrors - Volt
SPECIFICATIONS
FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS
|
Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications_______________ | |||||||||||
| |||||||||||
|
ADHESIVES, FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND SEALERS | ||||||||||
| ||||||||||
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR WIRING SCHEMATICS
Inside Rearview Mirror (DD8)
 |
|
Fig. 1: Inside Rearview Mirror (DD8) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR WIRING SCHEMATICS
Directional Controls and Motors
 |
|
Fig. 2: Directional Controls and Motors |
Mirror Heaters (DLW)
 |
|
Fig. 3: Mirror Heaters (DLW) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
SYMPTOMS - MIRRORS
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables.
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that
all of the following are true:
• There are no DTCs set.
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data link.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Outside
Mirror Description and Operation, and Automatic Day-Night Mirror Description and Operation.
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the system. Refer to Checking
Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
Heated Mirrors Malfunction
Power Mirror Malfunction
Automatic Day-Night Mirrors Malfunction
HEATED MIRRORS MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The outside rearview mirror heater relay supplies voltage to the outside rearview mirror heater elements based
on the current state of the rear window defogger. The relay supplies B+ through the driver/passenger mirror
heating element control circuit when a request is seen.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Outside Rearview Mirror Schematics
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information.
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the E18 Rear Defogger Grid turns ON and OFF when commanding the Rear Defogger On and Off
with a scan tool.
• If the E18 Rear Defogger Grid does not turn ON or OFF
Refer to Rear Window Defogger Malfunction .
• If the E18 Rear Defogger Grid turns ON and OFF
3. Verify the mirror glass of the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver and the A9B Outside Rearview
Mirror-Passenger become warm when commanding the Rear Defogger On with a scan tool.
• If the mirror glass of the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver and the A9B Outside
Rearview Mirror-Passenger do not become warm
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate A9 Outside
Rearview Mirror. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 7 and ground.
• If 10 О or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode, connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and the ground circuit
terminal 7.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Rear Defogger On and Off with a scan
tool.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block-
Underhood.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the A9 Outside Rearview Mirror.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block-
Underhood, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the X50A Fuse Block-Underhood
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
5. Test or replace the A9 Outside Rearview Mirror.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
AUTOMATIC DAY-NIGHT MIRRORS MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
The inside rearview mirror uses 2 photocell sensors. One sensor is the rear light sensor, located on the face side
of the mirror, facing the rear of the vehicle. The rear light sensor is used to determine light conditions present at
the mirror face. The other sensor is the front light sensor, located on the backside of the mirror, facing the front
of the vehicle. The front light sensor is used to determine the exterior light conditions at the front of the vehicle.
With a low exterior light condition detected by the front light sensor and a high light condition from the rear
light sensor, the inside rearview mirror will automatically darken the face of the inside rearview mirror.
With the gear selector lever in the REVERSE position, backup lamp control voltage is supplied as an input to
the inside rearview mirror. The mirror monitors this input to disable the automatic day-night feature. This
allows the driver to see objects in the mirror clearly when backing up, regardless of the rear light sensor status.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle ON.
2. Cover the rear window with a blanket or other suitable item.
3. Verify the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror face dims when shining a bright light into the rear light sensor
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Inside Review Mirror Dimming Inoperative
4. Verify the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror face transitions from dim to bright while commanding the Backup
Lamps Active and Inactive with a scan tool.
• If the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror does not transition between dim and bright.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Day-Night Disable Malfunction
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror. It may take up to 2
minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 2 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Replace the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
2. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground
3. Vehicle in Service Mode, verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF while commanding the Backup Lamps
Active and Inactive with a scan tool.
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, refer to Backup Lamps Malfunction .
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, refer to Backup Lamps Malfunction
4. Replace the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
|
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The outside rearview mirror switch controls the outside rearview mirrors based on the position of the mirror
selector switch and which movement position is selected. The outside rearview mirror switch has four positions:
up, down, left, and right. B+ is applied to the switch from the power mirror fuse and when a movement position
switch is selected, voltage is sent to the commanded mirror via a mirror control circuit. The opposite mirror
control circuit acts as a ground circuit for the bi-directional mirror motor. Ground is the applied through the
switch.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the mirror glass of the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver and the A9B Outside Rearview
Mirror-Passenger move UP, DOWN, LEFT and RIGHT with the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror
Switch-Driver.
• If both outside mirror glasses do not move
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Both Outside Rearview Mirrors Inoperative.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Driver Outside Mirror Movement Malfunction.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Passenger Outside Mirror Movement Malfunction.
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-
Driver. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 24 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 23 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for infinite resistance between each of the control circuit terminals listed below and ground:
• Control circuit terminal 2
• Control circuit terminal 3
• Control circuit terminal 4
• Control circuit terminal 6
• Control circuit terminal 7
• Control circuit terminal 8
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Test or replace the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the M77D Outside Rearview Mirror Motor-Driver.
Vehicle in Service Mode
2. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 2 and control circuit terminal 3.
3. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the UP and DOWN states with the S146
Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
• If the test lamp remains OFF during either of the commands
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S146 Window/Outside
Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
2. Test for infinite resistance between each control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in each control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, test or replace the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S146 Window/Outside
Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between each control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, test or replace the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver
• If the test lamp turns ON during each of the commands
4. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and control circuit terminal 2.
5. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the LEFT and RIGHT states with the S146
Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
• If the test lamp remains OFF during either of the commands
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S146 Window/Outside
Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
2. Test for infinite resistance between each control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in each control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, test or replace the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S146 Window/Outside
Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between each control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, test or replace the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver
• If the test lamp turns ON during each of the commands
6. Test or replace the M77D Outside Rearview Mirror Motor-Driver.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the M77P Outside Rearview Mirror Motor-Passenger.
Vehicle in Service Mode
2. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 2 and control circuit terminal 3.
3. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the UP and DOWN states with the S146
Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
• If the test lamp remains OFF during either of the commands
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S146 Window/Outside
Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
2. Test for infinite resistance between each control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in each control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, test or replace the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S146 Window/Outside
Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between each control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, test or replace the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver
• If the test lamp turns ON during each of the commands
4. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and control circuit terminal 2.
5. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the LEFT and RIGHT states with the S146
Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S146 Window/Outside
Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
2. Test for infinite resistance between each control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in each control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, test or replace the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver.
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S146 Window/Outside
Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between each control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, test or replace the S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch-Driver
6. Test or replace the M77P Outside Rearview Mirror Motor-Passenger.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
 |
|
Fig. 4: Outside Rearview Mirror |
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
Callout
Component Name
WARNING:
Refer to
Glass and
Sheet Metal
Handling
Warning .
Preliminary Procedure
• Remove Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding. Refer to Front Side Door Window Garnish
Molding Replacement
• Remove Front Side Door Window Upper Reveal Molding. Refer to Front Side Door Window
Upper Reveal Molding Replacement
|
1 |
Plug Procedure Remove the plug that covers the lower front mirror bolt. |
|
2 |
Outside Rearview Mirror Bolt (Qty: 3) CAUTION: |
| ||||||
|
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR GASKET REPLACEMENT |
Fig. 5: Outside Rearview Mirror Gasket
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
| ||||||
|
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HOUSING UPPER COVER REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 6: Outside Rearview Mirror Housing Upper Cover |
| ||||||
|
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR INNER ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 7: Outside Rearview Mirror Inner Actuator |
| ||
|
Preliminary Procedure Remove Outside Rearview Mirror Glass. Refer to Outside Rearview Mirror Glass Replacement |
| ||||
|
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR GLASS REPLACEMENT |
|
1 |
 |
Fig. 8: Outside Rearview Mirror Glass
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Outside Rearview Mirror Glass WARNING: Approved | |
|
1 |
procedure to Procedure
|
| ||||
|
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 9: Inside Rearview Mirror |
|
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY | ||||||
| ||||||
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Procedure
Tighten 1.8 N.m (16 lb in) | |
|
2 |
Inside Rearview Mirror |
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
AUTOMATIC DAY-NIGHT MIRROR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Inside Rearview Mirror with the Automatic Day-Night Feature System Operation
The inside rearview mirror uses 2 photocell sensors. One sensor is the headlight sensor, located on the face side
of the mirror. The headlight sensor is used to determine light conditions present at the mirror face. The other
sensor is the ambient light sensor, located on the rear of the mirror or windshield side. The ambient light sensor
is used to determine the exterior light conditions. With a low exterior light condition detected, and a high light
condition from behind of the car, at the headlight sensor, the inside rearview mirror will automatically darken
the face of the mirror.
In the daytime, the mirror is in a normal state because of the high exterior light condition that is indicated by the
ambient light sensor. With the gear selector lever in the REVERSE position, backup lamp supply voltage is
supplied as an input to the inside rearview mirror. The mirror monitors this input to disable the automatic day-
night feature. This allows the driver to see objects in the mirror clearly when backing up, even during the night.
OUTSIDE MIRROR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Power Mirror System Components
The power mirror system consists of the following components:
• Outside rearview mirror switch
• Mirror selector switch
• Driver outside rearview mirror
• Passenger outside rearview mirror
Each of the outside rearview mirror contains two motors. The vertical motor operates the mirror in the up and
down directions, and the horizontal motor operates the mirror in the left and right directions.
4 S52
I Outside
Rearview
I Mirror
. Switch
Ч А9А
| Outside
Rearview
I Mirror -
• Driver
1 A9B
■ Outside
Rearview
I Mirror -
j Passenger
Fig. 10: Power Mirror System Block Diagram (Without A45)
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
| ||||||||
|
Power Mirror System Controls |
The outside rearview mirror switch is a four position directional switch: Up, Down, Left and Right.
The mirror select switch is a three position switch: left, neutral/fold, and right.
Power Mirror System Operation
The outside rearview mirror switch receives battery voltage from the underhood fuse block The power mirror
switch also receives a constant ground.
The four positions of the direction switch have dual switch contacts. Each of the contacts are connected to
opposing sides of the appropriate power mirror motors through the selector switch. The selector switch
completes these circuits depending on the position of the selector switch, L or R.
If the selector switch is placed in the L position and the up switch is pressed, battery voltage will be supplied to
the left outside rearview mirror vertical motor through the left mirror motor vertical control circuit and ground
through the left mirror motor common control circuit. If the down switch is pressed, battery voltage will be
supplied to the left outside rearview mirror vertical motor through the left mirror motor common control circuit
and ground through the left mirror motor vertical control circuit.
The remainder of the mirror functions operate in the same manner as described above. Placing the power mirror
switch in opposing positions, left/right or up/down, will reverse the polarity to the mirror motor, reversing the
direction of movement.
Heated Mirrors (If Equipped)
The heated mirrors are controlled through the rear defog relay. Whenever the rear window defogger is turned on
battery voltage is supplied to the mirror heater elements through the left and right mirror heater element control
circuits.
Article GUID: A00884712
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Object Detection and Pedestrian Protection - Volt
SPECIFICATIONS
FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS
Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications
NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
|
Application |
Specification |
|
Forward Collision Alert Display Bolt |
2.5 N.m (22 lb in) |
|
Forward Range Radar Sensor Fastener |
6 N.m (53 lb in) |
|
Parking Assist Control Module Nut |
5 N.m (44 lb in) |
|
Pedestrian Sound Alert Speaker Bolt |
2.5 N.m (22 lb in) |
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
OBJECT DETECTION WIRING SCHEMATICS
Front Park Assist (UFQ)
 |
|
Fig. 1: Front Park Assist (UFQ) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Rear Park Assist (UFQ)
Fig. 2: Rear Park Assist (UFQ)
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
Rearview Camera
 |
|
Fig. 3: Rearview Camera Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Comprehensive Safety - Camera and Module Power, Ground, and Controls (UEU/UHX/-UGN)
 |
|
Fig. 4: Comprehensive Safety - Camera and Module Power, Ground, and Controls (UEU/UHX/-UGN) |
Side Object Detection (UKC)
 |
|
Fig. 5: Side Object Detection (UKC) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
Comprehensive Safety - Camera and Module Power, Ground and Controls (UEU/UHX/UGN)
 |
|
Fig. 6: Comprehensive Safety - Camera and Module Power, Ground and Controls (UEU/UHX/UGN) |
Comprehensive Safety - Serial Data Camera, Module and Long Range Radar (UEU/UHX/UGN)
Fig. 7: Comprehensive Safety - Serial Data Camera, Module and Long Range Radar (UEU/UHX/UGN)
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
DTC B094B OR B094C: LEFT SIDE OBJECT DETECTION CONTROL MODULE/RIGHT SIDE
OBJECT DETECTION CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC B094B 00
Left Side Object Detection Control Module - Malfunction
DTC B094B 08
Left Side Object Detection Control Module - Performance - Signal Invalid
DTC B094B 45
Left Side Object Detection Control Module - High Temperature
Left Side Object Detection Control Module - Performance
Right Side Object Detection Control Module - Malfunction
Right Side Object Detection Control Module - Performance - Signal Invalid
Right Side Object Detection Control Module - Variant Not Programmed
Right Side Object Detection Control Module - High Temperature
Right Side Object Detection Control Module - Performance
Circuit/System Description
The side object sensor - left or side object sensor - right can set this code if the module determines there is a
fault due to the reason listed in the symptom byte.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The control module has detected a malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The Side Blind Zone and Rear Cross Traffic Alert Systems will not function.
• The driver information center will display "Service Side Detection System".
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears when the control module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50,
without a repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
If DTC B094B 58 or B094C 58 is set, check for anything that can interfere with the radar signal. Verify area in
front of radar is clean of mud, ice, snow, etc. Also verify the fascia panels in front of the radar are damage-free
and not obstructed by any add-on accessories such as emblems, etc.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle ON.
2. Verify that B094B 45 or B094C 45 is not set.
1. Program the appropriate B94 Side Object Sensor.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
• If the DTC sets, replace the appropriate B94 Side Object Sensor.
• If the DTC does not set
3. All OK.
3. Verify that B094B 00, B094C 00, B094B 08, B094C 08, B094B 54 or B094C 54 is not set.
Replace the appropriate B94 Side Object Sensor.
• If the DTC is not set
4. Verify that B094B 58 or B094C 58 is not set.
Verify the area in front of the sensor is clean, unobstructed, and damage-free.
• If not clean, unobstructed, and damage-free, clean or repair as necessary.
• If clean, unobstructed, and damage-free, replace the appropriate B94 Side Object Sensor.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B0954, B0955, B0956, OR B0957: PARKING ASSIST FRONT SENSOR CIRCUITS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Parking Assist Front Sensor Left Corner Circuit
Parking Assist Front Sensor Left Middle Circuit
Parking Assist Front Sensor Right Middle Circuit
Parking Assist Front Sensor Right Corner Circuit
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The object sensors are 3-wire sensors that are used to determine the distance between the vehicle and an object
of interest. The parking assist control module supplies 9 V to the object sensors via the 9 V reference circuit and
provides ground via the low reference circuit. The parking assist control module triggers the sensors in a
sequential loop. After each sensor transmits, the parking assist control module uses the sensor echo received
through the signal circuit to calculate the distance and position of an object.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle ON
• The park assist is activated. The activation takes place through putting in the reverse gear or through
operating the park assist switch.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The parking assist control module has detected the voltage at the sensor circuit is greater than 11.5 V or the
object sensor is not grounded.
The parking assist control module has detected the voltage at the sensor circuit is less than 0.5 V.
The parking assist control module has received an invalid signal.
The object sensor determines no change in the position of an object while the vehicle is in motion.
The parking assist control module determines the wrong sensor type is installed.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The parking assist is disabled.
• The driver information center displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle ON.
2. Verify that DTC B1405 is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B1405
• If the DTC is not set
3. Verify that DTC B0954 01, B0955 01, B0956 01, B0957 01 B0954 21, B0955 21, B0956 21 or B0957 21
is not set.
1. Verify the B78 Front Object Sensors are not contaminated with snow, mud, dirt, slush, or ice.
• If contaminated, clean sensor.
• If there is no contamination
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
4. Verify that DTC B0954 3A, B0955 3A, B0956 3A or B0957 3A is not set.
Replace the B78 Front Object Sensor with the correct sensor type.
5. Vehicle ON, transmission in REVERSE.
6. Verify the scan tool Parking Assist System Status parameter displays Enabled.
• If the Parking Assist System displays Disabled
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
7. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, scan tool disconnected, disconnect the harness at the appropriate B78 Front Object Sensor.
It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the low reference circuit terminal 2 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector X3 at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
3. Vehicle ON.
4. Test for 7.5 - 10.5 V between the 9 V reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 9 V reference circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the 9 V reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module, Vehicle
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 9 V reference circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
5. Test for 7.5 - 9.5 V between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module, Vehicle
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for parking assist control module replacement, programming and
setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Left Corner Circuit
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Left Middle Circuit
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Right Middle Circuit
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Right Corner Circuit
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
| ||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The parking assist sensors are 3-wire sensors that are used to determine the distance between the vehicle and an
object of interest. The Parking Assist Control Module supplies 9 V to the parking assist sensors via the 9 V
reference circuit and provides ground via the low reference circuit. The Parking Assist Control Module triggers
the sensors in a sequential loop. After each sensor transmits, the Parking Assist Control Module uses the sensor
echo received through the signal circuit to calculate the distance and position of an object.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode
• The parking assist is activated. The activation takes place through putting the vehicle in reverse.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The Parking Assist Control Module has detected the voltage at the sensor circuit is greater than 11.5 V or the
object sensor is not grounded.
The Parking Assist Control Module has detected sensor circuit is shorted to ground.
The Parking Assist Control Module has detected the voltage at the sensor circuit is less than 0.5 V.
The Parking Assist Control Module has received an invalid signal.
The Parking Assist Control Module has received an invalid signal.
The object sensor determines no change in the position of an object while the vehicle is in motion.
The Parking Assist Control Module determines the wrong sensor type is installed.
The Parking Assist Control Module determines the sensor failed a self test.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The parking assist is disabled.
• The driver information center displays "Park Assist Temporarily Unavailable" or "Service Park Assist".
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Object Detection Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Parking Assist Description and Operation (with Rear Park Assist, UD7)Parking Assist Description and
Operation (with Front and Rear Park Assist, UFQ)Parking Assist Description and Operation (with
Parallel Parking or Automatic Parking Assist)
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC B1405 is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B1405
• If the DTC is not set
3. Verify that DTC B0958 3A, DTC B0958 3B, B0959 3A, B0959 3B, B0960 3A, B0960 3B, B0961 3A or
B0961 3B is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Replace the B306 Parking Assist Sensor.
4. Verify that DTC B0958, B0959, B0960, or B0961 is not set.
1. Check the B306 Parking Assist Sensor for contamination with snow, mud, dirt, slush, or ice.
• If contaminated, clean sensor.
• If there is no contamination
2. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
5. Ignition On/Vehicle ON, transmission in R.
6. Verify the scan tool Parking Assist System Status parameter displays Enabled.
• If the Parking Assist System displays Disabled
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
7. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, scan tool disconnected, disconnect the harness at the appropriate B306
Parking Assist Sensor. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the low reference circuit terminal 3 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector X2 at the K182 Parking Assist Control
Module.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
3. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for 7.8 - 10.2 V between the 9 V reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control
Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 9 V reference circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the 9 V reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
• If greater than 10.2 V
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control
Module.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 9 V reference circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
5. Test for 7 - 12.0 V between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control
Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control
Module, ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
6. Test or replace the appropriate B306 Parking Assist Sensor.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Parking Assist On/Off Switch Circuit
Parking Assist On/Off Switch Indicator Circuit
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The parking assist can be activated/deactivated by pressing the parking assist switch. By engaging the reverse
gear the parking assist can also be activated. By subsequently pressing the parking assist switch the parking
assist can be disabled again.
The indicator in the parking assist switch shows the status of the parking assist. If the lamp is ON, the parking
assist is activated.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition ON
• The parking assist is activated. The activation takes place by putting in the reverse gear or by pressing the
parking assist switch.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The parking assist control module has detected a short to ground.
The parking assist control module has detected a short to battery.
The parking assist control module has detected a short to ground or open.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The parking assist is disabled.
• The driver information center displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Parking Assist Description and Operation (with Parallel Parking or Automatic Parking Assist)Parking
Assist Description and Operation (with Rear Park Assist, UD7)Parking Assist Description and Operation
(with Front and Rear Park Assist, UFQ)
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle ON.
2. Verify that DTC B0967 02 is not set.
Refer to Parking Assist Switch Malfunction.
3. Verify that DTC B0968 01 or B0968 06 is not set.
Refer to Parking Assist Switch Indicator Malfunction.
4. Activate and deactivate the parking assist switch and verify the scan tool Park Assist Switch parameter
changes between Active and Inactive.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48D Multifunction Switch 2 - Instrument Panel. It
may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 1.6 - 3.6 V between the control circuit terminal 6 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open or high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, refer to Interior Backlighting Malfunction .
• If greater than 3.6 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition on.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, refer to Interior Backlighting Malfunction .
• If between 1.6 - 3.6 V
3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 7 and signal circuit terminal 6.
4. Verify the test lamp turns On and Off when commanding the Parking Assist Switch On and Off with a
scan tool.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module, Vehicle
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit
• If less than 1 V
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open or high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit
• If infinite resistance, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
5. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48D Multifunction
Switch 2 - Instrument Panel. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 10 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Park Assist Switch parameter is Inactive.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector X1 at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
6. Verify the scan tool Park Assist Switch parameter is Active.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector X1 at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module,
ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V.
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
7. Test or replace the S48D Multifunction Switch 2 - Instrument Panel.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B096B: PARKING ASSIST SWITCH PARALLEL PARKING CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Parking Assist Switch Parallel Parking Circuit
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The parallel parking assist can be activated/deactivated by pressing the parallel parking assist switch.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle ON
• The parallel parking assist is activated. The activation takes place through pressing the parallel parking
assist switch.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The parking assist control module has detected a short to ground.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The parallel parking assist is disabled.
• An indicator in the driver information center shows the parking assistance is not available.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48D Multifunction
Switch 2 - Instrument Panel. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 10 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the ground circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Advanced Parking Assist Switch parameter is Inactive.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the S48D Multifunction Switch 2 - Instrument Panel signal
circuit terminal 1 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
6. Verify the scan tool Advanced Parking Assist Switch parameter is Active.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module, vehicle
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the S48D Multifunction Switch 2 - Instrument Panel signal circuit
terminal 1 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V.
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
7. Test or replace the S48D Multifunction Switch 2 - Instrument Panel.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B096C OR B096D: PARKING ASSIST SIDE SENSOR FRONT CIRCUITS
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Parking Assist Side Sensor Left Front Circuit
Parking Assist Side Sensor Right Front Circuit
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||
|
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The object sensors are 3-wire sensors that are used to determine the distance between the vehicle and an object
of interest. The parking assist control module supplies 9 V to the object sensors via the 9 V reference circuit and
provides ground via the low reference circuit. The parking assist control module triggers the sensors in a
sequential loop. After each sensor transmits, the parking assist control module uses the sensor echo received
though the signal circuit to calculate the distance and position of an object.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Vehicle in Service Mode
• The parallel parking assist is activated. The activation takes place through operating the parallel parking
assist switch.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The parking assist control module has detected the voltage at the sensor circuit is too high.
The parking assist control module has detected the voltage at the sensor circuit is too low.
The parking assist control module has received an invalid signal.
The object sensor determines no change in the position of an object while the vehicle is in motion.
The parking assist control module determines the wrong sensor type is installed.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The parallel parking assist is disabled.
• An indicator in the driver information center shows the parking assistance is not available.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Parking Assist Description and Operation (with Rear Park Assist, UD7)Parking Assist Description and
Operation (with Front and Rear Park Assist, UFQ)Parking Assist Description and Operation (with
Parallel Parking or Automatic Parking Assist)
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC B1405 is not present.
3. Verify that DTC B096C 01 or B096D 01 is not present.
Check the appropriate sensor for contamination with mud, ice or snow. If no contamination is
diagnosed, refer to Circuit/System Testing.
4. Verify that DTC B096C 3A or B096D 3A is not present.
Replace the appropriate sensor with a sensor by correct sensor type.
5. Verify that DTC B096C 21 or B096D 21 is not present.
Check the appropriate sensor for contamination with mud, ice or snow. If no contamination is
diagnosed, replace the appropriate sensor.
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF for 30 s, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate B94 Side Object Sensor - Front.
It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the low reference circuit terminal 3 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the low reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode, engine running.
4. Test for 7.5 - 10.5 V between the 9 V reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 9 V reference circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the 9 V reference circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module, Vehicle
in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 9 V reference circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
5. Test for 7.5 - 9.5 V between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module, Vehicle
in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module
6. Test or replace the appropriate B94 Side Object Sensor - Front.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Vehicle Direction Camera Indicator Circuit Short to Battery
Vehicle Direction Camera Indicator Circuit Low Voltage/Open
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The lane departure warning is enabled and disabled through a switch located in the left steering wheel controls
switch. When enabled, the frontview camera module will illuminate the indicator located in the switch.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The frontview camera module has detected a short to battery or open/high resistance in the control circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Lane departure warning is disabled.
• SERVICE FRONT CAMERA is displayed on the driver information center.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that DTC B356A is not set.
Refer to DTC B356A.
3. Verify the lane departure warning indicator turns ON and OFF while pressing and releasing the lane
departure warning switch.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left,
ignition ON.
NOTE: Verify interior lighting dimming is turned all the way up.
2. Test for 6.2 - 12.0 V between the dimming control circuit terminal 4 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, refer to Interior Backlighting Malfunction .
• If greater than 12.0 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, refer to Interior Backlighting Malfunction .
• If between 6.2 - 12.0 V
3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 5 and B+.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Lane Departure Warning Indicator
parameter ON and OFF with a scan tool.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K109 Frontview Camera Module, ignition
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Ignition OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
5. Test or replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Cruise Control Switch Replacement - Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left replacement.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B1011: SYSTEM DISABLED INFORMATION STORED
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
System Disabled Information Stored
Circuit/System Description
The front view camera module permanently monitors the serial data bus for error messages. When a
malfunction is detected by the front view camera module, the system will be disabled and an error message will
be stored in the front view camera module disable history buffer which is used to store information about the
front camera features that are disabled.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition ON
• Front view camera enabled
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The front view camera module detects a malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The front view camera module is disabled.
• The front view camera module disable history buffer stores information why the system was disabled.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Diagnostic Aids
The front view camera module disable history buffers are used to store information about the front view camera
module features that are disabled. The Buffers will only update if the disable condition changes.
Example: If the data received from the steering wheel angle sensor is Invalid across many ignition cycles then it
will only appear in 1 history buffer and not all history buffers. If this condition is the current reason why the
front view camera module is disabled then it will be set in front view camera module disable history buffer 1. If
a new reason occurs, such as vehicle speed validity is invalid, then the invalid steering wheel angle sensor fault
will shift into disable history buffer 2 and vehicle speed validity invalid will be in disable history buffer 1. Since
there are only 4 disable history buffers, the invalid steering wheel angle sensor will age out if 4 other disable
reasons occur since the last invalid steering wheel angle sensor event occurred. Front view camera module
disable history buffer 1 contains the current reason that one of the front view camera module features is
disabled.
The front view camera module disable history buffers can display the following values:
• Lane Departure Warning Indicator Malfunction
• Lane Departure Warning Switch Malfunction
• Camera Obstructed
• Accelerator Pedal Position Out of Range
• Driven Wheel Speed Signal Invalid
• Non-Driven Wheel Speed Signal Invalid
• Brake Pedal Moderate Travel Signal Invalid
• Brake Pedal Initial Travel Position Achieved
• Lost Communication with Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module
• Invalid Data Received From Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module
• Forward Collision Alert Switch Malfunction
• Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Sensor Performance
• Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Sensor Performance
• Transmission Gear Engaged
• Acceleration Sensor Longitudinal Signal
• Invalid Data Received From Yaw Rate Sensor Module
• Power Mode Controlled by Backup Device
• System Power Mode
• Overvoltage
• Undervoltage
• Undefined
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify no DTC is set.
• If a DTC is present, diagnose this first. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
2. Verify the scan tool Vehicle Direction Camera System parameter is NORMAL.
• If not the specified value, refer to Lane Departure Warning System Malfunction, and Forward
Collision Alert System Malfunction.
3. Verify the scan tool Vehicle Direction Camera Calibration Status parameter is CALIBRATED.
• If not the specified value, calibrate the K109 Frontview Camera Module. Refer to Front View
Camera Module Learn.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Perform the Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with the
Circuit/System Testing.
1. Verify the scan tool Front View Camera Module Disable History displays no current malfunction. Refer
to Diagnostic Aids.
• If a current malfunction is displayed, diagnose the system that sets the malfunction.
2. If no malfunction is displayed in the Front View Camera Module Disable History, refer to Lane
Departure Warning System Malfunction, and Forward Collision Alert System Malfunction.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for front view camera module programming and setup
DTC B1015: VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER INFORMATION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Vehicle Identification Number Information
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Circuit/System Description
When the ignition is turned ON, the advanced parking assist control module and the frontview camera module
receive the vehicle identification number (VIN) from the body control module (BCM). The modules will
compare the VIN received to the VIN stored in memory.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The stored VIN does not match the received VIN.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The parking assist system or the lane departure warning system is disabled.
• The driver information center may display a system service message.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The stored VIN matches the VIN stored in the body control module.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that DTC B1015 is not set.
1. Program the control module that set the DTC.
2. Verify that DTC B1015 is not set.
• If the DTC is set, replace the control module that set the DTC.
• If the DTC is not set
3. All OK
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B101D: ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE (DTC SET IN K109 FRONTVIEW
CAMERA MODULE)
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Electronic Control Unit Hardware
Electronic Control Unit Hardware Performance Internal Communications Failure
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List
Circuit/System Description
The internal fault detection is handled inside the device. The symptom byte information is for engineering
reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The frontview camera module has detected an internal malfunction
The frontview camera module has detected a software malfunction
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Lane departure warning is disabled
• SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM is displayed on the DIC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear once 100 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify that DTC B101D symptom byte 3C is not set as current.
• If DTC B101D symptom byte 3C is set as current
Reprogram the K109 Frontview Camera Module
2. Verify that DTC B101D is not set as current.
Replace the K109 Frontview Camera Module
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, setup, and programming
DTC B127B: REARVIEW CAMERA INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT MISSING REFERENCE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Rearview Camera Input Signal Circuit Missing Reference
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
When the vehicle is placed in reverse with the engine running, a video signal is sent from the rearview camera
to the human machine interface control module. If the human machine interface control module does not see a
signal from the camera it will set B127B 2B and display "Service Rear Vision System". The rearview camera is
powered with ignition voltage and does not have a reverse signal circuit.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The vehicle must be in reverse with the engine running.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
Signal from the rearview camera not received by the Human Interface Machine Control Module for 2.5 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The human machine interface control module commands the driver information center to display "Service
Rear Vision System".
• The human machine interface control module stores the DTC in memory.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clear once 40 malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
A poor video image can be caused by ice, snow, and mud buildup on the lens of the rearview camera. Also,
extreme lighting conditions can affect performance, such as operating in the dark or with bright sunlight shining
on the camera. Extreme high or low temperatures can also affect the image quality. An open in the shield of the
video signal circuit can also cause a distorted screen.
Terminal fretting or incorrectly seated connectors can cause a poor image displayed condition. Check the circuit
terminals for fretting or incorrectly seated connector. If the condition is intermittent or cannot be duplicated,
disconnect the connectors and add Nyogel lubricant 760G. This procedure will correct the high resistance
condition due to terminal fretting corrosion.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: If the condition is intermittent or cannot be duplicated, disconnect the
connectors and add Nyogel lubricant 760G. This procedure will correct the high
resistance condition due to terminal fretting corrosion.
1. Vehicle ON.
2. Verify that DTC B2545 is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B2545 .
• If the DTC is not set
3. Verify the rearview camera has no debris on the lens and that the bezel and bezel seal are not damaged.
Clean the lens. If the lens, bezel, or bezel seal are damaged, replace as necessary.
4. Vehicle ON, transmission in R.
5. Verify the backup lamps are illuminated.
• If the backup lamps are not illuminated
Refer to Backup Lamps Malfunction .
• If the backup lamps are illuminated
6. Verify a clear rear vision image is displayed on the P17 Info Display Module.
• If a clear image is not displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
7. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE:
• Circuit/System Verification must be performed before Circuit/System
Testing.
• Under normal operating conditions the Human Interface Machine Control
Module will become very hot. The module should be allowed to cool down
prior to removal for any service procedure.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B87 Rearview Camera. It may take up to 2 min for
all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle ON.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse. Refer to Power Mode
Mismatch .
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the B87 Rearview Camera.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module,
vehicle ON.
6. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• B87 Rearview Camera signal (+) circuit terminal 5
• B87 Rearview Camera signal (-) circuit terminal 6
• If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
7. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• B87 Rearview Camera signal (+) circuit terminal 5
• B87 Rearview Camera signal (-) circuit terminal 6
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
8. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal (+) circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
9. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal (-) circuit end to end.
Test the signal circuit for an open/high resistance.
10. Replace the B87 Rearview Camera.
11. Vehicle ON, transmission in R,
12. Verify a clear rear vision image is displayed on the P17 Info Display Module.
Replace the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module.
13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Control Module Voltage Reference Output 2 Circuit Short to Ground
Control Module Voltage Reference Output 2 Circuit Low Voltage
Control Module Voltage Reference Output 2 Circuit High Voltage
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||
|
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The object sensors are 3-wire sensors that are used to determine the distance between the vehicle and an object
of interest. The parking assist control module supplies 9 V to the object sensors via the object sensor supply
voltage circuit and provides ground via the object sensor low reference circuit. The parking assist control
module triggers the sensors in a sequential loop. After each sensor transmits, the parking assist control module
uses the sensor echo received through the object sensor signal circuit to calculate the distance and position of an
object.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition ON
• Transmission in REVERSE
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The parking assist control module has detected the object sensor supply voltage circuit is shorted to ground.
The parking assist control module has detected the object sensor supply voltage circuit is low.
The parking assist control module has detected the object sensor supply voltage circuit is high.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The parking assist is disabled.
• The driver information center displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Parking Assist Description and Operation (with Rear Park Assist, UD7)Parking Assist Description and
Operation (with Front and Rear Park Assist, UFQ)Parking Assist Description and Operation (with
Parallel Parking or Automatic Parking Assist)
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 and X3 harness connectors at the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist
Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 12 V reference circuit terminal 4 X2 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at each of the B78 Rear Object Sensors.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 12 V reference circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the appropriate B78 Rear Object Sensor.
3. Test for infinite resistance between the 12 V reference circuit terminal 1 X3 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at each of the B78 Front Object Sensors.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 12 V reference circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the appropriate B78 Front Object Sensor.
4. Ignition ON.
5. Test for less than 1 V between the 12 V reference circuit terminal 4 X2 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at each of the B78 Rear Object Sensors.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 12 V reference circuit and ground.
• If greater than 1 V, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the appropriate B78 Front Object Sensor.
6. Test for less than 1 V between the 12 V reference circuit terminal 1 X3 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at each of the B78 Front Object Sensors.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 12 V reference circuit and ground.
• If greater than 1 V, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the appropriate B78 Front Object Sensor.
7. Connect the X2 and X3 harness connector at the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control Module,
ignition ON.
8. Verify DTC B1405 is not set.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at each of the B78 Object Sensors.
2. Verify DTC B1405 is not set.
• If DTC B1405 is set
Replace the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control Module.
• If DTC B1405 is not set.
3. Verify the DTC B1405 does not set while connecting the harness connector at each B78 Object
Sensor, one at a time.
• If DTC B1405 does set
Replace the B78 Object Sensor that was connected immediately before DTC B1405.
• If DTC B1405 does not set.
9. All OK.
10. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
DTC B356A: VEHICLE DIRECTION WARNING SWITCH CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Vehicle Direction Warning Switch Circuit Short to Ground
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||
The Vehicle Direction Warning Switch DTC detects a short to ground on the circuit that contains the lane
departure warning and forward collision setting switches. The lane departure warning feature is enabled and
disabled through the lane departure switch located in the left steering wheel controls switch. When enabled, the
frontview camera module will illuminate the indicator located in the switch. The forward collision alert distance
is adjustable using the forward collision switch located in the left steering wheel controls switch. The setting is
shown in the driver information center.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition ON
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The frontview camera module has detected a short to ground for more than 10 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Lane departure and forward collision warning features are disabled.
• Service Front Camera is displayed on the driver information center.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Lane Departure Warning Switch Status parameter while pressing and releasing the
lane departure warning switch. The parameter should change between Open and Closed.
• If the parameter does not change
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
3. Verify the driver information center displays and adjusts forward collision alert setting while repeatedly
pressing and releasing the forward collision switch. The setting should change cycle between far,
medium, near, and off.
• If the display does not change
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, remove the ignition key, open the driver door, disconnect the scan tool, all vehicle systems
OFF, this may take up to 2 min. Disconnect the harness connector at the S70L Steering Wheel Controls
Switch - Left.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the ground circuit terminal 7 and ground.
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Lane Departure Warning Switch Status parameter is Open.
• If not Open
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 2 at the S70L Steering Wheel
Controls Switch - Left and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
• If Open
5. Reconnect the harness at S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left. Ignition ON.
6. Verify the scan tool Lane Departure Warning Switch Status parameter while pressing and releasing the
vehicle direction warning switch. The parameter should change between Open and Closed.
• If the parameter does not change
Test or replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
7. All OK.
Component Test
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground circuit terminal 7.
Replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
3. Test for 1.0k - 1.5k Q between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground circuit terminal 7 while pressing
forward collision alert switch.
Replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
• If between 1.0k - 1.5k Q
4. Test for 3.8k - 5.8k Q between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground circuit terminal 7 while pressing
lane departure warning switch.
Replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Cruise Control Switch Replacement - Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left replacement.
• Refer to Control Module References for module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B390C: LONG RANGE RADAR SENSOR MODULE
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Long Range Radar Sensor Module
Circuit/System Description
After replacement, the radar sensor module - long range must complete an alignment procedure. The alignment
procedure can be completed by driving the vehicle for approximately 30 min.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Module alignment procedure started.
• Vehicle operating on the road.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The radar sensor module - long range was unable to complete alignment process within approximately 30 min
of drive time.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The radar sensor module - long range is disabled.
• Any systems that rely on data from the radar sensor module - long range are disabled.
• A service message may be displayed on the driver information center.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The radar sensor module - long range is successfully aligned.
Diagnostic Aids
The radar sensor module - long range must be securely mounted. Verify it is secured properly in it's mount.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC B390C is not set
• If the DTC is set
1. Perform the Radar Sensor Module - Long Range Learn procedure.
2. Verify DTC B390C is not set after the calibration procedure has been completed.
• If the DTC is set after calibration, replace the B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range.
• If the DTC is not set after calibration
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for radar sensor module - long range replacement, programming, and
setup.
DTC B390D: FRONTVIEW CAMERA MODULE INCORRECT MOUNTING
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Frontview Camera Module Incorrect Mounting
Circuit/System Description
The frontview camera module has determined that it is not properly mounted.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Vehicle operating on the road.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The frontview camera module was unable to see the road ahead.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The frontview camera module is disabled.
• The Active Safety System is disabled.
• Service Driver Assist is displayed on the driver information center and/or heads up display.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The frontview camera module is successfully aligned.
Diagnostic Aids
• The frontview camera module needs to be securely mounted. Verify it is secured properly in it's mount.
• The frontview camera module needs to have a clear field of vision to the road ahead. Check for anything
that can impair the camera's vision.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Forward Collision Alert Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify there are no DTCs set, except for DTC B101E 4B in the B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Rage
or K109 Frontview Camera Module.
• If other DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If no other DTCs are set
NOTE: Before conducting alignment, verify that the K109 Frontview Camera
Module will not have difficulty seeing the lines on the road. If the view of
the K109 Frontview Camera Module is blocked with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or
slush, if the windshield is damaged, or if weather limits visibility, such as
while driving in fog, rain, or snow conditions, the calibration procedure
may not be able to be completed.
3. Perform the calibration procedure. Refer to Front View Camera Module Learn.
4. Verify DTC B390D 66 is not set
• If DTC B390D 66 is set
Replace and calibrate the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
• If DTC B390D 66 is not set
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for frontview camera module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P15F6: FRONT OBJECT DETECTION CONTROL MODULE TORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL
MESSAGE COUNTER INCORRECT
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
Front Object Detection Control Module Torque Request Signal Message Counter Incorrect
Circuit/System Description
The Frontview Camera Module communicates with the Engine Control Module (ECM), requesting engine
speed or torque reduction as necessary.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Engine running.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects that the engine speed and torque modification messages from the Frontview Camera Module
are either corrupted or intermittently missing.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• The Frontview Camera Module sends a serial data message to display the appropriate indicator message
• The Frontview Camera Module features are unavailable.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
• The condition for the DTC is no longer present.
• The engine control module clears the history DTC when a current DTC is not detected in 40 consecutive
drive cycles.
Diagnostic Aid
This is an informational DTC set by the engine control module. It is set to provide an indication that the
Frontview Camera Module will not be able to perform as intended. Diagnose any other DTCs first. During
normal diagnostic and/or repair verification technicians may find that a "Service Driver Assist System" message
may be displayed by the Frontview Camera Module. Do not replace the Frontview Camera Module for this
condition.
If the Service Driver Assist System message is displayed with no DTCs set, perform the following steps:
1. Remove the key from the ignition, open and close the driver's door to turn off retained accessory power,
and wait 60 s.
2. Ignition ON, if the Service Driver Assist message is still present, operate the vehicle at speeds greater
than 15 km/h (10 mph) to complete the self test. The Frontview Camera Module should request the
message to turn off.
3. If the telltales remain on with no DTCs set after the drive cycle, disconnect the battery for at least 60 s,
then reconnect the battery.
4. Operate the vehicle at speeds greater than 40 km/h (25 mph), the Frontview Camera Module should
request all indicators to turn off.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: • DTC P15F6 is an informational DTC.
• Diagnose all other K20 Engine Control Module DTCs prior to DTC P15F6.
1. Verify there are no other DTCs set in the K20 Engine Control Module and that there are no
communication DTCs set in the vehicle.
• If any DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
• If no DTCs are set
2. Clear DTCs and operate the vehicle in the conditions that the customer experienced.
3. Verify DTC P15F6 does not set.
Replace K109 Frontview Camera Module
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming, and setup.
SYMPTOMS - OBJECT DETECTION
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables:
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that
all of the following are true:
• There are no DTCs set.
• The control module can communicate via the serial data link.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to:
Cross Traffic Alert Description and Operation
Forward Collision Alert Description and Operation
Lane Departure Warning Description and Operation
Parking Assist Description and Operation (with Rear Park Assist, UD7)Parking Assist
Description and Operation (with Front and Rear Park Assist, UFQ)Parking Assist
Description and Operation (with Parallel Parking or Automatic Parking Assist)
Rear Vision Camera Description and Operation
Side Blind Zone Alert Description and Operation
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which may affect the operation of the system. Refer to Checking
Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which may
cause the symptom.
• This system can use various sensors that need to be clean in order to function properly. Make sure to
check the following sensors for obstructions:
• Parking assist sensors located in the rear bumper cover
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .
Symptom List
Forward Collision Alert System Malfunction
Lane Departure Warning System Malfunction
Parking Assist System Malfunction
Rear Vision Camera System Malfunction
Rear Cross Traffic Alert System Malfunction
Side Blind Zone Alert System Malfunction
FORWARD COLLISION ALERT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
Vehicle Direction Camera Indicator Circuit Short to Battery
Vehicle Direction Camera Indicator Circuit Low Voltage/Open
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The lane departure warning is enabled and disabled through a switch located in the left steering wheel controls
switch. When enabled, the frontview camera module will illuminate the indicator located in the switch.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The frontview camera module has detected a short to battery or open/high resistance in the control circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Lane departure warning is disabled.
• SERVICE FRONT CAMERA is displayed on the driver information center.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that DTC B356A is not set.
Refer to DTC B356A.
3. Verify the lane departure warning indicator turns ON and OFF while pressing and releasing the lane
departure warning switch.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left,
ignition ON.
NOTE: Verify interior lighting dimming is turned all the way up.
2. Test for 6.2 - 12.0 V between the dimming control circuit terminal 4 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, refer to Interior Backlighting Malfunction .
• If greater than 12.0 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, refer to Interior Backlighting Malfunction .
• If between 6.2 - 12.0 V
3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 5 and B+.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Lane Departure Warning Indicator
parameter ON and OFF with a scan tool.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K109 Frontview Camera Module, ignition
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Ignition OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
5. Test or replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Cruise Control Switch Replacement - Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left replacement.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The ultrasonic parking assist system is designed to identify and notify the driver of an object in the vehicle's
path when moving reverse at speeds of less than 8 km/h (5 MPH). The distance and location of the object is
determined by four object sensors, located in the rear bumper. The parking assist system will notify the driver
using an audible signal through the radio.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The parking assist system is enabled and disabled through the parking assist switch. When enabled, the parking
assist indicator will illuminate.
The switch and indicator are connected to the front and rear parking assist control module. The front and rear
parking assist control module supplies a reference voltage to the parking assist switch. When the switch is
pressed, the signal circuit is grounded. The front and rear parking assist control module can control the park
assist indicator by grounding the control circuit to illuminate the LED which indicates that the system is
enabled.
The front and rear parking assist control module supplies a reference voltage and a low reference to the object
sensors. The sensors will return a signal based on the reflections from objects within range of the sensors.
When an object is detected, the front and rear parking assist control module will send serial data to the radio to
provide an audible alert.
Diagnostic Aids
The following is a brief description of potential causes for a disable condition which may aid in diagnosis:
• Manual Disable - The parking assist system has been disabled through the parking assist switch or audio
system personalization menu.
• Hitch/Object Attached - The front and rear parking assist control module is detecting an object that is
attached to the vehicle. Common items such as a hitch receiver, trailer, or a bicycle rack may cause this
concern. Additionally, damage to the rear of the vehicle or a misaligned sensor may cause this concern. If
the vehicle is damaged in a manner that causes the sensor to detect the bumper itself, the front and rear
parking assist control module will interpret this as an attached object and disable the system. Carefully
inspect the bumper, bumper mounting surface, and sensor retainers before continuing with normal
diagnosis. After the detected cause has been addressed the vehicle must be driven at speed greater than 40
km/h (25 mph).
• Reverse Overspeed - The vehicle is travelling too fast in reverse at speeds of greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).
• Inhibit - The front and rear parking assist control module has lost or received invalid GMLAN signal(s).
• Sensor Disturbance - An outside interference is causing sensor movement. Such interference may be
caused a heavy pounding, like that of a nearby jackhammer, or large changes in pressure, such as a large
truck air brakes.
• Sensor Ring Time - If the sensor fails its own diagnostic initialization the front and rear parking assist
control module will set this error. After the detected cause has been addressed the vehicle must be driven
at speed greater than 40 km/h (25 mph). The following is a list of reasons this cause may have set:
• One or more of the sensors may be blocked by snow, mud, ice, or other debris. This might happen
after going through a car wash in cold weather.
• Silicone insulator surrounding sensor maybe missing, cut, or twisted.
• Improperly installed sensor, sensor maybe be crooked due to a tight wire harness.
• One or more of the sensors may be scratched or the paint maybe chipped.
• Excessive paint thickness on a sensor may cause an excessive sensor ring time. When replacing or
refinishing a sensor, do not apply an excessive amount of paint or clear coat.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Parking Assist Description and Operation (with Rear Park Assist, UD7)Parking Assist Description and
Operation (with Front and Rear Park Assist, UFQ)Parking Assist Description and Operation (with
Parallel Parking or Automatic Parking Assist)
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle ON.
2. Verify the Parking Assist Control Module Parking Assist Switch scan tool parameter changes between
Active and Inactive while pressing and releasing the parking assist switch.
• If the parameter does not change between Active and Inactive
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Parking Assist Switch Circuit Malfunction.
3. Verify the parking assist switch indicator turns On and Off while commanding the Parking Assist Control
Module Parking Assist Switch LED On and Off with a scan tool.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Parking Assist Switch Indicator Circuit Malfunction.
4. Transmission in R.
5. Verify the Parking Assist Control Module Calculated Transmission Range scan tool parameter is Reverse.
• If the parameter is not Reverse
Refer to Backup Lamps Malfunction .
• If the parameter is Reverse
6. Transmission in R.
7. Verify the scan tool Parking Assist System Status parameter displays Enabled.
• If the parameter is not Enabled
Refer to Diagnostic Aids to determine the cause.
8. Vehicle ON, transmission in R for 5 s, then transmission in Drive, no objects near the front or rear of
vehicle, verify there are no beeping tones for park assist.
• If there are park assist beeping tones
Inspect the front park assist senors for proper installation and verify they are clean of debris.
9. Vehicle ON, transmission in R, no objects near the front or rear of vehicle, verify there are no beeping
tones for park assist.
• If there are park assist beeping tones
Inspect the rear park assist senors for proper installation and verify they are clean of debris.
10. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console. It
may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 1 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Parking Assist Switch Status parameter is inactive.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control
Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control Module.
5. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
6. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 6 and the ground circuit terminal 1.
7. Verify that a test lamp turns On and Off when Commanding the Parking Assist Switch On and Off with a
scan tool.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control
Module
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground in the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control
Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control Module
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
8. All OK.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console,
vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for greater than 11 V between terminal 6 and ground.
Test the voltage circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance.
3. Command the Park Assist Switch LED output control ON with the scan tool. Test for greater than 11 V
between the control circuit terminal 6 and the ground circuit terminal 1.
Test the signal circuit for an open/high resistance.
4. Command the Park Assist Switch Indicator Off with the scan tool.
5. Test for less than 1 V between the terminal 6 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater
Test the signal circuit for a short to voltage.
6. If all circuits test normal, replace the S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The parallel parking assist is activated/deactivated by pressing the parking assist switch at speeds below 30
km/h (18 mph). The activated parallel parking assist then searches for an appropriate parking spot. If a spot is
detected, feedback is given to the driver through the indicator in the driver information center. The driver
accepts the decision by stopping the vehicle. The system calculates the optimal path into the parking lot and will
then guide the vehicle into the chosen spot by taking over the steering control from the driver. The driver only
needs to shift gears, brake and accelerate following the instructions given on the driver information center.
The system consists of the 8 parking assist sensors from the normal parking assist located in the front and rear
bumper, and two additional parallel parking assist sensors on the side of the vehicle. The additional parallel
parking assist sensors are used to measure the parking lot size. The parallel parking assist system uses the 8
parking assist sensors to identify objects in the vehicle's path when moving into the parking lot.
Diagnostic Aids
The following is a brief description of potential causes which may aid in diagnosis:
• Possible disengagement reasons:
• Steering input by driver. The driver must not interfere with the steering function during a parking
maneuver.
• Vehicle speed. The vehicle is travelling at speeds of greater than 10 km/h (6 MPH) while
performing a parking maneuver.
• Electronic stability control or anti-lock brakes are activated.
• Failure within the system - check for DTCs.
• Manual Disable - The parking assist system has been disabled through the parking assist switch or audio
system personalization menu.
• Hitch/Object Attached - The parking assist control module is detecting an object that is attached to the
vehicle. Common items such as a hitch receiver, trailer, or a bicycle rack may cause this concern.
Additionally, damage to the rear of the vehicle or a misaligned sensor may cause this concern. If the
vehicle is damaged in a manner that causes the sensor to detect the bumper itself, the parking assist
control module will interpret this as an attached object and disable the system. Carefully inspect the
bumper, bumper mounting surface, and sensor retainers before continuing with normal diagnosis. After
the detected cause has been addressed the vehicle must be driven at speed greater than 40 km/h (25
MPH).
• Sensor Disturbance - An outside interference is causing sensor movement. Such interference may be
caused a heavy pounding, like that of a nearby jackhammer, or large changes in pressure, such as a large
truck's air brakes.
• Sensor Ring Time - If the sensor fails its own diagnostic initialization the parking assist control module
will set this error. After the detected cause has been addressed the vehicle must be driven at speed greater
than 40 km/h (25 MPH). The following is a list of reasons this cause may have set:
• One or more of the sensors may be blocked by snow, mud, ice, or other debris. This might happen
after going through a car wash in cold weather.
• Silicone insulator surrounding sensor maybe missing, cut, or twisted.
• Improperly installed sensor, sensor maybe be crooked due to a tight wire harness.
• One or more of the sensors may be scratched or the paint maybe chipped.
• Excessive paint thickness on a sensor may cause an excessive sensor ring time. When replacing or
refinishing a sensor, do not apply an excessive amount of paint or clear coat.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Object Detection Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Parking Assist Description and Operation (with Parallel Parking or Automatic Parking Assist)
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the correct operation of the parking assist system.
• If the parking assist system malfunctions
Refer to Parking Assist System Malfunction.
• If the parking assist system functions properly
2. Vehicle ON.
3. Verify the scan tool Advanced Parking Assist Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive
while pressing and releasing the parallel parking assist switch.
• If the parameter does not change
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
• If the parameter changes
NOTE: After completing the next step the vehicle might need to be driven in the
forward direction at speed greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
4. Verify the scan tool Park Assist System Status parameter is Enable.
• If the parameter is not Enable
Refer to Diagnostic Aids to determine the cause of the inhibit.
• If the parameter is Enable
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Disconnect the harness connector at the S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console.
3. Verify the scan tool Advanced Parking Assist Switch parameter is Inactive.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist
Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console signal circuit
terminal 7 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control Module.
4. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 7 and ground terminal 1.
5. Verify the scan tool Advanced Parking Assist Switch parameter Active.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control
Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console signal circuit
terminal 7 and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Vehicle OFF
4. Test for less than 2 fi in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the K41 Front and Rear Parking Assist Control Module.
6. Test or replace the S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.
• Refer to Vehicle Stability Control System Switch Replacement for S48E Multifunction Switch - Center
Console replacement
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The side object sensor modules are located on each side of the vehicle behind the rear fascia and are not directly
visible from outside the vehicle. The sensors use radar to determine the presence of objects nearby. When an
object is detected in the rear cross traffic zone, the module will send out a signal through serial data
communication to turn on the visual icons on the rear vision camera screen and also audio chime notification for
the appropriate side. Each sensor is supplied B+ and ground. The right sensor receives an additional ground.
Both sensors communicate independently on the serial data line. The serial data enters the left sensor in a pass-
thru configuration, that connects to the right sensor. The scan tool is able to individually communicate with each
sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
• The rear cross traffic alert system uses the same side blind zone sensors so a malfunction may affect
either or both systems.
• The conditions for disabling the rear cross traffic alert system are captured by DTCs. The drivers
information center will display Service Side Detection System if one of the sensors has failed.
• The rear cross traffic system can be disabled if any off the following occur:
• The driver has selected the Off mode through vehicle personalization menus. The selected mode is
retained over ignition cycles. A driver information center message stating that the Rear Cross
Traffic System Alert Off shall be displayed.
• There is a loss of serial data communication with a sensor or between modules.
• A blockage condition exists (i.e. mud/snow buildup in front of the sensor). A driver information
message stating that the side detection system is temporarily unavailable will be displayed. The rear
cross traffic system transitions back to the normal operating state when the blockage is removed.
Bumper sticks, fascia damage, labels, and heavy rain storms may also cause this condition. The
blockage determination is performed with the vehicle in a drive gear.
• The rear cross traffic alert system will read the GPS latitude and longitude on the serial data bus
and calculate if the vehicle is within a Radio Astronomy zone. These zones are located in Europe
and Japan and require the sensors to be turned off. The "Side Detection System Unavailable"
message will be displayed to the driver when this occurs.
• Because the sensors are identical, they may be swapped from one side of the vehicle to the other in an
attempt to isolate a concern. Sensors should NOT be swapped from one vehicle to another.
• The rear cross traffic alert system is designed to ignore stationary objects; however, the system may
occasionally detect pedestrians, shopping carts, or other objects. This is normal system operation and
does not require service.
• The rear cross traffic alert system may indicate an object if a trailer is attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle
or object is extending out to either side of the vehicle. The system may also temporarily disable the
system and display the "Side Detection System Unavailable" message.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle ON.
2. Verify the scan tool can communicate with the right side object sensor.
• If the scan tool can not communicate with the right side object sensor
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Right Side Object Sensor Malfunction.
3. Verify the scan tool can communicate with the left side object sensor.
• If the scan tool can not communicate with the left side object sensor
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Left Side Object Sensor Malfunction.
4. Verify that the rear cross traffic indicators alerts turn ON and then turn OFF when commanding the
Object Detection Alert Indicators ON and OFF with a scan tool.
1. Verify the system is enabled.
• If disabled, refer to diagnostic aids for cause of disable.
• If enabled, test or replace the radio.
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power
down. Disconnect the harness connector at the Side Object Sensor - Left.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.
• If 10 О or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the Side Object Sensor - Left.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power
down.
5. Test for less than 2 Q in each of the serial data circuits end to end between the control module harness
connector terminal 2 and the DLC terminal 1.
• If 2 О or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
6. Replace Side Object Sensor - Left.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power
down. Disconnect the harness connector at the Side Object Sensor - Right.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the following ground circuit terminals and ground.
• Terminal 3
• Terminal 8
• If 10 О or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the Side Object Sensor - Right.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power
down.
5. Test for less than 2 Q in each of the serial data circuits end to end between the control module harness
connector terminal 7 and the DLC terminal 1.
• If 2 О or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
6. Replace Side Object Sensor - Right.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.
Refer to Control Module References control module replacement, programming and setup
REAR VISION CAMERA SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
When the transmission is placed into REVERSE, a serial message is sent to the K74 Human Machine Interface
Control Module indicating that camera operation is requested. Ignition voltage and ground are supplied to the
rearview camera. The rearview camera sends video information to the radio through a video signal + and a
video signal - circuit. A grounded shielding also wraps the video signal circuits to reduce electronic interference
which may degrade the video signal and cause a distorted or otherwise degraded image.
Diagnostic Aids
A poor video image can be caused by ice, snow, and mud buildup on the lens of the rearview camera. Also,
extreme lighting conditions can affect performance, such as operating in the dark or with bright sunlight shining
on the camera. Extreme high or low temperatures can also affect the image quality. An open in the shield of the
video signal circuit can also cause a distorted screen.
Terminal fretting or incorrectly seated connectors can cause a poor image displayed condition. Check the circuit
terminals for fretting or incorrectly seated connector. If the condition is intermittent or cannot be duplicated,
disconnect the connectors and add Nyogel lubricant 760G. This procedure will correct the high resistance
condition due to terminal fretting corrosion.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Object Detection Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Rear Vision Camera Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: If the condition is intermittent or cannot be duplicated, disconnect the
connectors and add Nyogel lubricant 760G. This procedure will correct the high
resistance condition due to terminal fretting corrosion.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC B2545 is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B2545 .
• If the DTC is not set
3. Verify the rearview camera there is no debris on the lens and that the bezel or bezel seal is not damaged.
• If debris are found on the lens
Clean the lens. If the lens, bezel, or bezel seal are damaged, replace as necessary.
• If no debris on the lens
4. Vehicle ON, transmission in REVERSE.
5. Verify the backup lamps are On.
• If the backup lamps are not ON
6. Engine running, transmission in REVERSE.
7. Verify a clear rear vision image is displayed on the radio.
• If a clear image is not displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
8. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification must be performed before Circuit/System Testing.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B87 Rearview Camera. It may take up to 2 min for
all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 4 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ignition circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, test or replace the KR74 Ignition Run Relay.
• If the test lamp illuminates
5. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K74 Human Machine Interface Module, Vehicle
in Service Mode.
6. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• Signal (+) circuit terminal 5 at the B87 Rearview Camera.
• Signal (-) circuit terminal 6 at the B87 Rearview Camera.
• If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
7. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• Signal (+) circuit terminal 5 at the B87 Rearview Camera.
• Signal (-) circuit terminal 6 at the B87 Rearview Camera.
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
8. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal (+) circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
9. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal (-) circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater
Test the signal circuit for an open/high resistance.
10. Replace the B87 Rearview Camera.
11. Engine running, transmission in REVERSE, verify a clear rear vision image is displayed on the A11
Radio.
• If a clear rear vision image is not displayed on the A11 Radio
Replace the K74 Human Machine Interface Module.
12. All Ok.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | |||||||||||||||||||||||||
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description |
The side blind zone alert system detects and reports objects on either side of the vehicle, within a specified blind
spot zone. The system alerts with a visual indicator placed on each side rear view mirror, to the presence of
objects that may not be visible in the inside rearview mirror and outside rearview mirrors. Although this system
is intended to help drivers avoid lane change crashes, it does not replace driver vision and therefore should be
considered a lane change aid. Even with the side blind zone system, the driver must check carefully for objects
outside of the reporting zone (e.g., a fast approaching vehicle) before changing lanes. In the event that the
system senses a malfunction through its diagnostic routines, the system will be disabled and the driver will be
visually notified.
When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone while driving forward, independent if passing a vehicle
or being passed, an amber warning symbol will light up in the appropriate outside mirror. This indicates that it
may be unsafe to change lanes. If the driver then activates the turn signal, the amber warning symbol starts
flashing as an extra warning not to change lanes.
Side blind zone alert is active when the vehicle is out of park or the parking brake is off on manual transmission
vehicles and from speeds of 10 km/h (6.2 MPH) up to 140 km/h (87 MPH). Driving faster deactivates the
system, indicated by dimly lighting the warning symbols in the mirrors. Driving under this speed again will turn
off the warning symbols. If then a vehicle is detected in the blind zone, the warning symbols will turn on
normally on the appropriate side. When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays will briefly come on
to indicate that the system is operating.
Diagnostic Aids
• The conditions for disabling the side blind zone alert system are captured by DTCs. The drivers
information center will display Service Side Detection System if one of the sensors has failed.
• The side blind zone system can be disabled if any off the following occur:
• The driver has selected the Off mode through vehicle personalization menus. The selected mode is
retained over ignition cycles. A driver information center message stating that the side blind zone
system is off shall be displayed and the outside mirror indicators will be OFF.
• There is a loss of serial data communication with a sensor or between modules.
• A blockage condition exists (i.e. mud/snow buildup in front of the sensor). A driver information
message stating that the side detection system is temporarily unavailable will be displayed. The rear
cross traffic system transitions back to the normal operating state when the blockage is removed.
Bumper sticks, fascia damage, labels, and heavy rain storms may also cause this condition. The
blockage determination is performed with the vehicle in a drive gear.
• The side blind zone alert system will read the GPS latitude and longitude on the serial data bus and
calculate if the vehicle is within a Radio Astronomy zone. These zones are located in Europe and
Japan and require the sensors to be turned off. The "Side Detection System Unavailable" message
will be displayed to the driver when this occurs.
• Because the sensors are identical, they may be swapped from one side of the vehicle to the other in an
attempt to isolate a concern. Sensors should NOT be swapped from one vehicle to another.
• The side blind zone system is designed to ignore stationary objects; however, the system may
occasionally detect guard rails, signs, trees, shrubs, or other stationary objects as an object in the blind
zone. This is normal system operation and does not require service.
• The side blind zone system may indicate an object in the blind zone if a trailer is attached to the vehicle,
or a bicycle or object is extending out to either side of the vehicle. The system may also temporarily
disable the system and display the "Side Detection System Unavailable" message.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle ON.
2. Verify the scan tool can communicate with the left side object sensor.
• If the scan tool can not communicate with the left side object sensor
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Left Side Object Sensor Malfunction.
• If the scan tool can communicate with the left side object sensor
3. Verify the scan tool can communicate with the right side object sensor.
• If the scan tool can not communicate with the right side object sensor
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Right Side Object Sensor Malfunction.
4. Vehicle OFF, vehicle ON.
5. Verify that the side blind zone alert system indicator located in the appropriate outside rearview mirror
turns ON and OFF when commanding the appropriate Object Detection Alert Indicator On and Off with a
scan tool.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Side Object Indicator Malfunction.
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. Disconnect the harness connector at the B218L Side Object
Sensor Module - Left. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 fi between ground circuit terminal 8 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. Disconnect the It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle
systems to power down.
5. Test for less than 2 Q between the serial data circuit terminal 2 and the DLC terminal 1.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
6. Replace B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. Disconnect the harness connector at the B218R Side Object
Sensor Module - Right. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Q between the following ground circuit terminals and ground.
• Terminal 3
• Terminal 8
• If 10 Q or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 5 and ground.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Test for less than 2 Q in the B+ circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
• If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
• If the test lamp illuminates
4. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
5. Test for less than 2 Q between the serial data circuit terminal 7 and the DLC terminal 1.
• If 2 Q or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
6. Replace B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector for the appropriate A9
Outside Rearview Mirror. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
• X510 - Driver Door Harness to Outside Rearview Mirror
• X610 - Passenger Door Harness to Outside Rearview Mirror
2. Test for less than 10 fi between the ground circuit terminal 11 and ground.
• If 10 fi or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 fi in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Vehicle ON, connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 15 and the ground circuit terminal
11.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Object Detection Alert Indicators ON and
OFF with a scan tool.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate B218 Side Object Sensor Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 fi in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 fi or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 fi, replace the B218 Side Object Sensor Module.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B218 Side Object Sensor Module, Vehicle
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, replace the B218 Side Object Sensor Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
5. Test or replace the appropriate E17 Outside Rearview Mirror Glass.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
|
Diagnostic Fault Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Circuit/System Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
The lane departure warning system is enabled and disabled through the lane departure switch. When enabled,
the lane departure warning indicator will illuminate. The switch and indicator are connected to the Frontview
Camera Module. The Frontview Camera module supplies a reference voltage to the lane departure switch.
When the switch is pressed, the signal circuit is grounded. When enabled, the Frontview Camera Module will
illuminate the indicator located in the switch when lane departure warning system is enabled.
When the system is operating and can detect the lane markings, the Frontview Camera Module will request via
serial data communications that the instrument cluster illuminates the green lane departure ready-to-assist
indicator. If the Frontview Camera Module detects that the vehicle unintentionally crosses a lane marking
without the turn signal being used, the module will request the vehicle direction display to flash the amber lane
departure warning indicator. An audible warning will also sound three times when the amber lane departure
warning indicator in the vehicle direction display is flashing.
Diagnostic Aids
Certain factors will affect the operation of the lane departure warning system. When the system is operating
properly, the green lane departure warning indicator will illuminate on the instrument cluster. This indicates that
all of the required operating conditions to permit lane departure warning have been met. The green lane
departure warning indicator will not appear when the system is having difficulty seeing the lines on the road or
if the view of the front view camera is blocked with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, if the windshield is damaged,
or when weather limits visibility, such as while driving in fog, rain, or snow conditions. This is normal
operation, the vehicle does not need service. Additionally, lane departure warnings may occasionally occur in a
properly operating vehicle due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in the road, or other road imperfections. This is
normal system operation and the vehicle does not require service. The driver information center may also
display Lane Departure System Unavailable due to the temporary conditions listed above.
The driver information center may also display LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE
when the front camera module and bracket assembly is not properly installed. It may be helpful to verify the
correct installation of the front camera and bracket assembly. Calibrate the front camera module after repair.
Refer to Front View Camera Module Learn
Additionally, the Front View Camera Disable History can give useful hints about what affected the operation of
the lane departure warning system. For the Front View Camera Disable History, refer to DTC B1011.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Connector End View Reference
Description and Operation
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Refer to Diagnostic Aids before performing Circuit/System Verification.
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the K43 Power Steering Control Module (if equipped) and the K17 Electronic Brake Control
Module do not have any DTCs set.
• If any DTC is set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
• If the DTC is not set
3. Verify that DTC B356A is not set.
• If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B356A.
4. Verify that DTC B0987 is not set.
Refer to DTC B0987.
5. Verify that DTC B1011 is not set.
Refer to DTC B1011.
6. Verify the scan tool Frontview Camera Disable History 1 parameter does not have a current Malfunction
• If the parameter is Malfunction
Refer to Diagnostic Aids.
7. Verify the scan tool Frontview Camera System Status parameter is Normal.
• If the parameter is Undefined or Malfunction
Refer to Diagnostic Aids.
8. Verify the scan tool Lane Departure Warning Switch Status parameter changes between Open and Closed
while pressing and releasing the lane departure warning switch.
• If the parameter does not change between Open and Closed
Refer to Lane Departure Warning Switch Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing.
9. Verify the scan tool Lane Departure Warning Switch indicator turns on and off while pressing and
releasing the lane departure warning switch.
Refer to Lane Departure Warning Switch Indicator Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing.
10. Verify the area of the K109 Frontview Camera Module for contamination.
Clean the windshield.
• If it does not need to be cleaned
11. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left. It may
take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 5 Q between the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left ground circuit terminal 7
and ground.
• If 5 Q or greater
1. Test for less than 2 Q in the ground circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Lane Departure Warning Switch Status parameter is Open.
• If not Open
1. Ignition OFF. Disconnect the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left signal circuit
terminal 2 and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
• If Open
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 2 and the ground circuit terminal 7.
6. Verify DTC B356A 02 sets.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K109 Frontview
Camera Module, ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the signal circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
7. Test or replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left,
ignition ON.
NOTE: Verify interior lighting dimming is turned all the way up.
2. Test for 6.2 - 12.0 V between the dimming control circuit terminal 4 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, refer to Interior Backlighting Malfunction .
• If greater than 12.0 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V, refer to Interior Backlighting Malfunction .
• If between 6.2 - 12.0 V
3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 5 and the control voltage circuit terminal 4.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Lane Departure Warning Indicator
parameter ON and OFF with a scan tool.
• If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K109 Frontview Camera Module, ignition
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
• If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
• If less than 1 V
3. Ignition OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 Q in the control circuit end to end.
• If 2 Q or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
• If less than 2 Q, replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
• If the test lamp is always ON
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
• If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
• If infinite resistance, replace the K109 Frontview Camera Module.
• If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
5. Test or replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Refer to Cruise Control Switch Replacement - Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left replacement.
• Refer to Control Module References for Frontview Camera Module replacement, programming and
setup.
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
FORWARD RANGE RADAR SENSOR REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 8: Forward Range Radar Sensor Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Remove Front Bumper Fascia. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Removal and Installation | |
|
1 |
Forward Range Radar Sensor Fastener (Qty: 3) CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Tighten 6 N.m (53 lb in) |
| ||||||
|
ACTIVE SAFETY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 9: Active Safety Control Module Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Remove Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel (Left Side). Refer to Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel Replacement (Left Side) | |
|
1 |
Active Safety Control Module Procedure
|
| ||||
|
FORWARD COLLISION ALERT DISPLAY REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 10: Forward Collision Alert Display Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Remove Instrument Panel Extension. Refer to Instrument Panel Extension Replacement | |
|
1 |
Forward Collision Alert Display Bolt (Qty: 2) CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in) |
|
2 |
Forward Collision Alert Display Procedure Disconnect the electrical connector. |
PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 11: Parking Assist Control Module Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Remove Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel (Left Side). Refer to Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel Replacement (Left Side) | |
|
1 |
Parking Assist Control Module Nut CAUTION: Refer to Caution . Tighten 5 N.m (44 lb in) |
|
2 |
Parking Assist Control Module Retainer |
|
3 |
Parking Assist Control Module Procedure
|
| ||||
|
ADVANCED PARKING ASSIST ALARM SENSOR REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 12: Advance Parking Assist Alarm Sensor |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Remove Front Bumper Fascia Energy Absorber. Refer to Front Bumper Fascia Energy Absorber Replacement | |
|
1 |
Advance Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Procedure
NOTE: Do not |
| ||||
|
SIDE OBJECT SENSING ALERT MODULE REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 13: Side Object Sensing Alert Module |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Remove Rear Bumper Fascia. Refer to Rear Bumper Fascia Removal and Installation | |
|
1 |
Side Object Sensing Alert Module Procedure
|
REAR PARKING ASSIST ALARM SENSOR REPLACEMENT
 |
|
Fig. 14: Rear Parking Assist Alarm Sensor |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedure Remove Rear Bumper Energy Absorber. Refer to Rear Bumper Energy Absorber Replacement | |
|
1 |
Rear Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Procedure
NOTE: Do not Excess paint |
| ||||||
|
FRONT VIEW CAMERA REPLACEMENT |
 |
|
Fig. 15: Front View Driver Information Camera |
| ||||||
|
REARVIEW DRIVER INFORMATION CAMERA REPLACEMENT | ||||||
 |
|
Fig. 16: Rearview Driver Information Camera |
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
Preliminary Procedures
| |
|
1 |
Rearview Driver Information Camera Procedure Release the plastic retaining tabs. |
FRONT VIEW CAMERA MODULE LEARN
Calibration
For North American SPS users, Calibration MAY NOT start automatically and will need to be initiated with
GDS2. For European SPS users, Calibration MAY start automatically and will not need to be initiated with
GDS2.
The calibration process for the front view camera system is necessary when a front view camera module is
replaced by a new one. This process is required when only replacing the windshield and the front view camera
module has been mounted again properly. This process shall be completed within 3 - 5 minutes when the ideal
driving conditions are met. If conditions are not met correct, the front view camera module shall continuously
run the service point calibration until successfully completed. This process shall work across ignition cycles and
shall not be required to be re-initialized at start up. If the Lane Departure Warning Switch is pressed during
calibration, the indictor will flash momentarily and then stay out - this is normal operation.
To calibrate the front camera, operate the vehicle in the following conditions until the calibration is complete:
• Clean windshield.
• Avoid lane changes.
• Maintain vehicle speeds between 56 - 90 km/h (35 - 56 MPH).
• Ensure the road contains visible references (well defined lane markings, curbs, etc.).
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Place the transmission in Park (if applicable)
3. Install scan tool
4. Navigate to the module diagnostics menu
5. Select Frontview Camera Module
6. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu Item
7. Select the Frontview Camera Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
8. Drive the vehicle to complete calibration.
Once the procedure is complete, the amber indicator will turn off . Shortly after the green ready to assist
light should turn on as long as all conditions are met for normal operation. The system is then ready to assist.
If Slow to Calibrate
One or more of the following conditions may increase the length of time required to complete the self-
calibration procedure:
• Heavy traffic
• Stop and go traffic
• Mountain roads
• Curves in roadway
• Poor contrast lane markings
• Botts' Dots type lane markings
• Operating the vehicle speed is greater than 90 km/h (56 MPH)
• Driving through snow or fog, or driving directly into the sun
• Camera not properly installed. Verify it is snapped into tabs and is secure. Refer to Front View Camera
Replacement.
No Calibration
Conditions that will prevent completion of the self-calibration procedure:
• Dirty windshield glass or obstruction on windshield
• Operating the vehicle with speed less than 56 km/h (35 MPH)
• No visible lane markings
• Severe weather where lane markings cannot be seen
• Camera not properly installed. Verify it is snapped into tabs and is secure. Refer to Front View Camera
Replacement.
PARKING ASSIST SENSOR LEARN CALIBRATION
Calibration
The calibration process for the Parking Assist system is necessary when a parking assist sensor has been
replaced or improperly learned.
To calibrate the Parking Assist sensors:
NOTE: Parking Assist Sensors should be at or near room temperature
1. Select Parking Assist Sensor Learn in the scan tool
2. Operate the vehicle in the following conditions until the calibration is complete:
• Nothing is within 50 cm of the parking assist sensors
• Ensure the parking assist sensors are clean
3. Vehicle OFF, scan tool disconnected, all doors closed, all accessories OFF, open and close driver door. It
may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
4. Verify Parking Assist system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs set.
No Calibration
Conditions that will prevent completion of the self-calibration procedure:
• Dirty or contaminated obstruction on the parking assist sensor
• Objects are within 50 cm of the parking assist sensors
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
RADAR SENSOR MODULE - LONG RANGE LEARN
NOTE: "Adaptive Cruise Temporarily Unavailable" service message may be displayed if
this calibration procedure has to be performed. The radar may have become
misaligned.
After replacing and programming the Long Range Radar Sensor Module, it is necessary to perform a calibration
procedure to align the radar. This is indicated to the technician by DTC B101E 4B. Calibration is performed
while driving the vehicle with the scantool connected. Calibration is initialized using a scantool and the scantool
must remain connected until calibration is complete. During this time the "Service Driver Assist" service
message will be displayed. Once the procedure is complete, the service message will turn off and normal
operation will resume.
Calibration is not required if the existing module was reprogrammed only. Calibration needs to be conducted if
the module was replaced or removed and re-secured.
If calibration is not successful, it could be due to improper driving environment, module and bracket assembly
bent out of position or incorrect module mounting. A typical driving environment is usually sufficient to
calibrate the module within 10 - 30 minutes. The module needs to be mounting properly in the bracket and
aimed straight ahead within +/- 3 degrees.
Calibration Procedure
1. Verify no other DTCs except for B101E 4B Electronic Control Unit Software are present.
• If other DTCs are present
Refer to service information and repair as necessary.
2. Prior to driving the vehicle make sure the surface in front of the radar (vehicle emblem) is clean. Also
verify the mounting area is not damaged and allows the module to face the intended direction.
3. Prepare scantool to be mobile for Long Range Radar Calibration driving phase. The scantool needs to
stay connected during the driving phase of the calibration.
4. Engine running.
5. Initiate calibration using Long Range Radar Sensor Module Learn in the scantool. The driver information
display will display "Service Driver Assist" message during calibration.
NOTE: Do not back out of screen or press any other buttons until the calibration
is complete.
6. Drive the vehicle within the following conditions for 10 - 30 minutes or until calibration is complete. The
"Service Driver Assist" message will turn off when calibration is complete.
• Drive at speeds greater than 56 kph (35 mph)
• Minimize tight curves
• Avoid extreme acceleration or deceleration
• Follow one or multiple vehicles. (typical vehicle traffic is sufficient, but vehicles 30 - 50 m (100 -
165 ft) away are most effective at decreasing the calibration time)
• Drive in an environment that has stationary objects on the side of the road (street signs, guard rails,
mail boxes, fences, etc)
7. Verify proper calibration by observing that the "Service Driver Assist" message turns off within 10 - 30
minutes of normal driving.
• If "Service Driver Assist" message fails to turn off
1. Verify correct operating conditions were met
• If incorrect driving environment, refer to If Slow to Calibrate and repeat calibration
procedure following recommended operating conditions.
• If correct driving environment
2. Verify DTC B390C 66 Incorrect Mounting is not set
• If B390C 66 is set
Refer to DTC B390C.
• If B390C 66 is not set
• If "Service Driver Assist" message turns off
8. Drive at speeds greater than 40 kph (25 mph) and verify engagement of Adaptive Cruise Control (cruise
control icon will change from white to green)
• If Adaptive Cruise Control will not engage
Check vehicle for DTCs and correct as required.
9. All OK.
If Slow to Calibrate
The ideal calibration condition is driving on a freeway or two lane road with medium traffic. One or more of the
following conditions may increase the length of time required to complete the self-calibration procedure:
• Heavy traffic - following too close behind vehicles for long periods (more than 40 min)
• Stop and go or very slow traffic
• Mountain roads
• Constant sharp curves in roadway
• No traffic - if no traffic is available, may need to add vehicle ahead to support calibration
• Limited or no stationary structures on side of the road - need structures such as street signs, guard rails,
mail boxes, parked cars, etc.
• Driving in tunnels
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The ultrasonic parking assist system is designed to identify and notify the driver of an object in the vehicles
path when reversing at speeds of less than 8 km/h (5 MPH). The distance and location of the object is
determined by 4 object sensors located in the rear bumper. The parking assist system will notify the driver using
an audible beep signal through the radio rear speakers.
The parking assist system is made up of the following components:
• Parking assist control module
• Rear object alarm sensors
The parking assist control module provides an 8 V reference and a low reference to the four object alarm
sensors. The parking assist control module receives individual signals from each of the four sensors and
determines the location and distance of an object based on these inputs. When an object is detected, the parking
assist control module will send a data message via CAN-Bus to the radio requesting an audible alert.
The object alarm sensors are located in the rear bumper of the vehicle. The sensors are used to determine the
distance between an object and the bumper. Each sensor emits an ultrasonic frequency which is reflected off any
object located behind the vehicle. These reflections are received by the sensors. The time difference between the
emission of the frequency and when the reflection is received is known as sensor echo time, it is used to
determine the distance to the object. The sensors report this information to the parking assist control module.
Rear Parking Assist Operation
When the vehicle is first placed into reverse there will be one audible beep through the rear speakers, to indicate
that the system is working. If rear speakers are inoperable no audible signals will occur.
When backing up at speed of less than 8 km/h (5 MPH), the system is constantly monitoring for object of
interest located behind the vehicle. The rear parking assist system can detect objects greater than 7.6 cm (3 in)
wide and 25.4 cm (10 in) tall. The system cannot detect objects below the bumper, underneath the vehicle. If an
object is detected within 2.5 m (8 ft) there will be a audible beep notification out of both rear speakers based
upon the distance to the object. As the vehicle gets closer to an object, the time between the beeps become
shorter.
If the vehicle stops in a range zone the beeping will stop after 5 s. When the distance between the object and the
vehicle changes, beeping will start again.
If the rear parking assist system detects a malfunction the single audible beep will not chime when put into
reverse along with a DTC being stored. The object alarm module will send a serial data message to the
instrument panel cluster to display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST message on the driver information center.
Parking Assist System Driver Information Center Messages
The driver information center displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST when the parking assist control module
detects a malfunction in the rear parking assist system and the system is disabled. The driver information center
also displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST when a loss of communication occurs with the parking assist control
module.
The PARK ASSIST OFF message is displayed in the driver information center when the parking assist system
is disabled due to conditions that disable or inhibit the system. The parking assist control module requests the
driver information center display PARK ASSIST OFF when it detects that one of the following conditions:
• The rear parking assist system is manually disabled by the vehicle operator through the audio system
personalization menu.
• The park brake is applied or not fully released.
• An object is attached to the rear of the vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle rack, trailer hitch receiver, or tow
bar. Also, an object extending beyond a lowered endgate will disable the system.
• The parking assist sensors are covered by snow, mud, dirt or ice.
• The vehicle bumper is damaged.
• Excessive paint thickness on a replacement parking assist sensor.
• The parking assist sensors are disrupted by vibrations, like those caused by a large nearby vehicle or from
heavy equipment such as a jackhammer.
The parking assist system is designed to identify and notify the driver of an object in the vehicle path when
moving forward or reversing at speeds of less than 8 km/h (5 MPH). The distance and location of the object is
determined by 8 object sensors: 4 located in the rear bumper and 4 located in the front bumper. The parking
assist system will notify the driver using an audible beep signal through the radio.
The parking assist system is made up of the following components:
• Advanced parking assist control module
• Front object alarm sensors
• Rear object alarm sensors
• Parking assist switch
• Parking assist switch indicator
The advanced parking assist control module provides a reference voltage and a low reference to the 8 object
alarm sensors. The advanced parking assist control module receives individual signals from each of the 8
sensors and determines the location and distance of an object based on these inputs. When an object is detected,
the advanced parking assist control module will send a data message via CAN-Bus to the radio requesting an
audible alert.
The object alarm sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers of the vehicle. The sensors are used to
determine the distance between an object and the bumper. Each sensor emits an ultrasonic frequency which is
reflected off any object located in front of or behind the vehicle. These reflections are received by the sensors.
The time difference between the emission of the frequency and when the reflection is received is known as
sensor echo time, it is used to determine the distance to the object. The sensors report this information to the
advanced parking assist control module.
The parking assist can be activated and deactivated by pressing the parking assist switch. By engaging the
reverse gear the parking assist can also be activated. By subsequently pressing the parking assist switch the
parking assist can be disabled again.
The indicator in the parking assist switch shows the status of the parking assist. If the lamp is ON, the parking
assist is activated.
Parking Assist Operation
When an object is within the measuring range of the sensor, the ultrasonic pulse is reflected and is received by
the sending or a neighboring sensor. The sensor converts this signal into a voltage signal and sends this signal to
the parking assist control module. The advanced parking assist control module evaluates the received sensor
signals. As soon as an object is within the measuring range, the advanced parking assist control module sends a
message via CAN-Bus to the radio in order to give out the acoustic distance signal.
The parking assist system can detect objects greater than 7.6 cm (3 in) wide and 25.4 cm (10 in) tall. The system
cannot detect objects below the bumper, underneath the vehicle. If an object is detected, one of the following
will occur:
• The measuring range of the front object alarm sensors is between 30 - 120 cm (11.8 - 47.2 in). From a
distance of 120 cm (47.2 in), the acoustic signal is active. The frequency of the beep sound increases with
decreasing distance. From a distance less than 30 cm (11.8 in), the sound becomes continuous.
• The measuring range of the rear object alarm sensors is between 30 - 250 cm (11.8 - 98.4 in). From a
distance of 250 cm (98.4 in), the acoustic signal is active. The frequency of the beep sound increases with
decreasing distance. From a distance less than 30 cm (11.8 in), the sound becomes continuous.
The parking assist can be activated and deactivated by pressing the parking assist switch. When REVERSE gear
is selected, park assist automatically is engaged for both front and rear sensors. When the vehicle is put into
DRIVE from REVERSE the front assist sensors will be active up to speeds of 8 km/h (5 MPH) to assist with
parking maneuvers. Once the vehicle is above 8 km/h (5 MPH) the front sensors are disabled and will not be re-
enabled until either REVERSE gear is selected or the parking assist switch is pressed to activate the system.
Once the parking assist switch is pressed during a key cycle the front sensors become active at speeds under 8
km/h (5 MPH). If the park assist switch is pressed again in the same key cycle the message "Park Assist Off"
will be displayed in the driver information center if the vehicle speed is under 8 km/h (5 MPH) and front
sensors detect an object within 120 cm (47.2 in). The LED indicator on the parking assist switch provides the
ON/OFF state of the system. If the indicator is ON, the system is active and ready to assist.
The advanced parking assist control module carries out a self test and monitors the sensors for electrical and
mechanical faults. Monitored is the power supply of each sensor and the sensor signals, which need to alter
when the vehicle moves. If this is not the case, the sensor is acoustically blocked or faulty. Mud, ice and snow
may cause obstruction of the function of the sensors. Besides that the advanced parking assist control module
checks whether the correct type of sensor is installed. If any of these tests fails, a DTC with corresponding
symptom is set, the parking assist is deactivated and the parking assist indicator in the instrument panel cluster
is activated.
Parking Assist System Driver Information Center Messages
The driver information center displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST when the advanced parking assist control
module detects a malfunction in the parking assist system and the system is disabled. The driver information
center also displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST when a loss of communication occurs with the advanced parking
assist control module.
The PARK ASSIST OFF message is displayed in the driver information center when the parking assist system
is disabled due to conditions that disable or inhibit the system. The advanced parking assist control module
requests the driver information center display PARK ASSIST OFF when it detects that one of the following
conditions:
• The parking assist system is manually disabled using the parking assist switch.
• An object is attached to the rear of the vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle rack, trailer hitch receiver, or tow
bar. Also, an object extending beyond a lowered tailgate will disable the system.
• The parking assist sensors are covered by snow, mud, dirt, slush, or ice.
• The vehicle bumper is damaged.
• Excessive paint thickness on a replacement parking assist sensor.
• The parking assist sensors are disrupted by vibrations, like those caused by a large nearby vehicle or from
heavy equipment such as a jackhammer.
PARKING ASSIST DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (WITH PARALLEL PARKING OR
AUTOMATIC PARKING ASSIST)
NOTE: The parallel parking assist system can steer the vehicle automatically. Be aware
that, in some unlikely situations, the vehicle steering wheel and wheels/tires
may move without warning. Please be especially aware of situations when
vehicle front tires are lifted above the ground on a vehicle hoist as the wheels
could move without warning. Please exercise special care if any work is
performed with the vehicle running and in gear while elevated on a hoist.
In addition to the 8 ultrasonic sensors used for front and rear park assist, the parallel parking assist system uses,
additional sensors located on the front fascia and/or two additional sensors located on the rear fascia. These
sensors face toward the side of the vehicle and are used to aid the driver in positioning the vehicle in a parallel
parking maneuver.
NOTE: Any malfunction in the Parking Assist system may disable parallel parking.
Parallel parking will NOT operate if the Parking Assist system is disabled.
Parallel Parking Assist Components
The parking assist system is made up of the following components:
• Parking assist control module
• Front parking assist sensors
• Rear parking assist sensors
• Parking assist side sensors
• Parallel Parking assist switch
• Parking assist switch indicator (if equipped)
The parking assist control module provides a reference voltage and a low reference to the parking assist sensors.
The parking assist control module receives individual signals from each of the sensors and determines the
location and distance of an object based on these inputs. When an object is detected, the parking assist control
module will send a serial data message to the radio requesting an audible alert or to the memory seat module for
a haptic alert (if equipped). Refer to the owner's manual for more information on Vehicle Personalization.
The parking assist sensors are located in the bumpers of the vehicle. The sensors are used to determine the
distance between an object and the bumper. Each sensor emits an ultrasonic frequency which is reflected off any
object located in front of or behind the vehicle. These reflections are received by the sensors. The time
difference between the emission of the frequency and when the reflection is received is known as sensor ring
time, it is used to determine the distance to the object. The sensors report this information to the parking assist
control module. The parking assist sensors detect object to approximately 2.5 m (8 ft). The parking assist side
sensors (located on the side of the vehicle) detect objects to approximately 4.5 m (15 ft).
The parking assist can be enabled and disabled by pressing the parking assist switch. By engaging the reverse
gear the parking assist can be activated. By pressing the parking assist switch the parking assist can be disabled
again.
The indicator in the parking assist switch shows the status of the parking assist. If the indicator is ON, the
parking assist is enabled.
The parallel parking assist can be activated and deactivated by pressing the parallel parking assist switch.
Parking Assist Operation
For traditional parking assist operation, refer to Parking Assist description and operation
Parallel Parking Assist Operation
The parallel parking assist system aids the driver when attempting a parallel parking maneuver. The parking
assist control module uses the parallel parking assist sensors located in the front fascia, along with the front and
rear parking assist sensors, to guide the driver into a parking space.
The parallel parking assist switch is used to initiate the parallel parking assist system when traveling at speeds
below approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) (refer to owners manual for exact speed). While driving along a row of
vehicles in which the driver wishes to parallel park, the parallel parking assist switch is pressed. This will
enable the parallel parking assist system and the parking assist control module will begin seeking potential
parking spots using the parallel parking assist sensor.
When a parking spot of suitable size is found, the parking assist control module will display a stop message on
the driver information center. The driver accepts the decision by stopping the vehicle. The system calculates the
optimal path into the parking lot and will then guide the vehicle into the chosen spot by taking over the steering
control from the driver. The driver only needs to shift gears, brake and accelerate following the instructions
given on the driver information center. Once in the spot, the parking assist control module uses the front and
rear park assist sensors to center the vehicle in the parking spot.
If the parallel parking assist system is unable to complete a parallel parking maneuver, a message indicating that
the maneuver has been aborted will be displayed on the driver information center.
Parking Assist System Driver Information Center Messages
The driver information center displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST when the parking assist control module
detects a malfunction in the parking assist system and the system is disabled. The driver information center also
displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST when a loss of communication occurs with the parking assist control
module.
The PARK ASSIST OFF message is displayed in the driver information center when the parking assist system
is disabled due to conditions that disable or inhibit the system. The parking assist control module requests the
driver information center display PARK ASSIST OFF when it detects that one of the following conditions:
• The parking assist system is manually disabled using the park assist switch.
• An object is attached to the vehicle which is interfering with the park assist system field of view. Example
items are a trailer, bicycle rack, trailer hitch receiver, tow bar, aftermarket front license plate frame, or a
bent front license plate.
• The parking assist sensors are covered by snow, mud, dirt or ice.
• The vehicle bumper is damaged.
• Excessive paint thickness on a replacement parking assist sensor.
• The parking assist sensors are disrupted by vibrations, like those caused by a large nearby vehicle or from
heavy equipment such as a jackhammer.
The lane departure warning system is a convenience feature of the front view camera that issues a warning
when the system detects that the vehicle has unintentionally crossed a lane marking. The front view camera is
located behind the windshield, looking out at the road ahead and detecting any lane markings. When the vehicle
unintentionally leaves a detected lane, a visual and audible alert is given to the driver.
The lane departure warning system is made up of the following components:
• Front view camera module
• Lane departure warning switch
• Instrument cluster/Vehicle Direction Display
• Radio
The camera detects visual queues such as lane markings. When it is determined that the vehicle has
unintentionally moved outside of the lane, a visual and audible warning is given to the driver. The front view
camera module receives an input from the lane departure warning switch and controls the lane departure
warning switch indicator output. The front view camera module also communicates via serial data with the
instrument cluster and radio to request visual and audible alerts.
The lane departure warning switch provides an input to the front view camera module to turn the lane departure
warning system ON and OFF. The front view camera module provides a signal voltage to the normally open
momentary switch. When the switch is pressed, the signal circuit is pulled to ground, indicating to the front
view camera module that the system has been requested to turn ON or OFF. The lane departure warning switch
also contains the lane departure warning switch indicator, which is controlled by the front view camera module
to indicate the ON and OFF status of the lane departure warning system. When the system has been enabled by
the lane departure warning switch, the front view camera module applies ground to the switch indicator and
illuminates the LED. The location of the lane departure warning switch can vary with different vehicles. For the
exact location please refer to the user's manual.
The vehicle direction display contains green and amber lane departure warning indicators. These indicate to the
driver the current status of the lane departure warning system and are controlled via serial data by the front view
camera module. When the vehicle speed is above 56 km/h (35 MPH) and the system has detected the required
lane markings and is ready to assist, the green indicator will be illuminated on the vehicle direction display. If
the vehicle has unintentionally left the lane, the amber indicator will flash.
The radio controls the audible alert for the lane departure warning. If the vehicle has unintentionally left the
lane, the radio will command three beeps as an audible alert to the driver.
Lane Departure Warning Operation
System operation can be describe by the following modes:
• Off State: The system has been turned off by the driver, using the lane departure warning switch. The lane
departure warning indicator will not be illuminated.
• Not Ready To Assist: The system is enabled and the lane departure warning indicator is illuminated, but
not ready to assist when any of the following conditions is true:
• Vehicle speed is less than 56 km/h (35 MPH). The system is designed to function at speeds greater
than 56 km/h (35 MPH).
• The system cannot detect lane markings. This may be because there are no lane markings, as on a
country road or that the lane markings cannot be determined due to snow, rain, or other driving
conditions.
• The windshield area in front of the camera or the camera lens is blocked by fog, dirt, damage to the
windshield or other elements that may prevent the camera from detecting lane markings.
• Ready To Assist: The system is enabled and ready to warn of the unintentional lane crossing. The system
is ready to assist when the green lane departure warning indicator is illuminated on the vehicle direction
display.
• When one of the following conditions are met, the system will not give alerts:
• The correct turn signal is activated. An activated turn signal is interpreted as an intentional lane
crossing.
• The operator makes an intentional steering maneuver.
• The operator makes an intentional accelerating maneuver.
• The operator makes an intentional braking maneuver.
• Lane crossing alert consists of the following:
• Three chimes are activated through the radio.
• The amber lane departure warning indicator will flash.
Lane Departure Warning System Driver Information Center Messages
The front view camera module can command the driver information center to display the various messages to
alert the driver of a system concern or status information. For detailed information about the possible messages
please refer to the user's manual.
LANE KEEP ASSIST DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
NOTE:
• The Lane Keep Assist system DOES NOT continuously steer the vehicle
• The Lane Keep Assist system replaces Lane Departure Warning System
• Lane Departure Warning will have more alerts than Lane Keep Assist
(visual, audible, and haptic warning)
The system assists driver to keep vehicle in-lane by providing a steering push back to the vehicle when an
unintended lane departure is detected. See the user's manual for more detailed information on vehicle
personalization.
The lane keep assist system is made up of the following components:
• Front view camera module
• Lane Keep Assist switch/control indicator
• Instrument cluster/Vehicle Direction Display
• Radio
• Safety Alert Seat (if equipped)
• Yaw rate sensor
• Electric power steering
The camera detects visual queues such as lane markings. When it is determined that the vehicle has
unintentionally moved outside of the lane, visual, and audible or haptic warning is given to the driver. The front
view camera module receives an input from the lane keep assist switch and controls the lane keep assist switch
indicator output. The front view camera module also communicates via serial data with the instrument cluster,
radio, and memory seat module to request visual, and audible or haptic alerts.
Lane Keep Assist Switch
The lane keep assist switch provides an input to the front view camera module to turn the lane keep assist
system ON and OFF. The front view camera module provides a signal voltage to the normally open momentary
switch. When the switch is pressed, the signal circuit is pulled to ground, indicating to the front view camera
module that the system has been requested to turn ON or OFF. The lane keep assist switch also contains the lane
keep assist switch indicator, which is controlled by the front view camera module to indicate the ON and OFF
status of the lane keep assist system. When the system has been enabled by the lane keep assist switch, the front
view camera module applies ground to the switch indicator and illuminates the LED. The location of the lane
keep assist switch can vary with different vehicles. For the exact location please refer to the user's manual.
The vehicle direction display contains green and amber lane keep assist indicators. These indicate to the driver
the current status of the lane keep assist system and are controlled via serial data by the front view camera
module. When the vehicle speed is above 56 km/h (35 MPH) and the system has detected the required lane
markings and is ready to assist, the green indicator will be illuminated on the vehicle direction display. If the
vehicle has unintentionally left the lane, the amber indicator will flash.
The radio controls the audible alert for the lane keep assist. If the vehicle has unintentionally left the lane, the
radio will command three beeps as an audible alert to the driver.
The memory seat module controls the haptic alert provided by the seats. If the vehicle has unintentionally left
the lane, and the Electric Power Steering determines the corrective action requires an above threshold amount of
effort, the memory seat module will command three pulses to the left or right side of the seat, depending on the
lane departure direction.
The steering intervention is based on the forward looking sensor outputs, such as lateral offset of the vehicle,
relative yaw angle and time to line crossing. Over that, other vehicle dynamics signals are needed, e.g. velocity,
steering angle, yaw rate for the purpose of a driver suppression.
The electric power steering uses a torque sensor to detect driver inputs and relays that information to the
frontview camera module. The electric power steering is used to provide steering push back.
Lane Keep Assist Operation
There is two stages of warning/intervention for the driver: The first stage is the steering push back, if the lane
keep assist system detects that the vehicle will cross the lane marking despite it is intervening, a second stage
warning shall be issued. The second stage warning is a chime or a haptic seat vibration, if equipped with haptic
seats. If a haptic seat vibration is used as stage 2 warning, the vibration shall take place on the side of the seat,
where the lane departure happened.
System operation can be described by the following modes:
• Off State: The system has been turned off by the driver using the lane keep assist switch. The lane keep
assist indicator will not be illuminated.
• Not Ready To Assist: The system is enabled and the lane keep assist indicator is illuminated, but not
ready to assist when any of the following conditions is true:
• Vehicle speed is less than 37 MPH (60 km/h). The system is designed to function at speeds greater
than 37 MPH (60 km/h).
• The system cannot detect lane markings. This may be because there are no lane markings, as on a
country road or that the lane markings cannot be determined due to snow, rain, or other driving
conditions.
• The windshield area in front of the camera or the camera lens is blocked by fog, dirt, damage to the
windshield or other elements that may prevent the camera from detecting lane markings.
• Ready To Assist: The system is enabled and ready to warn of the unintentional lane crossing. The system
is ready to assist when the green lane keep assist indicator is illuminated on the vehicle direction display.
• When one of the following conditions are met, the system will not give alerts:
• The correct turn signal is activated. An activated turn signal is interpreted as an intentional lane
crossing.
• The operator makes an intentional steering maneuver.
• The operator makes an intentional accelerating maneuver.
• The operator makes an intentional braking maneuver.
• Lane crossing alert consists of the following:
• The amber lane keep assist indicator will flash.
• "push-back" steering torque input (or nudge) from Electric Power Steering to help prevent a lane
departure
• Three chimes are activated through the radio.
• or if equipped , three pulses to the left or right side of the seat.
Lane Keep Assist System Driver Information Center Messages
The front view camera module can command the driver information center to display the various messages to
alert the driver of a system concern or status information. For detailed information about the possible messages
please refer to the user's manual.
The rear cross traffic alert system is designed to provide enhanced customer visibility while backing up by
providing warnings to the driver on impending rear cross traffic. The rear cross traffic alert system is designed
to detect and track objects of interest within a specified coverage zone behind the vehicle. The system is
designed to alert the driver, with a visual display and either an audible sound or a haptic w, to the presence of
objects of interest that may cause a collision with the host vehicle. Although the system is intended to assist
drivers in backing up, it does not replace driver's vision. The driver is responsible to check carefully for objects
outside of the coverage zone (e.g., a fast approaching vehicle) for a safe backing maneuver. In the event that the
system senses a malfunction through its diagnostic functions, the system will be disabled and the driver will be
visually notified.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert System Components
The side blind zone alert system is made up of the following components:
• Left side object sensor module (also used for side blind zone alert)
• Right side object sensor module (also used for side blind zone alert)
• Visual Display Icons located on the rear vision display screen
• Audio System chime or Haptic Seat notification
The side object sensor modules are located on each side of the vehicle behind the rear fascia and are not directly
visible from outside the vehicle. The sensors use radar to determine the presence of objects nearby. When an
object is detected in the rear cross traffic zone, the module will send out a signal through serial data
communication to turn on the visual icons and also audio chime notification. Each sensor is supplied B+ and
ground. The right sensor receives an additional ground. Both sensors communicate independently on the serial
data line. The serial data enters the left sensor in a pass-thru configuration, that connects to the right sensor. The
scan tool is able to individually communicate with each sensor.
The rear cross traffic alert system visual alert display consists of two visual icons, one on each side of the
display screen of the rear vision camera, that are used to alert the driver on rear cross traffic from each side of
the host vehicle respectively.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert Operation
The rear cross traffic alert system is designed to detect objects of interest as small as a 125cc motorcycle with
rider. The detection zone extends approximately 30 m (99 ft) from the rear corner of the car and covers an area
from behind the vehicle to 125 degrees towards the front at a height of 0.45 m (1.5 ft) to 2 m (6.5 ft) above
ground. The system operates when vehicle speed is 10 kph (6 mph) or less and is designed to detect objects
moving at speeds up to 36 kph (22 mph).
When the vehicle is backing up, the side object sensors receive energy that is reflected from external objects and
determine if the objects are objects of interest or not. The system may at times detect pedestrians, shopping
carts, or similar moving objects. This is normal and should not be considered as a false alert or problem with the
system. The rear cross traffic alert system will estimate vehicle travel trajectory and use the information in
conjunction with object travel trajectory information to determine if there is a potential collision between the
vehicle and the object of interest. The rear cross traffic alert function will only alert on objects of interest that
pose a potential collision with the host vehicle. The system is not designed to provide an alert to objects that
have no potential collision with vehicle. In addition, the system will not alert to stationary objects such as signs,
parked cars, etc.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert Driver Information Center Messages
This message indicates that the system has been disabled through the driver information center. Refer to the
vehicle owners manual for instructions on how to set personalization options on the driver information center.
This message indicates that the system requires service. Since the sensors are also used for side blind zone alert,
this feature will also be inoperative.
This message indicates that the system has been temporarily disabled because the sensor is blocked or can
otherwise not accurately detect vehicles or objects. Such instances may be mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush build-
up on the rear fascia, heavy rainfall, excessive road spray, fascia damage or stickers.
The rear cross traffic alert system will read the GPS latitude and longitude on the serial data bus and calculate if
the vehicle is within a Radio Astronomy zone. These zones are located in Europe and Japan and require the
sensors to be turned off. The "Side Detection System Unavailable" message will be displayed to the driver when
this occurs.
|
I A9B I Outside I Mirror - I Passenger I B218R ■ Side Object I Module - i Right |
 |
|
■ Side Object 1 Sensor I Module - Left A9A | Outside I Mirror - I Driver |
Fig. 17: Side Blind Zone Alert System Block Diagram
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
B218R |
B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right |
|
A9B |
A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger |
|
A11 |
A11 Radio |
|
B218L |
B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left |
|
A9A |
A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver |
|
K40 |
K40 Seat Memory Control Module |
|
P45LR |
Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Left Rear |
|
P45RR |
Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Right Rear |
NOTE: Not all items in block diagram may apply to specific vehicle. Refer to
schematics for specific vehicle wiring diagrams.
Description and Operation
The side blind zone alert system shall detect and report "objects of interest" on either side of the vehicle, within
a specified "blind spot" zone. The system is designed to alert the driver, with a visual display placed on the side
view mirror, to the presence of objects of interest that may not be visible in the inside rearview mirror and
outside rear view mirrors. Although this system is intended to help drivers avoid lane change crashes, it does
not replace driver vision and therefore should be considered a lane change aid. Even with the side blind zone
alert system, the driver must check carefully for objects outside of the reporting zone (e.g., a fast approaching
vehicle) before changing lanes. In the event that the system senses a malfunction through its diagnostic routines,
the system will be disabled and the driver will be visually notified.
When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone while driving forward, an amber warning symbol will
light up in the appropriate outside mirror. This indicates that it may be unsafe to change lanes. If the driver then
activates the turn signal, the amber warning symbol starts flashing as an extra warning not to change lanes.
Side blind zone alert is active when the vehicle is out of park or the parking brake is off on manual transmission
vehicles and at speeds up to approximately 140 km/h (87 MPH). If a vehicle is detected in the blind zone, the
warning symbols will turn illuminate on the appropriate side. When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror
displays will briefly come on to indicate that the system is operating. The warning symbols will vary brightness
based on the ambient light conditions.
Side Blind Zone Alert System Components
The side blind zone alert system is made up of the following components:
• Left side object sensor module (also used for rear cross traffic alert)
• Right side object sensor module (also used for rear cross traffic alert)
• Driver outside rearview mirror
• Passenger outside rearview mirror
Side Object Sensor Modules
The side object sensor modules are located on each side of the vehicle behind the rear fascia and are not directly
visible from outside the vehicle. The sensors use radar to determine the presence of objects nearby. When an
object is detected in the side blind zone, the side object sensor module supplies voltage to illuminate the visual
indicator on the appropriate side rear view mirror. Each sensor is supplied B+ and ground. The right sensor
receives an additional ground. Both sensors communicate independently on the serial data line. The serial data
enters the left sensor in a pass-thru configuration, that connects to the right sensor. The scan tool is able to
individually communicate with each sensor.
The outside rearview mirrors contain an icon that is backlit with high intensity, amber-colored LED's located on
the mirror surface. The display brightness adapts to day/night conditions. The side blind zone alert indicator
icon in the left or right outside rearview mirror is illuminated if the left or right side object sensor module
detects a vehicle in the side blind zone to inform the driver that there is a vehicle driving in the blind spot zone.
Side Blind Zone Alert Operation
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays will briefly come on to indicate that the system is
operating. The system is designed to detect objects of interest as small as a 125cc motorcycle with rider. The
detection zone starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends out to 3.5 m (11 ft) at the back corner of the
vehicle and 3 m (10 ft) behind the vehicle at a height of 0.5 m (1.5 ft) to 2.0 m (6 ft) above the ground. The
system may light up an indicator due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects. This is
normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone while driving forward, independent if passing a vehicle
or being passed, an amber warning symbol will light up in the appropriate outside mirror. This indicates that it
may be unsafe to change lanes. If the driver then activates the turn signal, the amber warning symbol starts
flashing as an extra warning not to change lanes.
Foul weather may affect the operation of the side blind zone system. Occasional missed alerts can occur under
normal circumstances and will increase in wet conditions. The number of missed alerts will increase with
increased rainfall or road spray. Heavy rainfall, as well as mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush build-up on the rear
fascia, can completely disable the system.
If the vehicle is towing a trailer or has an object such as a bicycle rack attached to the rear of the vehicle, the
side blind zone system may not function properly and the indicators may illuminate intermittently or remain
illuminated all the time.
Side Blind Zone Alert Driver Information Center Messages
This message indicates that the system has been disabled through the driver information center. Refer to the
vehicle owners manual for instructions on how to set personalization options on the driver information center.
This message indicates that the system requires service. When the message is displayed, the indicators will
remain illuminated at all times, notifying the driver that the side blind zone system should not be relied upon
when changing lanes. Since the sensors are also used for rear cross traffic alert, this feature will also be
inoperative.
This message indicates that the system has been temporarily disabled because the sensor is blocked or can
otherwise not accurately detect vehicles or objects. Such instances may be mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush build-
up on the rear fascia, heavy rainfall, excessive road spray, fascia damage or stickers.
The rear cross traffic alert system will read the GPS latitude and longitude on the serial data bus and calculate if
the vehicle is within a Radio Astronomy zone. These zones are located in Europe and Japan and require the
sensors to be turned off. The "Side Detection System Unavailable" message will be displayed to the driver when
this occurs.
The forward collision alert system is a convenience feature of the frontview camera module that issues a
warning to the driver when a potential collision risk exists. The frontview camera module is located behind the
windshield, looking toward the roadway ahead and detecting vehicles within a distance of approximately 60
meters (197 ft). The forward collision alert system is always active and operates at speeds above 40 kph (25
mph).
When the frontview camera module detects a vehicle in the path ahead, the green vehicle ahead indicator in the
vehicle direction display is illuminated. When following a vehicle ahead too closely, the amber collision alert
indicator will illuminate and stay on until the following distance is increased. The green vehicle ahead indicator
will then be illuminated again. When approaching another vehicle too rapidly, the collision alert symbol will
flash in the vehicle direction display and an audible alert sounds. The forward collision alert sensitivity can be
adjusted using the forward collision alert switch in the left steering wheel controls.
When the system detects a vehicle ahead in your path that is traveling in the same direction that you may be
about to crash into, it can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This can help avoid or
lessen the severity of crashes when driving in a forward gear. Depending on the situation, the vehicle may
automatically brake moderately or hard. This front automatic braking can only occur if a vehicle is detected.
The system works when driving in a forward gear between 5 mph (8 km/h) and 37 mph (60 km/h). It can detect
vehicles up to approximately 197 ft (60 m).
Forward collision does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash unless it detects a vehicle. Forward collision
alert may not detect a vehicle ahead if the frontview camera module is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the
windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit
visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition.
Ensure the windshield, headlamps, and frontview camera module are clean and in good repair. In some cases the
forward collision alert system may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes,
objects that are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need
service.
The forward collision alert system is made up of the following components:
• Frontview camera module
• Forward collision alert switch
• Instrument cluster/Vehicle direction display
• Infotainment system
The frontview camera module detects vehicles in front of the host vehicle. The frontview camera module
communicates via serial data to the instrument cluster to illuminate the appropriate indicators in the vehicle
direction display. The frontview camera module also communicates via serial data with the driver information
center to display messages and the radio to request audible alerts.
The forward collision alert switch provides an input to the frontview camera module to select between four alert
timing sensitivity settings. These setting will change the sensitivity for both the following too closely and
forward collision alert indicators. In addition to the sensitivity setting, the alert distance will change based upon
vehicle speed. The frontview camera module provides a signal voltage to the normally open switch. When the
switch is pressed, the signal circuit is pulled to ground through a resistor, indicating to the frontview camera
module that the system has been requested to change the alert timing sensitivity. The first button press shows
the current alert timing setting on the driver information center. With every button press, the alert timing
sensitivity is changed. The current alert timing setting will be maintained until it is changed. The preset alert
timing setting is displayed in the top line of the driver information center. The position of the forward collision
alert switch can vary with different vehicles. For the exact position please refer to the owner's manual.
The vehicle direction display contains the indicators for the collision alert system and are controlled by the
instrument cluster via serial data messages from the frontview camera module. The green vehicle ahead
indicator indicates to the driver that the frontview camera module system has detected a vehicle in the driving
path ahead. The amber collision alert indicator will illuminated continuously if the system determines that the
vehicle ahead is too close. When approaching another vehicle too rapidly, the red collision alert symbol will
flash.
The infotainment system controls the audible alert for the forward collision alert system and is activated via
serial data from the frontview camera module. If the host vehicle is approaching another vehicle too rapidly, the
infotainment system will command an audible alert to the driver.
Forward Collision Alert System Driver Information Center Messages
The frontview camera module can command the driver information center to display the various messages to
alert the driver of a system concern or status information. For detailed information about the possible messages
please refer to the owner's manual.
• FORWARD COLLISION ALERT OFF
• SERVICE FRONT CAMERA
ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The forward collision alert system is a convenience feature of the frontview camera module that issues a
warning to the driver when a potential collision risk exists. The frontview camera module is located behind the
windshield, looking out at the road ahead and detecting vehicles directly ahead. When the system detects a
vehicle in the path ahead, the green vehicle ahead indicator is illuminated on the instrument cluster. When
approaching another vehicle too rapidly, the collision alert symbol will flash in the head-up display (if
equipped) or a series of red collision alert indicators will flash. An audible alert sound will simultaneously
sound or the safety alert seat will provide haptic feedback. The visual alert cannot be changed, but the driver
can select between audible or haptic alerts in the vehicle personalization menus. The forward collision alert
system can also be turned on or off through the vehicle personalization menus. See the vehicle owner manual
for more detailed information on vehicle personalization.
Forward collision alert does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. Forward
collision alert may not detect a vehicle ahead if the frontview camera module is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or
if the windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can
limit visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper
condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and frontview camera module clean and in good repair.
Forward collision alert may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that
are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service.
The forward collision alert system is made up of the following components:
• Frontview camera module
• Forward collision alert switch
• Instrument cluster
• Collision alert indicators (without UV6)
• Head-up display (with UV6)
• Infotainment system
• Safety alert seat, if equipped
The active emergency braking systems includes the intelligent brake assist system and the automatic collision
preparation system. The intelligent brake assist and the automatic collision preparation systems are designed
provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle to help avoid or lessen the severity of crashes
when driving in a forward gear.
Intelligent brake assist is designed to pre-fill the brake hydraulic system to reduce system response time and
increase pressure when quickly applying the brakes. Using the frontview camera module and the distance
sensing cruise control module, the system monitors the approach speed and distance to a vehicle ahead. If the
Intelligent brake assist system determines a collision risk exists, it will begin preparations to the brake hydraulic
system. When active, minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement may occur and this should be considered
normal. Intelligent brake assist will resort to normal braking operation after an intelligent brake assist even has
occurred when the brake pedal is released.
When driving in a forward gear at speeds 9 kph (5 mph), the automatic collision preparation system uses the
frontview camera module and distance sensing cruise control module to determine if an imminent collision risk
exists. If the brakes have not been applied, the system will automatically apply the brakes in an effort to
mitigate the collision or reduce collision damage. The system has a detection range of approximately 60 m (197
ft) and will only function when a vehicle is detected, as indicated by the green vehicle ahead indicator is
illuminated on the instrument cluster.
Automatic collision preparation is not a substitute for normal vehicle braking and should not be relied on to
brake the vehicle. Automatic collision preparation may not detect a vehicle ahead if the frontview camera
module or distance sensing cruise control module is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the windshield is
damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit visibility
such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition. Keep the
windshield, headlamps, distance sensing cruise control module, and frontview camera module clean and in good
repair.
The active emergency braking system are made up of the following components:
• Frontview camera module
• Distance sensing cruise control module
• Electronic brake control module
The frontview camera module detects vehicles in front of the vehicle. The frontview camera module
communicates with the instrument cluster via serial data to illuminate the appropriate amber or green vehicle
ahead indicator, collision alert symbol will flash in the head-up display, or collision alert indicators. The
frontview camera module also communicates via serial data with the infotainment system and memory seat
module to request audible or haptic alerts.
The frontview camera module works in conjunction with the distance sensing cruise control module to track
vehicles ahead and determine if a collision risk exists. If a collision risk exists, the active emergency braking
systems will be activated to reduce collision damage.
The distance sensing cruise control module works in conjunction with the frontview camera module to track
vehicles ahead and determine if a collision risk exists. If a collision risk exists, the active emergency braking
systems will be activated to reduce collision damage.
The electronic brake control module is used by the active emergency braking system to pre-fill and prepare for
braking by the intelligent brake assist and actively brake the vehicle by the automatic collision preparation
system.
The forward collision alert switch provides an input to the frontview camera module to select the alert timing
sensitivity when approaching another vehicle too rapidly. The forward collision alert switch is part of the
steering wheel controls switch - left and provides inputs to the body control module (BCM), which then
communicates with the frontview camera module via serial data.
The BCM applies a reference voltage and monitors a low signal voltage from the normally open switch. When
the switch is pressed, the signal circuit is pulled low through a specific series of resistors, indicating that the
system has been requested to change the alert timing sensitivity. The first button press will show the current
alert timing setting on the driver information center. With every subsequent button press, the alert timing
sensitivity is changed.
The instrument cluster communicates via serial data with the frontview camera module and will illuminate the
amber or green vehicle ahead indicator as requested by the frontview camera module. The instrument cluster
also controls the head-up display or the collision alert indicators.
The collision alert indicators are a series of red LEDs that will flash when approaching another vehicle too
rapidly. The collision alert indicators are located in the upper instrument panel area and reflect off the
windshield when illuminated.
The collision alert indicators receive power and ground and are discretely controlled by the instrument cluster
through a pair of low control circuits. When requested by the frontview camera module, the instrument panel
will pulse the low control circuits, flashing the LEDs as a visual alert that another vehicle is being approached
too rapidly.
The instrument cluster controls the head-up display via serial data. The instrument cluster will command the
head-up display to flash the collision alert indicator as a visual alert when approaching another vehicle too
rapidly as requested by the frontview camera module.
The infotainment system controls the audible alerts for the forward collision alert system. If the host vehicle is
approaching another vehicle too rapidly, the frontview camera module will command the infotainment system
issue an audible alert to the driver.
The memory seat module controls the haptic alert provided by the seats. If the vehicle is approaching another
vehicle too quickly, the frontview camera module will command the memory seat module to pulse both sides of
the seat.
REAR VISION CAMERA DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Rear Vision Camera System Operation
The rear vision camera system consists of a video camera/module located at the rear of the vehicle and the
infotainment display.
When the transmission is placed into REVERSE, a 12 volt signal is sent to the rear vision camera by the body
control module (BCM). This signal indicates to the camera that the vehicle is in reverse and image display is
requested. The rear vision camera receives ignition voltage and a constant ground to power the camera. Video
signal + and video signal - circuits carry the video image from the rear vision camera to the infotainment
display. Additionally, the video signal circuits are shielded to prevent any interference which may lead to a loss
of video signal resolution and a degraded video image. The shield is provided a ground path by the rear vision
camera.
The following conditions may cause a degraded rear vision camera image:
• Ice, snow, or mud has built up on the rear vision camera
• Dark conditions
• Extreme light conditions, such as glare from the sun or the headlights of another vehicle
• Damage to the rear of the vehicle
• Extreme high temperatures or extreme temperature changes
If a malfunction is detected in the system, Service Rear Vision Camera may be displayed on the infotainment
display as an indicator to the customer that a problem exists that requires service.
Article GUID: A00884657
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Power Seats - Volt
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
WIRE TO WIRE REPAIR - SEATS
Special Tools
• EL-38125-10 Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool (non GMNA)
• J-38125-5A Ultra Torch Special Tool
• J-38125-8 Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool (GMNA)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, loss of high voltage isolation to
ground and higher system impedance, do not attempt to repair any HV wiring,
connector, or terminal that is damaged. High voltage coaxial type cables are not
repairable. Never attempt to repair a coaxial type cable. The entire
cable/harness or component must be replaced. In order to maintain system
integrity and personal safety, never attempt to repair any high voltage wiring,
cables, or terminals. Performing this procedure on high voltage circuits may
result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: If the wiring harness internal to the transmission is damaged, the wiring
harness must be replaced. The use of splice sleeves in an attempt to repair the
internal transmission wires, connectors, or terminals could result in
performance issues.
NOTE: Do not splice wires in Door Harness Grommets.
NOTE: The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features:
• A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat
shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside.
• A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low
resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits.
|
Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except high voltage and Splice Sleeve Selection | ||||||
| ||||||
|
Splice Sleeve Color |
Crimp Tool Nest Color |
Wire Gauge mm2 / | |
|
3 Crimp Nests |
4 Crimp Nests | ||
|
Salmon (Yellow-Pink) |
Red (1) or Red/Green (1) |
Red (2) |
0.22 - 0.8/(18 - 26) |
|
Blue 19168447 |
Blue (2) |
Blue (3) |
1.0 - 2.0/(14 - 16) |
|
Yellow |
Yellow (3) |
Yellow (4) |
3.0 - 5.0/(10 - 12) |
NOTE: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the
procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip
with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
• Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in
order to avoid wire insulation damage.
• Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except Tefzel and coaxial.
• Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the
location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness
branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
• When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
• Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
• Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
• If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and
work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
• Strip approximately 5.0 mm (0.20 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
• Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
• If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. For high temperature wiring, slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of
wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the
beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool
nests.
 |
|
Fig. 1: Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool With 4 Crimp Nests |
6. The EL-38125-10 splice sleeve crimping tool has four crimp nests. The largest crimp nest (4) is used for
crimping 10 and 12 gauge wires. The second largest crimp nest (3) is used for crimping 14 and 16 gauge
wires. The third largest crimp nest (2) is used for crimping 18 and 20 gauge wires. The smallest crimp
nest (1) is used for crimping 22 to 26 gauge wires. The crimp nests are referenced in the table (farther
above) under the crimp tool nest color.
 |
|
Fig. 2: Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool With 3 Crimp Nests |
7. The J-38125-8 splice sleeve crimping tool has three crimp nests. The largest crimp nest (3) is used for
crimping 10 and 12 gauge wires. The second largest crimp nest (2) is used for crimping 14 and 16 gauge
wires. The smallest crimp nest (1) is used for crimping 18 to 20 gauge wires. The crimp nests are
referenced in the table (farther above) under the crimp tool nest color.
8. Use the splice sleeve crimp tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of
the splice sleeve crimp tool. For the four crimp nest tool, use the three largest crimp nests to crimp the
splice sleeves. For the three crimp nest tool, use all three crimp nests to crimp the splice sleeves. Use the
four and three crimp tool diagrams (above) and the table (farther above) to match the splice sleeve with
the correct crimp nest. The crimp tool diagram callout numbers match the numbers in the table (under
crimp tool nest color).
9. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the
barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1)
from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice
sleeve in the proper nest.
 |
|
Fig. 4: Crimped Duraseal Splice Sleeve Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
10. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Refer to Folded-Over Wire
Repair for splicing wires of 0.35 mm or less (22, 24, 26 gauge sizes) and for splicing wires of different
gauges.
11. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice
sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 6 for the opposite end of the splice.
 |
|
Fig. 5: Crimped Duraseal Splice Sleeve |
12. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
13. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Weatherpack™ Wiring Repair
NOTE: Some replacement pigtail connectors may be delivered without the terminated
leads installed into the connector. For Weatherpack™ connectors, all
terminated leads included in the package should to be installed into the
connector. If the connector end view shows that a terminal is not occupied, the
extra terminated lead(s) need to be installed and the end(s) sealed using a
DuraSeal splice sleeve and taped back into the harness.
1. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Refer to Folded-Over Wire
Repair for splicing wires of 0.35 mm or less (22, 24, 26 gauge sizes) and for splicing wires of different
gauges.
 |
|
Fig. 6: Tightly Close Handles Of Crimp Tool |
2. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice
sleeve. Holding the DuraSEAL with one hand gently tug on the wire to ensure it is crimped in the
DuraSeal.
3. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
 |
|
Fig. 7: Heat To Crimped Area Of Barrel Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY |
4. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
5. Tape the extra terminated lead(s) back into the harness.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Use the following procedures to perform high temperature wiring repairs:
1. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve.
2. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing.
3. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
4. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been removed during the repair.
CONNECTOR RECONNECTION - SEATS
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An
intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated.
Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an
intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following
items:
• Loose, corroded, or painted terminal stud/fastener
• Wiring broken inside the insulation
• Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
• A terminal not seated all the way into the connector body
• Poor terminal to wire connection - Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps,
poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire
to terminal contact area, etc.
• Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor
can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire
in the suspect circuits.
• Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or
short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
• Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
• Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order
to verify the customer concern.
• Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high
resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions.
• Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder
operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up
of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The
oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the
connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause
fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and
hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since
vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin,
copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to
see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add dielectric grease / lubricant (Nyogel
760G or equivalent, meeting GM specification 9986087) to both sides of the connector terminals. Then
reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact
resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect
component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between
the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged
connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause
contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion,
causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always
use the EL-35616 kit when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining
the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the
female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in
a bussed electrical center. Use the EL-35616 kit to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use the EL-35616
kit can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves.
2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green
build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance,
intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of
contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal/terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different
between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire connectors on the harness side or the component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Remove the component in question.
2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the
connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to
ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter into the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
• Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to
a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may
also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any
intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM
may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current.
Operate the component to test the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing
, and Power Distribution Schematics .
• Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground
circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested.
Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point (screw or stud). Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Operate the component to test the
ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing , and Ground Distribution
Schematics .
Temperature Sensitivity
• An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating
temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the
component/connection is hot.
• Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of
intermittent condition, where applicable.
• If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
• High ambient temperatures
• Underhood/engine generated heat
• Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
• Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
• If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
• Low ambient temperatures - In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
• The condition only occurs on a cold start.
• The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
• Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature
related.
• If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition.
Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical
noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
• A mis-routed harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition
components, motors, generator etc. - These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could
interfere with normal circuit operation.
• Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or
switch - These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the
malfunctioning component is operating.
• Installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers,
electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc. - These accessories may create
interference in other circuits while operating and the interference would disappear when the accessory is
not operating. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may
contain a clamping diode.
• The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
• There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
• A new service control module is installed.
• A control module from another vehicle is installed.
• Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
NOTE: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME
software/calibration files that are already present in the control module.
This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
• Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is
found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References for replacement, setup, and programming.
FRONT SEAT WIRING HARNESS REPLACEMENT
Fig. 9: Front Seat Wiring Harness
Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY
Callout Component Name
WARNING:
Refer to SIR
Warning .
Preliminary Procedures
1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling .
2. Remove the driver or passenger seat. Refer to Driver or Passenger Seat Removal and
Installation .
Front Seat Wiring Harness
NOTE:
Typical
wiring
harness
shown,
individual
harness may
be different
due to
option
|
Callout |
Component Name |
|
content. |
Article GUID: A00884751
ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Programming and Setup - Volt
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
CONTROL MODULE REFERENCES
Reference Information
Data Link References
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
Symptoms - Vehicle
|
Code |
Control Module/Scan |
Schematic |
Repair Instruction |
Programming and |
|
A11 |
Radio Scan Tool |
Radio/Navigation |
Radio Replacement |
Radio Programming |
|
Information |
System Schematics |
and Setup | ||
|
B218L/R |
Side Object Sensor |
Object Detection |
Side Object Sensing |
Side Object Sensor |
|
Module Scan Tool |
Alert Module | |||
|
Schematics |
Programming and | |||
|
Information |
Replacement | |||
|
Setup | ||||
|
E54 |
Hybrid/EV Battery Pack |
Hybrid/EV Cooling |
Heater Coolant |
Coolant Heater Control Module |
|
Schematics |
Heater Replacement |
Programming and | ||
|
Setup | ||||
|
G1 |
A/C Compressor |
HVAC Schematics |
Air Conditioning |
Air Conditioning |
|
Battery Cooling |
Module | |||
|
Compressor Replacement |
Programming and | |||
|
K1 |
14 Volt Power Module |
Starting and Charging |
Accessory DC Power |
14 Volt Power Module Accessory DC Power |
|
Control Module |
Control Module | |||
|
K9 |
Body Control Module |
Body Control System |
Body Control |
Body Control |
|
Scan Tool Information |
Schematics |
Module Replacement |
Programming and | |
|
Setup | ||||
|
K16 |
Battery Energy |
Hybrid/EV Energy |
Battery Energy |
Battery Energy Control Module |
|
Control Module Scan |
Control Module | |||
|
Storage Schematics |
Programming and | |||
|
Tool Information |
Replacement | |||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K17 |
Electronic Brake |
Antilock Brake System |
Electronic Brake |
Electronic Brake |
|
Control Module Scan |
Control Module |
Control Module | ||
|
Tool Information |
Replacement |
Programming and |
|
Code |
Control Module/Scan Tool Information |
Schematic |
Repair Instruction |
Programming and |
|
Setup | ||||
|
K20 |
K20 Engine Control |
Engine Controls |
Engine Control |
K20 Engine Control |
|
Schematics |
Module Replacement |
Programming and | ||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K29 |
Driver Seat and |
Heated/Cooled Seat |
Front Seat Heater Replacement |
Seat Heating Control |
|
Schematics |
Programming and | |||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K29R |
Rear Seat Heater Control Module |
Heated/Cooled Seat |
Rear Seat Heater Control Module |
Rear Seat Heater Control Module |
|
Schematics |
Programming and | |||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K33 |
Heating, Ventilation |
HVAC Schematics |
Heater and Air |
HVAC Control |
|
and Air Conditioning |
Module | |||
|
Control Module Scan |
Programming and | |||
|
Control Replacement | ||||
|
Tool Information |
Setup | |||
|
K36 |
Inflatable Restraint Module Scan Tool |
SIR Schematics |
Airbag Sensing and |
Inflatable Restraint Sensing and |
|
Replacement |
Programming and | |||
|
K41 |
Parking Assist Control |
Object Detection |
Parking Assist |
Parking Assist Control Module |
|
Module Scan Tool |
Control Module | |||
|
Schematics |
Programming and | |||
|
Information |
Replacement | |||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K43 |
Power Steering |
Power Steering |
Electric Belt Drive |
Power Steering |
|
Schematics |
Steering Gear |
Programming and | ||
|
Replacement |
Setup | |||
|
K73 |
Telematics Communication |
OnStar/Telematics |
Communication |
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module Programming and Setup (with |
|
Interface Control |
Interface Module | |||
|
Schematics |
UKF)Telematics | |||
|
Module Scan Tool |
Replacement | |||
|
Communication | ||||
|
Information | ||||
|
K74 |
Human Machine Interface Control |
Radio/Navigation |
Human Machine |
Human Machine Interface Control Module Programming and |
|
Module Scan Tool |
System Schematics | |||
|
Information | ||||
|
Code |
Control Module/Scan |
Schematic |
Repair Instruction |
Programming and |
|
Setup | ||||
|
K77 |
Remote Control Door |
Remote Function |
Remote Control |
Remote Control |
|
Schematics |
Programming and | |||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K84 |
Keyless Entry Control |
Remote Function |
Keyless Entry Control Module |
Keyless Entry Control Module |
|
Schematics |
Programming and | |||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K85 |
Inflatable Restraint |
SIR Schematics |
Airbag Front Passenger Presence |
Passenger Presence |
|
Passenger Presence |
System | |||
|
System Scan Tool |
Programming and | |||
|
Module Replacement | ||||
|
Information |
Setup | |||
|
K89 |
Immobilizer Control |
Immobilizer |
Theft Deterrent |
Immobilizer Control |
|
Schematics |
Module Replacement |
Programming and | ||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K109 |
Front View Camera Module |
Object Detection |
Front View Camera |
Front View Camera |
|
Schematics |
Replacement |
Programming and | ||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K111 |
Fuel Pump Power |
Engine Controls |
Fuel Pump Power |
Fuel Pump Power |
|
Control Module Scan |
Control Module | |||
|
Schematics |
Programming and | |||
|
Tool Information |
Replacement | |||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K114B |
Hybrid Powertrain |
Hybrid/EV Cooling |
Hybrid Powertrain |
Hybrid Powertrain |
|
Control Module 2 Scan |
or Hybrid/EV Energy |
Control Module 2 | ||
|
Tool Information |
Replacement | |||
|
Storage Schematics | ||||
|
K132 |
Pedestrian Alert |
Horn Schematics |
Pedestrian Sound |
Pedestrian Alert |
|
Sound Control Module |
Alert Module |
Module | ||
|
Scan Tool Information |
Replacement |
Programming and | ||
|
Setup | ||||
|
K177 |
Brake Booster Control |
Hydraulic Brake |
Power Brake Master |
Brake Booster |
|
Cylinder Booster |
Control Module | |||
|
Schematics |
Assembly |
Programming and | ||
|
Replacement |
Setup | |||
|
P16 |
Instrument Cluster |
Instrument Cluster |
Instrument Cluster |
Instrument Cluster |
|
Scan Tool Information |
Schematics |
Replacement | ||
|
T3 |
Audio Amplifier |
Radio/Navigation |
Radio Speaker |
Audio Amplifier Setup |
| |||||||||||||||||||||
|
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS |
K20 ENGINE CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
Special Tools
EL-49642 SPS Programming Support Tool
|
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools. | ||
|
the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) system status indicators to NO.
• Note the engine oil life remaining percentage.
Replace and Program Control Module
To program a replacement K20 Engine Control Module (ECM), perform the following procedure:
1. Install EL-49642 SPS programming support tool.
2. Access the Service Programming System (SPS) and follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Before removing the old control module, perform the SPS function Prepare Control Module for Removal, if
available.
NOTE: The Prepare Control Module for Removal function can only be performed when
communication with the old control module is still possible.
4. Replace the ECM.
5. Perform one of the following SPS Programming functions:
NOTE: If both controller options below are listed, select K20/K71 Engine and
Transmission Control Modules.
• K20/K71 Engine and Transmission Control Modules and follow the on-screen instructions.
• K20 Engine Control Module and follow on-screen instructions.
6. Clear the DTCs after completing the Programming procedure.
7. If equipped, Perform the SPS function Immobilizer Learn and follow the on-screen instructions. Refer to
Immobilizer System Component Programming .
8. Perform the following SPS function:
1. Setup
NOTE: If both controller options below are listed, select K20 Engine Control
Module.
• K20/K71 Engine and Transmission Control Modules and follow the on-screen instructions.
• K20 Engine Control Module and follow on-screen instructions.
2. Configuration - If applicable
9. Clear DTCs.
Reprogram Control Module
To reprogram an existing K20 Engine Control Module, perform the following procedure:
1. Install EL-49642 SPS programming support tool.
2. Access the Service Programming System (SPS) and follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Perform one of the following SPS Programming functions:
NOTE: If both controller options below are listed, select K20/K71 Engine and
Transmission Control Modules.
• K20/K71 Engine and Transmission Control Modules and follow the on-screen instructions.
• K20 Engine Control Module and follow on-screen instructions.
4. Clear DTCs after completing the Programming procedure.
NOTE: If vehicle fails to start during Configuration and Setup, perform the SPS
Function Immobilizer Learn and follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Perform the following SPS function:
1. Setup
NOTE: If both controller options below are listed, select K20 Engine Control
Module.
• K20/K71 Engine and Transmission Control Modules and follow the on-screen instructions.
• K20 Engine Control Module and follow on-screen instructions.
2. Configuration - If applicable
6. Clear DTCs.
Unsuccessful Programming Recovery
If programming a control module is not successful, perform the following procedure:
1. Verify the control module, data link connector and programming tool connections are secure and the tool
software is up to date.
2. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
3. Perform one of the following SPS Programming functions:
NOTE: If both controller options below are listed, select K20/K71 Engine and
Transmission Control Modules.
• K20/K71 Engine and Transmission Control Modules and follow the on-screen instructions.
• K20 Engine Control Module and follow on-screen instructions.
4. Verify the control module programming is successful.
• If the programming is not successful
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off - For greater than 1 min
2. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
3. Perform one of the following SPS Programming functions:
NOTE: If both controller options below are listed, select K20/K71 Engine and
Transmission Control Modules.
• K20/K71 Engine and Transmission Control Modules and follow the on-screen instructions.
• K20 Engine Control Module and follow on-screen instructions.
• If the programming is not successful, replace the appropriate component: K20 Engine Control
Module or K71 Transmission Control Module
• If the programming is successful
4. All OK.
• If the programming is successful
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for ECM replacement, programming and setup
ACCESSORY DC POWER CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
This device requires no programming or setup.
|
ACTIVE SAFETY CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING AND SETUP | ||
| ||
|
Replace and Program Active Safety Control Module or Reprogram Active Safety Control Module |
To program a replacement or an existing active safety control module, perform the following procedure:
1. Access the Service Programming System (SPS) and follow the on-screen instructions.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select Active Safety Control Module - Programming and follow the
on-screen instructions.
3. At the end of programming, choose the "Clear All DTCs" function on the SPS screen.
Unsuccessful Programming Recovery
In the event of an interrupted or unsuccessful programming event, perform the following steps:
1. Ignition ON. Ensure the active safety control module, DLC and programming tool connections are secure and
the SPS software is up to date.
2. Verify the active safety control module can be reprogrammed.
• If the active safety control module cannot be reprogrammed
1. Ignition OFF for one minute, ignition ON.
2. Verify the active safety control module can be reprogrammed.
• If the active safety control module cannot be reprogrammed, replace the K124 Active Safety
Control Module.
• If the active safety control module can be reprogrammed.
3. All OK.
• If the active safety control module can be reprogrammed
3. All OK.
|
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING AND SETUP | ||
| ||
|
Reference Information |
Special Tools
EL-49642 SPS Programming Support Tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Replace and Program Control Module or Reprogram Control Module
To program a replacement or an existing control module, perform the following procedure:
1. Access the Service Programming System (SPS) and follow the on-screen instructions.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select Electric A/C Compressor Control Module - Programming and
follow the on-screen instructions.
3. At the end of programming, choose the "Clear All DTCs" function on the SPS screen.
Unsuccessful Programming Recovery
In the event of an interrupted or unsuccessful programming event, perform the following steps:
1. Vehicle in Service Mode. Ensure the control module, DLC and programming tool connections are secure and
the SPS software is up to date.
2. Verify the control module can be reprogrammed.
• If the control module cannot be reprogrammed
1. Vehicle OFF for one minute, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the control module can be reprogrammed.
• If the control module cannot be reprogrammed, replace the control module.
• If the control module can be reprogrammed.
3. All OK.
• If the control module can be reprogrammed
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
|
AUDIO AMPLIFIER PROGRAMMING AND SETUP | ||
|
Diagnostic Aids
During programming you may be required to select multiple calibrations dependent upon vehicle equipment. Have
the vehicle build/RPO information available during the following procedure to ensure the correct calibrations are
selected.
Reference Information
Special Tools
EL-49642 SPS Programming Support Tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Replace and Program Control Module or Reprogram Control Module
To program a replacement or an existing control module, perform the following procedure:
1. Install the EL-49642 SPS Programming Support Tool.
2. Access the Service Programming System (SPS) and follow the on-screen instructions.
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select T3 Audio Amplifier - Programming and follow the on-screen
instructions.
4. At the end of programming, choose the "Clear DTCs" function on the SPS screen.
Unsuccessful Programming Recovery
In the event of an interrupted or unsuccessful programming event, perform the following steps:
1. Vehicle in Service Mode. Ensure the control module, DLC and programming tool connections are secure and
the SPS software is up to date.
2. Verify the control module can be reprogrammed.
• If the control module cannot be reprogrammed
1. Vehicle OFF for one minute, ignition ON.
2. Verify the control module can be reprogrammed.
• If the control module cannot be reprogrammed, replace the control module.
• If the control module can be reprogrammed.
3. All OK.
• If the control module can be reprogrammed
3. All OK.
This device requires no programming or setup.
BATTERY ENERGY CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
|
NOTE: |
• DO NOT program a control module unless directed to by a service procedure |
• Ensure the programming tool is equipped with the latest software and is
securely connected to the data link connector. If there is an interruption during
programming, programming failure or ECU damage may occur.
• Stable battery voltage is critical during programming. Any fluctuation, spiking,
over voltage or loss of voltage will interrupt programming. Install the EL-49642
SPS Programming Support Tool to maintain system voltage. If not available,
connect a fully charged 12 V jumper or booster pack disconnected from the AC
voltage supply. DO NOT connect a battery charger.
• Turn OFF or disable systems that may put a load on the vehicles battery such
as; interior lights, exterior lights (including daytime running lights), HVAC,
radio, etc.
• During the programming procedure, follow the SPS prompts for the correct
ignition switch position.
• Clear DTCs after programming is complete. Clearing powertrain DTCs will set
the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) system status indicators to NO.
Replace and Program ECU or Reprogram ECU
To program a replacement or an existing ECU, perform the following procedure:
1. Install EL-49642 SPS programming support tool.
2. Access the Service Programming System (SPS) and follow the on-screen instructions.
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select Battery Energy Control Module - Programming and foll